HISTORICAL BEFORE 2016

Dear Mr. Garner:
NR-FRO
JUN.. 0 20A
W ENR `
North -Carolina Department of Environment and Natural -Resources
Water Pollution Control System Operators Certification Commission
.Pat McCrory _ - .
W _Corey Basinger John.E,$ky rla,xlll-
Governor.. _;
Chairman; Secretary
June 18, 2014
CERTIFIED MAIL
RETURN RECEIPT REOUESTED
Mr. Randy Garner
Bladen County Water District
PO Box 2350
Elizabethtown, North Carolina 28337-2350
Subject: Classification of Water Pollution Control System
Facility: Tobermony Well
Permit #: g WQ0033325
4 '7 ,
In accordance with North Carolina General Statute §' 90A-37, the Water Pollution Control
System Operators Certification Commission hereby classifies the subject facility as a Surface
Irrigation System effective today.
As required by North Carolina Administrative Code .15A 8G .0201 andyouur permit, you must
designate one Operator in Responsible Charge (ORC) and at least one Back-up ORC for this.'
facility. All designated operators must possess active Surface Irrigation System Operator
certificates. If certified, .you may designate yourself and/or your employees, or you may engage
the services of contract operators or a contract operations firm.
Please complete and return the enclosed designation form to this office by October 20, 2014. The
form must be .signed by the ORC, -the Back-up ORC(s), and you' or- your designee. Unless
otherwise specified in your permit, the designated ORC is required to visit the .system weekly. '
The Backup ORC may act as surrogate for the ORC for, a period:
'(a) not to exceed 40 percent of the system visitations required per calendar year; or
(b) not to exceed 120 consecutive calendar days -when the ORC is absent due to the vacancy
of the ORC position or due to personal or familial illness.
WPCSOCC, NC DENR
1618 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, NC V699-1618
Location: 512 N. Salisbury St. Raleigh, North Carolina 27604
Telephone [phone] Fax [phone]
Internet: http://portal.hcdenr.orgtweb/wgladmin/tacu
- NorthCarolina
Natz WAY
An Equal Opportunity AiFrmalive Action Employer— 50% Recycled 110%a Post Consumer Paper

Mr. Randy Garner
June 18, 2014
Page 2 of 2
The next Surface Irrigation System Operators Training School will be offered in early 2015. For
your convenience, we have enclosed information on the school • and the certification
examination. A list of contract operators is also enclosed.
If you have questions concerning the facility classification or designation requirements, please
contact me at [phone] or [e-mail].
Sincerely,
Beth Buffington, En it ®rce,
l pecialist
Division of Water ReCDENR
Enclosures
''' cc: (Fayetteville Regional -,Office; Water, Quality'Re - 64- 'Operation
Non -Discharge Permi
NCOCP Facility Files

r` A� ._4-
NCDENR
North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Division of Water Resources
Water Quality Programs
Pat McCrory Thomas A. Reeder
Governor Director
April 24, 2014
Randy W. Garner
Water Director
Bladen County Water District
P.O. Box 2350
Elizabethtown NC 28337
SUBJECT: April 23, 2014 Compliance Evaluation Inspection
Bladen County Water District
Tobermory Well
Permit No: WQ0033325
Bladen County
Dear Mr. Garner:
John Skvarla
Secretary
Enclosed please find a copy of the Compliance Evaluation Inspection form from the inspection conducted on AFTil 23,
2014. The Compliance Evaluation Inspection was conducted by Tony W. Honeycutt of the Fayetteville Regional Office.
The facility was found to be in Compliance with permit WQ0033325.
Please refer to the enclosed inspection report for additional observations and comments. If you or your staff have any
questions, please call me at (9100 433-3339.
Sincerely,
Tony W. Honeycutt
Environmental Specialist
NCDENR/DWR/FRO/WQP
cc: , ORC
Central Files
Eayette� es
Water Quality Program .
225 Green St., Ste. 714
Fayetteville, North Carolina 28301-5095
Phone: [phone] FAX: [phone] Customer Service:1-877-623-6748
Internet: www.h20.enr.state.nc.us
An Equal Opportunity 1 Affirmative Action Employer

Compliance Inspection Report
Permit: WQ0033325 Effective: 11/04/08 Expiration: 12/31/16 Owner:. Bladen County Water District
SOC: Effective: Expiration: Facility: Tobermory Well
County: Bladen 8129 Chicken Foot Rd
Region: Fayetteville
Council NC 28434
Contact Person: David T Upchurch Title: Phone: [phone]
Directions to Facility:
From downtown Fayetteville, take Hwy 87 south and turn right onto Tobermory Road. At the second paved road, turn right onto W. .
Bladen Union Church Rd. Turn left onto Chicken Foot Rd. and go approx. 1.5 miles to site on Right.
System Classifications:
Primary ORC: Certification: Phone:
Secondary ORC(s):
On -Site Representative(s):
Related Permits:
Inspection Date: 04/23/2014 Entry Time: 10:00 AM Exit Time: 10:30 AM
Primary Inspector: Tony W Honeycutt Phone: [phone]
Secondary Inspector(s):
Reason for Inspection: Routine
Permit Inspection.Type: Wastewater Irrigation
Facility Status: ■ Compliant ❑ Not Compliant
Question Areas:
Miscellaneous Questions End Use -Irrigation
(See attachment Summary)
Inspection Type: Compliance Evaluation
Page: 1

Permit: WQ0033325 Owner -Facility: Bladen County Water District
Inspection Date: 04/23/2014 Inspection Type: Compliance Evaluation Reason for Visit: Routine
Inspection Summary:
The system appears in good shape.
Please begin the additional reporting measures we discussed.
Page: 2

Permit: WQ0033325 Owner - Facility: Bladen County Water District
Inspection Date: 04/23/2014 Inspection Type: Compliance. Evaluation
Reason for Visit: Routine
Type
Yes No NA NE
Infiltration System
n
Reuse (Quality)
❑
Activated Sludge Spray, HR
Activated Sludge Spray, LR
❑
Single Family Spray, LR
Q
Lagoon Spray, LR
Recycle/Reuse
❑
Activated. Sludge Drip, LR
❑
Single Family Drip
❑
End Use -Irrigation
Yes No
NA NE
Are buffers adequate?
®❑
❑ ❑
Is the cover crop type specified in permit?
❑ N
❑ ❑
Is the crop cover acceptable?
a ❑
❑ ❑
Is the site condition adequate?
0
❑ ❑
Is the site free of runoff / ponding?
■ ❑
❑ ❑
I's the acreage specified in the permit being utilized?
0 ❑
❑ ❑
Is the application equipment present?
■ n
n n
Is the application equipment operational?
M ❑
❑ ❑
Is the disposal field free of limiting slopes?
®❑
❑ ❑
Is access restricted and/or signs posted during active site use?
■ ❑ _
❑ ❑
Are any supply wells within the CB?
❑ ❑
S ❑
Are any supply wells within 250' of the CB?
❑ ❑
M ❑
How close is the closest water supply well?
❑ ❑
■ ❑
Is municipal water available in the area?
■ ❑
❑ ❑
# Info only: Does the permit call for monitoring wells? (
❑ ❑
❑
Are GW monitoring wells located properly w/ respect to RB and CB?
❑ ❑
■ ❑
Are GW monitoring wells properly constructed, including screened interval?
Q ❑
■ ❑
Are monitoring wells damaged?
❑ ❑
■ 0
Page: 3

Permit: WQ0033325 Owner - Facility: Bladen County Water District
Inspection Date: 04/23/2014 Inspection Type: Compliance Evaluation Reason for Visit: Routine
Comment: The water being disposed of is the filter backwash water from a county well
site.
A specific cover is not specidied by the permit. The field site is covered with standard
grass.
Page: 4

A �
�� �
NCDENR
North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Division of Water Quality
,severly Eaves Perdue Coleen H. Sullins
Governor Director
Mr. Randy Garner, Director
Bladen County Water District
550 Smith Circle
Elizabethtown, North Carolina 28337
RECEIVED / DENR / DWQ
Aquifer Protection Section
April 7, 2010 APR 12 2010
Dee Freeman
Secretary
Subject: Permit Extension
Permit No. WQ0033325
Bladen County Water District
Iron Filter Backwash
Tobennory Well (Well 49)
Wastewater Irrigation System
Bladen County
Dear Mr. Garner:
On August 5, 2009, Session Law 2009-406, entitled "An Act to Extend Certain Government
Approvals Affecting the Development of Real Property Within the State," was enacted by the General
Assembly and signed into law. The Act, known as the Permit Extension Act of 2009, extends the
expiration date of certain government approvals and permits. For additional information, the following
website ( http:/portal.ncdenr.org/web/wq/aps/lau#extension ) can be viewed to address this statute and
affected DWQ permits.
Non -discharge permit, WQ0033325, issued by the Division of Water Quality falls within the
scope of this Act and is therefore being extended until 31 December 2015. Please note per your permit, a
renewal application must still be submitted six months in advance of the extended expiration date. If
Bladen County needs to modify, upgrade, retrofit infrastructure at this facility which would require
modification of the permit; a permit application can be submitted for review and the necessary modified
permit issued.
If you have any questions regarding this letter, please contact Division staff in the Fayetteville
Regional Office at [phone] or Central Office at [phone]. Thank you in advance for your
cooperation.
Scerely,
MAOrwwL_
Jim Barber
Aquifer Protection Section
cc: Fayetteville Regional Office, Aquifer Protection Section
WQ0033325 Permit File
WQ0033325 Notebook File
Bladen County Health Department
Technical Assistance and Certification Unit
AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION
1636 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1636
Location: 2728 Capital Boulevard. Raleigh, North Carolina 27604 One
Phone: [phone] FAX 1:919-71"5K FAX 2: 919-715.60481 Customer Service:1-877-623-6748 NorthCarol.ina
Internet: www.nmaterouality.oM
An Equal opportunity ! Affirmative Action Emplo, ar Nwhapally

O� W A rF/�1QG Michael F. Easley, Governor
C]�
0 William G. Ross Jr., Secretary
63 North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Coleen H. Sullins, Director
Division of Water Quality
November 4, 2008
Mr. Randy Garner, Director of Water District
Bladen County Water District
550 Smith Circle
Elizabethtown, NC 28337
Subject: Permit No. WQ0033325
Bladen County Water District
Iron Filter Backwash from Tobermony Well (Well #9)
Wastewater Surface Irrigation
Bladen County
Dear Mr. Garner:
In accordance with your permit application request received August 8, 2008, we are forwarding
herewith Permit No. WQ0033325, dated November 4, 2008, to the Bladen County Water District for the
construction and operation of the subject wastewater treatment and surface irrigation facilities.
This permit shall be effective from the date of issuance until October 31, 2013 and shall be
subject to the conditions and limitations as specified therein. Please pay particular attention to the
monitoring requirements in this pen -nit. Failure to establish an adequate system for collecting and
maintaining the required operational information will result in future compliance problems.
Prior to any pump and haul event, a permit to pump and haul must be obtained from the
Fayetteville Regional Office of the Aquifer Protection Section.
If any parts, requirements, or limitations contained in this permit are unacceptable, you have the
right to request an adjudicatory hearing upon written request within thirty (30) days following receipt of
this permit. This request must be in the form of a written petition, conforming to Chapter 150E of the
North Carolina General Statutes, and filed with the Office of Administrative Hearings, 6714 Mail Service
Center, Raleigh, NC 27699-6714. Unless such demands are made this permit shall be final and binding.
One set of approved plans and specifications is being forwarded to you. If you need additional
information concerning this matter, please contact David Goodrich at [phone] or
[e-mail].
Sincerely,
r '
oleen H. Sullins
cc: Bladen County Health Department
Fayetteville Regional Office, Aquifer Protection Section
Adam P. Kiker, E.I., Hobbs, Upchurch & Associates, P.A., Southern Pines, NC
Technical Assistance and Certification Unit
APS Central Files
LAU Files
o°`
NCarolina
Natura!!Y
Aquifer Protection Section 1636 Mail Service Center Raleigh, NC 27699-1636 Telephone : [phone]
Internet: www.ncwaterqualitv.ore Location: 2728 Capital Boulevard Raleigh, NC 27604 Fax 1: [phone]
Fax 2: [phone]
An Equal OpportuniWAffirmative Action Employer— 50% Recycled110% Post Consumer Paper Customer Service: [phone]

NORTH CAROLINA
ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT COMMISSION
DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENT AND NATURAL RESOURCES
Is7\Ili Cell
SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM PERMIT
In accordance with the provisions of Article 21 of Chapter 143, General Statutes of North Carolina as
amended, and other applicable Laws, Rules, and Regulations
PERMISSION IS HEREBY GRANTED TO
BLADEN COUNTY WATER DISTRICT
Bladen County
FOR THE
construction and operation of a 1,143 gallon per day (GPD) surface irrigation treatment and disposal
facility consisting of
A pre-engineered metal building, 1-inch Schedule 80 PVC chemical feed lines, two chemical feed vaults,
a 10,000-galloon capacity polyethylene tank, a 40 GPM irrigation pump, a 1.5-inch Schedule 80 PVC
irrigation line and a 1.5-inch movable rubber irrigation hose with a sprinkler head capable of irrigating in
a circular fashion with a minimum radius of 50 feet to irrigate sod production areas for transplant and use
off site.
to serve Bladen County's Tobernlony Well (Weil Number 9) and the Bladen County Water System, with
no discharge of wastes to the surface waters, pursuant to the application received August 8, 2008, and
subsequent additional information received by the Division of Water Quality (Division), and in
conformity with the project plan, specifications, and other supporting data subsequently filed and
approved by the Department of Environment and Natural Resources and considered a part of this permit.
This permit shall be effective from the date of issuance until October 31, 2013 and shall be subject
to the following specified conditions and limitations:
I. SCHEDULES [please review the entire permit for reporting, monitoring, and other on -going activities]
Upon completion of construction and prior to operation of this permitted facility, a certification (see
attached form) must be received from a professional engineer certifying that the permitted facility has
been installed in accordance with this permit, the approved plans and specifications, and other
supporting materials including the location of all monitoring wells as applicable. If this project is to
be completed in phases and partially certified. you shall retain the responsibility to track further
construction approved under the same permit, and shall provide a final certificate of completion once
the entire project has been completed. Mail the Certification to the Aquifer Protection Section,
Division of Water Quality, 1636 Mail Service Center, Raleigh, NC 27699-1636.
WQ0033325 Version 1.0 Shell Version 080827 Page 1 of 8

2. The Fayetteville Regional Office, telephone number [phone], shall be notified at least forty-
eight (48) hours in advance (excluding weekends and holidays) of operation of the installed facilities
so that an in place inspection can be made. Such notification to the regional supervisor shall be made
during the normal office hours from 8:00 a.m. until 5:00 p.m. on Monday through Friday, excluding
State Holidays.
No later than six months prior to the expiration of this permit, the Permittee shall request renewal of
this permit on official Division forms. Upon receipt of the request, the Division will review the
adequacy of the facilities described therein, and if warranted, will renew the permit for such period of
time and under such conditions and limitations as it may deem appropriate. Please note that Rule 15A
NCAC 02T .0105(d) requires an updated site map to be submitted with the permit renewal
application.
II. PERFORMANCE STANDARDS
1. The surface irrigation facilities shall be effectively maintained and operated at all times so that there
is no discharge to the surface waters, nor any contravention of groundwater or surface water
standards. In the event that the facilities fail to perform satisfactorily, including the creation of
nuisance conditions due to improper operation and maintenance, or failure of the irrigation area to
adequately assimilate the wastewater, the Permittee shall take immediate corrective actions including
those actions that may be required by the Division, such as the construction of additional or
replacement wastewater treatment and disposal facilities_
2. The issuance of this permit shall not relieve the Permittee of the responsibility for damages to ground
or surface waters resulting from the operation of this facility.
3. Effluent limitations shall not exceed those specified in Attachment A.
4. Application rate(s), whether hydraulic, nutrient, or other pollutant shall not exceed those specified in
Attachment B.
The compliance boundary for the disposal system is specified by rules in 15A NCAC 02L,
Groundwater Classifications and Standards. This disposal system was individually permitted on or
after December 30; 1983; therefore, the compliance boundary is established at either 250 feet from
the waste disposal area, or 50 feet within the property boundary, whichever is closest to the waste
disposal area. An exceedance of groundwater standards at or beyond the compliance boundary is
subject to remediation action according to 15A NCAC 02L .0106(d)(2) as well as enforcement
actions in accordance with North Carolina General Statute 143-215.6A through 143-215.6C.
The Permittee shall apply for a permit modification prior to any sale or transfer of property that
affects a compliance boundary to establish a new compliance boundary.
In accordance with 15A NCAC 02L .0107(d), no wells, other than monitoring wells, shall be
constructed within the compliance boundary except as provided by 15A NCAC 02L .0107(g).
8. The review boundary is established around the disposal systems midway between the compliance
boundary and the perimeter of the waste disposal area. Any exceedance of standards at the review
boundary shall require action in accordance with 15A NCAC 02L .0106.
9. The facilities permitted herein must be constructed according to the following setbacks:
a. The setbacks for Irrigation sites shall be as follows (all distances in feet):
i. Any habitable residence or place of public assembly under separate ownership: 400
ii. Any habitable residence or place of public assembly owned by the permittee: 200
iii. Any private or public water supply source: 100
WQ0033325 Version 1.0 ShelI Version 080827 Page 2 of 8

iv. Surface waters:
100
v. Groundwater lowering ditches:
100
vi. Surface water diversions:
25
vii. Any well with exception of monitoring wells:
100
viii. Any property line:
51
ix. Top of slope of embankments or cuts of two feet or more in vertical height.
15
x. Any water line frorn a disposal system:
10
xi. ,Subsurface groundwater lowering drainage systems:
100
xii. Any swimming pool:
100
xiii.Public right of way:
50
xiv. Nitrification field:
20
xv. Any building foundation or basement:
15
b. The setbacks for Treatment and storage units shall be as follows (all distances in feet):
i. Any habitable residence or place of public assembly under separate ownership: 100
ii. Any private or public water supply source; 100
iii. Surface waters: 50
iv. Any well with exception of monitoring wells: 100
v. Any property line: 50
' In conformance with 15A NCAC 02T .0506(d), a variance to the setback of 150 feet
from property lines was granted by a waiver agreement. This agreement must remain in
effect to legally sustain the variance.
III. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
1. The facilities shall be properly maintained and operated at all times. The facilities shall be effectively
maintained and operated as a non -discharge system to prevent the discharge of any wastewater
resulting from the operation of this facility. The Permittee shall maintain an Operation and
Maintenance Plan pursuant to 15A NCAC 02T .0507 including operational functions, maintenance
schedules, safety measures, and a spill response plan.
2. Upon classification of the wastewater treatment and irrigation facilities by the Water Pollution
Control System Operators Certification Commission (WPCSOCC), the Permitter, shall designate and
employ a certified operator to be in responsible charge (ORC) and one or more certified operator(s) to
be back-up ORC(s) of the facilities in accordance with 15A NCAC 08G .0200. The ORC shall visit
the facilities in accordance with 15A NCAC 08G .0200 or as specified in this permit and shall comply
with all other conditions specified in these rules.
3. A suitable year round vegetative cover shall be maintained such that crop health is optimized, allows
for even distribution of effluent, and allows inspection of the irrigation system.
4. Adequate measures shall be taken to prevent wastewater ponding or runoff from the irrigation field.
5. Irrigation shall not be performed during inclement weather or when the ground is in a condition that
will cause ponding or runoff.
S. All waste application equipment must be tested and calibrated at least once per permit cycle. Records
of the calibration must be maintained for five years.
WQ0033325 Version 1.0 Shell Version 080827 Page 3 of 8

7. No type of wastewater other than that from the backwashing of the iron filters of the Tobermony Well
(Well Number 9) shall be irrigated onto the irrigation area.
8. Public access to the land application sites shall be controlled. Such control shall include the
maintenance of a fence, and may also include the posting of signs showing the activities being
conducted at each site.
The iron scale generated from these treatment facilities shall be removed from the storage tank as
necessary, dried and transported to the Bladen County transfer station for disposal.
10. Diversion or bypassing of the untreated wastewater from the treatment facilities is prohibited.
IV. MONITORING AND REPORTING REQUMEMENTS
1. Any monitoring (including groundwater, surface water, soil or plant tissue analyses) deemed
necessary by the Division to ensure surface and ground water protection will be established and an
acceptable sampling reporting schedule shall be followed.
2. All laboratory analyses for effluent, ground waters, or surface waters shall be made by a laboratory
certified by the Division for the required parameter(s) under 15A NCAC 02H .0800.
3. Flow through the treatment facility shall be continuously monitored and daily average flow values
shall be reported on Form NDMR. Flow may be estimated from water use records provided water
use is metered. Daily average values shall be calculated by dividing monthly flow volume by the
number of days in the month.
4. The effluent from the subject facilities shall be monitored by the Permittee at the frequency(ies) and
location(s) for the parameter(s) specified in Attachment A. After the effluent has been monitored as
specified in the most recently -certified Attachment A of this permit for two years at the frequency
specified therein., the Permittee may submit a request to the Division for a permit modification to
request a reduction of this monitoring requirement. In no case, however, shall the frequency of
monitoring be less than once per permit cycle.
5. The Permittee tracking the amount of wastewater disposed shall maintain adequate records. These
records shall include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following information:
a. Date of irrigation,
b. Volume of wastewater irrigated,
c. Field irrigated,
d. Length of time field is irrigated,
e. Continuous weekly, monthly, and year-to-date hydraulic (inches/acre) loadings for each field,
f. Continuous monthly and year-to-date loadings for any non -hydraulic parameter specifically
limited in Attachment B for each field,
g. Weather conditions,
h. Any applications of fertilizer to the spray area, along with the quantity and nutrient content of
such fertilizer, and
i. Maintenance of cover crops.
WQ0033325 Version 1.0 Shell Version 080827 Page 4 of 8

6. A maintenance log shall be maintained at this facility including but not limited to the following items:
a. Visual observations of the plant and plant site.
b. Record of preventative maintenance (changing of filters, adjusting belt tensions, alarm testing,
diffuser inspections and cleanings, etc.).
c. Date of calibration of flow measurement device.
d. Date and results of power interruption testing on alternate power supply.
7. Three (3) copies of all monitoring data [as specified in Conditions IV. 3. and IV. 4.] on Form NDMR
for each PPI and three (3) copies of all operation and disposal records [as specified in Conditions IV.
5 and IV. 6.1 on Force NDAR-1 for every field shall be submitted on or before tlae last day of the
following month. If no activities occurred during the monitoring month, monitoring reports are still
required documenting the absence of the activity. All information shall be submitted to the following
address:
Division of Water Quality
Information Processing Unit
1617 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, North Carolina 27699-1617
An annual representative soils analysis (Standard Soil Fertility Analysis) shall be conducted on each
irrigation field and the results maintained on file by the Permittee for a minimum of five years. The
Standard Soil Fertility Analysis shall include, but is not necessarily limited to, the following
parameters:
Acidity
Manganese
Potassium
Calcium
Percent Humic Matter
Sodium
Copper
pH
Zinc
Magnesium
Base Saturation (by calculation)
Phosphorus
Cation Exchange Capacity
Exchangeable Sodium Percentage
9, Noncompliance Notification:
The Permittee shall report by telephone to the Fayetteville Regional Office, telephone number (910)
433-3300, as soon as possible, but in no case more than 24 hours or on the next working day
following the occurrence or first knowledge of the occurrence of any of the following:
a. Any occurrence at the wastewater treatment facility which results in the treatment of significant
amounts of wastes which are abnormal in quantity or characteristic, such as the dumping of the
contents of a sludge digester; the known passage of a slug of hazardous substance through the
facility; or any other unusual circumstances including ponding in the irrigation field or runoff
from the irrigation fields.
Any process unit failure, due to known or unknown reasons, that render the facility incapable of
adequate wastewater treatment such as mechanical or electrical failures of pumps, aerators,
compressors, etc.
c. Any failure of disposal system resulting in a by-pass directly to receiving waters.
WQ0033325 Version 1.0 Shell Version 080827 Page 5 of 8

V.
d. Any time that self -monitoring information indicates that the facility has gone out of compliance
with its permit limitations including, but not limited to, freeboard measurements, effluent
limitations, exceedances of groundwater standards, or overloading of any field.
For any emergency that requires immediate reporting (e.g., discharges to surface waters, imminent
failure of a storage structure, etc.) outside normal business hours must be reported to the Division's
Emergency Response personnel at telephone number [phone], [phone], or (919) 733-
3300. Persons reporting such occurrences by telephone shall also file a written report in letter form
within five (5) days following first knowledge of the occurrence. This report must outline the actions
taken or proposed to be taken to ensure that the problem does not recur.
1. Adequate inspection and maintenance shall be provided by the Permittee to ensure proper operation
of the subject facilities.
The Permittee or his designee shall inspect the wastewater treatment and disposal facilities to prevent
malfunctions and deterioration, operator errors and discharges which may cause or Iead to the release
of wastes to the environment, a threat to human health, or a nuisance. The Permittee shall keep an
inspection log or summary including at least the date and time of inspection, observations made, and
any maintenance, repairs, or corrective actions taken by the Permittee. This log of inspections shall
be maintained by the Permittee for a period of five years from the date of the inspection and shall be
made available upon request to the Division or other permitting authority.
3. Any duly authorized officer, employee, or representative of the Division may, upon presentation of
credentials, enter and inspect any property, premises or place on or related to the disposal site or
facility at any reasonable time for the purpose of determining compliance with this permit; may
inspect or copy any records that must be maintained under the terms and conditions of this permit,
and may obtain samples of groundwater, surface water, or leachate.
VI. GENERAL CONDITIONS
1. Failure to abide by the conditions and limitations contained in this permit may subject the Permittee
to an enforcement action by the Division in accordance with North Carolina General Statute 143-
215.6A to 143-215.6C.
2. This permit shall become voidable unless the facilities are constructed in accordance with the
conditions of this permit, the approved plans and specifications, and other supporting data.
3. This permit is effective only with respect to the nature and volume of wastes described in the
application and other supporting data. No variances to applicable rules governing the construction
and / or operation of the permitted facilities are granted unless specifically requested and granted in
this permit.
4. The issuance of this permit does not exempt the Permittee from complying with any and all statutes,
rules, regulations, or ordinances, which may be imposed by other government agencies (local, state,
and federal) that have jurisdiction. Of particular concern to the Division are applicable river buffer
rules in 15A NCAC 02B .0200, erosion and sedimentation control requirements in 15A NCAC
Chapter 4 and under the Division's General Permit NCGO10000, and any requirements pertaining to
wetlands under 15A NCAC 02B .0200 and 02H .0500.
WQ0033325 Version 1.0 Shell Version 080927 Page 6 of 8

5. In the event there is a desire for the facilities to change ownership, or there is a name change of the
Permittee, a formal permit request must be submitted to the Division on official Division form(s),
documentation from the parties involved, and other supporting materials as may be appropriate. The
approval of this request will be considered on its merits and may or may not be approved. The
Permittee of record shall remain fully responsible for compliance until a permit is issued to the new
owner.
6. The Permittee shall retain a set of approved plans and specifications for the life of the facilities
permitted herein.
7. The Permittee shall maintain this permit until all permitted facilities herein are properly closed or
permitted under another permit issued by the appropriate permitting authority.
8. The Permittee must pay the annual fee within thirty (30) days after being billed by the Division.
Failure to pay the fee accordingly may cause the Division to initiate action to revoke this permit
pursuant to 15A NCAC 02T .0105(e).
Permit issued this the 4th of November, 2008
NORTH CAROLINA ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT COMMISSION
Cole . Sullins, Director
Division of Water Quality
By Authority of the Environmental Management Commission
Permit Number WQ0033325
WQ0033325 Version 1.0 Shell Version 080827 Page 7 of 8

Permit No. WQ0033325
10/29/2008
ENGINEER'S CERTIFICATION
Partial Final
I, & , as a duly registered Professional Engineer in the State
of North Carolina, having been authorized to observe (periodically, weekly, fall time) the construction of
the project,
Project Name
Location and County
for the Permittee hereby state that, to the best of my abilities, due care and diligence was used in the
observation of the construction such that the construction was observed to be built within substantial
compliance and intent of this permit, the approved plans and specifications, and other supporting
materials.
Signature
Date
Registration No.
WQ0033325 Version 1.0 Shell Version 080827 Page 8 of 8

ATTACHMENT A - LIMITATIONS AND MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
PPI001—WWTF Effluent
Permit Number: WQ0033325 Version: 1.0
EFFLUENT CHARACTERISTICS
EFFLUENT LIMITS
MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
Parameter Description - PCS Code
Monthly Average
Weekly Average
Daily Maximum
Measurement
Frequency
Sample
Type
ow, ui conduit or thru. treatment plant 50050 —
S,OOi1
Gallons
Continuous
Recorder
Iron, I ota as e
Annually
Grab
Chloride (as CI) -- 00940
Annually
Grab
WQ0033325 Version 1.0 Attachment A Page I of I

ATTACHMENT B - APPROVED LAND APPLICATION SITES AND LIMITATIONS Permit Number: WQ0033325 Version: 1.0
BLADEN COUNTY WATER DISTRICT — TOBERMORY WELL (WELL NUMBER 9) IRON FILTER BACKWASH WATER
UTILIZATION AREA INFORMATION
APPLICATION LIMITATIONS
Field/
Basin
Owner
County
Latitude
Longitude
Net
Acreage
Dominant
Son Series
Parameter
hate
Yearly
Max
Units
I
Bladen County Water District
Bladen
33"49' 19"
78053'20"
0.72
Butters
01284 — Application Surface Irrigation
1.0/hr_
20.46
inches
Totalt
0.72
WQ0033325 Version 1.0 Attachment B Page 1 of 1

,Eym �, � ✓k � y� r �' aoM ' q ,.y
bm
5v
r A �.',� y �, r.^ � � ,rc f :�'�� /':r� - M .�., � J. 1 � fie. - •.I .� ,-�. I
iii X�
,• � �.`{iaan -_ � � ;�� � -r„•, � E '�!..�i' lj� .
-
♦. - Horsa N.
Pa
r ! .A-
L !IN J•Y �.- � �.
.iols1 , arr Bider 'Nock
wf
lk
SS ur.r `,/ -7r+w - �w F= r�^�-�^.0 ��. �. � "�:—.-,_r ..+. ..F ,fir '� � •: "�{ ��1 _
A- - -,�" !tea' w+ S• ' l 5 .. ___» ��Ne�o. ',...-..,.y�
•gig^-
f4�ah�n,
Pic
ei
T l !.. FIGURE 1
BLADEN COUNTY WATER SYSTEM
Name: ST PAULS Location: 034' BACKWASH WATER REUSE SYSTEM
Date: 5/1412DOS
Scale: 1 inch equals 3333 feet BLADEN COUNTY
WQ00333_25
Copyright (C) 1997, Maptech, irsa. SITE LOCATION MAP

RFC'IYE9/0EHR/DVrQ
AQUIFER PUTECTIUN SEC,
08 AUG 28 AM 9: 16
PROPER"• LINE
V DD•DD•
/
FENCE
FFEIC F SEC[IRRY
PELPCRI N Iu9oe PRaPERTx LINE
i
� L
E
{ PflOP05E0 IW` LONG,
W FLEXIDLE HOSE
I -
S 4 pROPDSEO MOVABLE
SPANKLER HEAP WET.
\\ FL"fOLE NOSE CONNECTION PROPOSED 13' SPIGOT FOR -
c[ FLExIBLE NOSE CONHEC71014
chmcIz NAEE4 ..
PROPOSED IRRITATION SITE
CO rE'a,R lk u GRADE SFoow
FOR
pL"T THE EHiuiE WRIr-ATION
SITE'QL SERMVOA CJ., FOR
NapL n5E o-•: A TllRE R.
tl
�f
I!
EA'• AC
,I40" Md. IEF
P' LY
Q" M.J.J. G.V.
CHEN, FEED VALIV
NO. 1 SEE DETAIL
:,I+EET O-T
L-1
PFGPERTx LRIE
vEssaiPrlox w.rE e<I
FC•5EP xnnOlARpR � 5 Yi i9 xcf II
\ I
\ � i
,
\ Ia o 20
`\
NELL MEAD \4 \
&FIND (12- }YP MJ i ExSYrvC [L£LC /.MUSE ��\ \ II EJFL4T/M% \
G.V,
1,2'X6"I \F \ EkNT1MG
um, E' 1<! .9U' MEND MJ FEG"-EF
—{I INSTALL S")IS" REDUCER I pERiCcp EXiT,
CONNECT TO S" CAIE •ALIF k IN9 , ESISL.
BEND 10 BE REOSEO �'r EXSE E" MJ uS%,
R£MOYE EIIIST. S" PPE x \
V'fp REMOJT• E b 9� RENo AND REa . , \ \
EIns 4, \,
F_I PROPOSED 6-"A' MJ BEND
pROPOSED B ['NFILTFREQ WATER \\ \\
r !4T[R
__J POHECaMRTR $ILDING
SARi\
\ Ni \�
WCVDGE6 S" I FF
FILTEPCO WATER � ,� / \\
r<77 PPavosED cNvu
VN FEED L[F3E5 IN
4" r,C CaNDL'IT
CHEll FEED Yr:IILT I `
N? t SEE [ETP1L
REEF C-T PROP{t:E.11 9' D.I.
�eAGK -.. wwTe'aTER
__ iPROPI—ED 10.000 -L I '�
Pf STIraGE TJNN
_ I�CPZ FRA JV •BELL xmCF ED F;n.L 1 L"EVRE
`TF,L•.TENFO1TO SLAB ! ELOW FORILL CF SI IlP
TEMpc=aP.•' DEr'ICHUW'I[['-`%J
IR
PROPOSED WELL SITE PLAN
SCALE' I"
I IOTE
t JILL -RE PP -IG 511ALL BE BumED V
NI,1. I.. 'ER
�IrKE' OT.ER"'E I101 O
2 ALL CHEmicN. 'EEL CDNDUR$ SFiALI BE
piM'ED 'V 2' w. CL'ER-
FIGURE 2
BLADEN COUNTY WATER SYSTEM
BACKWASH WATER REUSE SYSTEM
BLADEN COUNTY
W00033325
SITE DETAIL MAP

Michael F. Easley, Governor
William G. Ross Jr., Secretary
North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Coleen H. Sullins, Director
Division of Water Quality
October 10, 2008
Mr. Randy Garner, Director of Water District
Bladen County Water District
550 Smith Circle
Elizabethtown, NC 28337
Subject: Permit Application No. WQ0033325
Bladen County Water District Reuse System
Iron Filter Backwash from Tobermory Well (Well #9)
Bladen County
Dear Mr. Garner:
The Aquifer Protection Section is in receipt of your application to obtain a Non -Conjunctive Reclaimed water system
permit for the disposal of iron 'filter backwash water from the Tobermory Well in Bladen County. Additional information
is required before we may continue our review. Please address the following items no later than November 30, 2008:
1. The subject application must include a soils report that meets the requirements listed under 15A NCAC
02T .0905. The soils information submitted does not include site -specific Ksat values provided by field
testing. Please submit this information..
2. The facility must provide adequate storage to contain the backwash water during inclement weather, or
be able to operate in such a fashion that there are no spray application events taking place during the
inclement weather. Please notify the Division as to how the facility intends to meet this requirement.
3. The facility will be required to sample the effluent for each of the parameters (BOD, TSS, NH3, Fecal
Coliform, and turbidity) listed under 15A NCAC 02T .0906 once each year, with turbidity sampling
three times each year, and meet the established wastewater quality standards listed under that Section.
If any of.tbese standards cannot be met, the wastewater must be taken off site for disposal. An
alternative approach would be to permit the facility as a wastewater irrigation system under 15A
NCAC 02T .0500, provided all of the setback requirements can be met. Please notify the Division as to
how the wastewater quality standards will be met, or what alternative actions will be taken, and submit
the requested information to us at the following address:
NCDENR-DWQ
Aquifer Protection Section
1636 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, NC 27699-1636
Please be aware that you are responsible for meeting all requirements set forth in North Carolina rules and
regulations. Any oversights that occurred in the review of the subject application package are still the
responsibility of the applicant. In addition, any omissions made in responding to the above items may result in
future requests for additional information.
Please reference the subject application number when providing the requested information. Please note that
failure to provide this additional information on or before the above requested date may result in your application
being returned as incomplete.
If you have any questions regarding this request, please do not hesitate to contact me at [phone]. You may
also check the future status of this project online at http://12o.enr.state.nc.us/bims/Reports/reportsPermits.htmi.
Thank you for your cooperation.
Sincerely,
ose NCarolina
7. turully
Aquifer Protection Section 1636 Mail Service Center
Internet: www.ncwatergualiiy.org Location: 2728 Capital Boulevard
An Equal Opportunity/Affirmative Action Employer— 50% Recycled/10% Post Consumer Paper
Raleigh, NC 27699-1636 Telephone: [phone]
Raleigh, NC 27604 Fax 1: [phone]
Fax 2: [phone]
Customer Service: [phone]

David Goodrich
Hydrogeologist
cc: Adam Kiker, Hobbs, Upchurch and Associates
APS Central Files
Fayetteville Regional Office, Aquifer Protection Section

Re: Additional Info. Request for Bladen County WQ0033325
Subject: Re: Additional Info. Request for Bladen County WQ0033325
From: Jim Barber <[e-mail]>
Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 15:53:30 -0400
To: Art Barnhardt <[e-mail]>
CC: David Goodrich <[e-mail]>
David;
I concur with Art with respect to the additional info requested. But since I haven't been involved with
this type. of proposal before, this being my first, and the introduction of the new 2T rules; I don't know
the history of what has been required of applicants. I do have a couple of questions related to this
application that I will pose and if it is easier to discuss over the phone after reading, please give me a
call this afternoon or on Monday 1,3 October at your convenience.
1. Why is this application considered a non -conjunctive system, when the water being managed is
utilized on the site it is generated on?
2. I thought this permit was being considered as a "reclaimed water" system. Under .0910 Reclaimed
Water Utilization (a), water can be used in areas that the public frequents, i.e. lawns, golf courses,
cemeteries, school grounds, etc., and doesn't appear to make the generator getting rid of the water go
thru the hoops we are making Bladen County go through. The Bladen County site is secure (with 7'
fence and gate) and only Bladen County employees will have exposure the backwash water that is
chlorinated during the movement of the sprinkler used. If the concern is over turbidity being slightly
above the 10 NTU standard, it would be very easy to add a filter to the tank holding the water to help
lower the turbidity/suspended solids prior to irrigation. The typical grasses in eastern NC have a need
to iron, so the slight turbidity cause by iron residue is helpful in the grand scheme of things.
Again, if it is easier to have a conference call on Monday to discuss, please let me know when a good
time to call in would be.
Jim Barber
Art Barnhardt wrote:
Seems to be a bit much to me, but I will go along with what Jim thinks is necessary to meet the
permit application requirements.
Arta.
David Goodrich wrote:
Art and Jim,
After discussing the issues associated with permitting the system proposed by the Bladen
County Water District to dispose of their iron filter backwash water with fellow staff after the
recent departure of Kim Colson, I have composed the attached letter requesting additional
information.
I would appreciate your examining this letter for content, and letting me know if there is any
other information we should be requesting.
1 of 2 10/10/2008 3:54 PM

Re _AdditiWal Info. Request for Bladen County WQ0033325
Thank you for your help with this.
David
2 of 2 10/10/2008 3:54 PM

Re: Additional Info. Request for Bladen County WQ0033325
Subject: Re: Additional Info. Request for Bladen County WQ0033325
From: Art Barnhardt <[e-mail]>
Date: Fri, 10 Oct 2008 10:24.:23 -0400
To: David Goodrich <[e-mail]>
CC: Jim Barber <[e-mail]>
Seems to be a bit much to me, but I will go along with what Jim thinks is necessary
to meet the permit application requirements.
ArtB.
David Goodrich wrote:
Art and Jim,
After discussing the issues associated with permitting the system proposed by
the Bladen County Water District to dispose of their iron filter backwash water
with fellow staff after the recent departure -of Kim Colson, I have composed the
.attached letter requesting additional information.
I would appreciate your examining this letter for content, and letting me know
if there is any other information we should be requesting.
Thank you for your help with this.
David
1 of 1 10/10/2008 12:16 PM

08/01/2008 16:'58 9106924795 _ PAGE 01/01
rd5/1912D08 0�3:02 9108626725 BLADEN PI.IkL'HASYNG PAGE 03
P.O. `6QX 7085, a'14''G3Pt, , :�}1U(E;ril:
GR>=�NVILLE�, B., ..`.;':.... 3
NEW WILL INORGANIC +CM, MTCAL'AN.A,LVSIS
,L.�►vim L��r, .
WAT8P, Syc;TF.M ID#: 0 3 -0 9- 0 6 0 COUNTY: BAbEN ,
Nairnc Of Water Systemrm: isasT a.r.Eza (LCk")-
SumpJ,e Type; ( ) Lntry point ' (X) 3pecialllVon-CCSq�pi7ancC
LOcgttion When C'01100ted. 3:Rp1Q K=ov= VXLTLR W03 collection, 9e1e9rt i5me
FacilitytT)Nd._ 05/07f0R 07:40 AM
Sample Point: Ski
Callceted By AL14N 8D
Mail Results to (water syatetzm resresentativo)l
EAST SWMEN
MAR, Phone##: [phone]
--En"r.k. QOt723TY WATER DIST'RZCT p8x#: (910) gb2-786
'P.O. Boi 2350
ZLZZAZET]1TowN.2g0 29337 Regpvmtsibie PerRvlrl'S. t7irail:
LABOMTc)ky 1D#: 3 7 7 1 5 ( ) SAMPLC L]NSATiSFACTOTLY ( ) RESAMPLE RNUgSTED
CONTA.M CONTAMINANT . METHOD REQUIRED NOT DETECTED QUANTIFIED ALLOWABLE
COPE CODE REPORT1NO LMrr ABOVE F R,L,
R.R.L. N/A
Turbidit 0010,!00 mttta ntu
0100 m 1 0,010 szx 1
1005 Arsenic 1.7 0 0.005 m /l
Bat'itmrn - 17o fl.4 sct Il - rn 2.000
1010 r m 0.005 m 1
10i5 Ciadmium 3.70 p.001 m /1 N1A
101G c' 169 ' 1•A 1 7 m 250:0
Chloride 127
1017 5.0
Chrossuwao ,17 0 0.020 zn ! m 0.100 - m
1020 to 1 1,300 m 1
1022 Co er; o f 4.050 . m 1 n 0.200 m
1024 " C' atside 3 4 8 Q.040- m ! mW-1 �4.000 tt11-
lozs F1 107 0.10o m 1
Iron 101 .0,060 - m-! 3 6 E 0 0 mn 1, 0.300 m
1028 m 0.015 m
0.003 mr /1
1030 as 17 o in l NIA
` 1031 • - Ma e9ium 169 1.0` m m l 0,050 -m :!_ _ -
1032 Man anese 2,70 OA10 m /1
' 170 0:0004 m m 1 0.002 m 11
1035 Mercu
NOTE: Q1flc=trAuans ibr Lead and Copper are getim levels. not MCLS., = ,
CaUtinuncl cm Page 2......
...... .' ♦`.'J
si.5.i n a°i`. •f•..ti.'.%I�i••wi.
.._.IwiliihRliP131''�`tttrsv�tit�'' 3 cr
- '!� • •f" `.�>.�d''ar.`�.F1i?'). ai<���IXrr.;.yn.•-..

t-h
II
z� 5/ ---1 Lrru�. �a Ca
T)PIUU--ova Aoou—
D.
.,?Ih
-- -
� � SSc�'•rr,�iu l "Zed � -- j J(7 �
3UP
q7
III
2
' o
5 �oPF S P9
Z`� lob— ((eo I �eS— I? 0
2cu — 1�

Pick SI
A,
e
x
U�F�tic M[ t Es Parcels
.s,
u
CHURCH
a
s �Fs
.. '' 4"' dX Care
;• r PIN: 03380C
OLD PIN: 03
ACCOUNT: 6
OWNER NAME
���r ;� , �•,; , f..,,. ,rji -' OWNER ADDR
1O4CALCULATED
h;.
U-) VALUATION:
�. . y g�� � °•' ;� s;': ,. SALE PRICE:
SALE DATE:
ZONING: RA
+� Y
100-YEAR FU
�+ r' -FTR CODE:
PERIMETER:
'•' {: AREA: 9644
f` '.'$- _ CALCACRE: 1
CITY,STATE:
NC
�ZIP: 28337C
. j DESCRIPTION
FIRE DISTRIC
DEED REFERE
x.
REFERE
('
REFERE
our
F .
,
r..
M •
. C unty

Page 1 of 2
State of North Carolina
Department of Environment and Natural
Resources
Division of Environmental Health
Public Water Supply Section
Michael F. Easley,'Governor
William G. Ross, Jr., Secretary
Terry Pierce, Director
Jessica G. Miles, Section Chief
N0914
%.a 61 1 LOh
North Carolina Public Water Supply
Plan Revie-W Tracking System
This information is current a& of: 9/3/2008
Plan Information
Applicant Information
Engineer Information
Year Submitted: 2008
RANDY GARANER,
HOBB'S UPCHURCH &
County:BLADEN
DIRECTOR
ASSOCIATES -SO.
DEH Serial No.: 08-00895
P,O 'BOX 2350
300 SW BROAD ST
TOBERMOREY WELL
ELIZABETHTOWN, NC
SOUTHERN PINES, NC 28388
(WELL #9) IRON
283.37
Type: WATER MAIN
l
EXTENSION
Pws ID: 03-09-055 BLADEN
CO WTR DIST-WEST
BLADEN
For projects received on or after May 1, 2005 contact:
Name Email Address I Phone
IOU, HENRI Heinrich.Ougncmail.net 919-715-3226
'For projects received piror to Mayl,2005, Identify the review engineer from the initials in the comments
column below and contact that engineer.
Initials
Review Engineer
E-mail address
Phone Number
TCC
Tony Chen
[e-mail]
919/715-3231,
SMC
Siraj Chohan
[e-mail]
919/715-3235
DEN
Doug Newhouse
[e-mail]
919/715-3234
OU
Henri Ou
heinrich;[e-mail]
919/715-3226
SMB
Shashi Bhatta
[e-mail] .
919nl5-5857
JEC
Julia Cavalier
[e-mail]
919/715-6643
For projects with initials other thanthose shown above or with no initials,
contact either Tony Chen or
httD://www.deh.enr.state.nc.us/Dws/pws reports/P1anReview/plan/plan.asp?SerialNo=08-00... 9/4/2008

Page 2 of 2
Public Water Supply Section at 919/733-2321.
jActivftV Date
jActivityl
comment
7/9/2008
REPLYTO COMMENTS.RECVD
WAITING FOR DWQ
PERMIT
6/27/2008
COMMENT LETTER SENT
NEED DWQ DISCHARGE
PERMIT
6/27/2008
D/E-MAILED COMMENTS
WITH BERKWEIZE
6/20/2008
D/E-MAILED COMMENTS
W/TONY CHEN
6/20/2008-
1PULLED FOR REVIEW,
0u
5/23/2008 =JAPPLICATION
RECEIVED.
PROJECT OPENED
Please.click here to review the status of another plan.
Please click here to return to Public Water Supply main menu.
httn://www.deh.enr.staie.nc.us/nws/nws reports/P1anReview/-olan/nlan.asp?SerialNo=08-00... 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 1 of 10
Water System Detail Information
Water Systein No.: NC0309055 Federal "Cype: C
Water System Name: BLADEN CO WTR DIST-WEST BLADEN Federal Source: GW
Principal. C0I:I111y Served: BLADEN System Status: A
l:'r.inci.pal City Served: ELIZABETHTOWN Activity, :Data:. 11-01-1989
Water System Contacts
Type e Contact t::lommunication
GARNER, RANDY
AC Administrative PO BOX 2350 Phone Type Value
Contact 272 SMITH CIR BUS - Business 910-862-6996
ELIZABETHTOWN, NC 28337
BLADEN COUNTY _0309055 Phone .i ype Value
OW - Owner PO BOX 2350 ELIZABETHTOWN, NC 28337 BUS -Business 910-862-6996
Annual Operating Ile.riod(s)
Start End
1:1ff. ftjn Date Eff End bate 1 :0 �lflll�}Ay Month/Dayhype Population
11-01-2005 No End Date 1 /1 12/31 R 9038
Service Co nection(s
Type Count Meter Type Size
RS 3689 UN 0
Service Area(s)
Code Name
R RESIDENTIAL AREA
Water System Facilities
1=a�. Type '[Tit Process Name
11 Facility �J'alue Status Treatment tab ective Name
Avail. Treatment Process Name
B03 BLADENBORO CC - A - E
COI CLARKTON CC - A - E
DO1 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DS - A - P
EAR EAST ARCADIA - CC - A - E
L03 STORAGE-ELEVATED-3 ST - A - P
PO4 I TREATMENT PLT WELL #4 1 TP - A - P
P05 I TREATMENT PLT WELL 95 1 TP -A - P
P06 ILISBON TREATMENT PLT_WELL #6 I TP - A - P
P09 I TREATMENT PLT WELL #9 1 TP - A - O
GENERIC
CORROSION CONTROL
INHIBITOR,
UNIT
ORTHOPHOSPHATE
GENERIC
DISINFECTION
HYPOCHLORINATION,
UNIT
POST
GENERIC
CORROSION CONTROL
INHIBITOR,
UNIT
ORTHOPHOSPHATE
GENERIC
DISINFECTION
HYPOCHLORINATION,
UNIT
POST
GENERIC
CORROSION CONTROL-
INHIBITOR,
UNIT
POLYPHOSPHATE
GENERIC
DISINFECTION
HYPOCHLORINATION,
UNIT
POST
GENERIC'
CORROSION CONTROL
INHIBITOR,
UNIT
ORTHOPHOSPHATE
GENERIC
CORROSION CONTROL
PH ADJUSTMENT, POST
UNIT
GENERIC
DISINFECTION
HYPOCHLORINATION,
UNIT
POST
httDs://www.i)wss.enr.state.nc.us/NCDWW/JSP/Fact.-isp?tinwsys is number=4164&tinwsy...' 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 2 of 10
S09
WELL #9 TOBEMORY
WL - A - O
WO 1
ELIZABETHTOWN
CC - A - P
W04
WELL #4/ABBOTTSBURG
WL - A - P
W05
WELL #5/WHITE'S XRD
WL - A - P
W06
WELL #6 LISBON WELL
WL - A - P
GENERIC
UNIT
CORROSION CONTROL
PH ADJUSTMENT
P08
TREATMENT _PLT_WELL #8
INACTIVE
TP-1 - P
GENERIC
UNIT
DISINFECTION
HYPOCHLORINATION,
POST
GENERIC
UNIT
IRON REMOVAL
SEQUESTRATION
S08 I
WELL #8 INACTIVE
WL - I - P
Water System. Facility Flows
Supplving Faacility 1D 11o.
Supplying .Facility Dance
Receiving Facility .I13 No.
Receiving .Facility .Nance
TP - PO4
TREATMENT PLT_WELL
#4
DS - DO1
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
TP - POS
TREATMENT_PLT_WELL
#5
DS - DO1
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
TP - P06
TREATMENT _PLT_WELL
#6 LISBON
DS - DO1
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
TP - P09
TREATMENT _PLT_WELL
#9
DS - DO1
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
WL - S09
WELL #9 TOBEMORY
TP - P09
TREATMENT _PLT WELL
#9
CC - W01
ELIZABETHTOWN
DS - DO1
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
WL - W04
WELL #4/ABBOTTSBURG
TP - PO4
TREATMENT _PLT WELL
#4
WL - W05
WELL 95/WHITE'S XRD
TP - P05
TREATMENT PLT_WELL
#5
WL - W06
WELL #6 LISBON WELL
TP - P06
TREATMENT PLT WELL
#6 LISBON
Water Purchases
Water System No.
Water Svstecn N.aane
Water Finish
NC0309015
BLADENBORO, TOWN OF
Unfinished Water
NC0309020
CLARKTON, TOWN OF
Unfinished Water
NC0309050
EAST ARCADIA, TOWN OF
Unfinished Water
NC0309010
ELIZABETHTOWN, TOWN OF
Unfinished Water
Ruvers of Water
Water Svstem- No.
Name
NC0309025
DUBLIN, TOWN OF
NC0309050
EAST ARCADIA, TOWN OF_.
Routine TCR Sample Schedules
begin .bate
End..Date
Requirements
01-01-2007
Continuous
10 RT/MN
01-01-1991
12-31-2006
5 RT/MN
Repeat TCR. Sample Schedules
Begin.Date
1! nd Date
RequirementsOriginal
Sample
lDIDsate
No Repeat TCR Schedules
https:llwww.pwss. enr.state.nc. us/NCD W WIJSPIFact. j sp?tinwsys_is_number=4164&tinwsy... 9/4/200 8

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 3 of 10
Group :Non-TCR Sample Schedules
Facility
Begin late
1'nd. l)aate
requirements
t�nalyte
Analy
te GroupGroupName
Group Code
DO1
01-01-2008
Continuous
5 RT/YR
CDBP
CDS FOR DBP
D01
01-01-1992
Continuous
20 RT/3Y
CL90
CDS FOR LEAD COPPER
PO4
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/3Y
CIOC
CDS FOR INORGANICS
PO4
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/3Y
CIOS
CDS FOR SECONDARIES
PO4
01-01-2005
Continuous
'1 RT/YR
CN03
CDS FOR NITRATE
PO4
01-01-2005
Continuous
2 RT/3Y
CSOC
CDS FOR SOC
PO4
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/3Y
CVOC
CDS FOR VOC
P05
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/3Y
CIOC
CDS FOR INORGANICS
P05
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/3Y
CIOS
CDS FOR SECONDARIES
P05
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/YR
CN03
CDS FOR NITRATE
P05
01-01-2005
Continuous
2 RT/3Y'
CSOC
CDS FOR SOC
P05
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/3Y
CVOC
CDS FOR VOC
P06
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/3Y
CIOC
CDS FOR INORGANICS
P06
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/3Y
CIOS
CDS FOR SECONDARIES
P06
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/YR
CN03
CDS FOR NITRATE
P06
01-01-2005
Continuous
2 RT/3Y
CSOC
CDS FOR SOC
P06
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/YR
CVOC
CDS FOR VOC
Individual Non— CR Sample Schedules
Begin/End
l�nit P
l° `aad'ilit�'
Seasonal
Req.
Cd)iie
taaa.t}'t'£' Name
Date
begin Dt-
PO4
01-01-2008
01-01-2008
1 RT/9Y
4000
GROSS ALPHA, EXCL. RADON
Continuous
& U
PO4
01-01-2008
Continuous
01-01-2008
1 RT/9Y
4006
COMBINED URANIUM
PO4
01-01-2008
01-01-2008
1 RT/6Y
40.10
COMBINED RADIUM (-226 & -
Continuous
228)
POS
01-01-2008
01-01-2008
1 RT/9Y
4000
GROSS ALPHA, EXCL. RADON
Continuous
& U
P05
01-01-2008
Continuous
01-01-2008
1 RT/9Y
4006
COMBINED URANIUM
P05
01-01-2008
01-01-2008
1 RT/6Y
4010
COMBINED RADIUM (-226 & -
Continuous
228)
P06
01-01-2008
Continuous
01-01-2005
2 RT/3Y
2031
DALAPON
P06
01-01-2008
01-01-2005
1
2039
DI(2-ETHYLHEXYL)
Continuous
RT/QT
PHTHALATE
P06
01-01-2008
01-01-2008
1 RT/9Y
4000
GROSS ALPHA, EXCL. RADON
Continuous
& U
P06
01-01-2008
Continuous
01-01-2008
1 RT/9Y
4006
COMBINED URANIUM
P06
01-01-2008
01-01-2008
1 RT/6Y
4010.
COMBINED RADIUM (-226 & -
Continuous
228)
Crotty Violations
Fed.
Vi 1. Name
An. Group Name
Fiscal
l£t.
Viol.
An.
https://www.pwss.enr.state.nc.us/NCDWW/JSP/Fact.j sp?tinwsys_is_number=4164&tinwsy... 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 4 of 10
Year
late
l: y pia
Q:Irroup
1997
01-15-
1998
MR
STATE - MONITORING AND
REPORTING
CVOC
CDS FOR VOC
1996
12-30-
1996
MR
STATE - MONITORING AND
REPORTING
CVOC
CDS FOR VOC
1996
10-01-
1996
MR
STATE - MONITORING AND
REPORTING
CSOC
CDS FOR SOC
1996
06-12-
1996
MR
STATE - MONITORING AND
REPORTING
CVOC
CDS FOR VOC
Individual Violations
Viol.
No.
Det.
Date
Viol.
Type
Viol.
Z'i�l, t�Taane
An.
An. Name
2005-405
10-06-
2004
72
CCR
ADEQUACY/AVAILABILITY/CONTENT
7000
CONSUMER CONFIDENCE RULE
2004-304
09-16-
2003
71
CCR REPORT
7000
CONSUMER CONFIDENCE RULE
2003-203
2003
003
22
MCL (TCR), MONTHLY
3100
COLIFORM (TCR)
2003-103
10-01-
2002
71
CCR REPORT
7000
CONSUMER CONFIDENCE RULE
Recent 'Positive TCR Sample Results
71'ype/
Sample
No.
Sample
Point point
Sample lit.
Description
LabR.l
ID
Result / ::�.ia�alytc / Method/ NO.,6DL'
I< BCC Sample Sumrn7aq results
1P Begin
Date
type
9 Samples
Nfeasure
Units
A aalyte Code/Name
01-01-200
90%
20
.305
MG/L
CU90 - COPPER SUMMARY
12-31-2007
01-01-2005
90%
20
0
MG/L
PB90 - LEAD SUMMARY
12-31-2007
07-01-2003
9.0%
1
0
MG/L
PB90 - LEAD SUMMARY
12-31-2003
07-01-2000
90%
1
.005
MG/L
PB90 --LEAD SUMMARY
12-31-2000
Site Visits .
reason
Date
l)eflciency(ie5)/Reeo m.mendation(s)
Cat.
Sep.
.base. ("ode
Dese. '1'�t
Freehand Desc°.
Dct.
Date
ides.
Date
CNST
06-19-2008
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
INVG
02-I1-2008
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
ENGR
02-01-2008
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
SITE
01-25-2008
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered /
SRCE
10-01-2007
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
OTHR
09-18-2007
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
INVG
09-17-2007
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
SNSV
09-13-2007
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
INVG
08-27-2007
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
CNST
07-23-2007INo
Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
htti)s://www.pwss.enr.state.nc.us/NCDWW/JSP/Factjsp?tinwsys is—number=4164&tinwsy... 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 5 of 10
CNST
04-17-2007
o Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
Recent Primary/Secondary Sample
Results
"aed
Sample
An.
Site
No.
Data
Code
Analyte
Result
Unit
(�letha�c
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1074
ANTIMONY, TOTAL
ND
E04I
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1005
ARSENIC
ND
E04I
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1010
BARIUM
ND
E04I
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1075
BERYLLIUM, TOTAL
ND
E04I
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1015
CADMIUM
ND
E04I
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1020
CHROMIUM
ND
E041
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
-04-02-
1024
CYANIDE
ND
E041
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1025
FLUORIDE
ND
E04I
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1035
MERCURY
ND
E041
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1036
NICKEL
ND
E04I
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1045
SELENIUM
ND
E04I
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1085
THALLIUM, TOTAL
ND
E04I
2008
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1074
ANTIMONY, TOTAL
ND
E05I
2008
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1005
ARSENIC
ND
.E051
2008
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1010
BARIUM
ND
E05I
2008
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1075
BERYLLIUM, TOTAL
ND
E051
2008
POS-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1015
CADMIUM
ND
E05I
2008
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1020
CHROMIUM
ND
E051
2008
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1024
CYANIDE
ND
E05I
2008,
P05-E05
85277040208-
04-02-
1025
FLUORIDE
ND
E051
2008
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1035
MERCURY
ND
E051
2008
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1036
NICKEL
ND
E05I
2008 .
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1045
SELENIUM
ND
E05I
2008
POS-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1085
THALLIUM, TOTAL
ND
httDs://www.Dwss.enr.state.ne.us/NCDWW/JSP/Fact.isp?tinwsys is number=4164&tinwsy... 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 6 of 10
E05I
2008
P06-1,06
8527-010406-
01-04-
1074
ANTIMONY, TOTAL
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
P06-1,06
8527-010406-
01-04-
1005
ARSENIC
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
P06-1,06
8527-010406-
01-04-
1010
BARIUM
ND
MG/L
L06 .
2006
P06-1,06
8527-010406-
01-04-
1075
BERYLLIUM, TOTAL
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
P06-1,06
8527-010406-
01-04-
1015
CADMIUM
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
P06-1,06
8527-010406-
01-04--
1020
CHROMIUM
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
P06-L06
8527-010406-
' 01-04-
1024
CYANIDE
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
P06-L06
8527-010406-
01-04-
1025
FLUORIDE
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
P06-L06
8527-010406-
01-04-
1035
MERCURY
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
P06-L06
8527-010406-
01-04-
1036
NICKEL
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
P06-L06
8527-010406-
01-04-
1045
SELENIUM
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
P06-L06
8527-010406-
01-04-
1085
THALLIUM, TOTAL
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
Recent Results
Fac./
Sample
late
Analy e
Result
Unit
MethodAn.
Site
No.
Code
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
-
05-07-
2110
2,4,5-TP
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2105
2,4-D
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2050
ATRAZINE
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2010
BHC-GAMMA
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527450708-
05-07-
2959
CHLORDANE
ND.
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2031
DALAPON
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2041
DINOSEB
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2005
ENDRIN
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2065
HEPTACHLOR
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2067
HEPTACHLOR EPDXIDE
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2051
LASSO
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2015
METHOXYCHLOR
ND
https://www.pwss.enr.state.nc.us/NCDWW/JSP/Factjsp?tinwsys is—number=4164&tinwsy... 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 7 of 10
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2326
PENTACHLOROPHENOL
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
.05-07-
2040
PICLORAM
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2037
SIMAZINE
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2020
TOXAPHENE
ND
E04S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2110
2,4,5-TP
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2105.
2,4-D
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2050
ATRAZINE
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2010
BHC-GAMMA
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2959
CHLORDANE
ND
E05S
2008
POS-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2031
DALAPON
ND
E05S
2008
POS-E05
8527-050708--
05-07-
2041
DINOSEB
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2005
ENDRIN
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-50708-
O 07-
2065
HEPTACHLOR
ND
E05S
20008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2067
HEPTACHLOR EPDXIDE
ND
E05S
2008
8527-050708-
05-07-
P05-E05
E05S
2008
2051
LASSO
ND
8527-050708-
05-07-
P05-E05
E05S
2008
2015
METHOXYCHLOR
ND
P65-E05
852 050708-
O 07-
2326
PENTACHLOROPHENOL
ND
E05S
20008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-.
2040
PICLORAM
ND
EOSS
2008
POS-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2037
SIMAZINE
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708=
05-07-
2020
TOXAPHENE
ND
E05S
2008
P06-L06
8527-080107-
08-01-
2110
2,4,5-TP
ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06
8527-080107-
08-01-
2105
2,4-D
ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2050
ATRAZINE
ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2010
BHC-GAMMA
ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2959
CHLORDANE
ND
L06S
2001
8527-080107-
08-01-
httns://www.Dwss.enr.state.nc.us/NCDWW/JSP/Fact.isn?tinwsys is number=4164&tinwsy... 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 8 of 10
P06-1,06
L06S
2007
2031
DALAPON
ND
P06-1,06
8527-080107-
08-01-
2041
DINOSEB
ND
L06S
2007
P06-1,06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2005
ENDRIN
ND
L06S
2007
P06-1,06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2065
- HEPTACHLOR
ND
L06S
2007
P06-1,06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2067
HEPTACHLOR EPDXIDE
ND
L06S
2007
P06-1,06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2051
LASSO
ND
L06S
2007 .
P06-1,06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2015
METHOXYCHLOR
ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06
8527-080107-
08-01-
2326
PENTACHLOROPHENOL
ND
L06S
2007
P06-1,06
8527-080107-
08-01-
2040
PICLORAM
ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2037
SIMAZINE
ND
L06S.
2007
P06-L06
8527-050207-
05-02=
2020
TOXAPHENE
ND
L06S
2007
Reeent .RVOC Sa ple Results
l!ac./
Sample
An.
�Uni
'UnitMethod
Date
Aixalvte
Result
Site
.NO.
(..ode
"
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2981
1,1,1-TRICHLOROETHANE
ND
E04V
2007
8527-080107-
08-01-
PO4-E04
E04V
2007
2985
1,1,2-TRICHLOROETHANE
ND
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2977
1,1-DICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
E04V
2007
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2378
12 4-
ND
, E04V
2007
TRICHLOROBENZENE
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2980
1,2-DICHLOROETHANE
ND
E04V
2007
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2983
1,2-DICHLOROPROPANE
ND
E04V
2007
8527-080107-
08-01-
PO4-E04
E04V
2007
2990
BENZENE
ND
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2982
CARBON
ND
E04V
2007
TETRACHLORIDE
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2989
CHLOROBENZENE
ND
E04V
2007
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2380
CIS-1,2-
ND
E04V
2007
DICHLOROETHYLENE
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2964
DICHLOROMETHANE
ND
E04V
2007
PO4-E04
8527-081308-
08-13- '
2992
ETHYLBENZENE
ND
E04V
2008
PO4=E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2968
O-DICHLOROBENZENE
ND
E04V
2007
8527-080107-
08-01-
https: //www.pwss. enr. state. nc.usINCD W WIJSPIFact. j sp?tinwsys_is_number=4164&tinwsy... 9/4/200 8

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 9 of 10
PO4-E04
- E04V
2007
2969
P-DICHLOROBENZENE
ND
PO4-E04
8527-081308-
08-13-
2996
STYRENE
ND
E04V
2008
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2987
TETRACHLOROETHYLENE
ND
E04V
2007
PO4-E04
8527-081308-
08-13-
2991
TOLUENE
ND
E04V
2008
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2979
TRANS-1,2-
E04V
2007
DICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2984
TRICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
E04V
2007
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2976
VINYL CHLORIDE
ND
E04V
2007
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2955
XYLENES, TOTAL
ND
E04V
2007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-0-
,
2981
1,1,1-TRICHLOROETHANE
ND
E05V
2007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2985
1,1,2-TRICHLOROETHANE
ND
E05V
2007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2977
1,1-DICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
E05V
2007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2378
1,2,4-
ND
E05V
2007
TRICHLOROBENZENE
P05-E05
852080107-
0 01-
2980
1,2-DICHLOROETHANE
ND,
E05V
20007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
0 01-
2983
1,2-DICHLOROPROPANE
ND
E05V
20007
POS-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2990
BENZENE
ND
E05V
2007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2982
CARBON
ND
E05V
2007
TETRACHLORIDE
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2989
CHLOROBENZENE
ND
E05V
2007
8527-080107-
08-01-
CIS-1,2-
POS-E05
E05V
2007
2380
DICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2964
DICHLOROMETHANE
ND
E05V
2007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2992
ETHYLBENZENE
ND
E05V
2007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2968
O-DICHLOROBENZENE
ND
E05V
2007
P05-E05
852 00107-
0 01-
2969
P DICHLOROBENZENE
ND
E05V
20007
POS-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2996
STYRENE
ND
E05V
2007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2987
TETRACHLOROETHYLENE
ND
E05V
2007
POS-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-.
2991
TOLUENE
ND
E05V
2007
8527-080107-
08-01-
TRANS-1,2-
P05-E05
E05V
2007
2979
DICHLOROETHYLENE
ND'
8527-080107-
08-01-
https://www.pwss.enr.state.nc.us/NCDW WIJSPIFact.j sp?tinwsys_is_number=4164&tinwsy... 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 10 of 10
P05-E05
E05V
2007
2984
TRICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2976
VINYL CHLORIDE
ND
E05V
2007
P05-E05
8527-.080107-
08-01-
2955
XYLENES, TOTAL
ND
E05V
2007
P06-L06
852 040208-
0 0
2981
1,1,1-TRICHLOROETHANE
ND
L
L06V
200088
P06-L06
852 070908-
0 09-
2985
1,1,2-TRICHLOROETHANE
ND
.
L
L06V
20008
P06-1,06.
8527-040208-
04-02-
2977
1,1-DICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
,L06V
2008
P06-1,06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2378
1,2,4-
L06V
2008
TRICHLOROBENZENE
ND
P06-1,06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2980
1,2-DICHLOROETHANE
ND
L06V
2008
P06-L06
852 040208-
0 02-
2983
1,2-DICHLOROPROPANE
ND
L
L06V
20008
P06-1,06
8527-070908-
07-09-
2990
BENZENE
ND
L06V
2008
P06-1,06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2982
CARBON
L06V
2008
TETRACHLORIDE
ND
P06-1,06
8527-070908-
07-09-
2989
CHLOROBENZENE
ND
L06V
2008
P06-L06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2380
CIS-1,2-
ND
L06V
2008
DICHLOROETHYLENE.
P06-L06
852 L040208-
0 02-
2964
DICHLOROMETHANE
ND
L06V
20008
P06-L06
8527-070908-
07-09-
2992
ETHYLBENZENE
ND
L06V
2008
P06-L06 -
8527-040208-
04-02-
2968
O-DICHLOROBENZENE'
ND
L06V
2008
8527-040208-
04-02-
P06-1,06
L06V
2008
2969
P-DICHLOROBENZENE
ND
P06-L06
8527-070908=
07-09-
2996
STYRENE
ND
L06V
2008
P06-L06
8527-070908-
07-09-
2987
TETRACHLOROETHYLENE
ND
L06V
2008
8527-070908-
07-09-
P06-L06
L06V
2008
2991
TOLUENE
ND
P06-1,06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2979
TRANS-12-
ND
L06V
2008
DICHLOROETHYLENE
P06-L06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2984
TRICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
L06V
2008
P06-1,06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2976
VINYL CHLORIDE
ND
L06V
2008
P06-L06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2955
XYLENES, TOTAL
ND
L06V
2008
httbs://www.nwss.enr.state.nc.us/NCDWW/JSP/-Fact.isv?tinwsys is number=4164&tinwsV... 9/4/200'8

COMMUNITY
GROUNDWATER SYSTEMS
- MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
May Reduce• g fr2oRm
euired.
;Contaminant GrouFp
Initial &Routine Monitorin` ,(�)
9
,Routine
O
`(3),
increased Monitorin Re
9 q.,
.,
F requelncynf
, ,
Asbestos (AS)
collect one initial sample, thereafter, every 9 years,
can apply for a waiver if not in source vulnerable county
if result > MCL, begin quarterly monitoring
unless > maximum contaminant level (MCL)
and/or do not have asbestos piping
monthly, from distribution (see 15A NCAC 18C Section
if positive result, collect repeat samples within 24 hours of
Bacteriological (BA)
.1534 for number of samples)
Not Applicable
notification; then collect 5 routine samples the next month
following the positive routine sample
Disinfectants &
See chart entitled "Groundwater Systems - Stage 1
See chart entitled "Groundwater Systems - Stage 1
See chart entitled "Groundwater Systems - Stage 1
Disinfection
Disinfectants/Disinfection Byproducts (D/DBP)
Disinfectants/Disinfection Byproducts (D/DBP) Monitoring
Disinfectants/Disinfection Byproducts (D/DBP) Monitoring
Byproducts (D/DBP)
Monitoring Requirements" (Attachment 2)
Requirements" (Attachment 2)
Requirements" (Attachment 2)
Inorganic Chemicals
collect one initial sample at each entry. point, thereafter,
after 3 consecutive three year periods < MCL, a request to
(IC)
once every 3 years, unless > MCL
reduce to once every 9 years may be granted by the State
if result >MCL, begin quarterly monitoring
Lead and Copper
(LC)
every 6 months for first year,.thereafter, collect annual
after two 6-month samples and 2 annuals where the 90th
if 90th percentile > action level for lead or copper, perform
Corrosion Control Treatment Study, test for Water Quality
(lead action level =
samples during June -September for 2 more
percentile < action levels, then may be reduced to every 3
Parameters, conduct public education (for lead only); then
0.015 mg/L;
consecutive years (see 15A NCAC 18C .1507 for
years (4)
need two 6-month samples where 90th percentile < action
copper action level =
number of samples)
levels
1.3 mg/L)
if result is > 5 mg/L, begin quarterly monitoring; after 4
annually, at each entry point, unless result > 5 mg/L;
consecutive quarters < 5 mg/L, may apply to State for annual
Nitrate (NT)
Note: if result > MCL (10 mg/L), take confirmation
Not Applicable
monitoring; if approved, subsequent annual samples must be
sample within 24 hours
collected during the quarter that previously had the highest
concentration
if result is > 0.5 mg/L, begin quarterly monitoring; after 4
one sample, one time at each entry point unless >0.5
consecutive quarters < 0.5 mg/L, may apply to State for
Nitrite (NI)
mg/L. Note: Ifresult > MCL (1 mg/L), take
Not Applicable
annual monitoring; if approved, subsequent annual samples
confirmation sample within 24 hours
must be collected during the quarter that previously had the
highest concentration
Pesticides/Synthetic
4 consecutive quarterly samples at each entry point;
if no detection of regulated contaminants for all 4
consecutive quarters, may reduce as follows: population
if result > MCL, or if regulated contaminant is detected, begin
Organic Chemicals
Population < 3,300 has option to use 1st sample and
>3,300 may reduce to 2 consecutive quarterly entry point
quarterly monitoring (quarterly analyses must include all
(SOCs)
apply for waiver (see our web site for waiver application
samples every 3 years; population < 3,300, may reduce to
contaminants identified by the analysis method used for the
package information)
one entry point sample every 3 years
detected contaminant)
4 consecutive quarterly samples at each entry point (if,
if the initial monitoring has been completed, or if your
Radionuclides (RA)
your system has not exceeded any of the new ,
system's data was grandfathered, with written State
if running annual average exceeds the MCL or if on reduced
(new rule requirements -
radionuclides MCLs, may composite up to 4
approval, may reduce to every 3, 6, or 9 years according totest
monitoring and the MCL is exceeded, begin quarterly
Effective 12/8103)
consecutive quarterly samples from a single entry point
results
monitoring
if analysis is done within a year of the first sample)
if no detection of regulated contaminants for all 4
Volatile Organic
consecutive quarters, may reduce to one entry point
if result > MCL, or if regulated contaminant is detected, begin
Chemicals (VOCs)
4 consecutive quarterly samples at each entry point
sample, collected annually; after 3 consecutive annual
quarterly monitoring (quarterly analyses must include all VOCs
samples with no detections of regulated contaminants, may
listed on the State's laboratory form)
reduce to once every 3 years
(1) Compliance monitoring for all contaminant groups should be performed the same quarter as system start-up except for bacteriological, which should be performed within 30 days of system start-up.
(2) A request must be submitted to the State, in writing, in order to get approval for reduced monitoring.
(3) If a system is required to increase to monthly or quarterly monitoring, the follow-up samples must be collected the next month or quarter.
(4) For lead & copper, if the 90th percentile of lead result is < 0.005 mg/L and copper result is < 0.65 mg/L, after 2 consecutive 6-month periods, the system can apply for reduced monitoring to every three years.

GROUNDWATER SYSTEMS
STAGE 1 - DISINFECTANT / DISINFECTION BYPRODUCTS (D/DBP) MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
MAXIMUM RESIDUAL DISINFECTANT LEVELS
IMRDLI*:
Applies to any c
� � ROUSINE
MONITORING
RECIUIREMC-NT3 ":
DISINFECTANT
RESIDUALS
MRDL
(man•1
COMPLIANCE BASED
ON
ANALYSIS
REQUIREMENTS
FREOUfiN,CY
hy�olTeap
geyuired
p SAMPLE LOCATION=
Chlorine
4.0
(as tree
Running
Use EPA/State
Monthly or
Quarterly
Same -as
# of
chlorine)
Annual
Approved
based on
Bacteria
Test When &
Average
(RAA)
Method.•••'
Test performed
system's
required
samples
required
Where compliance
bacteria samples
4.0
(Explanation for
by Certified
bacteria
each
are collected each
Chloramine
(as
calculating
Operator or
Sam tin
piing
month or
month or quarter
(when ammonia Is
combined—
RAAB below)*-
designee
schedule
quarter
applied)
chlorine)
)mmunity or Nontmnsient noncommunity water system that uses groundwater for drinking purposesthat has had a disinfectant added.
NOTE: There.are no monitoring reductions allowed for MRDL testing.
,rreporting these residuals to the State, the.appropriate
le of chlorine residual level must be 11] recorded on each Total
diform sample analysis report sent to the State for compliance
h the Total Colform Rule and [2] reported an the appropriate
)nthly Operations Report form showing the monthly average fat
;se residuals. (If the system has received laboratory
rtification from N.C. to analyze its own samples, it may use the
stribution Bacteriological Analysis Summary Report form in lieu
the two methods given above).
• MRDL (Maximum Residual Disinfectant Level) - the maximum residual level allowed bra given disinfectant in dunking water by'EPA as a running annual average.
++ Combined chlorine residual - Testfortotal chlorine and free chlorine residuals. Subtm tthe free amount from the total amount to determine the combined chlorine residual.
+•+RAA(Running annual average) - The average forth, past four consecutive quartmsananongeing basis. Forsystemsrequimd te coll,etbactria samples monthly, the MRDL RAAsare calcolatedbyavenEing the chlorine residuals (free and/ercombined esappligble)forall compliance bacteria samples collected duringtha manthforthe monthly
verage. Using the averages for each of the three months, calculate the quarterly average(s). The four quartedy averages are than used to calculate the RAA(s). (For systems required to collect bacteria samples only quarterly the MRDL RAAs are calculated by averaging the chlorine residuals (free and/or combined) for all compliance samples collected
during the quarter, then using the averages of the four consecutive quarters to calculate the RAAs].
•••+ Approved methods --When testing for free and combined chlorine residuals using field test kit, the DPD analysis method must be used. May also use any other EPA or State approved method for free and tatel chlorine residual testing. '
r THM and HAA samples must be collected together at the same sites and of the same time. Ali THM and HAA samples used to determine compliance with the MCLs for a specific compliance perlodmust be collected an the same day.
DISINFECTION BYPRODUCTS - Trihalomethanes ITTHMI and Haloacetic Acids IHAA51 Applies to any Community orNontransient noncommunity water system that uses groundwater for drinking purposes that has had a
11 ,
Note: If the system elects to oolkct more Man the minimum one - disinfectant added.
sample per entry point per compliance period, then at least 2,74 of the
samples coilectedfor that entry point fora compliance period must be
a h, r ..,�-.-,a"...
- ROiI'17NE MONITORING.REQUIREMENT3 -
' REOUCEn t'roi7i'Kloutrna„MONtTORINC3-E2EQUfREfyIENTS-
�3,y
INCREASED. REQUIREMENTS'-+
-
"� �.REOUCFJ?fro_mJnereased
tJIONt30RWG ,
from MRT locations.
,MONITORING
4].IIREMENT
eoMAMINANT
MCL•
COMPLIANCE eASEO
ANALYSIS
Molsmpl
TREQUENCY SAMPLE LOCATION >
"CONDITMN9
FREQUENCY
#ols pl
,SAMPLE
"'CUNDmONs
M Ibm .AMPLE'
FREQUENCY ',,LOCATION
"+
CONDITIONS
x', tbr,pla,=
FREQUENCY
-'ISAMPLe.':
ON
REDMREMFMs
Riqulmd
;, ReAvi d•,
LOCATION
„.�
p+q,yrey
Rqulrcd
LOCATION,`.
GROF)NOWATER 10Jf100-or
gtoatet.po(t
Running
1 sample
..
1 sample
1. sample
1 sample
THM
0.080
Annual
site per
Annually
site per-
M R�
site per
Annually
site per
Average
entry
At Maximum
TTHM RAA does not
between
entry
exceeds 0.0604
entry
TTHM RAA does not
between July
entry
(�) �•
Certified Lab
Quarterly
point-*-
See
Residence Time (MRT)
sites in the
exceed 0.0404 mg/L and
HAAS RAA does not
July 1st and
point--
See
At MRT
sites
mg/L OR the
Quarterly
p oint"'
See
At MRT
sites
exceed 0.0604 mg/L
and HAAS RAA does
1st and
point-
p
See
At MRT
sites
(Explana5on for
"Sample
distribution system-**
exceed 0.0304
September
Sample
HAA RAA exceeds
"Sample
not exceed 0.0454 mg/L
September
"Sample
HAAS
0.060
calculating RAA
301h
0.0454 mg/L
30(h.
below)
Location"
Location"
Location"
Location"
ttROUNOYYA'CER,,, Less't[ian
1DAOD
ptNt, �:'m i .. .
Running
1 sample
T-rHM RAA does not exceed
1 sample
1 sample
1 sample
THM
0.080
Annual
Annually
site per
0.0404 mglL and HAAS RAA
Every 3
site per
-THM RAA
.site per
Annually
site per
.
Average
between July
entry
At Maximum
does not exceed 0.0304 mg/L
years,
entry
exceeds
entry
TTHM RAA does not
between July
entry
(R'�) �+
for
Certified Lab
1st and
September
point••'
See
Residence Time (MRT)
sites in the
for 2 consecutive years OR
TTHM RAA does not exceed
0.0204 HAAS
between
July 1st and
point-'
Sea
Al MRT
sites
mg/L OR HAAS
HAAS
RAA exceeds
Quarterly
point -*
See
At MRT
� sites
exceed 0.0604 mg/L
and HAAS RAA does
1st and
September
point--
See
At MRT
sites
(Explanation
30th
"Sample
distribution system--
mg/Land RAA
September
"Sample
0.0604 mg/L
"Sample
not exceed 0.0454 mg/L
301h
"Sample
HAAS
0.060
calculating RAA
Location"
does not exceed 0.0154 mg L
30th
Location"
Location"
Location"
below)
�
for lyear
• MCL (Maximum edntaminant Level). - The maximum level allowed for a contammant in ddnidng water by EPA
RAA (Running Annual Average)= The average for the past four consecutive quarters on an ongoing basis. For systems required to collect TTHM and HAAS samples quarterly, the RAAS for the TTHM, and HAAS, am calculated by averaging theirvaluesfor all compliance samples collected during the quarter, then using the TTHM and HAAS averages for
eachefthe fourquartemfocalculate the RAAa. [For system. required to collect TTHM and HAAS samples annually (only during the third quarter of each year), the annual averages for the TTHM. and HAASs are calculated by averaging their values for all samples collected during that quarter. If the annual average for that true period exceeds either MCL, the
system must baoin ouaMdy monifodno the Wowing quarter. For those systems monitoring either annually or every Wee years that are required to increase their TTHMIHAAS monitoring, compliance with the MCLs is determined at the end of the second quarter (after June 30th) of the following year].
•••#ofTTHMI HAAS Sample Sets Required: The numberof TTHMand HAA5eample.Mthatawatersystemisrequiredfo collectfrom,o-EL.itea within medistribution..stem each compliance period is based on the number of EntryPoints serving Me watarsysmm. An",ntry.poinf is defined as the location whom potable water from a source and its
treatment plantentere the distribution system. Systems that Lpmchasa wateranaregular basis, in additlente providing their own cources,must also collect, minimum ofone (t)TTHM I HAAS sample sat frem a MRT site for each Seller that water is purchased ham.
•••+MRT (Maximum Res idence Time) - The location(s) within the distribution system where a given unit of were remain, to r the to ngest period of rime. F.b:ON

,+- MF A 0
Hobbs, Upchurch & Asso9j$.9— P EC.
Consulting Engineers
300 S.W. Broad Street a Southern Pines, S$$$,8 AM 9.
15
August 27, 2008
'Mr. David Goodrich
NC Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Division of Water Quality
Aquifer Protection Section
2728 Capital Boulevard
Parker -Lincoln Building
Raleigh, NC 27604
RE: Bladen County Water District, Phase III -A Expansion
Tobermory Well (Well #9) Iron Removal System
Dear Mr. Goodrich:
RECEIVED
AUG 2:9 2M
DENR-FAYETfEUILLE REGIONAL OFFICE
We received your comment letter dated August 21, 2008 on the proposed spray
irrigation of the backwash water from iron removal filters in Bladen County. We offer
the following responses to your comments:
1. Drawing G-3 in your submittal package, entitled `Proposed Well Site Plan",
indicates a wetted area of approximately 0.18 acres, whereas the wetted area
indicated on Page D-1 of the Soil Scientist's Evaluation is 0.72 acres. Please
explain.
The proposed wetted area has been modified to. reflect a wetted area
of approximately 0,72 acres, The irrigation sprinkler head will be
capable of being located at one of nine different locations allowing the
irrigation of larger area,
2. Any proposed reuse system must conform to the ""beneficial .use" requirement of
the regulations. The plans submitted indicate the establishment of a rotary spray
system that does not appear to meet this requirement. Scenarios that would.
meet this requirement include the watering of ornamental vegetation (shrubbery,
.red tips, etc.) and/or watering of planted turf -grass for transplant to other
properties owned by Bladen County, i.e. athletic fields. Please submit plans for a
revised spray system to the following address:
The irrigation site will be used as a sod field for the athletic facilities in
Bladen County. The high schools plant Greg Norman-1 Bermuda grass
on the football and soccer .fields. GN-Z Bermuda grass (or an equal)
will be planted at the Tobermory wells/te and will be used by'the high
school athletic departments for sod.
Southem Pines, NC • Telephone [phone] • Fax [phone] • email: [e-mail]
Hampstead . Nags Head '. Charlotte 9 Beaufort, SC

Bladen County Water District BC0802
+.;Tobermory. Well Iron Filters ilEu IVED/0ENR/0Vr0
A0►11 ER PROTECTiONI SEC.
BLADEN COUNTY WATER DISTRICT
PHASE HI -A EXPANSION
08 A-UG 28 P1 9: 15
CONTRACT 4 — TOBERMORY WELL IRON REMOVAL FILTERS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
01. BIDDING/COMPLETION TIME: Work shall be commenced with adequate forces on
the date stipulated in the Notice to Proceed and the Project shall be substantially
completed within the timeframe stipulated in the Agreement.
A one year warranty period shall begin on the date of the substantial completion.
Substantial completion shall be defined as the date at which the Project is able to be
placed into service (i.e. the new iron filters are online). This shall not occur prior to the
date the OWNER receives satisfactory bacteriological results on all lines and the filters
have been tested sufficiently. All punch list items shall be addressed within the fina130-
day period prior to issuance of Final Payment.
02. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: If the project remains incomplete after the established
time of completion, the liquidated damages sustained by the OWNER shall be as
stipulated in the Agreement. The Contractor will be liable for additional inspection
costs incurred by the OWNER for the time by which contract time is exceeded in the
amount as specified in the Agreement. The liquidated damages shall not be punitive
damages but shall be charged based only on expenses incurred by the OWNER.
03. CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS: The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with
six copies of, construction submittals detailing the pipe materials, building materials,
metering pumps, injectors, iron filters, pre -engineering metal building, and all other
components of the construction. No construction shall begin without submittal approval
by the Engineer.
04. EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS: The Contractor shall satisfy himself as to .the
existing site conditions prior to bidding the project. The Contractor shall be responsible
for maintaining a workable site condition during the execution of this contract. Proper
ingress and egress to the site must be- maintained at all times. The Contractor shall be
responsible for restoring the site to its original conditions following construction. A
permanent grass stand must be established and/or all driveways and sidewalks restored
to their previous state before Final Payment is issued. The Contractor is responsible for
restoring any disturbed existing chemical feed lines, electrical lines, telephone/cable
lines to their original condition before Final Payment is issued.
05. LENGTHS AND QUANTITIES: The length and location of each chemical feed line,
both inside and outside the building, is approximate. Any increase or decrease in the
required length of chemical feed lines, carrier piping, fittings, or any other component
associated with chemical feed line installation like side walk crossings, driveway
crossings, or fence relocations shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
SP-1

Bladen County Water District
'Tobermory Well Iron Filters
06. TOBERMORY WELL OPERATION: The existing well shall be taken completely
offline during project construction.
07. PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING: The Contractor shall supply a pre-
engineered metal building as shown on the drawings. The building shall.be equipped
with lights, fan and louver system, and all other electrical components indicated on the'
drawings. Submittals for the metal building shall be signed and sealed by a registered
NC Professional Engineer. The sealed submittal drawings shall include the concrete
slab designed to support the weight of the building and the filter units;
08. EXISTING WELL. HOUSE: The existing well house shall be reconfigured as
indicated on the plans. The new chemical feed system shall be installed as indicated.
Any and all existing metering pumps, chemical feed lines, bends, tees, etc. may be used
by the Contractor when installing the new system.
09. PROPOSED CHEMICAL FEED LINES: All new chemical feed lines inside the well
house shall be 1" Schedule 80 PVC unless otherwise noted on the drawings. All
chemical feed lines outside the building shall be 1" plastic tubing installed inside PVC
conduit buried a minimum of 24" as shown on the drawings.
10. PROPOSED CHEMICAL FEED VAULTS: Two. new chemical feed vaults shall be
supplied as shown on the drawings. The vaults shall be pre -cast concrete vaults
11. 10,000-GALLON POLYETHYLENE TANK: The filter backwash water shall be
dumped into a 10,000-gallon tank as shown on the, plans. The inlet to the tank shall
extend to the top of the tank, and the tank shall be translucent such that the water level in
the tank can be seen from the outside. The tank shall be placed on the concrete pad as
indicated and shall be secured to the pad as recommended by the tank manufacturer.
The tank shall be equipped with a manway access hatch, a screened vent to allow air in
and out, and a level gauge in gallons on the outside of the tank. The words "NON -
POTABLE WATER, NOT FOR DR]NIGNG" shall be placed on the outside of the tank
in large, clear letters. The outlet from the tank. shall be approximately 12" from the
bottom of the tank to allow for the iron particulate to settle to the bottom. The outlet of
the tank shall be connected to the proposed irrigation pump, and a tee with a drain valve
shall be provided between the tank and the irrigation pump to allow the tank to drain.
12. IRRIGATION PUMP: The irrigation pump shall be provided as - shown on the
drawings. The pump shall mount on the same concrete pad as the polyethylene tank and
shall be enclosed in a simple weatherproof, wooden shelter. The irrigation pump shall
be suitable for outdoors application. Pump shall be capable of irrigation 40 gpm against
65' TDH.
13. IRRIGATION HOSE AND IRRIGATION SITES: A 1.5" Schedule 80 PVC
irrigation line shall be buried 18" .below grade between the pump and the center of the
irrigation sites. A 1.5" rubber irrigation hose shall be provided between the end of the
SP-2

Bladen County Water District
"''Tobermory Well Iron Filters
F-DUSTIM
PVC line and the sprinkler head of sufficient length to allow the sprinkler head to be
spread between the five irrigation sites plus an extra 10' in length. The PVC irrigation
line shall extend out of the ground approximately 6" and a PVC elbow and 1.5" shut off
valve shall be supplied before transitioning to the ribber hose. The proper transition
pieces shall be provided to allow the rubber hose to screw on and off of the PVC line.
Only one sprinkler head shall be provided mounted on a 3' stand and it shall be capable
of irrigating in a circular fashion with a minimum radius of 50'. The Contractor shall be
responsible for planting the entire irrigation site in Greg Norman — 1 (GN-1) Bermuda
grass or an approved equal Bermuda grass. Final Payment shall not be issued until a
sufficient stand of Bermuda grass has been established (this may mean waiting for the
seasons).
14. RELOCATION OF EXISTING FENCE: The Contractor shall relocate the existing
fence to the back of the property as shown on the drawings. The Contractor may reuse
the existing fence posts and fence fabric, however final approval of the fence conditions
shall be the decision of the Engineer.
15. CHEMICAL FEED LINE LABELS: The Contractor shall be responsible for labeling
all new chemical feed lines installed inside the well house. Labels shall clearly indicate
what the line contains (such as "pre -chlorine") and shall indicate the direction of the
flow. Labels shall be placed on every run of line and shall be no more than five feet
apart on straight lines.
16. ROCK EXCAVATION: Any rock excavated during construction shall be considered
unclassified and shall not be paid for directly. Contractor shall be responsible for the
removal of any and all rock encountered and the replacement with Select Backfill at no
additional cost to the Owner.
17. PROGRESS MEETINGS: Monthly progress meetings shall be held to review the
progress of work and to discuss problems which might arise. These meetings shall be
attended by the contractor's foreman and project manager, the Engineer and his resident
inspector, and any representatives of the OWNER wishing to attend. These meetings shall
be scheduled by the Engineer at a date and time to be agreed upon by all to attend.
Attendance of the contractor's foreman and project manager is mandatory.
SP-3

AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION
APPLICATION REVIEW REQUEST FORM
Date: August 11, 2008
To: ❑ Landon Davidson, ARO-APS ❑ David May, WaRO-APS
X - Art Barnhardt, FRO-APS lc-fr"17 13G -ev ❑ Charlie Stehman, WiRO-APS
❑ Andrew Pitner, MRO-APS ❑ Sherri Knight, WSRO-APS
❑ Jay Zimmerman, RRO-APS
From: David Goodrich, Land Application Unit
Telephone: [phone] Fax: [phone]
E-Mail: david.goodrich(a)ncmail.net
A. Permit Number: W00033325
B. Owner: Bladen County Water District
C. Facility/Operation: Tobermory Well Filter Backwash Surface Irrigationystem
X Proposed ❑ Existing ® Facility X Operation
D. Application:
1. Permit Type: , ❑ Animal X Surface Irrigation ❑ Reuse ❑ H-R Infiltration
❑ Recycle ❑ FE Lagoon ❑ GW Remediation (ND)
❑ UIC - (5A7), open loop geothermal
For Residuals: ❑ Land App. ❑ D&M ❑ Surface Disposal
❑ 503 ❑ 503 Exempt ❑ Animal
2. Project Type: X New ❑ Major Mod. ❑ Minor Mod. ❑ Renewal ❑ Renewal w/ Mod.
E. Comments/Other Information: ❑ I would like to accompany you on a site visit.
Statutory Date:
.J
Attached, you will find all information submitted in support of the above -referenced application for your
review, comment, and/or action. Within calendar days, please take the following actions:
® Return a Completed APSARR Form.
'❑ Attach Well Construction Data Sheet.
❑ Attach Attachment B for Certification by the LAPCU.
❑ Issue an Attachment B Certification from the RO.*
* Remember that you will be responsible for coordinating site visits and reviews, as well as additional
information requests with other RO-APS representatives in order to prepare a complete Attachment B for
certification. Refer to the RPP SOP for additional detail.
When you receive this request form, please write your name and dates in the spaces below, make a copy
of this sheet, and return it to the appropriate Central Office -Aquifer Protection Section contact person
listed above.
M y o 8
RO-APS Reviewer: / Date:
FORM: APSARR 07/06 Page 1 of 1

i 1 '
AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION REGIONAL STAFF REPORT
Date: 09/04/68 County: Bladen
To: Aquifer Protection Section Central Office Permittee: Bladen County Water Distric
Central Office Reviewer: D. Goodrich Project Name: Toberinory Well ReUse
Regional Login- No: ?? Application No.:-WQ0033325
L GENERAL INFORMATION
1. This application is (check all that apply): ® New ❑ Renewal
El Minor Modification ❑Major Modification.
❑ Surface Irrigation ® Reuse ❑ Recycle ❑High Rate Infiltration ❑ Evaporation/Infiltration Lagoon
❑ Land Application of Residuals ❑'Attachment B included ❑ 503 regulated ® 503 exempt
❑ Distribution of.Residuals ❑ Surface Disposal
❑ Closed -loop Groundwater Remediation ❑ Other Injection Wells (including in situ remediation)
Was a site visit conducted in order to prepare.this report? Z Yes or ❑ No.
a. Date -of site visit: 04/09/08
b.. Person contacted 'and contact information: Randy Garner (Utilities Director)
c: Site visit conducted by- 'Jim Barber
d. Inspection Report Attached: ❑ Yes or ® No:
2. Is the following information entered into the BIMS record for this application correct?
® Yes or ❑ No. If no, please complete the following or indicate that it is correct on the current application.
For Treatment Facilities:
a. Location: Chicken Foot Road, NC (Bladen County
b. Driving Directions: Take Hwy 87 south from downtown Fayetteville and t0m.right onto Tobermory Road.
At the second paved road, turn right onto W. Bladen Union Church Rd. Turn left onto Chicken Foot Road
and og_approximatelyl',1.5 miles and water supply well w/elevated tank will be on the right. The fenced area
behind the elevated tank will comprise the reuse irrigation site of approximately.one acre.
C. USGS Quadrangle Map name and number: Saint Pauls, NC (H-23 S)Y)
d. Latitude: 34.81717516 Longitude:-78.88625939
e. Regulated- Activities / Type of ' Wastes (e.g., subdivision, food processing, municipal wastewater):
Reuse/Reclaimed water, generated fiom.the backwashing of filters used to remove iron from groundwater
distributed through the Bladen County Water System.
For Disposal and Injection Sites:
.(If multiple sites either indicate which sites the information applies to,` copy- and paste a new section into the
document for each site, 'or attach additional pages for each site)
a. Location(s):
b. Driving Directions:
c. USGS Quadrangle Map name and number:
d.' Latitude: Longitude:
e.
FORM: APSARRTobennoryWe11WQ00333255Sept2008.doc 1

AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION REGIONAL STAFF REPORT
H NEW AND MAJOR MODIFICATIONAPPLICATIONS (this section not needed for renewals or minor
modifications, skip to next section)
Description Of Waste(S) And Facilitieg
1. Please attach completed rating sheet. Facility Classification: Not Applicable
2. Are the new treatment facilities adequate for the type of waste and disposal system?
N Yes ❑ No ❑ N/A. If no; please explain:
3. Are the new site conditions (soils, topography, depth to water table, etc) consistent with what was reported by
the soil scientist and/or Professional Engineer? ® Yes ❑ No ❑ N/A. If no, please explain:
4. Does the application (maps, plans, etc.) represent the actual site (property lines, wells, surface drainage)?.®
Yes ❑ No ❑ N/A. If no, please explain:
5. Is the proposed residuals management plan adequate and/or acceptable to the Division. ® Yes ❑ No ❑
N/A. If no, please explain: Iron scale will be removed from the storage tank as necessary dried and
transported to the Bladen County transfer station for disposal.
6. Are the proposed application rates for new sites (hydraulic or nutrient) acceptable?
Z Yes ❑ No. ❑ N/A. If no, please -explain: No nutrients anticipated from the water suppler
Commercial fertilizer will need to be applied to the proposed Greg Norman -1 Bermudagrass to be grown for
turf replacement at county athletic fields.
7. Are the new treatment facilities or any new disposal sites located in a 100-year floodplain?
❑ Yes ® No ❑ N/A. If yes, please attach a map showing areas of 100-year floodplain and please explain
and recommend any -mitigative measures/special conditions in Part IV:
8. Are there any -buffer conflicts (new treatment facilities or new disposal sites)? ❑ Yes or N No. If yes, please
attach a mapshowing conflict areas or attach any new maps you have received from the applicant to be
incorporated into the permit:
9. Is proposed ' and/or existing groundwater monitoring ,program (number of wells, frequency of monitoring,
monitoring parameters, ' etc.) adequate? ❑ Yes ❑ No ® N/A. Attach map of existing monitoring well
network if applicable. Indicate the review and compliance boundaries. If No, explain and recommend any
;changes to the 'groundwater monitoring program:
10. For residuals, will seasonal or other restrictions be required? ❑ Yes ❑ No Z N/A If yes, attach list of sites
with restrictions (Certification B?)
IIZ RENEWAL AND MODIFICATIONAPPLICATIONS (use previous section for new or maior modification
systems)
Description Of Waste(S) And Facilities
FORM: APSARRTobermoryWe11W000333255Sept2008.doc 2

AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION REGIONAL STAFF REPORT
1. Are there appropriately certified ORCs for the facilities? ❑ Yes or ❑ No.
Operator in Charge: Certificate #:
Backup- Operator in Charge: Certificate #:
2. Is the design, maintenance and operation (e.g. adequate aeration, sludge wasting, sludge storage, effluent
storage, etc) of the treatment facilities adequate for the type of waste and disposal system? ❑ Yes or ❑ No.
If no, please explain:
3. Are the site conditions (soils, topography, depth to water table, etc) maintained appropriately and adequately
assimilating the waste? ❑ Yes or ❑ No. If no, please explain:
4. Has the site changed in any way that may affect permit (drainage added, new wells inside the compliance
boundary, new development, etc.)? If yes, please explain:
5. ' Is the residuals management plan for the facility adequate and/or acceptable to the Division?
❑ Yes or ❑ No. If no, please'explain:
6. Are the existing application rates (hydraulic or nutrient) still acceptable? ❑ Yes or ❑ No. If no, please
explain:
7. Is the existing groundwater monitoring program (number of wells, frequency of; monitoring, monitoring
parameters, etc.) adequate? ❑ Yes ❑ No ❑ N/A. Attach, map of existing monitoring well network if
applicable. Indicate the review and compliance boundaries. If No,explain and recommend any changes to the
groundwater monitoring program:
8. Will seasonal or other restrictions be required for added sites? .❑ Yes ❑ No ❑ N/A If yes, attach list of sites
with restrictions (Certification B?)
9. 'Are there any buffer conflicts. (treatment facilities or disposal sites)? ❑ Yes or ❑ No. If yes, please attach a
map showing conflict areas or attach any new maps you have received from the applicant to be incorporated
into the permit:
10. Is the description of the facilities, type and/or volume of waste(s) as'written in, the existing permit correct? ❑
Yes or ❑ No. If no, please explain:
11. Were monitoring wells properly constructed and located? ❑ Yes or ❑ No ❑ N/A. If no; please explain:
12. Has a review of all self -monitoring data been conducted (GW, NDNM and NDAR,as applicable)? ® Yes or
❑ No ❑ N/A. Please summarize any findings resulting from this review:
13. Check all that apply: ❑ No compliance issues; ❑ Notice(s) of violation within the last permit cycle; ❑
Current enforcement action(s) ❑ Currently under, SOC; ❑ Currently under JOC; ❑ Currently under
moratorium. If any items checked, please explain and attach any documents that may help clarify
answer/comments (such as NOV, NOD etc):
1.4. Have all compliance dates/conditions inthe existing permit, (SOC, JOC, etc.) been complied with? ❑ Yes
❑ No ❑ Not Determined ❑ N/A.. If no, please explain:
FORM: APSARRTobermoryWe11WQ00333255Sept2008.doc 3

AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION REGIONAL STAFF REPORT
15. Are there any issues related to'compliance/enforcement that should be resolved before issuing this permit? ❑
Yes or ❑ No ❑ N/A. If yes, please explain:
4

AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION REGIONAL STAFF REPORT
IV. INJECTION WELL PERMIT APPLICATIONS (Complete these two sections for all systems that use injection
wells, including closed -loop groundwater remediation effluent injection wells, in situ remediation injection wells, and heat
pump injection wells.)
Description Of Well(S) And Facilities — New, Renewal, And Modification
1. Type.of injection system:
❑ Heating/,cooling water return flow (5A7)
❑ Closed -loop heat pump system (5QM/5QW)
❑ In situ remediation (51)
❑ Closed -loop groundwater remediation effluent injection (5L/"Non-Discharge")
❑ Other (Specify:
2. Does system use same well for water source and injection? ❑ Yes ❑ No
3. Are there any potential pollution sources that may affect injection? ❑ Yes ❑ No
What is/are the pollution source(s)? . What is the distance of the injection well(s) from the pollution
source(s)? ft.
4. What is the minimum distance of proposed injection wells from the property -boundary? ft.
5. Quality of drainage at site: ❑ Good ❑ Adequate ❑ Poor
6., Flooding potential of site: ❑ Low ❑ Moderate ❑ High .
7. For groundwater remediation systems; is the proposed and/or existing groundwater monitoring program
(number of wells, frequency of monitoring,. monitoring parameters, etc.) adequate? ❑ Yes ❑ No. Attach
map of existing monitoring well network if applicable. If No, explain and recommend any changes to the
groundwater monitoring program:
8. Does the map presented represent the actual site (property lines, welds, surface drainage)? ❑ Yes *or ❑ No. If
no or no map, please attach a sketch of the site. 'Show property boundaries, buildings, wells, potential pollution
sources, roads, approximate scale, and north arrow.
Iniection Well Permit Renewal And Modification'Only:
1. For heat pump systems, are there any abnormalities in heat pump or injection well operation (e.g. turbid water,
failure to assimilate injected fluid, poor heating/cooling)?
❑ Yes ❑ No. If yes, explain:
2. ,For closed -loop heat pump systems, has system lost pressure or required make-up fluid since perinit issuance
or last inspection? ❑ Yes ❑ No. If yes, explain:
3. For renewal or modification of groundwater remediation permits (of any type), will
continued/additional/modified injections have an adverse impact on migration of the plume or management of
the contamination incident? ❑ Yes ❑ No. If yes, explain:
4. Drilling contractor: Name:
FORM: APSARRTobermoryWellWQ003'33255Sept2008.doc 5

AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION REGIONAL STAFF REPORT
Address:
Certification number:
5. Complete and attach Well Construction Data Sheet.
FORM: APSARRTobermoryWe11WQ00333255Sept2008.doc
6

AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION REGIONAL STAFF REPORT
V, EVALUATIONAND RECOMMENDATIONS
1. Provide any additional narrative regarding your review of the application.:
2. Attach Well Construction Data Sheet 'if needed information is available
3. Do you foresee -any problems with issuance/renewal of this permit? ❑ Yes Z No: If yes; please explain
briefly.
4. List any items that you would, like APS Central Office to obtain through an additional information request.
Make sure that you provide a reason for each item:
5. List specific Permit conditions that you recommend to be removed from the permit when issued. Make sure
that.you provide a reason for each condition:
Condition Reason
6. List specific special conditions or compliance schedules that you, recommend to be included iA the permit when
issued. Make sure that you provide a reason for each special condition:
VA
8
Condition Reason
Recommendation: ❑ Hold, pending receipt and review of additional information by regional office; ❑ Hold,
pending I review of draft permit by regional office; ❑ Issue upon. receipt of needed•additional information;
Issue; ❑ Deny. If deny,, please state reasons:
Signature of report preparer(s):
Signature of APS regional supervisor: 2 b2R Q77d 1
Date: 14,0s
ADDITIONAL REGIONAL STAFF REVIEW ITEMS
It is recommended that the subject permit be issued. The use -of the backwash water in irrijzating turfgrass, for
athletic field repairs and re -sodding is a excellent use and will save money on maintanence of athletic fields.
FORM: APSARRTobennoryWe11WQ00333255Sept2008.doc 7

AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION REGIONAL STAFF REPORT'',,
The iron content of the filtered backwash water will be a benefit to the turf�rass to be grown. Commercial
fertilizer will need to be applied as needed for optimum turfgrass growth.
FORM: APSARRTobermoryWel1WQ00333255Sept2008.doe 8

O
£ Save trees. Go green"
G
t Download Goggle Maps forinobile
Text maps to 45b45 3

v
s'
m�•
r
N&R sii; TIAL WELL CONSTRUCTION RECORD
North Carolina DeMtmcnt of Environlnent'aiid Natural Resources Division of �WJater Quality
WELL'CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATION # 2111` .
1. WELL CONTRACTOR:
Thomas Bill
Well Contractor (Individual),Name-
8111's Well Drilling Co,
Well Contractor Company Nierne
STREET ADDRESS 800 McArthur Rd
Fayetteville, NC 28311
City or Torun State Zip Code
91( 0 , 488-3740 -
Area code- Phone number
2 WELL INFORMATION:
SITE. WELL ID #(If applicable)
STATE WELL PERMIT#(ifapplicable) WS06-M978
DWQ or OTHER PERMIT. #(if applicable)
WELL USE (Check Applicable Box) Monitoring q Municlpal/PublicEl
Industrial/Commercial O Agricuitural p Recovery E3 Injection Ei
Irrigationp otherp (list use)
DATE DRILLED 8-14-06
TIME COMPLETED 3:00 AM o pM m
3..WELL LOCATION:
CITY; TaTheel COUNTY Bladen
Chicken Foot Road - To; tory - We119
(Street Name, Numbers, Community, Subdivision, Lot No., Parcel, Zip Code)
TOPOGRAPHIC I LAND SETTING:
❑Slope t Valley ®Flat E]Ridge O Other
(chock appropriate box)
LATITUDE _ May bo in degrees,
minutes, scionds or
LONGITUDE ' iria dedmelformat
Latitude/longitude Source: EiGPS oTopographic nap
(location ofwell must be shown on a USGS topo map and
attached to this form if not using GPS) .
4. FACILITY- la the name of the butinees where the well Is located.
FACILITY ID #(it applicable)
NAME OF FACILITY
STREET ADDRESS
City, or Town State .. Zip Code
CONTACT PERSON
13laden Co. Water District
MAILING ADDRESS 272 Smith Cr
Elizabethtown NC . • 26337
City or Tcwli State Zip Code .
91t p .-'662-6996
Area code - Phone number
6. WELL DETAILS:
a. TOTAL DEPTH,
b.. DOES WELL•REPLACE EXISTING WELL? YES®. NO L7 , -
a -WATER LEVEL Below Top of Casing; 15 FT.
(Use'+' if.Above Top of Casing)
d. TOP OF CASING IS 3 � .fT. Above Land Surface
*Top of casing terminated atfor beldW land surface May require
avedanca in accordanciiWth.l5A NCAC 2C.0118.
e. YIELD (gpm);. Soo METHOD OF TEST Pumping.,
L DISINFECTION: Type HTN- _ ....A Amount 5lbs
9 WATERZONES (depth);
Frotn61 To 91 From . To '- !
From ToFrom To
From Tc From To.
6...CASING:; Thickness/
' Depth
12jamet 'or -.3Ight s eeida
+3
From To - : Ft>
From 91 . To.96 Ft.12' .375 steel
From _ To Ft
7. GROUT.. , Depth Material Method
From Q, T . 50 Ft, cement .PumPecf
Fthm To .. Ft -
From To Ft
8: SCREEN: Depth Diameter SlotSke Material
Frond! To 91 ' F 12t-_ -' tn: 50 jn. S. S: .
From . To Ft.,, Iln. In.
Frarn Ta Ff._Jn: ' in,
9. SANDIGRAVEL PACK:
Depth Size: Material
From 0 To 10D - Ft. #4 gravel..
From To
Front �To Ft.,
10. DRILLING LOS
From To Formation Description
0. 1 tontoll -
1 - 9 1 red sandy clay.,
9 -15 - . red and white clay . .
15 - 26 white and Pink sand. _
26 - 33 white tiny
33 -.51 white sand'
61 - ST Clay. -
63 -1. gray sand and wood
91-110. _gray day
y11. REMARKS: -
I DO HEREBY CERTiFYTHATTHIS WELL WAS ODNSTRUCTED IWACCORDANCE WITH
16A NCAC 2C, WELL CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS, AND THAT A COPY OFTHIS
RECORD 5 EEN PRO-VIDEDTOTHE WELL OWNER.
SIGNATURE OF CERTIFIED WELL CONTRACTOR. DATE
�- l f - --+ram - i i
Submit the original to the Division of Water Quality within 30 days. Ann: Information Mgt., `
11417 Mail Service Center— Raleigh, NC 27699-1617 Phone No. [phone] ext-566. Farm GW-1bRev, 7105

Soil Map—Bladen County, North Carolina
(Bladen: Tobermory well site)
bu 0aczUu basegu
d
60
N Meters
A 0 35 70 140 210
Feet
0 150 300 600 900
USDA Natural Resources Web Soil Survey 2.0 4/7/2008
50 Conservation Service National Cooperative Soil Survey Page 1 of 3

r
Soil Map—Bladen County, North Carolina Bladen: Tobermory well site
Map Unit Legend
BuA
Bu
Totals for Area of Interest (AOI)
12.9
100.0%
USDA Natural Resources Web Soil Survey 2.0 4/7/2008
Conservation Service National Cooperative Soil Survey Page 3 of 3

t-
Information - 1,
0 Map Unit Description
Bladen County, -North Carolina Version date:-1/18/2007 11:54:30 AM
BuA—Butters fine sand, 0 to 2 p6r.c6nt slopes
Map Unit Setting
Elevation: 80 to 330 feet
Mean annual precipitation.: 38 to 55 inches
-Mean annual air temperature: 59 to 70 degrees F
Frost -free period: 210 to.,265 days
Map Unit Composition
Butters and similar soils, 80 percent
Description of,Butters.-
Setting
Landform.: Broad interstrearn divides on'marine terraces, flats on marine terraces
Down -slope shape,- Linear
Across -slope'shape: Linear
Parent material: Sandy and loamy. Marine deposits and/or fluviomarine deposits
Properties and qualities
Slope: 0 to 2 percent
Depth to restrictive -feature: More than 80 inches
Drainage class: Well drained
Capacity of the most ' limiting layer to transmit water (Ksat): Moderately high -to high
(0.57 to 1.98 in/hr)
Depth to water table: About 48 to 60 inche's
Frequency of flooding: None
Frequency of ponding: None
Available water capacity-. Low (about 4.9 inches)
Interpretive groups
Land capability, (nonirrigated):_ 2s
Typical profile
0 to 11 inches: Fine sand
11 to 18 inches: -Fine sand
18 to 29'inches: Fine sandy loam
29 to 48 inches: Loamy fine sand
48 to 80 inches: Fine sandy loam

162
Soil Survey
TABLE 13.--ENGINEERING INDEX PROPERTIES
[The symbol < means less than. Absence of an entry indicates that data were not .estimated. Some soils may
have Unified classifications and USDA textures in addition to those shown. In general, the dominant
classifications and textures are shown]
Map symbol and Depth
soil name !
Tn
AaA--------------- i
Altavista. !
At---------------'i
Augusta
AUA --------------
Autryville
AyB--------------
Aycock
BnB --------------
Blanton
ciassiticaLion j rULl:C11L
USDA texture !ifi, 1 I sieve
Unified AASHTO 1--T --- r--M-
0-7 I,Fine sandy.loam lML, CL-ML,IA-4, A-2 I95-100190-100I
SM, SM-SC! !" !
I
7-39 !Clay loam, sandy ICL, CL=ML,!A-4, A-6, I95-100195-1001
! clay loam, loam.! SC,.SM-SCI A-7 ! !
39-70 !Variable---------! --- ! --- --- ---
I I �
I
0-8 !Sandy loam ------- ISM, SM-SC,LA-2, A-4 I90-100l75-100i
1 ! ML ! ! 1
1
8-34 (Sandy clay loam, ICL, CL-ML !A-4, A-6, 190-100175-100
clay loam, loam.! ! A-7
34-70 !Loamy sand, sand.lSP-SM, SM !A-2, A-3 I90-100I75-100
I
0-24 !Loamy sand ------- ISP-SM, SM !A-2, A-3 i 100 ! 100
24-38 !Sandy loam, sandylSM !A-2 i 100 ! 100
! clay loam, fine ! ! ! !
' nd loam ! 1 1
65-99 135-60
I
I
60-99 145-75
I
,
1
I
50-98 I30-60
I
75-100151-80
1
I
75-1001 5-20
i I
I
'50-1001 5-20
150-100115-30
;rias-
Liquid Iticity
limit ;index
Pct ,
I
I
<23 !NP-7
I
I
20-45 ! 5-28
1
38-50 !Sand, foamy sand,!SP-SM, SM IA-2, A-3 ! 100 ! 100 I50-100I 5-20 1
! I loamy fine sand.! ! ! ! ! ! !
! 50-62 !Sandy loam, sandylSM, SC, !A-2, A-4 ! 100 ! 100 I60-100120-49 I
! l clay loam, fine ! SM-SC ! ! ! ! !
! ! sandy loam.
! 0-10 !Very•fine sandy IML, CL=ML,IA-4 1 100 I95-100180-100151-80 !
loam. ! CL ! ! ! ! ! !
! 10-75 !Clay loam, silty !CL !A-4, A-6, I.100 195-100I90-100160-90 !
! I clay loam, loam.! i A-7 ! ! ! !
I I i
' 0-60 !Sand ----------- --lSP-SM, SM !A-3, A-2-41 100 190-100I65-1001 5-20
! 60-83 !Sandy clay loam, lSC, SM-SC,lA-4, ! 100 !95-100l69-96 l25-50
sandy loam fine! SM ! A-2-4, ! ! ! !
! ! sandy loam. ! ! A-2-6, ! ! ! !
I ! ! A-6
! !-----=--'SP-SM SM 'A-2 A-3 ! 100 I95-100150-95 1 5-20
BuA-------------- I 0-18 ,Fine sand , r I r
Butters ! 18-29 !Sandy loam, fine lSM, SM-SC !A-2, A-4 ! 100 I95-100l60-98 I15-40
� � 1 I I I
! 'I sandy loam. , I I I ' I
! 29-48 !Loamy sand, loamylSP, SP-SM,!A-2, A-3' !. 100 195-100150-75 ! 3-20
I' fine sand, sand.! SM ! ! i • i !
! 48-70 !Sandy loam, sandylSM, SM-SC,!A-2, A-4, ! 100 I95-100I60-85 125-49
I ' 1 loam fine ' SC I A-6 ! i
i ! c ay
sandy loam.
! I
' 0-10 (Loam ------------- lCL !A-6, A-7-6198-1001
By---------------� clay loam, lCL, CH 'IA-7-5, I98-100'
Byars ! 10-70 !Clay, �
! I sandy clay. I ! A-7-6, !
1 I ! ! A-6 I
------I 0-12 !Loam -lML, CL-ML,IA-4, A-6 ! 100
Ca----=---- i ! CL ! I
Cape Fear ! !
l 12-46 !Clay loam, clay, IML, CL, !A-7 ! 100
i I silty.clay. I MH, CH ! I
! 46-60 (Sand, loamy sand.ISP-SM, SM !A-2, A-3 190-100
------ ------
Ce--------- ; 0-6 (Sand------- lSP, SP-SM !A-3 ! 100
CentenaryI 6-58 (Sand, fine sand, ISP-SM, SP,IA-3, A-2-4I 100
I loamy sand. I SM ! i
58-80 !Sand, fine sand, ISP, SP-SM,IA-3, A-2-4I 100
i I loamy sand. ! SM
98-100
98-100
90-100
90-100
95-100185-101
I
I
95-100190-101
I
i
75-100I75-10
' 100 I60-90
' 100 160-90
! i
1 100 160-90
-<25 INP-7
I
20-45 l 5-25
<25
<3 0
<25
22-49
12-45
NP
NP
NP-3
i
� NP
i
i
i
!NP-10
I
1
I
I
I ,
I
!NP-10
1 �
8-30 i
I j
I
I
! NP
! 3-22 I
i
I
I
' NP
<30 INP-7
I
I
I NP
1
.15-35 !NP=15
1170-95 ! 32-50 111-23
60-95 ! 39-75 117-42
60-90 !
20-40-! 3-15
60-85 I.41-65
1
115-35
I
I
5-20 !
1
--- ! NP
4-10 !
--- ! NP .
4-20
; --- ! NP
3-20
!
--- ! NP
! i

169
Bladen County, North Carolina
TABLE 14.--PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES OF THE SOILS
[The symbol < means less than; >"-means more than. Entries under "Erosion factors--T" apply to the entire
profile. Entries under "Organic matter" apply only to the surface layer. Absence of an entry
indicates that data were not available -or were not estimated]
Map symbol and !Depth! Clay
soil name
AaA-------------- i
Altavista !
1
0-7
7-39
39-70
10-24
18_35
At---------------0-8 ! 5-20
Augusta ! 8-341 20-35
!34-701 2-10
AuA------------- ! 0-241
Autryville 124-381
138-50!
150-62!
---i !,
AyB---------=- ' 0-10!
Aycock 110-751
BnB-------------- ! 0-601
Blanton 1,60-831
BuA-------------- ! 0-181
Butters 118-291'
129-481
148-70!
Y --------! 0-10!
By
Byars 110-70!
Ca= -------------- ', 0-121
Cape Fear 112-461
146-60!
-� i
Ce
Centenary ! 6-581
158-801-
Ch:
Chewacla-------- ! 0-131
113-80!
Chastain--------! 0-5 ',
' 5-80!
0-5 !
Congaree ! 5-421
142-90!
Co---------------! 0-111
Coxville 111-701
Cr---------------' 0=321
Croatan '32-451
145-62
Moist
bulk
density
9 cc
1.30-1.50
1.30_1.50
Permeability !Available! Soil
' water !reaction
i
!capacity !
r., hr I In in i pH
2.0-6.0
0.6_2.0
1.40-1..701 2.0-6.0
11.35-1.601 '0.6-2.0
11.50-1.701. 6.0-2.0
2-10. 11.60-1.701 >6.0
10=25 11.40-1.6011 2.0-6.0
2-8 11.60-1.701 >6.0
10-35 11.40-1.601 0.6-2.0
i
4-15 11.30-1.601 2.0-6.0
18-35 11.30-1.601, 0.2-2.0
1 1
i 1
1-7 11.30-1.601 6.0-20
12-30 1.60-1.70i 0.6-2.0
i
2-8 1,1.50-1.701 6.0-20
10-20 1'1.40-1.601 ' 2.0-6.0
1-10 11.50-1.70! 6.0-20
10-25 11.30-1.50, 0.6-2.0
i
15-35. 11.20-1.501 0.6.-2.0
35-45 11.30-1.601, 0.06-0.2
5-15 11.36-1.501 0.6-6.0
35-60 11.25-1.401 0.06-0.2
2-10 11.50-1.70� 6.0-20
i
1-8 11.40-1.601 6.0-20
1-8 11.40-1.601 6.0-20
1-10 11.50-1.701 2.0-6.0
i
10-27 11.30-1.601 0.6-2.0
18-35 11.30-1.501 0.6-2.0
i
15-35 11.20-1.401 0.2-0.6
35-60 11.30-1.50! 0.06-0.2
10-25.
18_35
5-27
35-60
10-35
11.20-1.401 0.6-2.0
11.20_1.501 0.6_2.0
11.45-1.651 0.6-2.0
11.25-1.45� 0.2-0.6
i
10.40-0.651 0.06-6.0
11.40-1.601 0.2-2.0
Shrink -swell ! factors !Organic
potential !-!- ! matter
K ! T !
1.12-0.2014.5-6.0 !Low ---------- l0.24! 5
).12-0.2014.5-6.0 !Low ---------- 10.24l,
l-------------l----!
! !
).10-0.15!4.5-6.0 !Low ----------l0.24i 0.201 4
).12-0.18!4.5-6.0 !Low----------l0.101
'--------
).03-0.10l4.5-6.0 ,Low- !
i
i
).04-0.0914.5-6.5 !Low----------l0•TO! 5
0.08-0.13l4.5=5.5 !Low----------l0.10!
0.03-0.0814.5-5.5 'Low ----------'0.1001
0.10-0.1514.5-5.5 !Low--------- ! '
i
0.15-0.201'4.5-6.0 !Low ---------- 10.371 5
.0.15-0.2014.5-5.5 !Low----- --10.431
0.03-0.07114.5-6.0 !Low ----------- 0.10! 5
Q.10-0.1514.5-5.5 !Low ---------- 10.201
•0.03-0.06l4.5-5.5 !Low- ----------
10.101 5
0.10-0.14!4.5-5.5 !Low----------10.151
l0.03-0.0814.5-6.5 !Low----------10.17!
10.10-0.1514.5-5.5 !Low--------- ! �
10.15-0.2013.6-5.5 !Low ---------- 10.28! 5
10.14-0.1813.6-5.5 ',Moderate ----- 10.32!
i
l0.15-0.2214.5-6.5,!Low---------- 10.151 5
10.12-0.2214.5-6.0 !Moderate----_12 1
10.03'-0.1014.5-6.0 !Low--------- 0.
! 1
'0.03-0.0814.5-6.5 !Low---------0.10! 5
l
10.03-0.0514.5-6.0 !Low---------- l10.10!
10.03-0.10l4.5-6.0 !Low----------
10 10!
0.15-0.2414.5-6.5 'Low ---------- l0.28, 5
0.15-0.24l4.5-6.5''Low`------- 10.32
i
0.12-0.1814.5-6.0 !Moderate ----- 10.32' '5
0.12-0.161"4.5-6.0 jModerate ----- 10.37!
i
i
0.12-0.2014.5-7.3 !Low ---------- 10.37! 5
0.12-0.2014.5-7.3 !Low ---------- 10.371
--- '• --- I--=----------l-- -i
0.12-0.171113.6-5.5 ;Low ---- ------ !0.24, 5
0.14-0.1813.6-5.5 IModerate---=-10.321
0.35-0.45!
<4.5 !Low----------!----l---
0.12-0.2013.6-6.5 !Low-- -------- 10.24!
'------------- l
----!
i
.5-3
.5-2
.5-1
1-4
.5-1
.5-2
2-9
5-15
<1
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
' 1-4
i
i
i
i
' 2-6
i
i
i
i
i
' <4
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
' 2-4
i
i
i
i
25-60

174
TABLE 15.--SOIL AND WATER FEATURES
Soil Survey
["Flooding" and "water table" and terms such as "rare," "brief," "apparent," and "perched" are explained in
the text. The symbol > means more than. Absence of an entry -indicates that the feature is not a
concern or that data were not estimated]
Map symbol and iHydrologicl
soil name group I -Frequency
I
I
--------'
AaA------- �
C
Altavista 1
I
C
Augusta !
AuA---------------- 1
A
Autryville !
i
AyB--------------- 1
B
Aycock
i
BnB---------------i
A
Blanton 1
I
BuA---------------i
B
Butters I
1
i
By------- '
I
D
Byars
I
Ca -------'
D
Cape Fear
I
Ce -------'
A
Centenary
I
Ch: 1
Chewacla---------�
C
Chastain ----- ----i
D
I
'
BCn----------------I
Congaree
I
'
I
DCo----------------
Coxville
I
Cr---------------- I
D
Croatan
I
CT-------------, --�
D
Croatan 1
I
DgA------- ----',---�
C
Dogue !
DO----------------I
D
Dorovan
DDr----------------,
Dunbar
-I
Duplin
Duration
� I I
� � I
I ' �
' ---
Rare--------; �
I i !
I I �
;Rare--------1
I I i
I
I ' --- !
,None--------
II
I
I
I
' --- !
None-------'! I
i
! !
' --- '
!None--------1 I
I
I
i
'!None--------'!, ---
I i
I '
I �
' ---
lNone--------!
I
I I
I
i
' ---
!Rare --------!
' I
' 1
I
1
' ---
lNone--------!
I �
' I
1 �
' I
Frequent---- Brief-----
( �
(Frequent ---- !Very long
I I
� I
IFrequent---- ;Brief----
' I
� I
I I.
I
!None -------- I
' I
I I
I
I
' ---
(Rare -------- 1
I I
I I
I I
I
Frequent---- Brief to
i long
I,
'
(Rare-------- 11 ---
I 1
� I
1 �
i
(Frequent ---- ;Very lonc
' I
' I
I I
i
' ---
1None--------1
I �
I I
I
I '
' ---
lNone--------1
' I
I �
High water table____, Risk of corrosion
I
Months ; Depth i Kind Months Uncoated ;Concrete
steel
--- 11.5-2.5lApparent!Dec-MariModbrate !Moderate.
I
-- 11.0-2.OlApparent!Jan-MaylHigh-----(Moderate.
I I
--- I4.0-6.OIApparentlJan-AprlLow ------ (High.
I
1
i
1 ! �
---14.0-6.OIApparent'IJan-Apr!Moderate IHigh.
1
I ! !
15.0-6.OIPerched ;Dec-MarlHigh-----;High.
-- I 1 I ! !
--- ' I ' 1
I4.0-5.OIApparentlJan-MarlLow------;Moderate.
I � 1
� I
I +1-1..OlApparentINov-AprlHigh----- IHigh.
I •
I
I
I �
. I
1
' 0-1 5IApparentlDec-AprlHigh----- High.
I
I
1 ! !
I
I
I
1 ! ! I
1 ' arentlDec-MarlModerate (High.
' --- 13.5-5.OlApp
I
i
! !
1 Nov -Apr 10.5-1.5lApparentlNov-AprlHigh----- IModerate.
I
� I 1
l Nov -Apr ', 0-1.0'IApparentlNov-MaylHigh-= --- !High.
I
� Nov=Apr 12.5-4.OlApp arentINov-AprlModerate (Moderate.
I I 1
' 0-1.5'IApparentlNov-AprlHigh-----IHigh.
I � I
! +1-1.OIApparent Nov-JulIHigh----- High.
1
Jan -Dec l 0-1.01Apparent!Dec-MaylHigh ----- IHigh:
I 1 I I
I
I � I
1
--- 11.5-3.0!Apparent!Jan-MarlHigh ----- 'High.
I I ' ! ! '
I
� � 1
I '
I
[.l Jan -Dec !+1-0.5lApparentlJan-DeclHigh----- High.
I
',High.
--- 11.0-2.5liApparentiNov-MaylHigh-----
I !
1 I I
I
I
--- -AprlHigh-----IHigh.
;2.0-3.OlApparentlDec
I 1 I I 1 1 1
� I

Soil Map—Bladen County, North Carolina
(Bladen: Tobermory well site)
MAP LEGEND
MAP INFORMATION
Area of Interest (AOI)
M
VeryStony Spot
Original soil survey map sheets were prepared at publication scale.
Area of Interest (AD[)
Viewing scale and printing scale, however, may vary from the
+p
Wet Spot
original. Please rely on the bar scale on each map sheet for proper
Soils
i
Other
map measurements.
Soil Map Units
Special. Line Features
Source of Map: Natural Resources Conservation Service
Special
Point Features
-
Gully
Web Soil Survey URL http://Websoilsurvey.nres.usda.gov
s•y
Blowout
Coordinate System: -UTM Zone 17N
r
Short Steep Slope .
®
. Borrow Pit
This product is generated from the USDA-NRCS certified data as of
Other
the version date(s) listed below.
X
Clay Spot
Political Features . _
Soil Survey Area: Bladen County, North Carolina
Closed Depression
Municipalities
Survey Area Data: Version 11, Jan 18, 2007
Gravel Pit -
0
Cities
Date(s) aerial images were photographed: 3/4/1999
Gravelly Spot
0
Urban Areas
The orthophoto or other base map on which the soil lines were
g
Landfill
water Features
compiled and digitized probably differs from the background
{ (
oceans
imagery disr played on these maps. As a result, some minor
Lava Flow
of map unit boundaries maybe evident.
Marsh
Streams and Canals
,R
Mine or Quarry
Transportation
.
Rails
p
Miscellaneous Water
Roads
p
Perennial Water
oW
Interstate Highways'
u
Rock Outcrop
US Routes
+
Saline Spot
, State Highways
Sandy Spot
Local Roads
Severely Eroded Spot
Other Roads
{�.
Sinkhole
Slide or Slip
y(
Sodic Spot
Spoil Area
Stony Spot
USDA Natural Resources Web Soil Survey 2.0 4/7/2008
'iiiiiiiik Conservation Service National Cooperative Soil Survey Page 2 of 3

1
y
m �iPl$.1"4 4
WQ0033325: Tobermory well
L � 4F1Rh�, �sid r
i
..��; • I kto-r rid � ..,
-�- &n�hrntilMa _
�..•���R
t*�FG�S �.
- �`t453 ��!` 4�Pn��,
rTth51
,Trap
S •"
Ott e> s and $trtam3`
®'6th Ttrrrlo-'W juliAkvlis;
■ <`.F►iiF s, Gnrr►rknd F41k is, F.estr w s and. kn r:s
ra •`" : ` ?
, i • hiersfalc J air,
.
,Filth -
u>uttF, n �; . Gaas�rl &tilrrtr Ftsaurt< :
,
.:;fIC highuis,;;

Draft of the Additional Information Request to Bladen County WQO...
Subject: Draft of the Additional Information Request to Bladen County WQ0033325
From: David Goodrich <[e-mail]>
Date: Wed, 20 Aug 2008 07:58:37 -0400
To: Jim Barber <[e-mail]>, ART BARNHARDT <[e-mail]>
Art and Jim,
I am attaching my draft of the additional information request letter to Bladen
County.
Please make whatever changes you see fit, and send the revised version back to me.
Also, if you think of more information we need from them, it's OK if you add that,
too.
Things are going to be changing around here,, as we learned the other day that Kim
Colson is transferring to Construction Grants and Loans (DWQ), and there is no word
yet on who might be taking his place.
David
Content -Type: application/msword
Additional Informationl WQ0033325.doc'
Content -Encoding: base64
1 of 1 8/20/2008 10:06 AM

0�0� W ATF9QG Michael F. Easley, Governor
William G. Ross Jr., Secretary
North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Coleen H. Sullins, Director
Division of Water Quality
August 20, 2008
Mr. Randy Garner, Director of Water District
Bladen County Water District
550 Smith Circle
Elizabethtown, NC 28337
Subject: Permit Application No. WQ0033325
Bladen County Water District Reuse System
Iron Filter Backwash from Tobermory Well (Well #9)
Bladen County
Dear Mr. Garner:
The Aquifer Protection Section is in receipt of your application to obtain a reuse system permit for the disposal of iron
filter backwash water from the Tobermory Well in Bladen County. Additional information is required before we may
continue our review. Please address the following items no later than September 20, 2008:
1. Drawing G-3 in your submittal. package, entitled "Proposed Well Site Plan",. indicates a wetted area of
approximately 0.18 acres, whereas the wetted area indicated on Page D-1 of the Soil. Scientist's
Evaluation is 0.72 acres. Please explain.
2. Any proposed reuse system must conform to the "beneficial use" requirement of the regulations. The
plans submitted indicate the establishment of a rotary spray system that does not appear to meet this
requirement. Scenarios that would meet this requirement include the watering of ornamental vegetation
(shrubbery, red tips, etc.) and watering of sprig rye grass for transplant to other properties owned by
the County. Please submit plans for a revised spray system to the following address:
NCDENR-DWQ
Aquifer Protection Section
1636 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, NC 27699-1636
Please be aware that you are responsible for meeting all requirements set forth in North Carolina rules and
regulations. Any oversights that occurred in the review of the subject application package are still the
responsibility of the applicant. In addition, any omissions made in responding to the above items may result in
future requests for additional information.
Please reference the subject application number when providing the requested information. Please note that
failure to provide this additional information on or before the above requested date may result in your application
being returned as incomplete.
If you have any questions regarding this request, please do not hesitate to contact me at [phone]. You may
also check the future status of this project online at htt2://h2o.enr.state.nc.us/biins/Reports/reportsPermits.htm1.
Thank you for your cooperation.
Sincerely,
cc: Adam Kiker, Hobbs, Upchurch and Associates
APS Central Files
Fayetteville Regional Office, Aquifer Protection Section
Aquifer Protection Section 1636 Mail Service Center
Internet: www.ncwaterquality.ora Location: 2728 Capital Boulevard
An Equal Opportunity/Affirmative Action Employer— 50% Recycled/10% Post Consumer Paper
David Goodrich
Hydrogeologist
North Carolina
vVahma!!y
Raleigh, NC 27699-1636 Telephone: [phone]
Raleigh, NC 27604 Fax 1: [phone]
Fax 2: [phone]
Customer Service: [phone]

w
PROPERTY LINE
�— - R--- -- -----R--- -- -- -- -R•
I�— x=%—%=•X—%——"—x—x—x—x—% x—%—x—%—%— —X—X-- x—X—%—%—x i x—x—x—x—x—x—x—%—%—%—x—%—x—
II // x
li PROPOSED SECURITY I
FENCE RELOCATION %
II i
i
EXIST.
X PRO OSED o
IRRI TION /
A EA 1 i ------ 1
� \ PROPOSED 1" � x i
/ DSO' \ SPRINKLER HEAD -' 4
EXfTER ELEVATED
ATER STORAGE TANKI ��; � �•�
x
I i
Y--- EXISTING ! �
i
1 I x 12'X6" M.J. TEE
1 I 12 ' M.J. G.V. i
I I I 6" M.J. G.V.
------------
\ / x CHEM. FEED VAULT
NO. 2 SEE DETAIL "C"
\ A�x SHEET G-7
x
x �
PROPOSED 1-1 2" SCH.
� I �`�'" x 80 PVC IRRIGATION LINE
//+ � BURY 18' BELOW GRADE
-x-x- --x _ %!x- •x^�X X-X X _%_ X-- -x-%-x x- _ x-x-xr x-X-%X�x-x-X-x-x-x _ x-%-x_ x-x-x-x
--R--- -- -R - - - -
PROPERTY LINE
0.
411
rr //�� CC / PROPOSEC
!-ENC� /�REA Z�/ }( /9g� 3!J (o(JI) F!2 = �. 1 FiC. SCALE: 1" = 2
pp NOTES:
A-PP)Ro x W �TZ_!� GR��14(�-E �. C/�,4G 0. �7A C- — �. %�,4C MINALL. COVER SITE IPI
2. ALL CHEMICAI
BURIED W/ .

\ \ REVISIONS
5YM. DESCRIPTION DATE BY
\\ \ REVISED ANNOTATION 5/291081 HCF
\ \ \ Z
\ \ O
U
\A` Z
\ O
\\ LL.
\ \ J Z
\\ \ 0
\ \ z
SCALE IN FEET Q
10 0 20 _J
+\ \\ \ Z
EXIST. TOBERMORY \ \+\ \\ \
WELL HEAD + \
EXIST. 12" MJ 45• EXISTING WELL HOUSE \\ EXISTING \
BEND (TYP) �.F 6" PVC W.M.
EXIST 12')C6" M.J. TEE,
12" M.J. G.V., '•;` \ \ \
90' BEND EXIST. 12'X6" \ EXISTING
M.J. REDUCER + 6" PVC W.M.
-MOVE 8" PLUG ---- ------j--------------------- ---1 -f „ \ \ \
STALL 8"X6" REDUCER REMOVE EXIST. 6 X6TEE\
T+\ \
""
DNNECT TO 8' GATE VALVE ° ° i �\ \
� INSTALL EXIST. 6" 90' +
BEND TO BE REUSED , EXIST. 6 AJ 45' \
REMOVE EXIST. 6" PIPE I +� BEND TYP
G.'enP i REMOVE AND REUSE 1 + \ \ \
\c\\�;P�Q EXIST. 6" 90' BEND
PROPOSED 6" 45' MJ BEND
PROPOSED 6" D.I. �
BACKWASH WATER
EXIST PROPOSED 6" UNFILTERED WATER
. I \
x \ \ \
x
fERED WATER I'. PROPOSED IRON REMOVAL x \
OPOSED CHEM. PRESSURE FILTERS -- — — — — — —7D LINES IN \ \\
PVC CONDUIT I SEE SHEET G-4 FOR PROPOSED \ k
FILTER AND PIPING DETAILS \ '
_M. FEED VAULT
1 SEE DETAIL "C' PROPOSED 6" D.I.
_ET G-7 I BACKWASH WASTEWATER \
PROPOSED 10,000 GAL I x—x—x—x—x—X-\ \
PE STORAGE TANK +
EXISTING GRAVEL ACCESS
— J DRIVE ANO PARKING AREA + \
PROPOSED 3HP IRRIGATION PUMP IN SIMPLE
WOOD FRAMED METAL ROOFED FULL ENCLOSURE �+ \
FASTENED TO SLAB (ALLOW FOR TILT -OFF FOR �\ \
MAINTENANCE ACCESS) + \
—x = x-1R—x—x—x—x—x—x�x—x—x—x—x—x—x = x—x—x— x—x—x—FL -x—x—x = x—x—x—x—x—x—x _x—x� \
TEMPORARY BENCHMARK \
NIR - ELEV. 150.65 \ \
f
:LL SITE PLAN
[ALL BE BURIED W/ 3'
i OTHERWISE NOTED.
I CONDUITS SHALL BE
COVER.
z
Q
w
0
w
IL
w
CL
U_
~ LL
❑ O U)~///
I..L. LL. _J
Lu J
K
a
I- Q LL
F
O�
°z
F- W 0
z
Z w �
Z) Z w
o
z
O
<
� O
LL h
❑
Q
m
APRIL 2008
s .
APK
rm-
GER
EC o:
DTU
vue AS
SHOWN
WE[1 NM
G-3

Re: Bladen County Water District Iron Filter Backwash WQ0033325
0
Subject: Re: Bladen County Water District Iron Filter Backwash' VWQ0033325
From: David Goodrich <[e-mail]>
Date: Thu, 14 Aug 2008 08:47:47 -0400
To: Art Barnhardt <[e-mail]>
CC: Jim Barber <[e-mail]>, [e-mail]
Art Barnhardt wrote:
We have to do what the rules say. However, this does not seem to be an issue
that deserves a Hydro Investigation based on the facts that I am aware of (which
might not be enough). I recommend keeping the application process as simple as
possible within the rules. Isn't this a reuse permit? Is there an issue with
the design engineer not knowing the subject matter well enough to make the best
design and decisions for his client?
ArtB.
David Goodrich wrote:
Art and Jim,
We have received the submittal package for a.proposed surface irrigation.
system, as described by Adam Kiker during our recent teleconference call from
the APS Central Office, and have sent you one of the copies. It should be
arriving at the FRO very soon.
It seems to me that the iron filter backwash water qualifies as a form of
"industrial waste" (as defined in the definitions portion of the 2T Rules),
and if it does, this means that a hydrogeologic investigation/description will
be required, as per NCAC 02T .0905(e) (page 41). Let me know if you -concur,
and I will prepare a letter requesting it along with any other additional
information we need. I am reluctant to discuss the project until we are
furnished with a "complete" application package.
Thank you.
David
Art and Jim,
Although this is being marketed as a reuse system, we still require groundwater
?j mounding analysis if the seasonal high water table is within six feet of the ground
surface. I don't know if this is the case.
After you have had an opportunity to examine the application package I have sent
over,
I'd like us to set up an "internal" conference call be myself, Jon Risgaard,
and you guys to discuss whether or not we need more information, whether or not the
system they are proposing actually qualifies as a reuse system, whether or not we
need to have them perform a hydro investigation, and any other issues or concerns we
might have.
David
1 of 1 8/14/2008 11:51 AM

[Fwd-. Bladen County] >t
sal' /
Subject: [Fwd: Bladen County]
From: David. Goedr'ich <[e-mail]>
Date: Fri, 08' Aug 2008.08:02:24 -0400
To: Jim Barber <[e-mail]>, ART BARNHARDT <[e-mail]>
Subject: Bladen County
From: "Adam Kiker" <[e-mail]>
Date: Fri, 8 Aug 2008 0803.:24 -0400
To: "David Goodrich" <David. Goodrich@NCMail. net>
David
I overnighted you the application package for Bladen County yesterday for delivery -today. Please make sure it
doesn't get returned to Bladen County again.
I would appreciate any help you can offerwith the review time. Bladen County has been waiting a long time for
this permit, and in light of our conference call last week I feel we have worked out all of the kinks.
So you know, I. tested the turbidity of the backwash water after it settled for 24 hours and it came out between
11-12 NTU (this is in the application on page 7). [hope we can be granted some sort of variance for this.
Thanks for all your help,
Adam
ADAM P. KIKER, E.I.
Hobbs, Upchurch & Associates
300 SW Broad Street
PO BOX 1737
Southern Pines, NC 28388
Office: [phone]
Cell: [phone]
www.hobbsupchurch.com
Bladen County.em'1
Content -Type: message/rfc822
Content -Encoding: 7bit
1 of 1 8/8/2008 12:00 PM

08/01/2008 10:58 9106924795
05/19/2M 0f3:02 9109626725
PAGE 01/01
BL.ADEN PURCHASING PAGE 03
toes, a'a cam, 1,;,,:;ys
s��lea
•GRE NVILLE, N'. � �f$�s•, :" .:i(.•' 1
NEW WELL INORGANIC +C?MMICAL-A,N,A,LYSI-S
'WAT>;R SY$`fF.M ID#: Q 3 _ 0 9 - Q 60
COUNTY; 7Bt BEN: r ��
`w Y`� W✓ -
Nc of Water Systom: EAST MUMEN
N17Sample
Mcr)
Type; t ) �ntryr Point () Special/lvon-CG1(>lpi7lance
Location Wherc Collected: IR024 'RMo '13
>'xZ'TER WO CoilertionD c Cellactioa me
Facility IT) No-:
o5/o7/ 08 07:44 31M
Sample Point: SPa
Collocted By; ALAX EDP
Mail Reaulte to (water system representativc):
EAST swMEN Mar)
MR, RANDY MaMM
Phone 4: ML O) 8 8 2"9 9 6
---Hn=E:N. Gomm WATER DISTRICT
Fax
P.O. BQZ 2350
ZLIZ.A2MTllTOWN,lQC 29337
RelponsiblePersort'S1~trtail:
LAB0RATcJRY:1D#: 3 7 71
( ) SAMPLE UNSATISFACTORY ( ) KESA•MPLE REQUESTED
CONTAM CONTAMINANT
METHOD REQUIREDTIINCT T.,TED QUANTIFIED ALLOWABLE
CODE REPORTING LMIBO.L.RESIJLTs Lrtv1COWS.
-
MITI)
0100
L UyulQUY
13rsenic
7 0
0.005
trI �1
4
U.Ulu Tn l
1005
1010
Bariux
17 0
0.4
m 1
Mal- 2.000
m Too ua !
10i5
Cadmium
3.70
.0.001
m JI
N/A
1016
calri
1159
1.0
S.0
� 1 ' .
A7 m -250.0
1017
Chloride
127
.
n� 0:10o m
1020
c�rotsuW�1
1170
0:02o
m 1
na •n
m 1 1,306 l °
1022
Co cf.
] o i
0.050
m 1
0.200 m pAn
C" ansdtr
1 4.000 rr RA
.1024
_ 1025
F)
l07
O.IOd
m
3 6 8.6 0 0 m 1, 0,300 m
102$
Iron
0.003
to 11
m 0.015 xd
1030
an
17 0
10
m
iY, 1 NJA
1031-
Ma esium I
7 6 9
0°010
m
- 1032
Mlm nncse
2170
1035
Mercu
170
0°0004
m
'� NC)'Cr. Cunccntt�tiona'it+c read and
Copper ase peNon Ieve►s. not
MCC.s.° ,
Coia.t s.=04 oxt 'Page 2 :... .
-
_ _
._.-'.t.'y.•.iY+''�'�;+i•'.',•9%•:w;�st:�rr�., �:S.N.'^:�d,'?�.;'f': e'•n�' °°'.'
':�„ ;;; � ��:";�',,:>;a��:...��,:r;;.;T<:}'�`ri�Jt`p::��1a1p3�a"s,-;•-,;�ii`viror'irr°��'a'ii�l
_ •. '
.

II Cr
TII c. (I r-7i-
N m "tc- Au(S. ao
I
a�
� D
tog, I>w
�i
3ov
d!
Svc
dl �
NI rT,
�i uO X D
b 'ter t� = O
°�" �2t4b— ((Qo ►�5— IZo
ZZSC 2c

Page 1 of 2
State of North Carolina
Department of Environment and Natural
Resources 1
Division of Environmental Health
Public Water Supply Section
Michael F. Easley, Governor
William G. Ross, Jr., Secretary
Terry Pierce, Director
Jessica G. Miles, Section Chief
MCIDENR
North Carolina Public Water Supply
Plan Review Tracking System
This information is current as of: 9/3/2008
Plan Information
Applicant Information .
Engineer Information
Year Submitted: 2008
RANDYyGARANER,
HOBBS UPCHURCH &
County:BLADEN
DIRECTOR
ASSOCIATES -SO
DEH Serial No.: 08-00895
P',O 'BOX 2350
300 SW BROAD ST
TOBERMOREY WELL
ELIZABETHTOWN, NC
SOUTHERN PINES, NC 28388
(WELL #9) IRON
28337
Type: WATER MAIN
EXTENSION
PWs ID: 03-09-055 BLADBN
CO WTR DIST-WEST
BLADEN
or projects received on or after May 1, 2005 contact:
Name Email Address I Phone
IOU, HENRI [e-mail] 919-715-3226
For projects received piror to May. 1,2005, Identify the review engineer from the initials in the comments.
column below and contact that engineer.
Initials
Review Engineer
E-mail address
Phone Number
TCC
Tony Chen
[e-mail]
919/715-323 T
SMC
Siraj Chohan
[e-mail]
919/715-3235
DEN
Doug Newhouse
[e-mail]
919/715-3234
OU
Henri Ou
[e-mail]
919/715-3226
SMB
Shashi Bhatta
[e-mail]
919nl5-5857
JEC
Julia Cavalier
[e-mail]
919/715-6643
For projects with initials other than those shown above or with no initials, contact either Tony Chen or
http://www.deh.enr.state.nc.us/pws/pws reports/PlanReview/plan/plan.asp?SerialNo=08-00... 9/4/2008

Page 2 of 2
Public Water Supply Section at 919/733-2321.
lActivityate
[Activity ri ti
7/9/2008
REPLY TO COMMENTS, RECVD
WAITING FOR DWQ
PERMIT
6/27/2008
COMMENT LETTER SENT
]PERMIT
NEED DWQ DISCHARGE
6/27/2008
D/E-MAILED COMMENTS
WITH BERKWEIZE
6/20/2008
D/E-_MAILED COMMENTS
W/TONY CHEN
6/20/2008
1PULLED FOR REVIEW,
OU
5/23/2008 11APPLICATION
RECEIVED JFPROJECT
OPENED
Please -click here to review the status of another plan.
Please click here to return to Public Water Supply main menu.
http://www,.deh.enr.state.nc.us/pws/pws reports/P1anReview/plan/plan.asp?SerialNo=08-00... 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch
Page 1 of 10
Water. Svstem Detail Information
Water Svstem :No.:
NC0309055
Federal
C
Water Sr- stem Name:
BLADEN CO WTR DIST-WEST BLADEN
Federal Source:
GW
Principal C,011111N Served:
BLADEN
System Status:
A
Principal City Served:
ELIZABETHTOWN
Xct:ivity ..Date:.
11-01-1989
Water item Contacts
'l'v . e
C011tact
t: O munication
GARNER, RANDY
Tone Type
Value
AC - Administrative
PO BOX 2350
Contact
272 SMITH CIR
BUS - Business
910-862-6996
ELIZABETHTOWN, NC 28337
BLADEN COUNTY _0309055 hone Ty Value
OW -Owner PO BOX 2350 Pe —
BUS - Business �9'10-862-6996
ELIZABETHTOWN, NC 28337
Annual O e.r° in g Period(s)
lfl� l g i Irate EI .End late . Start End rl'ypc i .1 opula.tion
Mbnth/Day 'IO.nth/Day
11-01-2005 No End Date 1/1 12/31 R 9038
Service C;OInection s
Type Count nt eter° Type Meter Size
RS ; 3689 UN 0
Se -ice Area(s) .
Code
R
@@.
V ater Systen.
lI
Facility, Naive
Type
Stataas
Avail.
B03
BLADENBORO ,
CC - A - E
COI
CLARKTON
CC - A - E
DOI
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
DS - A - P
EAR
EAST ARCADIA
- CC - A - E
L03
STORAGE-ELEVATED-3
ST - A - P
PO4
TREATMENT PLT WELL #4
TP - A - P
P05
TREATMENT PLT WELL #5
TP - A - P
P06
TREATMENT PLT WELL #6
LISBON
TP - A - P
P09 I TREATMENT PLT WELL #9 - I TP - A - O
Name
RESIDENTIAL AREA
Facilities
1'nit Process Nam
Treatment 01� ective Naine
Treatment Process Naive
GENERIC
CORROSION CONTROL
INHIBITOR,
UNIT
ORTHOPHOSPHATE
GENERIC
DISINFECTION
HYPOCHLORINATION,
UNIT
POST
GENERIC
CORROSION CONTROL
INHIBITOR,
UNIT
ORTHOPHOSPHATE
GENERIC
DISINFECTION
HYPOCHLORINAT ION,
UNIT
POST
GENERIC
CORROSION CONTROL-
INHIBITOR,
UNIT
POLYPHOSPHATE
GENERIC
DISINFECTION
HYPOCHLORINATION,
UNIT
POST
GENERIC'
CORROSION CONTROL
INHIBITOR,
UNIT
ORTHOPHOSPHATE
GENERIC
CORROSION CONTROL
PH ADJUSTMENT, POST
UNIT
GENERIC
DISINFECTION
HYPOCHLORINATION,
UNIT
POST
httDs://www.nwss.enr.state.nc.us/NCDWW/JSP/Fact.isD?tinwsys is number=4164&tinwsv...' 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch
Page 2 of 10
SO9
WELL #9 TOBEMORY
WL - A - O
WO
ELIZABETHTOWN
CC - A - P
W04
WELL #4/ABBOTTSBURG
WL - A - P
W05
WELL #5/WHITE'S XRD
WL - A - P
W06
WELL #6 LISBON WELL
WL - A - P
ITREATMENT_PLT_WELL #8
P�8 TTT A P'MIT: TP - I - P
GENERIC
UNIT
CORROSION CONTROL
PH ADJUSTMENT
GENERIC
DISINFECTION
H OCHLORINATION,
UNIT
GENERIC
UNIT
IRON REMOVAL
SEQUESTRATION
S08 1
WELL #8 INACTIVE
WL - I - P
'alter System Facility Floes
iupplving Facility fD, No.
Supplying Facility Nanze
Receiving I acility ..1D No.
Receiving Facility Name
TP - PO4
TREATMENT _PLT_WELL
DS - DO1
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
#4
TP - POS
TREATMENT PLT_WELL
DS - 1001
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
#5
TP - P06
TREATMENT PLT_WELL
DS - DO1
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
#6 LISBON
TP - P09
TREATMENT _PLT_WELL
DS - D01
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
#9
WL - S09
WELL #9 TOBEMORY
TP - P09
TREATMENT _PLT WELL
#9
CC - WO 1
ELIZABETHTOWN
DS - DO1
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
WL - W04
WELL #4/ABBOTTSBURG
TP - PO4
TREATMENT _PLT_WELL
#4
WL - W05
WELL #5/WHITE'S XRD
TP - P05
TREATMENT_PLT_WELL
#5
WL - W06
WELL #6 LISBON WELL
TP - P06
TREATMENT PLT_WELL
#6 LISBON
Water Purchases
Water Svstem No.
Water Svstein Ni the
Water Finish
NC0309015
BLADENBORO, TOWN OF.
Unfinished Water
NC0309020
CLARKTON, TOWN OF
Unfinished Water
NC0309050
EAST ARCADIA, TOWN OF
Unfinished Water
NCO309010
ELIZABETHTOWN, TOWN OF
Unfinished Water
Buyers of Water
Water S, stean. N'o. �a e
NC0309025 DUBLIN, TOWN OF
NC6309050 EAST ARCADIA, TOWN OF -
Routine tine T:`R Sample Schedules
begin :late I+:•seal ' gate Requirements
01-01-2007 Continuous 10 RT/MN
01-01-1991 12-31-2006 5 RT/MN
epeat'I"Cli Sample Schedules
Begin :late E.n Date RequirementsDr Original Salaaple
litaat€1
No Repeat TCR Schedules
https://www.pwss.enr.state.nc.us/NCD WW/JSP/Fact.jsp?tinwsys_is_number=4164&tinwsy... 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 3 of 10
Group Non-TCR Sample Schedules
f n�al��e
Facility
begin late
End -Date
Requirements
y
_ n lyte Group Name
.
roup Code
D01
01-01-2008
Continuous
5 RT/YR
CDBP
CDS FOR DBP
DO1
01-01-1992
Continuous
20 RT/3Y
CL90
CDS FOR LEAD COPPER
PO4
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/3Y
CIOC
CDS FOR INORGANICS
PO4
01-01-2005
Continuous
I RT/3Y
'CIOS
CDS FOR SECONDARIES
PO4
01-01=2005
Continuous
1 RT/YR
.-CN03
CDS FOR NITRATE
PO4
01-01-2005
Continuous
2 RT/3Y
CSOC
CDS FOR SOC
PO4
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/3Y
CVOC
CDS FOR VOC
P05
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/3Y
CIOC
CDS FOR INORGANICS
P05
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/3Y
CIOS
CDS FOR SECONDARIES
P05
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/YR
CN03
CDS FOR NITRATE
P05
01-01-2005'
Continuous
2 RT/3Y'
CSOC
CDS FOR SOC
P05
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/3Y
CVOC
CDS FOR VOC
P06
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/3Y
CIOC
CDS FOR INORGANICS
E06
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/3Y
CIOS
CDS FOR SECONDARIES
P06
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/YR
CN03
CDS FOR NITRATE
P06
01-01-2005
Continuous
2 RT/3Y
CSOC
CDS FOR SOC
P06
01-01-2005
Continuous
1 RT/YR
CVOC
CDS FOR VOC
Individual Non-TCR
Sample Schedules
Begin/End
l:nit 11,
l°acifit
Date
Begin .Dt-
Seasonal
Req.
Code
Ana.lyte Name
PO4
01-01-2008
01-01-2008
1 RT/9Y
4000
GROSS ALPHA, EXCL. RADON
Continuous
& U
PO4
01-01-2008
Continuous
01-01-2008
1 RT/9Y
4006
COMBINED URANIUM
PO4
O1-..01-2008
01-01-2008
1 RT/6Y
40-10
COMBINED RADIUM (-226 & -
Continuous
228)
POS
01-01-2008
01-01-2008
1 RT/9Y
4000
GROSS ALPHA, EXCL. RADON
Continuous
& U
P05
01-01-2008
01-01-2008
1 RT/9Y
4006
COMBINED URANIUM
Continuous
POS
01-01-2008
01-01-2008
1 RT/6Y
4010
COMBINED RADIUM (-226 & -
Continuous.
229)
P06
01-01-2008
01-01-2005
2 RT/3Y
2031
DALAPON
Continuous- - -
P06
01-01-2008
01-01-2005
1
2039
DI(2-ETHYLHEXYL)
Continuous
RT/QT
PHTHALATE
P06
01-01-2008
01-01-2008
1 RT/9Y
4000
GROSS ALPHA, EXCL. RADON
Continuous
& U
P06
01-01-2008
01-01-2008
1 RT/9Y
4006
COMBINED URANIUM
Continuous
POG
01-01-2008
01-0'1-2008
1 RT/6Y
4010
COMBINED RADIUM (-226 & -
Continuous
228)
Ghouls Violations
Fed.
I
vi,A Dame
An. Group Name
Fiscal
let.
Viol.
n.
https://www.pwss. enr. state.ne.usINCD W WIJSPIFact. j sp?tinwsys_is_number=4164&tinwsy... 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 4 of 10
dear
:a to
're
tWr° up
1997
01-15-
1998
MR
STATE - MONITORING AND
REPORTING
CVOC
CDS FOR VOC
1996
12-30-
1996
MR
STATE - MONITORING AND
REPORTING
CVOC
CDS FOR VOC
1996
10-01-
1996
MR
STATE - MONITORING AND
REPORTING
GSOC
CDS FOR SOC
1996
06-12-
1996
MR
STATE - MONITORING AND
REPORTING
CVOC.
CDS FOR VOC
Individual Violatimis
Viol,
No.
Det.
Dale
Viol.
Type
Viol. �aarae
An.
Code
An. Name
2005-405
10-06-
2004
72
CCR
ADEQUACY/AVAILABILITY/CONTENT
7000
CONSUMER CONFIDENCE RULE
2004-304
09-16-
2003
71
CCR REPORT
7000
CONSUMER CONFIDENCE RULE
2003-203
2003
003
22
MCL (TCR), MONTHLY
3100
COLIFORM (TCR)
2003-103
10-01-
2002
71
CCR REPORT
7000
CONSUMER CONFIDENCE. RULE'
Recent .Positive TCR a.rnple .Results- ..
v.,yp0.;;�;; /
l
Loc
..i
Sample
o.
Date
t
sample
Point
sample Pt.
Description
l.ab
ID
.result / An alyte 1 Method / M.P
P CU Sample Summary .results
MP BeginDate
Type
9 Sain,ples
Measure
1inits
Ana,lyte Code/Name
01-01-2005
90%
20
.305
MG/L
CU90 - COPPER SUMMARY
12-31-2007
01-01-2005
90%
20
0
MG/L
PB90 - LEAD SUMMARY
12-31-2007
07-01-2003
90%
1
0
MG/L
PB90 - LEAD SUMMARY
12-31-2003
07-01-2006
90%
1
.005
MG/L
PB90 --LEAD SUMMARY
12-31-2000
Site Visits .
reason
:Date
l)efici .ey ies tlZec oin.rnend ation(s)
Cat.SeV.
ese. grade
Dese. Text
Freehand Dese.
Det.
Date
lees.
Date
CNST
06-19-2008
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
INVG
02-11-2008
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
ENGR
02-01-2008
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
SITE
01-25-2008
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered j
SRCE
10-01-2007
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
OTHR
09-18-2007
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
INVG
09-17-2007
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
SNSV
09-13-2007
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
INVG
08-27-2007
No Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
CNST
07-23-2007
jNo Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
httns://www.Dwss.enr.state.nc.us/NCDWW/JSP/Fact.isi)?tinwsys is number=4164&tinwsy... 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 5 of.10
CNST
104-17-2007INo
Deficiencies/Recommendations Entered
Recent Priman,/Sceondary Sample
Results
l"a °.1
Sample
An.
Date
Analyte
Result
U"nit
N..lethod
Site
No.
Code
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1074
ANTIMONY, TOTAL
ND
E04I
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1.005
ARSENIC
ND
E04I
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1010
BARIUM
ND'
E04I
2008 _
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02=
1075
BERYLLIUM, TOTAL
ND
E04I
2008
PO4-E04.
8527-040208-
04-02-
1015
CADMIUM
ND
E04I
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-1
1020
CHROMIUM
ND
E04I
2008-
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1024
CYANIDE
ND
F
E041
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1025
FLUORIDE
ND
E041
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1035
MERCURY
ND
E04I
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1036
NICKEL
ND
E041
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-02-
1045.
SELENIUM
ND
E04I
2008
PO4-E04
8527-040208-
04-0
1085
THALLIUM, TOTAL
ND
E04I
20088
i
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1074
ANTIMONY, TOTAL
ND
E05I
2008
POS-E05
8527-040208-.
04-02-
1005
ARSENIC
ND
.13051
2008
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1010
BARIUM
ND
EOSI
2008
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-0
1075
BERYLLIUM, TOTAL
ND
EOSI
� 20088
P05-E05 .
8527-040208- .
04=02-
1015
CADMIUM
ND
E05I
2008
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1020
CHROMIUM
ND
E05I
2008
POS-E05
8527-..040208-
04-02-
1024
CYANIDE
ND
E05I
2008
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1025
FLUORIDE
rm
E051
2008
P05-E05
8527-040208-.
04-02-
1035
MERCURY
ND
E05I
2008
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1036
NICKEL
ND
E05I
2008 ,
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1045
SELENIUM
ND
E051
2008
P05-E05
8527-040208-
04-02-
1085
THALLIUM, TOTAL
ND
httns://www.Dwss.enr.state.nc.us/NCDWW/JSP/Fact.isp?tinwsys is number=4164&tinwsy... 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 6 of 10
E05I
2008
P06-LO6
8527-010406-
01-04-
1074
ANTIMONY, TOTAL
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
P06-1,06
8527-010406-
01-04-
1005
ARSENIC
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
P06-LO6
8527-010406-
01-04-
1010
BARIUM
ND.
MG/L
L06 .
2006
8527-010406-
0 04-
P06-LO6
L06
20006
1075
BERYLLIUM, TOTAL
ND
MG/L
P06-L06
8527-010406-
01-04-
1015,
CADMIUM
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
P06-1,06
8527-010406-
01-04---
1020
CHROMIUM
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
P06-LO6
8527-010406-
' 01-04-
1024
CYANIDE
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
1`06-1,06
8527-010406-
01-04-
1025
FLUORIDE
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
8527-010406-
01-04-
P06-LO6
L06
2006
1035
MERCURY
ND
MG/L
P06-LO6
8527-010406-
01-04-
1036
NICKEL
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
P06-LO6
8527-010406-
0 04-
1045
SELENIUM
ND
MG/L
L06
20006
P06-LO6
8527-010406=
01-04-
1085
THALLIUM, TOTAL
ND
MG/L
L06
2006
Decent SOC; Sample Results
'ac./
Sample
ono
lade
An alyte
result
Unit
Method
Site
No.
Code
PO4-EO4
8527-050708-
05-07-
2110
2,4,5-TP
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-EO4
8527-050708-
05-07-
2105
2,4-D
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-EO4
8527-050708-
05-07-
2050
ATRAZINE
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-EO4
8527-050708-
05-07-
2010
BHC-GAMMA
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-EO4
8527-050708-
05-07-
2959
CHLORDANE
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-EO4
8527-050708-
05-07-
2031
DALAPON
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-EO4
8527-050708-
05-07-
2041
DINOSEB
ND
E04S
2008,
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2005
ENDRIN
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2065
HEPTACHLOR
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-EO4
8527-050708-
05-07-
2067
HEPTACHLOR EPDXIDE
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-EO4
8527-050708-
05-07-
2051
LASSO
ND
E04S
2008.
l
.
PO4-EO41
7-050708- 852
05-07-
2015
METHOXYCHLOR
ND
httns://www.nwss.enr.state.nc.us/NCDWW/JSP/Fact,isp?tinwsys is number=4164&tinwsy... 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 7 of 10
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-.
05-07-
2326
PENTACHLOROPHENOL
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
.05-07-
2040
PICLORAM
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2037
SIMAZINE
ND
E04S
2008
PO4-E04
8527-050708-
05-07-
2020
TOXAPHENE
ND
E04S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2110
2,4,5-TP
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2105.'.
2,4-D
ND
E05S
2008
8527-050708-
05-07-
P05-E05
E05S
2008
2050
ATRAZINE
ND
P05-E05
852 050708-
O 07-
2010
BHC-GAMMA
ND
E05S
20008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2959
CHLORDANE
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2031
DALAPON
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2041
DINOSEB
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05.
8527-050708-
05-07-
2005
ENDRIN
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2065
HEPTACHLOR
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2067
HEPTACHLOR EPDXIDE
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2051
LASSO
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2015
METHOXYCHLOR
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2326
PENTACHLOROPHENOL
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-.
2040
PICLORAM
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2037
SIMAZINE
ND
E05S
2008
P05-E05
8527-050708-
05-07-
2020
TOXAPHENE
ND
E05S
2008
P06-L06
8527-080107-
08-01-
2110
2,4,5-TP
ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06'
8527-080107-
08-01-
2105
2,4-D
ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2050
ATRAZINE
ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2010
BHC-GAMMA
ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2959
CHLORDANE
ND
L06S
2001
8527-080107-
08-01-
httnc-//www_nwss_enr_state'.ne.us/NCDWW/JSP/Fact.isD?tinwsys is number=4164&tinwsy... 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 8 of 10
P06-L06
L06S
2007
2031
DALAPON
ND
P06-L06
8527-080107-
08-01-
2041
DINOSEB
ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2005
ENDRIN
ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06
8527-050207-
05-02=
2065
-HEPTACHLOR
ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2067
HEPTACHLOR EPDXIDE
ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2051
LASSO
ND
L06S
2007 .
P06-L06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2015
METHOXYCHLOR
ND
L06S
2007 .
P06-L06
8527-080107-
08-01-
2326
PENTACHLOROPHENOL
'ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06
8527-080107-
08-01-
2040
PICLORAM
ND
L06S
2007
P06-L06
8527-050207-
05-02-
2037
SIMAZINE.
ND
L06S.
2007
P06-L06.
8527-050207-
-05-02=
2020
TOXAPHENE
ND
L06S
2007
' Recent .RVOC Sample results
� ?`f. e./
Sample
An.
ate
Ana`$lyte
Result
U'ni
Method
o
. Site
.N"O.
ode
PO4-E04
852080107-
0 01-
2981
1,1,1-TRICHLOROETHANE
ND
E04V
E
20007
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2985
1,1,2-TRICHLOROETHANE
ND
E04V
2007
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2977
1,1-DICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
E04V
2007
8527-080107-
08-01-
12 4-
PO4-E04
- E04V
2007
2378
TRICHLOROBENZENE
ND
8527=080107-
08-01-
PO4-E04
E04V
2007
2980
1,2-DICHLOROET-IANE
ND
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2983
1,2-DICHLOROPROPANE
ND
E04V
2007
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2990
BENZENE
ND
E04V
2007
8527-080107-
08-01-
CARBON
PO4-E04
E04V
2007
2982
TETRACHLORIDE
ND
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
0&01-
2989
CHLOROBENZENE
ND
E04V
2007
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2380
CIS-1,2-
ND
E04V
2007
DICHLOROETHYLENE
PO4-E04
852 080107-
0 01-
2964
DICHLOROMETHANE
ND
E
E04V
20007
PO4-E04
8527-081308-
08-13- '
2992
ETHYLBENZENE
ND
E04V
2008
PO4=E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2968
O-DICHLOROBENZENE
ND
E04V
2007
8527-080107-
08-01-
httnc6//www-nwss-enr_state_nc.us/NCDWW/JSP/Fact.isn?tinwsys is number=4164&tinwsv:.. 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 9 of 10
PO4-E04
- E04V
2007
2969
P-DICHLOROBENZENE
ND
PO4-E04
8527-081308-
08-13-
2996
STYRENE
ND
E04V
2008
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2987
TETRACHLOROETHYLENE
ND
E04V
2007
PO4-E04
8527-081308-
08-13-
2991
TOLUENE
ND
E04V
2008
8527-080107-
08-01-
TRANS-1,2-
PO4-E04
E04V
2007
2979
DICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2984
TRICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
E04V
2007
PO4-E04
8527-080107-
08-01-
2976
VINYL CHLORIDE
ND
E04V
2007
PO4-E04
852080107-
0 01-
2955
XYLENES, TOTAL
ND
E
E04V
20007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2981
1,1,1-TRICHLOROETHANE
ND
E05V
2007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2985
1,1,2-TRICHLOROETHANE
ND
E05V
2007.
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2977
1,1-DICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
E05V
2007
8527-080107-
08-01-
1,2,4-
P05-E05
E05V
2007
2378
TRICHLOROBENZENE
ND
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2980
1,2-DICHLOROETHANE
ND,
E05V
2007
P05-E05
852080107-
0 01-
2983
1,2-DICHLOROPROPANE
ND
E05V
20007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2990
BENZENE
ND
E05V
2007
8527-080107-
08-01-
CARBON
P05-E05
E05V
2007
2982
TETRACHLORIDE
ND
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2989
CHLOROBENZENE
ND
E05V
2007
8527-080107-
08-01-
CIS-1,2-
POS-E05
E05V
2007
2380
DICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
T05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2964
DICHLOROMETHANE
ND
E05V
2007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2992
ETHYLBENZENE
ND
E05V
2007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2968
O-DICHLOROBENZENE
ND
E05V
2007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
0 01-
2969
P DICHLOROBENZENE
ND
E05V
20007
POS-E05
8527-080107-
'08-01-
2996
STYRENE
ND
E05V
2007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2987
TETRACHLOROETHYLENE
ND
E05V
2007
POS-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2991
TOLUENE
ND
E05V
2007
POS-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2979
TRANS-12-
ND
E05V
2007
DICHLOROETHYLENE
8527-080107-
i 08-01-
1,t+„e-//,txnxnxT mxmc am etntP nn nc/NC..T-)WW/T,O'P/Fact_isn?tinwSvS is number=4164&tinwsv._. 9/4/2008

North Carolina Public Water Supply Section, Drinking Water Watch Page 10 of 10
P05-E05
E05V
2007
2984
TRICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2976
VINYL CHLORIDE
ND
E05V
2007
P05-E05
8527-080107-
08-01-
2955
XYLENES, TOTAL
ND
E05V
2007 .
P06-L06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2981
1,1,1-TRICHLOROETHANE
ND
L06V
2008
P06-L06
852L06V
0 008 09-
2985
1,1,2-TRICHLOROETHANE
ND
L
20070908-
P06-1,06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2977
1,1-DICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
L06V
2008
8527-040208-
04-02-
1,2;4-
P06-L06
L06V
2008
2378
TRICHLOROBENZENE
ND
P06-L06
852 040208-
0 0
2980
1,2-DICHLOROETHANE
ND
L06V
L
200088
P06-L06
852 040208-
0 0
2983
1,2-DICHLOROPROPANE
ND
L
L06V
200088
.
P06-L06
8527-070908-
07-09-
2990
BENZENE
ND
L06V
2008
P06-L06
8527-040208-
04-02-
.
2982
CARBON
ND
L06V
2008
TETRACHLORIDE
P06-L06
8527-070908-
0 09-
2989
CHLOROBENZENE
ND
L06V
20008
P06-L06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2380
CIS-1,2-
ND
L06V
2008'
DICHLOROETHYLENE
1`06-1,06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2964
DICHLOROMETHANE
ND
L06V
2008
P06-L06
852 070908-
0 09-
2992
ETHYLBENZENE
ND
L
L06V
20008
P06-L06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2968
O-DICHLOROBENZENE'
ND
L06V
2008
P06-L06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2969
P-DICHLOROBENZENE
ND
L06V
2008
P06-L06
8527-070908=
07-09-
2996
STYRENE
ND
L06V
2008
P06-L06
8527-070908-
-
07-09-
2987
TETRACHLOROETHYLENE
ND
L06V
2008
8527-070908-
07-09-
P06-L06
L06V
2008
2991
TOLUENE
ND
8527-040208-
04-02-
TRANS-1,2-
P06-1,06
L06V
2008
2979
DICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
P06-L06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2984
TRICHLOROETHYLENE
ND
L06V
2008
P06-L06
8527-040208-
04-02-
2976
VINYL CHLORIDE
ND
L06V
2008
P06-L06
852 040208-
0 0
2955
XYLENES, TOTAL
ND
L06V
L
200088

COMMUNITY
GROUNDWATER SYSTEMS
- MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
Contaminant Group
Initial & Routme`Monitoring= O
M ay Reduce,.Monitoryng from Routine
;x (2) "
Increased Monitoring ReqUik?41.1.(3)"
+Frequency if..
Asbestos (AS)
collect one initial sample, thereafter, every 9 years,
can apply for a waiver if not in source vulnerable county
if result > MCL, begin quarterly monitoring
unless > maximum contaminant level (MCL)
and/or do not have asbestos piping
monthly, from distribution (see 15A NCAC 18C Section
if positive result, collect repeat samples within 24 hours of
Bacteriological (BA)
.1534 for number of samples)
Not Applicable
notification; then collect 5 routine samples the next month
following the positive routine sample
Disinfectants &
See chart entitled "Groundwater Systems - Stage 1
See chart entitled "Groundwater Systems - Stage f
See chart entitled "Groundwater Systems - Stage 1
Disinfection
Disinfectants/Disinfection Byproducts (D/DBP)
Disinfectants/Disinfection Byproducts (D/DBP) Monitoring
Disinfectants/Disinfection Byproducts (D/DBP) Monitoring
Byproducts (D/DBP)
Monitoring Requirements" (Attachment 2)
Requirements" (Attachment 2)
Requirements" (Attachment 2)
Inorganic Chemicals
collect one initial sample at each entry, point, thereafter,
after 3 consecutive three year periods < MCL, a request to
if result >MCL, begin quarterly monitoring
(IC)
once every 3 years, unless > MCL
reduce to once every 9 years may be granted by the State
Lead and Copper
if 90th percentile > action level for lead or copper, perform
(LC)
every 6 months for first year,.thereafter, collect annual
after two 6-month samples and 2 annuals where the 90th
Corrosion Control Treatment Study, test for Water Quality
( lead action level =
samples during June -September for 2 more
y every
percentile < action levels, then may be reduced to eve 3
Parameters, conduct public education (for lead only); then
0.015 mg/L;
consecutive years (see 15A NCAC 18C .1507 for
years (4)
need two 6-month samples where 90th percentile < action
copper action level =
number of samples)
P )
levels
1.3 mg/L)
if result is > 5 mg/L, begin quarterly monitoring; after 4
annually, at each entry point, unless result > 5 mg/L;
consecutive quarters < 5 mg/L, may apply to State for annual
Nitrate (NT)
Note: if result > MCL (10 mg/L), take confirmation
Not Applicable
monitoring; if approved, subsequent annual samples must be
sample within 24 hours
collected during the quarter that previously had the highest
concentration
if result is > 0.5 mg/L, begin quarterly monitoring; after 4
one sample, one time at each entry point unless >0.5
consecutive quarters < 0.5 mg/L, may apply to State for
Nitrite (NI)
mg/L. Note: If result > MCL (1 mg/L), take
Not Applicable
annual monitoring; if approved, subsequent annual samples
confirmation sample within 24 hours
must be collected during the quarter that previously had the
highest concentration
Pesticides/Synthetic
4 consecutive quarterly samples at each entry p
if no detection of regulated contaminants for all 4
consecutive quarters,oint; may reduce as follows: population
if result > MCL, or if regulated contaminant is detected, begin
Organic Chemicals
Population < 3,300 has option to use 1st sample and
>3,300 may reduce to 2 consecutive quarterly entry point
quarterly monitoring (quarterly analyses must include all
(SOCs)
apply for waiver (see our web site for waiver application
samples every 3 years; population < 3,300, may reduce to
contaminants identified by the analysis method used for the
package information)
one entry point sample every 3 years
detected contaminant)
4 consecutive quarterly samples at each entry point (if,
if the initial monitoring has been completed, or if your
Radionuclides (RA)
your system has not exceeded any of the new
system's data was grandfathered,,with written State
if running annual average exceeds the MCL or if on reduced
(new rule requirements -
radionuclides MCLs, may composite up to 4
approval, may reduce to every 3, 6, or 9 years according to
monitoring and the MCL is exceeded, begin quarterly
Effective 12/8/03)
consecutive quarterly samples from a single entry point
test results
monitoring
if analysis is done within a year of the first sample)
if no detection of regulated contaminants for all 4
Organic
Volatile Organic
consecutive quarters, may reduce to one entry point
if result > MCL, or if regulated contaminant is detected, begin
Chemicals
4 consecutive quarterly samples at each entry point
sample, collected annually; after 3 consecutive annual
quarterly monitoring (quarterly analyses must include all VOCs
samples with no detections of regulated contaminants, may
listed on the State's laboratory form)
reduce to once every 3 years
(1) Compliance monitoring for all contaminant groups should be performed the same quarter as system start-up except for bacteriological, which should be performed within 30 days of system start-up.
(2) A request must be submitted to the State, in writing, in order to get approval for reduced monitoring.
(3) If a system is required to increase to monthly or quarterly monitoring, the follow-up samples must be collected the next month or quarter.
(4) For lead & copper, if the 90th percentile of lead result is < 0.005 mg/L and copper result is < 0.65 mg/L, after 2 consecutive 6-month periods, the system can apply for reduced monitoring to every three years.

Attachment
GROUNDWATER SYSTEMS
STAGE 1 - DISINFECTANT / DISINFECTION BYPRODUCTS (D/DBP) MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
MAXIMUM RESIDUAL DISINFECTANT LEVELS IMRDLI*: Applies to any Community or Nontransient noncommunity, water system that uses groundwater for drinking purposes that has had a disinfectant added.
ROUTINE "tiORINO'
REQUIREMENTS,
DISINFECTANT
RESIDUALS
MRDL
(mgA,l
COMPLIANCE gleam
ON
AMLYSIs
REQUIREMENTS
FREQUENCK
p 1Te0p 1
itequircd
SAMPLE LOCA7I,ON <
Chlorine
4.0
(as free
Running
Use EPA/State
Monthly or
Quarterly
Same as.
# of
chlorine)
Annual
Approved
based on
Bacteria
Test When &
Average
(RAA)
Method.****
Test performed
system's
required
samples
required
Where compliance
bacteria samples
4.0
(Explanation for
by Certified
bacteria
each
are collected each
Chloramine
as
calculating
Operator or
sampling
month or
month or quarter
(when ammonia is
Combined—RAAs
below)-
designee
schedule
quarter
applied)
chlorine)
NOTE: There are no monitoring reductions allowed for MRDL testing.
,r reporting these residuals to the State, the appropriate
)e of chlorine residual level must be [1] recorded on each Total
Iliform sample analysis report sent to the State for compliance
Ih the Total Coliform Rule and [2] reported on the appropriate
mthly Operations Report form showing the monthly average for
:se residuals. (If the system has received laboratory
rtifiration from N.C. to analyze its own samples, it may use the
stribution Bacteriological Analysis Summary Report form in lieu
the two methods given above).
• MRDL (Maximum Residual Disinfectant Level) - the maximum residual level Staved fora given disinfectant In drinking water by EPA es a mnnhg annual average.
•+ Combined chlorine residual - Test/or total chlorine and8ee chlorin, msidemN. Subbee tthe it,, amount fmmthe total amountes determine the combined chlorine residual.
•••RAA(Running annual average)- The average for the past four consecutive quarters on an ongoing basis. For systems required he collect bacteria samples monthly, the MRDL RAAs are calculated by w,mging the chlorine residuals (free and/or combined as applicable)for ell compliance bacteria samples collected during the month for the monthly
cuerege. Using the averages/or each of the three months, calculate the quartsdy average(s). The four quartsdy ovemges are than used to calculate the RAA(s). [For systems required to collect bacteria samples only guar the MRDL RAAs are calculated by averaging the eNamre residuals (free and/or combined) for all compliance samples collected
ring the quarter. then using the average, of the four consecutive quadem to calculate the RAA,j
•»• Approved methods - When testing for hoe and combined chlorine residuals using field test kits, the DPD analysis method must be used. May also use any other EPA a State approved method for free and total chlorine residual testing.
0- THM and HAA samples must be collected togetherat the same sites and at the same dine. All THM and HAA samples used to determine compliance with the MCLs fora specific compliance period must he collected on the same day.
Applies to any Community or Nontrans[ent noncommunity water system that uses groundwater for drinking purposes that has had a
DISINFECTION BYPRODUCTS - Trihalomethanes ITTHMI and Haloacetic Acids IHAA51
disinfectant added.
0 Note: If the system elects to collect more than the minimum one
sample per entry point per compliance period, then at least 25%of the
samples collected for that entry point foraeompliance period must be
- ". -g:. - -
- gROU71NE'MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
- - -- - -
° REDUCED`from Routme MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
-INCREASED MONITORINt3'REQUIREMENTS,�-
- REDEiCED from Incteos�d. MONflORWGr
from MRT locations.
"
-.'.
'REQUIREMENTS,„ ,
CONTAMINANT
MCL'
CDMPt01NCE grim
oN
AtULYSta
REQUIREU11
- patbmpis
FREQUENCY Regamd
SAMPLE.LACATION
coNDITgNs.
FREQUENCY
"pnatsmpb
.Rewtl�ed
'. SAMPLE.
iz
- FREQUENCY'
r,lbmpl'i.
R°VWteO
SAMPLE
CONDITIONS FREQUENCY
r,fbrop4
RKW°d
'SAMPLE
LOCATiDI'!:
„CONDn10NS
LOCATION
A.
LOCATION
GROUNDWATER-lO,UDDoi.gteatpt,pgp�
Running
1 sample
1 sample
1 sample
1 sample
THM
0.080
Annual
site per
Annually
site per.,
TTHM RAA
site per
Annually
site per
Average
entry
At Maximum
TTHM RAA does not
between
entry
exceeds 0.0604
-
entry
TTHM RAA does not
between Juty
entry
(�) ••
Certified Lab
Quarterly
Point'••
See
Residence Time (MRT)
sites in the
and
exceed RAA does
HAAS RAA does not
July 1st and
September
Point•'•
Sea
At MRT
sites
mg/L OR the
HAA RAA exceeds
quarterly
Point"`
See
At MRT
sites
exceed S RA doe
and HAAS RAA does
Island
September
Point"
See
At MRT
sites
(Explanation for
"Sample
distribution system•••• '
exceed 0.0304
30th
"Sample
0.0454 mglL
"Sample
not exceed 0.0454 mglL
30th
"Sample
HAAS
0.060
calculating RAA
Location"
Location"
Location"
Location"
below)
GROUNDWATER-`t.eS; ttwlt 10,QD0
poPzB;,`-„ .
Running
1 sample
TTHM RAA does not exceed
1 sample
1 sample
1 sample
THM
0.080
Annual
Annually
site per
0.0404 mg/L and HAAS RAA
Every 3
site per
TTHM RAA
site per
Annually
site per
Average
be July
entry
ant
At Maximum
does not exceed 0.0304 mg/L
...years,
entry
ry
exceeds 0.0804
entry
ry
TTHM RAA does not
between July
entry
(RAA)
CertifiedLeb
1stand
point•••
See
Residence Time (MRT)
sites in the
for consecutive years OR
TTHM RAA does not exceed
between
July 1st and
point •
See
At MRT
sites
mglL
quarterly
point•ee
See
At MRT
sites
exceed 0.0604 mg/L
and HAAS RAA does
1st and
point•••
See
At MRT
sites
n
(Explanation for
September
P
0.0204 HAA5 RAA
ex eels
RAA exceeds
September
P
30th
"Sam le
P
distribution s stem'•'•
y
m and
gR-
September
p
"Sample
p
0.0604m /L
g
"Sample
P
not exceed 0.0454 mg/L
30th
Sample
P
HAAS
0.060
calculating RAA
Location"
does not exceed 0.0154 mg/L
30th
Location"
Location"
Location"
below)
-�
forlyear
•MCL(Maximum Contaminant Level)- The maximum level allowed far a contaminant on ddniang water by EPA '
•• RAA (Running Annual Average) - The average for. the past fourconsecutive quartere on an ongoing basis. For systems required to collect TTHM and HAAS samples quertedy, the RAAs for the TTHMs and HAASs are calculated by averaging thetrvalues far all compliance samples collected during the quarter, then using the TTHM and HAAS averages far
each o/the four quarters, to calculate the RAAs. [For systems required collect TTHM and HAA5 samples annually (only during the third quarter of each year), the annual werages for the TTHMs and HAA59 are calculated by averaging theirvaluss for all samples collected during that quarter. If the annual average for thattime period -ads either MCL, the
systemmustbeein euartedv moniwdno the foloWng quarter. For thosesystemsmonitoring either annually or every three years that are required to increase their TTHMIHHA.Smonitoring, compliance with the MCLS is datettnined atthe and ofthe second quarter (after June 301h) of the following year],
••• pat TTHMI HAAS Sample Sets Required: The number of TTHM and HAAS sample setethate water system isrequimol to cootfrem soacite is, ss within the distribution worn each compliance period is based on the number of EntryPoints serving the wafer system. An'entrypoint' is defined as the location whom potable water from a source and its
treatment plant antthe distribution system. Systems that@jco purchase waror on a regular basis, in addition be providing their a— sources, muster collect a minimum of am(1)TTHM I HAAS sample set from a MRT site for each Seger that water is purchased from.
•••• MRT (Maximum Residence Time) - The location(,) within the distribution system where a given unit of mor remains for the largest period of time. F.b rag

Michael F. Easley, Governor
William G. Ross Jr., Secretary
North Carolina Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Coleen H. Sullins, Director
Division of Water Quality
August 21, 2008 AUG 2 51008
Mr. Randy Garner, Director of Water District
BladenCounty Water District [01ENR—FllYEMI LLEREGIQidALOFRCE
550 Smith Circle
Elizabethtown, NC 28337
Subject: Permit Application No. WQ0033325
Bladen County Water District Reuse System
Iron Filter Backwash. from Tobermory Well (Well #9)
Bladen County
Dear Mr._Garner:
The Aquifer Protection Section is in receipt of your application to obtain a reuse system. permit for the disposal of iron
filter backwash water from the TobermoryWell in Bladen County. Additional information is required before we may
continue our review. Please address the following items no later than September 21, 2008:
1. Drawing G-3 in your submittal package, entitled "Proposed Well Site Plan", indicates a wetted area of
approximately 0.18 acres, whereas the wetted area indicated on Page D-1 of the Soil Scientist's
Evaluation is 0.72 acres. Please explain.
2. Any proposed reuse system must conform to the "beneficial. use" requirement of the regulations. The
plans submitted indicate the establishment of a rotary spray system that does not appear to meet this
requirement. Scenarios that Would meet this requirement include the watering of ornamental vegetation
(shrubbery, red tips, etc.) and/or watering of planted turf -grass for transplant to other properties owned
by Bladen County, i.e. athletic fields. Please submit plans for a revised spray system to the following
address:
NCDENR-DWQ
Aquifer Protection Section
1636 Mail Service Center
Raleigh, NC 27699-1636
Please be aware that you are responsible for meeting all requirements set forth in North Carolina rules and
regulations. Any oversights that occurred in .the review of the subject application package are still the
responsibility of the applicant. In addition, any the
made .in responding to the above items may result in
future requests for additional information.
Please reference the subject application number when providing the requested information. Please note that
failure to provide this additional information on or before the above requested date may result in your application
being returned as incomplete.
If you have any questions regarding this request, please do not hesitate to contact me at [phone]. You may
also check the future status of this -project online at hM://l12o.enr.state.nc.us/bims/,Reports/rgportsPermits.html.
Thank you for your cooperation.
Sincerely,
David Goodrich
Hydrogeologist
cc: Adam Kiker, Hobbs, Upchurch and Associates
APS Cen a es . Z
Ug
ayette il'1 gional• ®. aquifer Protection Sectlon
None
rthCarolina
�atura!!�
Aquifer Protection Section 1636 Mail Service Center
Internet: www.newaterquality.org Location: 2728 Capital Boulevard
An Equal Opportunity/Affirmative Action Employer— 50% Recycled110% Post Consumer Paper
Raleigh, NC 27699-1636 Telephone: [phone]
Raleigh, NC 27604 Fax 1: [phone]
Fax 2: [phone]
Customer Service: , [phone]

AQUIFER PROTECTION SECTION
APPLICATION REVIEW REQUEST FORM
Date: August 11, 2008
To: ❑ Landon,Davidson, ARO-APS ❑ David May, WaRO-APS .
X - Art Barnhardt, FRO-APS /�, 13�� ev ❑ Charlie Stehman, WiRO-APS
❑ Andrew Pitner; MRO-APS ❑ Sherri Knight, WSRO-APS
❑ . Jay Zimmerman; RRO-APS
From: David Goodrich, Land Application Unit
Telephone: [phone] Fax: [phone]
E Mail: david.goodrich(c-r�ncmail.net
A. Permit Number: WQ0033325
B. Owner: Bladen County Water District
C. Facility/Operation: Tobermory Well Filter Backwash Surface Irrigation System
X Proposed : ❑ Existing ® Facility. X Operation
D. -Application:
1. Permit Type:, ❑ Animal X Surface Irrigation ❑
❑ Recycle ❑ FE Lagoon ❑
❑ UIC - (5A7), open loop geothermal
For Residuals: ❑ Land App. ❑ D&M
❑ 503 ❑ 503 Exempt
Reuse ❑ H-R Infiltration
GW Remediation (ND)
❑ Surface Disposal
❑ Animal
2. Project Type: X New ❑ Major Mod. ❑ Minor Mod. ❑ Renewal ❑ Renewal w/ Mod.
E. Comments/Other Informa'tion: ❑ I would like to accompany you on a site visit.
Statutory Date: �,-� ' b ✓d
Attached, you will find all information submitted in support of the above -referenced application for your
review, comment, and/or. action. Within calendar days, please take the following actions.:
® Return a Completed APSARR Form.
'❑ Attach Well Construction Data Sheet.
❑ Attach Attachment B for Certification by the LAPCU.
❑ Issue an Attachment B Certification from the RO.*
* Remember that you will be responsible for coordinating site visits and reviews; as well as additional
information requests with other RO-APS representatives in order to prepare a complete Attachment B for
certification. Refer to the RPP SOP for additional detail.
When you receive this request form, please write your name and dates in the spaces below, make a copy
of this sheet, and return it to the appropriate Central Office -Aquifer Protection Section contact person
listed above.
M
RO-APS Reviewer: / Date: 'y
FORM: APSARR 07/06 - Page 1 of 1

Central Files: APS SWP
08/11 /08
Permit Number WQ0033325
Permit Tracking Slip
Program Category
Status Project Type
Non -discharge
In review New Project
Permit Type
Version Permit Classification
Surface Irrigation
A Individual
Primary Reviewer Permit Contact Affiliation b
david.goodrich David Upchurch, PE
Permitted Flow 300 S W Broad St .
Southern Pines NC .28387
Facilit
Facility Name Major/Minor Region
Tobermory Well Minor Fayetteville
Location Address County
8129 Chicken Foot Rd Bladen
Council NC 2$434 Facility Contact Affiliation
Owner
Owner Name
Owner Type
Bladen County Water District
Government - County
Owner Affiliation
Randy Garner
PO Box 2350
Elizabethtown NC 283372350
Dates/Events
Scheduled
Orig Issue : App Received "Draft Initiated Issuance
Public Notice Issue . -Effective Expiration
08/08/08
Regulated Activities
Requested/Received Events
RO staff report received
RO staff report requested
Outfall NULL
Waterbody Name Stream Index Number Current Class Subbasin

j,
Hobbs, Upchurch & Associates, P.A.
Consulting Engineers
j-,J4
300 S.W. Broad Street . Southern Pines, NC 28388
August 7, 2008
Mr. David Goodrich
NC Department of Environment and Natural Resources
Division of Water Quality
Land Application Unit
2728 Capital Boulevard
Parker -Lincoln Building
Raleigh, NC 27604
RE: Bladen County Water District, Phase III -A Expansion
Tobermory Well (Well #9) Iron Removal System
Dear Mr. Goodrich:
Aqui RECF,, o t DEN Section
AUG ction
AUG 0 8 2008
Bladen County is installing iron removal filters on the Tobermory Well (Well #9). The
County proposed to dispose of the backwash water by irrigating the well and tank site.
The backwash water will be stored in a 10,000 gallon storage facility and irrigated on
the yard throughout each week. The maximum volume of wastewater (backwash)
produced is 8,000 gallons per week.
Enclosed please find the following:
1. One original and three copies of the application form RWNCS 12-06
2. One original and three copies of the form WSCA and the topographic map
3. A check for the appropriate application fee of $810.00
4. One original and three copies of -this Cover Letter
5. A property deed of the site indicating it is owned by Bladen. County
6. Four copies of iron and chloride analysis from the backwash of another well in
Bladen County that uses similar filters
7. Four copies .of the Soils Report from Cpec Environmental containing the soil
evaluation, water balance, agronomist evaluation, and hydrogeologic report.
8. Four copies of 11"x17" detailed plans containing a site map
9. Four copies of the project specifications
10. Four copies of the Engineering Calculations
This package was sent to you on May 28; 2008 and was returned to Bladen County
under the assumption that'it did not fit the mold of a reuse system. Since then we
have had numerous phone conversations about the project, and.we all feel this project
is the. best and most efficient method of disposal for the backwash water. On Page 7 of
the form RWNCS 12-06 I included turbidity measurements from the existing Live Oak
Well backwash water in Bladen County and the iron and chloride concentrations.
Southern Pines, NC . Telephone [phone] • Fax [phone] . email: [e-mail]
Hampstead . Nags Head • Charlotte 9 Beaufort, SC

On behalf of Bladen County, we appreciate any haste you can offer on your review of
this project. Bladen County would like to advertise this project for construction bids as
soon as possible, so a phone call providing feedback would be greatly appreciated.
If you have any questions with this submittal, please feel free to contact me at (910)
692-5616.
Sincerely,
HOBBS,.UPCHURCH & ASSOCIATES, P.A.
Adam P. Kiker, E.I.

SAT
RECEIVED ! DENR! DWQ State of North Carolina
�p �pQUIF _R-PR0TF0'T10N SFC110N Department of Environment and Natural Resources
JUN �--2 200$ Division of Water Quality
RECLAIMED WATER NON -CONJUNCTIVE SYSTEMS APPLICATION
FORM: RWNCS 12-06
(THIS FORM MAY BE PHOTOCOPIED FOR USE AS AN ORIGINAL)
Application Number: (to be completed by DWQ)
I. GENERAL INFORMATION:
1. Applicant's name (See Instruction A): Bladen County Water District
Applicant type: ❑ Individual ❑ Corporation ❑ General Partnership ❑ Privately Owned Public Utility
❑ Federal ❑ State ❑ Municipal ® County
Signature authority's name: Randy Garner (per 15A NCAC 2T .0106)Title: Director of Water District
Applicant's mailing address: 550 Smith Circle
City: Elizabethtown State: NC Zip: 28337
Telephone number: 910) 862-6996 Fax number: 910) 862-7869 Email Address: [e-mail]
2. Facility name (name of the subdivision, shopping center, etc.): Tobermory Well (Well #9)
Facility's physical address: 8129 Chicken Foot Road
City: St. Pauls State: NC Zip: 28434 County: Bladen
Wastewater Treatment Facility: Latitude: 34' 49' 19" Longitude: -780 53' 20" USGS Map Name:
3. Consulting Engineer's name: David T. Upchurch License Number: Firm: Hobbs, Upchurch & Associates
Engineer's mailing address: 300 S.W. Broad Street
City: Southern Pines State: NC Zip: 28387-
Telephone number: (_) = Fax number: (_) _- Email Address:
4. Consulting Soil Scientist's name: Tom Hinson License Number: 1060 Firm: CPEC Environmental
Soil Scientist's mailing address: 700 Arendell St, Sutie 14
City: Morehead City State: NC' Zip: 28557-
Telephone number: 252) 726-4260 Fax number: 252) 726-4260 Email Address: cpec(cDmindspring.com
5. Consulting Geologist's name: License Number: Firm:
Geologist's mailing address:
City: State: Zip: -
Telephone number: (_) _- Fax number: (_) _- Email Address:
6. Consulting Agronomist's name: Firm:
Agronomist's mailing address:
City: State: Zip -
Telephone number: (_) = Fax number: (_) = Email Address:
RECEIVED / DENR I-DVja
Aquifer protection SecUort a
AUG 0 8 2008
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 5

I F ,
H. PERMIT INFORMATION:
1. Project is: ® New ❑ Major Modification ❑ Minor Modification
2. Fee submitted: $810.00 (See Instruction CT' Existing Permit No.: WQ00 , issue date:
3. Facility status: ❑ Existing ❑ Proposed
Was this system approved for reclaimed disposal under 15A NCAC 2H .0219.(k)? ❑, Yes or ❑ No
4. Does this project utilize: ® public funds and/or ❑ private funds; ® public lands and/or ❑ private lands
5. What is the status of the following appropriate permits/certifications?
Permit/Certification
Submitted
Approved
Permit/Certification No.
Agency Reviewer
Erosion & Sedimentation
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Control Plan
Nationwide 12 or 404
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Wetlands 401
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Stormwater Management Plan
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Dam Safety
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Sewer System
Other:
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
6. Does the project comply with all setbacks found in the river basin rules (15A NCAC 2B .0200)? ® Yes or ❑ No
If no, list non -compliant setbacks:
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 ' Page 6

M. INFORMATION ON WASTEWATER GENERATION:
1. What is the origin of the wastewater (i.e., school, subdivision, hospital, municipality, shopping center, industry, apartments,
condominiums, etc.)? Backwash from iron removal filters
2. Volume of wastewater flow for this project: 1:140 gallons per day (GPD)
3. Explanation of how wastewater flow was determined (15A NCAC 2T•.0114(c)):
Type of Establishment
Basis of Flow
Flow Per Unit
Number of Units
Total
8,000 gal/backwash, 1 per week
Gallons/
Gallons/
Gallons/
Gallons/
Gallons/
Gallons/
Gallons/
Total
4. Nature of wastewater: ❑ 100% Domestic Waste (residential, commercial, etc)
❑ 100% Industrial
Combination of Industrial and Domestic Waste:' %o Domestic
❑ (Municipal waste (town, city, etc.)
Is there a Pretreatment Program in effect? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
5. Wastewater characteristics (See 15A NCAC 2T .0906(a)):
% Industrial
Parameter — taken from an
Estimated Influent
Designed Effluent
Designed Effluent
existing backwash system in
Concentration
Concentration
Concentration
Bladen Count
(monthly average)
(daily maximum
Turbidity (measured immediately
33.6 NTU
mg/1
mg/1
after backwash)
Turbidity (measured after allowing
11.8 NTU
mg/1
mg/1
24 hours of settling)
Iron
368.6 mg/1
1119/1
mg/l
Chloride
47 mg/1
mg/l
mg/l
mg/1
mg/1
mg/l
µµ�
mg/1
mg/l
mg/1',
NTU
per 100 ml -
per 100 ml
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 7

IV. GENERAL PROJECT INFORMATION:
1. Brief project description: Proposed surface irrigation of backwash water from iron removal filters for a production well
Expected flow is 8,000 gal/week.
2. In accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0901 and .0910, what is the intended beneficial utilization of this reclaimed water? To
prevent constuction of an infiltration lagoon
3. In accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0912, provide the minimum distance in feet from the facility's utilization system and
treatment/storage units to each parameter (distances greater than 500 feet may be marked N/A):
Setback Parameter
Utilization System
Treatment/Storage
Units
Any habitable residence or place of assembly under separate ownership or not
to be maintained as part of the project site
> 500'
Any private or public water supply source
150'
Surface waters (streams — intermittent and perennial, perennial waterbodies,
and wetlands) not classified SA
> 500'
Surface waters (streams — intermittent and perennial, perennial waterbodies,
and wetlands) classified SA
> 500'
Any well with exception of monitoring wells
150'
Any property line
-
10,
4. The treatment and disposal facilities must be secured to prevent unauthorized entry. Details and notations of restricted access
measures shall be shown on submitted plans and specifications. Briefly describe the measures being: site will be fenced in
5. What is the 100-year flood elevation? outside site feet mean sea level. Source: NCFloodmaps.com
✓ Are any treatment units or utilization areas located within the 100-year flood plain? ❑. Yes or ® No
If yes, briefly describe which treatment units and/or utilization areas are affected: , and the measures being taken to
protect them against flooding:
If yes, does the Applicant have documentation of compliance with § 143 Article 21 Part 6? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
6. Method to provide system reliability per 15A NCAC 2T .0908(h) (See Instruction R): N/A
7. A certified operator of a grade equal or greater than the facility classification is on call 24 hrs/day? ® Yes or ❑ No
8. What is the specified method of disinfection? No disinfection required
✓ If chlorine, specify detention time provided: minutes (30 minutes minimum required). Please indicate in what
part of the wastewater system chlorine contact time occurs (i.e. chlorine contact chamber):
✓ If ultraviolet (UV), specify the number of banks: , total lamps: and maximum capacity: gpm.
9. How many days of residuals storage are provided (15A NCAC 2T .0908(n))? N/A
10. Is duality provided for all treatment units per 15A NCAC 2T .0908(c)? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
11. Is there continuous online monitoring and recording of effluent for turbidity? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
12. Is lined 5-day upset storage provided? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
13. Does the 5-day upset storage have restricted access? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
14. Is aerated flow equalization of at least 25% average daily flow provided? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
FORM: RV NCS 12-06 Page 8

V. DESIGN INFORMATION FOR NEW OR MODIFIED .PORTIONS OF THE WASTEWATER TREATMENT FACILITY
1. Type of treatment system (fixed f lm, suspended growth, etc):
2. Provide the number and dimensions of each treatment unit, and provide their location in the specifications and plans. If an
item is not applicable, do not fill in the requested information:
a. PRELIMINARY TREATMENT (i.e., physical operations such' as large solids screening and equalization to remove
problem characteristics such as abrasive grit and clogging rags, as well as to dampen high flows):
Treatment Unit
Number
of Units
Manufacturer
or Material
Dimensions (ft)
/ Spacings' (in)
Volume
( allons)
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
b. PRIMARY TREATMENT (i.e., physical operations such as fine screening and sedimentation to remove floating and
settable solids):
Treatment Unit
Number
of Units
Manufacturer
or Material
Dimensions (ft)
/'S acin s (mm)
Volume
(gallons)
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
I Page Number
Select
Select
Select
c. SECONDARY / TERTIARY TREATMENT (i.e., biological and chemical processes to remove organics and nutrients)
Treatment Unit
Number
of Units
Manufacturer
or Material
Dimensions (ft)
Volume
(gallons)
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
S elect
FORM: RVWNCS 12-06 Page 9

d. DISINFECTION
Treatment Unit
Number
of Units
Manufacturer
or Material
Dimensions (ft)
Volume
(gallons)
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
Select
Select
Select
e. RESIDUAL TREATMENT
Treatment Unit
Number
of Units
Manufacturer
or Material
Dimensions (ft)
Volume
(gallons)
I Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
Select
Select
Select
£ PUMPS
Location
Number
of Pumps
Purpose
Manufacturer /
Type
Capaci�TDR
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
GPM
g. BLOWERS
Location
No. of
Blowers
Units Served
Manufacturer /
Type
Capacity
(CFM)
Plan Sheet
I Number
Specification
Page Number
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 10

h. MIXERS
Location
No. of
Mixers
Units Served
Manufacturer /
Tye
Power
(h)
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Pa a Number
i. RECORDING DEVICES & RELIABILITY
Device
Number
of Units
Maximum
Capacity
ManufacturerFLoc
c
ation
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
Select
Select
Select
Select
Select
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 11

VI. DESIGN INFORMATION FOR STORAGE IMPOUNDMENTS
1. Provide the number of earthen impoundments in the system:
2. Are any impoundments designed to receive adjacent surface runoff? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
If Yes, please specify which impoundment: and the drainage area: ftZ.
3. Are inipoundment(s) designed to include a discharge point (pipe, emergency spillway, etc)? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
4. Provide the design measures proposed for impoundment liner protection from wind driven wave action:
5. Provide the location of each design element in the specifications and engineering plans for each storage unit:
Storage Impoundment
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
Liner material (15A NCAC 2T .0908(f) and (g))?
❑
Synthetic
El clay
❑ Concrete 1
❑ Steel
Liner installation and testing requirements
Inside berm surface dimensions (L x W x H)
ft
ft
ft
Bottom dimensions (L x W)
ft
ft
Embankment side slope
Mean seasonal high water table depth *
ft
Finished grade elevation
ft
Depth from bottom to top of embankment
ft
Total volume
ft3
gallons
Design freeboard
ft
Depth of minimum liquid level (above permanent
liquid level)
ft
Effective volume provided **
ft3
gallons
Effective storage time provided
days
NOTE: The liner shall be protected, trom impacts of the seasonal high water table as necessary.
** NOTE: The storage volume should be calculated between the top of any permanent liquid level (as indicated by outlet
pipe) and maximum allowable liquid level in the impoundment.
6. Provide the number of 5-day upset impoundments in the system:
7. Are any 5-day upset impoundments designed to receive adjacent surface runoff? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
If Yes, please specify which impoundment: and the drainage area: ftZ.
8. Are the 5-day upset impouhdment(s) designed to include a discharge point (pipe, emergency spillway, etc)? ❑ Yes or ❑ No
9. Provide the design measures proposed for the 5-day upset impoundment liner protection from wind driven wave action:
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 12

10. Provide the location of each design element in the specifications and engineering plans for each storage unit:
5-day Upset Impoundment
I
Plan Sheet
I Number-
Specification
Page Number
Liner material (15A NCAC 2T.0908(o)?
❑
Synthetic
❑ Clay
❑
Concrete
I ❑ Steel
Liner installation and testing requirements
Inside berm, surface dimensions (L x W x H)
ft
ft
ft
I ft
Bottom dimensions (L x W)
ft
ft
Embankment side slope
Mean seasonal high water table depth
ft
Finished grade elevation
ft
Depth from bottom to top of embankment
ft
Total volume
fe
gallons
Design freeboard
ft
Depth of minimum liquid level (above permanent
liquid level)
ft
Effective volume provided
ft3
gallons
Effective storage time provided
days
NOTE: The liner shall be protected from impacts of the seasonal high water table as necessary.
NOTE: The storage volume should be calculated between the top of any permanent liquid level (as indicated by outlet
pipe) and maximum allowable liquid level in the impoundment.
FORM: RVVNCS 12-06 Page 13

VII. DESIGN INFORMATION FOR UTILIZATION SYSTEM
1. The utilization system is: ® Spray Irrigation ❑ Drip Irrigation
2. Utilization system is: ❑ existing ® proposed.
3. If.applicable, provide the location of each design element in the specifications and engineering plans:
Utilization Pump Tank
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
Internal dimensions (I, x W x H or (p x H)
ft
ft
ft
Total volume
1336 ft3
10,000 gallons
Dosing volume
1336 ft3
10,000 gallons
Audible & visual alarms
y-
N/A
N/A
Equipment to prevent utilization during rain events
N/A
N/A
4. List any equipment (note sheet number of the plans or page number in the specifications) not specifically mentioned above
(pump hoist, odor control equipment, etc.):
5. Loading rates recommended by the Soil Scientist Evaluation:
Fields within
Recommended Loading
Recommended Loading
Loading
If Seasonal,
list
Soil Series
Soil Area
Rate
Rate
Recommended
appropriate
(in/hr)
(in/yr)
months
❑ Annual
❑ Seasonal
❑ Annual
❑ Seasonal
❑ Annual
❑ Seasonal
❑ Annual
❑ Seasonal
❑ Annual
❑ Seasonal
6. Design loading rates are equal or less than the loading rates recommended by Soil Scientist? ® Yes or ❑ No
If No, explain why 15A NCAC 2T .0908(m) is not met:
7. In accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0910(a)(1) and (b)(1), how will the public and/or employees be notified of the use of
reclaimed water? storage tank will be labeled "Non -Potable Water, Do Not Drink"
8. In accordance with 15A NCAC 2T .0910(a)(3), what education materials will be provided to property owners of utilization
sites not owned by the generator? N/A
S, 3a IJ5161A c_
a�0 C�tl F'T3
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 14

9. Provide the following location information for the approximate center of each utilization field / zone:
Field / Zone
F7 Latitude
Longitude
#1
340
49 '
19 "
-78 0
53 '
20 "
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
0
,
„
0
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
,
0
,
„
0
O
,
„
0
,
✓ Level of accuracy? + /- 50'
✓ Method of measurement? USGS Quad Maps
✓ Datum?
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 15

10. Utilization Design (fill in the appropriate information for either a spray or drip utilization system):
a. Spray Utilization:
Field / Zone I Design Area (ft) Number of Maximum Precipitation I Design Annual Loading
Nozzles Rate (in/hr) Rate (in/vr)
Spray Utilization Design Element
Plan Sheet
Number
Specification
Page Number
Wetted diameter of nozzles
ft
Wetted area of nozzles
ft2
Nozzle capacity
gpm
Nozzle manufacturer / model
/
Elevation of highest nozzle
ft
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 16

b. Drip Utilization:
Field / Zone Design Area (ft) Number of I Maximum Precipitation I Design Annual Loading
Nozzles Rate (in/hr) Rate (in/vr)
Drip Utilization Design Element
Plan Sheet
Number
. Specification
Pa a Number
.Wetted area of emitters
ft,
Distance between laterals
ft
Distance between emitters
ft
Emitter capacity
gpm
Emitter manufacturer / model
/
Elevation of highest emitter
ft
FORM: RWNCS 12-06 Page 17

11. Cover crop information:
Use the Nutrient Management in North Carolina's Realistic Yield Expectations webpage
(littp://www.soil.nesu.edu/nm-o/nenmwg/yields/index.php#countyl to determine the PAN (lbs/acre) and Phosphorus removal
(lbs/acre) rates for each cover crop.
Cover Crop
Soil Series
%Slope
Nitrogen Removal Rate
(lbs/acre)
Phosphorus Removal
Rate (lbs/acre)
✓ Proposed mineralization rate: and volatilization rate:
✓ Utilization area based upon the nitrogen balance: ft2
✓ Utilization area based upon the phosphorus balance: ft2
✓ Utilization area based upon the water balance: ft2
✓ Utilization sites are: ❑ hydraulically limited ❑ nutrient limited
FORM: -RWNCS 12-06 Page 18

Professional Engineer's Certification.
I, \_ )C a Lei C attest that this application for
has been reviewed by me and is accurate, complete
and consistent with' the information supp i d in the engineering plans, calculations, and all other supporting documentation to the best
of my knowledge. I further attest that to the best of my knowledge the proposed design has been prepared in accordance with this
application package and its instructions as well as all applicable regulations and statutes. Although other professionals may have
developed certain portions of this submittal package, inclusion of these materials under my, signature and seal signifies that I have
reviewed this material and have judged it to be consistent with the proposed design. Note: In accordance with NC General Statutes
143-215.6A and 143-215.613, any person who knowingly makes any false statement, representation, or certification in any application
package shall be guilty of a Class 2 misdemeanor, which may include a fine not to exceed $10,000 as well as civil penalties up to
$25,000 per violation.,
North Carolina Professional Engineer's seal, signature, and date:
Applicant's Certification (signing authority must be in compliance with 15A NCAC 2T.0106(b)).
authority name)
attest that this application for
(facility name)
M.,
(title)
has been reviewed by me and is accurate and complete to the best of my knowledge. I understand that any discharge of wastewater
from this non -discharge system to surface waters or,the land will result in an immediate enforcement action that may include civil
penalties, injunctive relief, and/or criminal prosecution. I will make no claim against the Division of Water Quality should a condition
of this permit be violated: I also understand that if all required parts of this application package are not completed and that if all
required supporting information and attachments are not included, this application package will be returned to me as incomplete. I
further certify that the applicant or any affiliate has not been convicted of an environmental crime, has not abandoned a wastewater
facility without proper closure, does not have an outstanding civil penalty where all appeals have been exhausted or abandoned, are
compliant with any active compliance schedule, and do not have any overdue annual fees under Mule 2T.0105. Note: In accordance
with NC General Statutes 143-215.6A and 143-215.613, any person who knowingly makes any false statement, representation, or
certification in any application package shall be guilty of a Class 2 misdemeanor, which may include a fine not to exceed $10,000 as
well as civil penal ' s up toA25,000 per v olation.
Signature: Date:
RECEIVED I DENR I MNQ RECEIVED / DENR / DWQ
Aquifer Protection Secdon AQUIFF-R'PRQTFCTION SECTION
AUG 0 8 2608 JUN �;2 2008

WATERSHED CLASSIFICATIO ATTACHMENT (FORM. WSCA 10-06)
Applicant's name: . BLADEN. COUNTYWATER DISTRICT
Site/Field County Latitude Longitude Location Location Location Waterbody Subbasin and Current. and
ID Datum, Method Accuracy Stream'lndex,No. Proposed. Class
Code
Irrigation Robeson : 34 49 00 - 78 5350 NAD 83 MAP Second' Lumber; 14-224C; Sw C ; Sw
Site
attest that this attachment form has been prepared by me and:is accurate and complete to the
best: of my knowledge.:Funderstand that if alt required parts of this attachment are: not completed and that: if all required supporting information is not .
included, this a 1' tion pac age will a returned as incomplete. r�
`.�Date
Signature :
FORM: WSCA• 10-06 Page 5 of S Attachment Order 3--
a:

RECEIVE ; DENR / DWQ
AQUIFER?R0TFCTIoN SFCTION
.JUN,�::2 2008
M-1i
BLADEN COUNTY WATER DISTRICT
PHASE III -A EXPANSION
CONTRACT4
TOBERMORY WELL (WELL #9)
IRON REMOVAL SYSTEM
`���- • %cam
Adam P. Kiker, E.I.
r o`
PREPARED BY:
HOBBS, UPCHURCH & ASSOCIATES, P.A.
300 S.W. BROAD STREET
SOUTHERN PINES, NC 28387
MAY 2008

�! Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS
I'
DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
( 01110 SUMMARY OF WORK
01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
DIVISION 02 — SITE WORK
02000 DISINFECTION
02302 EXCAVATION, BACKFIILING, AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES
02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION
02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
02921 TURF
DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE
i_ 03100 CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
03410 PLANT PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
DIVISION 05 — METALS
i,
05500 METAL FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 09 — FINISHES
09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS
s DIVISION 11—EQUIPMENT
11242 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM
11393 PRESSURE FILTRATION UNITS
DIVISION 15 — MECHANICAL
f
15200 PIPELINES, LIQUID PROCESS PIPING
1:1
PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
I�
SECTION 01110
SUMMARY OF WORK
09/01
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.1.1 Project Description
The work shall include construction of the Iron Removal Filters including all site piping, filters, filter
piping, filter building, chemical feed modifications, site electrical, and finished grading required for a
complete function system.
1.1.2 Location
The work shall be located off SR 1300 as shown on the contract drawings.
1.2 LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND FACILITIES
Verify the elevations of existing piping, utilities, and any type of underground obstruction not indicated
or specified to be removed but indicated in locations to be traversed by piping, ducts, and other work to
be installed.
1.2.1 Notification. Prior to Excavation
Notify the Engineer at least 5 days prior to starting excavation work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Not used.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 01110 Page 1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
SECTION 01330
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
09/01
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 DEFINITIONS
1.1.1 Submittal
Shop drawings, product data, samples, and administrative submittals presented for review and
approval.
1.1.2 Types of Submittals
All submittals are classified as indicated in paragraph "Submittal Descriptions (SD)". Submittals also
are grouped as follows:
a. Shop drawings: As used in this section, drawings, schedules, diagrams, and other data
prepared specifically for this contract, by contractor or through contractor by way of
subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, distributor, or other lower tier contractor, to illustrate
portion of work.
b. Product data: Preprinted material such as illustrations, standard schedules, performance
charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, manufacturer's descriptive literature, catalog data,
and other data to illustrate portion of work, but not prepared exclusively for this contract.
c. Samples: Physical examples of products, materials, equipment, assemblies, or workmanship
that are physically identical to portion of work, illustrating portion of work or establishing
standards for evaluating appearance of finished work or both.
1.2 SUBMITTAL IDENTIFICATION (SD)
Submittals required are identified by SD numbers and titles as follows:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
d Certificates of insurance.
Surety bonds.
List of proposed subcontractors.
List of proposed products.
Construction Progress Schedule.
Submittal schedule.
Schedule of values.
Work plan.
SECTION 01330 Pagel

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
l
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate some portion of the work.
Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in producing the product and
as aids to the contractor for integrating the product or system into the project.
Drawings prepared by or for the contractor to show how multiple systems and interdisciplinary
work will be coordinated.
SD-03 Product Data
Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and brochures
illustrating size, physical appearance and other characteristics of materials or equipment for some
portion of the work.
Samples of warranty language when the contract requires extended product warranties.
SD-04 Samples
Physical examples of materials, equipment or workmanship that illustrate functional and aesthetic
characteristics of a material or product and establish standards by which the work can be judged.
Color samples from the manufacturer's standard line (or custom color samples if specified) to be
used in selecting or approving colors for the project.
Field samples and mock-ups constructed on the project site establish standards by which the
ensuring work can be judged. Includes assemblies or portions of assemblies which are to be
incorporated into the project and those which will be removed at conclusion of the work.
SD-05 Design Data
Calculations, mix designs, analyses or other data pertaining to a part of work.
SD-06 Test Reports
Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a material, product or system
identical to the material, product or system to be provided has been tested in accord with
specified requirements. (Testing must have been within three years of date of contract award for
the project.)
Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by the contractor on an actual
portion of the work or prototype prepared for the project before shipment to job site.
Report which includes finding of a test made at the job site or on sample taken from the job site,
on portion of work during or after installation.
Investigation reports
Daily checklists
SECTION 01330 Page 2

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
Final acceptance test and operational test procedure
1
—= SD-07 Certificates
y' Statements signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material
attesting that product, system or material meets specification requirements. Must be dated after
award of project contract and clearly name the project.
1,
1_ Document required of Contractor, or of a supplier, installer or subcontractor through Contractor,
the purpose of which is to further quality of orderly progression of a portion of the work by
documenting procedures, acceptability of methods or personnel qualifications.
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or material, including special
notices and Material Safety Data sheets concerning impedances, hazards and safety precautions.
SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer's representative to
confirm compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions.
Factory test reports.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Data intended to be incorporated in operations and maintenance manuals
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative requirements or to establish
an administrative mechanism.
As -built drawings.
Special warranties.
Posted operating instructions.
Training plan.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
! Submit the following in accordance with the requirements of this section.
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submittal register
SECTION 01330 Page 3

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
1.4. USE OF SUBMITTAL REGISTER
Prepare and maintain submittal register, as the work progresses. Use electronic submittal register
program furnished by the Engineer or any other format.
1.5 PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTALS
1.5.1 Reviewing, Certifying
The Engineer shall be responsible for reviewing and certifying that submittals are in compliance with
contract requirements.
1.5.2 Constraints
a. Submittals listed or specified in this contract shall conform to provisions of this section, unless
explicitly stated otherwise.
b. Submittals shall be complete for each definable feature of work; components of definable
feature interrelated as a system shall be submitted at same time.
c. When acceptability of a submittal is dependent on conditions, items, or materials included in
separate subsequent submittals, submittal will be returned without review.
d. Approval of a separate material, product, or component does not imply approval of assembly
in which item functions.
1.5.3 Scheduling
a. Coordinate scheduling, sequencing, preparing and processing of submittals with performance
of work so that work will not be delayed by submittal processing. Allow for potential
requirements to resubmit.
b. Except as specified otherwise, allow review period, of 21 days for Engineer approval. Period
of review for submittals with Engineer approval begins when Engineer receives submittal
from the contractor. Period of review for each resubmittal is the same as for initial
submittal.
1.5.4 Variations
Variations from contract requirements require approval by the Engineer.
1.5.4.1 Considering Variations
Discussion with Engineer prior to submission, will help ensure functional and quality requirements are
met and minimize rejections and resubmittals.
1.5.4.2 Proposing Variations
When proposing variation, deliver written request to the Engineer, with documentation of the nature
and features of the variation and why the variation is desirable and beneficial to Owner. If lower cost
is a benefit, also include an estimate of the cost saving. In addition to documentation required for
i
D
SECTION 01330 Page 4

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
variation, include the submittals required for the item. Clearly mark the proposed variation in all
documentation.
1.5.4.3 Warranting That Variations Are Compatible
When delivering a variation for approval, contractor warrants that this contract has been reviewed to
establish that the variation, if incorporated, will be compatible with other elements of work.
1.5.4.4 Review Schedule Is Modified
In addition to normal submittal review period, a period of 15 working days will be allowed for
consideration by the Engineer of submittals with variations.
1.5.5 Contractor's Responsibilities
a. Determine and verify field measurements, materials, field construction criteria; review each
�'. submittal; and check and coordinate each submittal with requirements of the work and
contract documents.
b. Transmit submittals to Engineer in accordance with schedule on approved Submittal Register,
and to prevent delays in the work, delays to Owner, or delays to separate contractors.
c. Correct and resubmit submittal as directed by Engineer. When resubmitting disapproved
transmittals or transmittals noted for resubmittal, the contractor shall provide copy of that
previously submitted transmittal including all reviewer comments for use by Engineer.
Direct specific attention in writing or on resubmitted submittal, to revisions not requested
by Engineer on previous submissions.
d. Complete work which must be accomplished as basis of a submittal in time to allow submittal
1 i to occur as scheduled.
e. Ensure no work has begun until submittals for that work have been returned as "approved," or
"approved as noted", except to the extent that a portion of work must be accomplished as
basis of submittal.
1.5.6 Engineer Responsibilities
a. Note date on which submittal was received from contractor on each submittal.
r
b. Review each submittal; and check and coordinate each submittal with requirements of work
' and contract documents.
c. Review submittals for conformance with project design concepts and compliance with
contract documents.
d. Ensure that material is clearly legible.
e. Stamp each sheet of each submittal with approving statement, except that data submitted in
bound volume or on one sheet printed on two sides may be stamped on the front of the first
sheet only.
SECTION 01330 Page 5

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
1:1
f. Retain three copies of approved submittals, one at the project site, including contractor's copy
of approved samples.
1.5.7 Actions Possible
Submittals will be returned with one of the following notations:
a. Submittals marked "not reviewed" will indicate submittal has been previously reviewed and
approved, is not required, does not have evidence of being reviewed and approved by
contractor, or is not complete. A submittal marked "not reviewed" will be returned with an
explanation of the reason it is not reviewed. Resubmit submittals returned for lack of review
by contractor or for being incomplete, with appropriate action, coordination, or change.
b. Submittals marked "approved" "approved as submitted" authorize contractor to proceed with
work covered.
c. Submittals marked "approved as noted" or "approval except as noted; resubmission not
required" authorize contractor to proceed with work as noted provided contractor takes no
exception to the notations.
d. Submittals marked "revise and resubmit" or "disapproved" indicate submittal is incomplete or
does not comply with design concept or requirements of the contract documents and shall
be resubmitted with appropriate changes. No work shall proceed for this item until
resubmittal is approved.
1.6 FORMAT OF SUBMITTALS
1.6.1 Transmittal Form
Transmit each submittal, except sample installations and sample panels, to office of Engineer.
Transmit submittals with transmittal form prescribed by Engineer and standard for project. The
transmittal form shall identify contractor, indicate date of submittal, and include information prescribed
by transmittal form and required in paragraph entitled "Identifying Submittals." Process transmittal
forms to record actions regarding sample panels and sample installations.
1.6.2 Identifying Submittals
Identify submittals, except sample panel and sample installation, with the following information
permanently adhered to or noted on each separate component of each submittal and noted on
transmittal form. Mark each copy of each submittal identically, with the following:
a. Project title and location.
b. Section number of the specification section by which submittal is required.
c. When a resubmission, add alphabetic suffix on submittal description, for example, SD-10A, to
indicate resubmission.
d. Name, address, and telephone number of subcontractor, supplier, manufacturer and any other
second tier contractor associated with submittal.
SECTION 01330 Page 6

1 Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
e. Product identification and location in project.
1.6.3 Format for Product Data
a. Present product data submittals for each section as a complete, bound volume. Include table
of contents, listing page and catalog item numbers for product data.
b. Indicate, by prominent notation, each product which is being submitted; indicate specification
section number and paragraph number to which it pertains.
c. Supplement product data with material prepared for project to satisfy submittal requirements
for which product data does not exist. Identify this material as developed specifically for
project.
1.6.4 Format for Shop Drawings
a. Shop drawings shall not be less than 8 1/2 by 11 inches nor more than 24 by 36 inches.
b. Present 8 1/2 by 11 inches sized shop drawings as part of the bound volume for submittals
required by section. Present larger drawings in sets.
c. Include on each drawing the drawing title, number, date, and revision numbers and dates, in
addition to information required in paragraph entitled "Identifying Submittals."
d. Dimension drawings, except diagrams and schematic drawings; prepare drawings.
_ demonstrating interface with other trades to scale. Shop drawing dimensions shall be the
({ same unit of measure as indicated on the contract drawings. Identify materials and .products
I�
J for work shown.
1.6.5 Format of Samples
a. Furnish samples in sizes below, unless otherwise specified or unless the manufacturer has
prepackaged samples of approximately same size as specified:
(1) Sample of Equipment or Device: Full size.
(2) Sample of Materials Less Than 2 by 3 inches: Built up to 8 1/2 by 11 inches.
(3) Sample of Materials Exceeding 8 1/2 by 11 inches: Cut down to 8 1/2 by 11 inches and
adequate to indicate color, texture, and material variations.
(4) Sample of Linear Devices or Materials: 10 inch length or length to be supplied, if less
than 10 inches. Examples of linear devices or materials are conduit and handrails.
(5) Sample of Non -Solid Materials: Pint. Examples of non -solid materials are sand and
paint.
(6) Color Selection Samples: 2 by 4 inches.
(7) Sample Panel: 4 by 4 feet.
SECTION 01330 Page 7

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
(8) Sample Installation: 100 square feet.
b. Samples Showing Range of Variation: Where variations are unavoidable due to nature of the
materials, submit sets of samples of not less than three units showing extremes and middle
of range.
c. Reusable Samples: Incorporate returned samples into work only if so specified or indicated.
Incorporated samples shall be in undamaged condition at time of use.
d. Recording of Sample Installation: Note and preserve the notation of area constituting sample
installation but remove notation at final clean up of project.
e. When color, texture or pattern is specified by naming a particular manufacturer and style,
include one sample of that manufacturer and style, for comparison.
1.6.6 Format of Administrative Submittals
a. When submittal includes a document which is to be used in project or become part of project
record, other than as a submittal, do not apply contractor's approval stamp to document, but
to a separate sheet accompanying document.
b. Operation and Maintenance Manual Data: Submit in accordance with Section 01781N,
"Operation and Maintenance Data." Include components required in that section and the
various technical sections.
1.7 QUANTITY OF SUBMITTALS
1.7.1 Number of Copies of Product Data
a. Submit ten copies of submittals of product data requiring review and approval by Engineer
Submit six copies of submittals of product data for operation and maintenance manuals.
1.7.2 Number of Copies of Shop Drawings
Submit shop drawings in compliance with quantity requirements specified for product data.
1.7.3 Number of Samples
a. Submit three samples, or three sets of samples showing range of variation, of each required
item. One approved sample or set of samples will be retained by Engineer and one will be
returned to contractor.
b. Submit one sample panel. Include components listed in technical section or as directed.
c. Submit one sample installation, where directed.
d. Submit one sample of non -solid materials.
1.8 SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION
Submittals are classified as follows:
SECTION 01330 Page 8

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
I.
BC0802
Y? 1.8.1 Engineer Approved
f
Engineer design approval is required for extensions of design, critical materials, deviations, equipment
whose compatibility with the entire system must be checked, and other items as designated by the
Engineer. Within the terms of the Contract Clause entitled "Specifications and Drawings for
Construction," they are considered to be "shop drawings."
1.9 APPROVED SUBMITTALS
The Engineer's approval of submittals shall not be construed as a complete check, but will indicate only
that the general method of construction, materials, detailing and other information are satisfactory.
Approval will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error which may exist, as the
Contractor is responsible for dimensions, the design of adequate connections and details, and the
satisfactory construction of all work. After submittals have been approved by the Engineer, no
resubmittal for the purpose of substituting materials or equipment will be considered unless
accompanied by an explanation of why a substitution is necessary.
1.10 DISAPPROVED SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall make all corrections required by the Engineer and promptly furnish a corrected
submittal in the form and number of copies specified for the initial submittal. If the Contractor
considers any correction indicated on the submittals to constitute a change to the contract, a notice in
accordance with the Contract Clause "Changes" shall be given promptly to the Engineer.
1.11 WITHHOLDING OF PAYMENT
Payment for materials incorporated in the work will not be made if required approvals have not been
obtained.
1.12 GENERAL
I , The Contractor shall make submittals as required by the specifications. The Engineer may request
submittals in addition to those specified when deemed necessary to adequately describe the work
covered in the respective sections. Units of weights and measures used on all submittals shall be the
_ same as those used in the contract drawings. Each submittal shall be complete and in sufficient detail
to allow ready determination of compliance with contract requirements. Prior to submittal, all items
- shall be checked and approved by the Contractor and each item shall be stamped, signed, and dated by
the Contractor indicating action taken. Proposed deviations from the contract requirements shall be
clearly identified. Submittals shall include items such as: Contractor's, manufacturer's, or fabricator's
drawings; descriptive literature including (but not limited to) catalog cuts, diagrams, operating charts or
curves; test reports; test cylinders; samples; O&M manuals (including parts list); certifications;.
warranties; and other such required submittals. Submittals requiring Engineer approval shall be
scheduled and made prior to the acquisition of the material or equipment covered thereby. Samples
remaining upon completion of the work shall be picked up and disposed of in accordance with
manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and in compliance with existing laws and
regulations.
SECTION 01330 Page 9

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
1.13 SCHEDULING
k�
Submittals covering component items forming a system or items that are interrelated shall be scheduled
to be coordinated and submitted concurrently. Certifications to be submitted with the pertinent
drawings shall be so scheduled. Adequate time (a minimum of 40 calendar days exclusive of mailing
time) shall be allowed and shown on the register for review and approval. No delay damages or time
extensions will be allowed for time lost in late submittals.
1.14 TRANSMITTAL FORM
An approved transmittal form shall be used for submitting both Engineer approved and information
only submittals in accordance with the instructions on the reverse side of the form. This form shall be
properly completed by filling out all the heading blank spaces and identifying each item submitted.
Special care shall be exercised to ensure proper listing of the specification paragraph and/or sheet
number of the contract drawings pertinent to the data submitted for each item.
1.15 CONTROL OF SUBMITTALS
The Contractor shall carefully control his procurement operations to ensure that each individual
submittal is made on or before the Contractor scheduled submittal date shown on the approved
"Submittal Register."
PART 2 PRODUCTS 'f
Not used.
PART 3 . EXECUTION
Not used.
-- End of Section --
C i?
L
SECTION 01330 Page 10

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
SECTION 02000
DISINFECTION
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and material necessary to provide disinfection for the water
treatment plant as shown on the drawings and described in the specifications.
Prior to being placed into operation all basins (excluding sludge treatment) pipes and storage facilities shall
be disinfected in accordance with American Waterworks Association Standard D102-78 and North
Carolina DENR standards. Two or more successive sets of samples, taken at 24-hour intervals, shall
indicate microbiologically satisfactory water before the facility is placed in operation. Disinfection shall be
accomplished by:
1. Contact with a chlorine solution of concentration not less than fifty parts per million for a
minimum contact period of twenty four hours, or
2. Through wetting of the surfaces to be disinfected by means of brush or spray application of a
chlorine solution of concentration not less than two hundred parts per million (200 ppm) a
minimum contact time of two (2) hours.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Disinfection Plan and Schedule
Dechlorination Plan
SD-03 Product Data
SD-04 Samples
r-.
SD-07 Certificates
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not used.
r
SECTION.02000 Page 1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall disinfect all pipes, basins, tanks, equipment, etc. that will come in contact with treated
water beginning with the distribution channel through the finished water pump station discharge pipe to the
point of connection. A disinfection plan and schedule shall be developed and reviewed by the Engineer.
3.2 DISPOSAL OF CHLORINATED WATER
The water used for disinfection shall be dechlorinated to a chlorine residual of 0.5 ppm or less prior to
discharge. The Contractor shall prepare a plan for dechlorination prior to beginning operation.
--End of Section --
SECTION 02000 Page 2

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
1:1
SECTION 02302
EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN CONCRETE PIPE ASSOCIATION (ACPA)
ACPA 01-103 (1990) Concrete Pipe Installation Manual
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM D 698 (1991) Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Standard
Effort (12,400 ft-lbs/ft (600 kN-m/m))
ASTM D 1140 (1997) Amount of Material in Soils Finer
Than the No. 200 (75-Micrometer) Sieve
ASTM D 1556 (1990; R 1996) Density and Unit Weight of
Soil in Place by the Sand -Cone Method
ASTM D 1557 (1991) Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Modified
Effort (56,000 ft-lbs/ft (2,700 kN-m/m))
ASTM D 4253 (1993) Maximum Index Density of Soils
Using a Vibratory Table
ASTM D 4254 (1991) Minimum Index Density and Unit
Weight of Soils and Calculation of
Relative Density
ASTM D 4318
COE EM-385-1-1
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Backfill
(1995; Rev. A) Liquid Limit, Plastic
Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE)
(1996) Safety and Health Requirements
Manual
Material used in refilling a cut, trench or other excavation.
SECTION 02302 Page 1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802 i
U
1.2.2 Cohesive Materials
Soils classified by ASTM D 2487 as GC, SC, ML, CL, MH, and CH. Materials classified as GM and
SM will be identified as cohesive only when fines have a plasticity index greater than zero.
1.2.3 Cohesionless Materials
Soils classified by ASTM D 2487 as GW, GP, SW, and SP. Materials classified as GM and SM will be
identified as cohesionless only when the fines have a plasticity index of zero.
1.2.4 Compaction
The process of mechanically stabilizing a material by increasing its density at a controlled moisture
condition. "Degree of Compaction" is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by
the test procedure described in ASTM D 698 or ASTM D 1557 for general soil types or ASTM D 4253
or ASTM D 4254 (Relative Density) for isolated cohesionless materials, abbreviated in this
specification as "95 percent ASTM D 698 maximum density."
1.2.5 Granular Pipe Bedding
A dense, well -graded aggregate mixture of sand, gravel, or crushed stone (mixed individually, in
combination with each other, or with suitable binder soil) placed on a subgrade to provide a suitable
foundation for pipe. Granular bedding material may also consist of poorly graded sands or gravels
where fast draining soil characteristics are desired.
1.2.6 Hard Material
Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits, or conglomerate materials (excluding man made
materials such as concrete) which are not included in the definition of "rock" but which usually require
the use of heavy excavation equipment, ripper teeth, or jack hammers for removal.
1.2.7 In -Situ Soil
Existing in place soil.
1.2.8 Lift
A layer (or course) of soil placed on top of subgrade or a previously prepared or placed soil in a fill or
backfill.
1.2.9 Porous Fill
A granular soil material having a large void ratio when placed and compacted, allowing a free flow of
fluid to or from the surrounding soil, with no more than 5 percent of the material passing the No. 100
Sieve.
1.2.10 Refill
Material placed in excavation to correct overcut in depth.
SECTION 02302 Page 2

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
1:1
1.2.11 Rock
Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented, laminated, foliated masses
or conglomerate deposits, neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling and blasting,
drilling and the use of expansion jacks or feather wedges, or the use of backhoe-mounted pneumatic
hole punchers or rock breakers; also large boulders, buried masonry, or concrete other than pavement
exceeding 1/2 cubic yard in volume. Removal of "hard material' will not be considered rock
excavation because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed merely to increase
production.
1.2.12 Topsoil
In natural or undisturbed soil formations, the fine-grained, weathered material on the surface or directly
below any loose or partially decomposed organic matter. Topsoil may be a dark -colored, fine, silty, or
sandy material with a high content of well- decomposed organic matter, often containing traces of the
parent rock material. Gradation and material requirements specified herein apply to all topsoil
references in this contract. The material shall be representative of productive soils in the vicinity.
1.2.13 Unyielding Material
Rock rib, ridge, rock protrusion, or soil with cobbles in the trench bottom requiring a covering of finer
grain material or special bedding to avoid bridging in the pipe or conduit.
1.2.14 Unsatisfactory Material
_ In -Situ soil or other material that can be identified as having insufficient strength characteristics or
stability to carry intended loads in the trench without excessive consolidation or loss of stability. Also
_. backfill material that contains refuse, frozen material, large rocks, debris, soluble particles, and other
material that could damage the pipe or cause the backfill not to compact. Materials classified as PT,
OH, or OL by ASTM D 2487 are unsatisfactory.
1.2.15 Unstable Material
Material in the trench bottom that lacks firmness to maintain alignment and prevent joints from
separating in the pipe, conduit, or appurtenance structure during backfilling. This may be material
otherwise identified as satisfactory which has been disturbed or saturated.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal Procedures."
1.3.1 SD-02 Shop Drawings
a. Shoring and sheeting plan
b. Dewatering plan
SECTION 02302 Page 3

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
1.3.1.1 Shoring and Sheeting Plan
Describe materials of shoring system to be used. Indicate whether or not components will remain after
filling or backfilling. Provide plans, sketches, or details along with calculations by a professional
engineer registered in any jurisdiction. Indicate sequence and method of installation and removal.
1.3.1.2 Dewatering Plan
Describe methods for removing collected water from open trenches and diverting surface water or
piped flow away from work area. Describe the basic components of the dewatering system proposed
for use and its planned method of operation. Dewatering plan, as a minimum, shall address those
requirements outlined in paragraph entitled "Drainage and Dewatering."
1.3.2 SD —06 Test Reports
a. Under -drainage backfill material tests
b. Concrete tests
c. Trench backfill material tests
d. Pipe bedding material tests
e. Topsoil tests
1.3.3 SD-06 Field Test Reports
a. Test for moisture -density relation
b. Topsoil tests
c. Density and moisture tests
Submit field test data not listed above sufficiently in advance of construction so as not to delay work.
1.3.3.1 Test for Moisture -Density Relation
Submit 7 days prior to commencing utility excavation.
1.3.3.2 Topsoil Tests
Submit topsoil tests verifying conformance to required parameters prior to commencing seeding
operations.
1.3.3.3 Density and Moisture Tests
Submit within 14 days of test date.
SECTION 02302 Page 4

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
` 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
I'
�a
Materials and workmanship specified herein with reference to NC DOT State Standard shall be in
accordance with the referenced articles, sections, and paragraphs of the standard except that contractual
and payment provisions do not apply.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
f Deliver and store materials in a manner to prevent contamination, segregation, freezing, and other
damage. Store synthetic fiber filter fabric to prevent exposure to direct sunlight.
1.6 CRITERIA FORBIDDING
i Base bids on the following criteria:
a. Surface elevations are as indicated.
b. No pipes or other man-made obstructions, except those indicated, will be encountered.
c. No prior subsurface investigation has been performed for this project (other than soil science
l report). However, in preparing the bid, the Contractor shall assume that "Rock" or "Hard
Material" as defined in the paragraph entitled "Definitions", will not be encountered.
i
d. The Contractor should be aware of the possibility of encountering material not suitable for
- foundation or backfill material in the excavation for this project, defined as either "Unsatisfactory
Material" or "Unstable Material" in the paragraph entitled "Definitions".
1.7 PROTECTION
1.7.1 Dewatering Plan
Base site surface and subsurface conditions, available soil and hydrological data.
1.7.2 Utilities
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities during construction shall
be at the Contractor's risk. For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or
other buried obstruction, excavate by hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated
obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is
assured. Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected by the contract excavation until
approval for backfill is granted by the Engineer. Report damage to utility lines or subsurface
construction immediately to the Engineer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
r 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
Provide soil materials as specified below free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetable matter,
refuse, soft unsound particles, ice, or other deleterious and objectionable materials.
SECTION 02302 Page 5

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802 1 P
U
2.1.1 Backfill
Bring trenches to grade indicated on the drawings using material excavated on the site of this project.
This material will be considered unclassified and no testing other than for compaction will be required
before use as Backfill except that the liquid limit of the material cannot exceed 35 percent when tested
in accordance with ASTM D 4318, the plasticity index cannot exceed 12 percent when tested in
accordance with ASTM D4318, and not more than 35 percent by weight can be 2.1.2 Text is tags
exceeds the maximum length of 300 characters.
2.1.2 Gravel
Clean, coarsely graded natural gravel, crushed stone or a combination thereof identified as NCDOT
#57, NCDOT #67.
2.1.3 Topsoil Material
Free of subsoil, stumps, rocks larger than 3/4 inch in diameter (with maximum 3 percent retained on
1/4 inch sieve), brush, weeds, toxic substances, and other material or substance detrimental to plant
growth. Topsoil shall be a natural, friable soil representative of productive soils in the vicinity.
2.1.4 Borrow (Select Backfill Material)
Where excavated material is deemed unfit for use as foundation or backfill, provide materials meeting
requirement for bedding or backfill. Obtain borrow materials is excess of those unfit from excavations
specified herein from borrow areas specified by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
2.1.5 Pipe Bedding
Provide material for specific types of pipe bedding as specified in Table 1 for pipe material listed.
SPECIFICATION
PIPE MATERIAL SECTION
Polyvinyl Chloride 02530
(PVC) Non -pressure
Pipe
Polyvinyl Chloride 02510
(PVC) Pressure Pipe
Ductile Iron Pipe 02510, 02530
TABLE 1
SOIL MATERIALS
INSTALLATION
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
ASTM 2321, except
ASTM 2321
bedding material shall be
NCDOT #57 or #67
stone, include as
haunching to 6" above
top of pipe
ASTM 2774, Material
ASTM 2774
surrounding pipe shall
have Yz" maximum
particle size
AWWA C600, except
AWWA 600
refill of over cut shall be
NCDOT #57 or #67
stone, bedding shall be
GW, GP or SW
SECTION 02302 Page 6

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
3.1.1 Shoring and Sheeting
Provide shoring trench boxes and sheeting where required, according to subsurface conditions and
11 depth of trench. In addition to Section 25 A and B of COR EM-385-1-1, include provisions in the
-T shoring and sheeting plan that will accomplish the following:
a. Prevent undermining of pavements, foundations and slabs.
b. Prevent slippage or movement in banks or slopes adjacent to the excavation.
j c. Allow for the abandonment of shoring and sheeting materials in place in critical areas as the work
is completed. In these areas, backfill the excavation to within 3 feet of the finished grade and
remove the remaining exposed portion of the shoring before completing the backfill.
3.1.2 Drainage and Dewatering
Plan for and provide the structures, equipment, and construction for the collection and disposal of
surface and subsurface water encountered in the course of construction.
3.1.2.1 Drainage
Surface water shall be directed away from excavation and construction sites so as to prevent erosion
and undermining of foundations. Diversion ditches, dikes and grading shall be provided and
t __r maintained as necessary during construction. Excavated slopes and backfill surfaces shall be protected
to prevent erosion and sloughing. Excavation shall be performed so that the site and the area
immediately surrounding the site and affecting operations at the site shall be continually and effectively
drained.
3.1.3 Dewatering
Groundwater flowing toward or into excavations shall be controlled to prevent sloughing of excavation
I slopes and walls, boils, uplift and heave in the excavation and to eliminate interference with orderly
progress of construction. French drains, sumps, ditches or trenches will not be permitted within 3 feet
of the foundation of any structure, except with specific written approval, and after specific contractual
provisions for restoration of the foundation area have been made. Control measures shall be taken by
the time the excavation reaches the water level in order to maintain the integrity of the situ material.
While the excavation is open, the water level shall be maintained continuously, at least 3 feet below the
working level.
Operate the dewatering system until construction work below existing water levels is complete.
Measure and record the performance of the dewatering system. Have a back-up pump and system
available for immediate use.
1,
SECTION 02302 Page 7

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802 '1
3.1.4 Underground Utilities
Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall physically verify the
location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting construction. The Contractor
shall contact Bladen County for assistance in locating existing utilities.
3.1.5 Structures and Surfaces
Protect newly backfilled areas and adjacent structures, slopes, or grades from traffic, erosion
settlement, or any other damage. Repair and reestablish damaged or eroded graded and slopes and f 'r
restore surface construction prior to acceptance. Protect existing streams, ditches, and storm drain I '
inlets from water -borne soil by means of as indicated on the contract drawings. Perform work in
accordance with requirements specified in Section 01575, "Temporary Environmental Controls."
3.1.5.1 Disposal of Excavated Material J
Dispose of excavated material so that it will not obstruct the flow of runoff, streams, endanger a partly
finished structure, impair the efficiency or appearance of any facilities, or be detrimental to the
completed work.
-I
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
3.2.1 Stockpiling Topsoil
Strip suitable soil from the site where excavation or grading is indicated and stockpile separately from T
other excavated material. Material unsuitable for use as topsoil shall be stockpiled and used for
backfilling. Locate topsoil so that the material can be used readily for the finished grading. Where
sufficient existing topsoil conforming to the material requirements is not available on site, provide
borrow materials suitable for use as topsoil. Protect topsoil and keep in segregated piles until needed.
3.2.2 Cutting Pavement, Curbs, and Gutters
Saw cut with neat, parallel, straight lines one foot wider than trench width on each side of trenches and
one foot beyond each edge of pits. When the saw cut is within 5 feet of an existing joint, remove
pavement to the existing joint.
3.3 GENERAL EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING
Keep excavations free from water while construction is in progress. Notify the Engineer immediately
in writing if it becomes necessary to remove rock or hard, unstable, or otherwise unsatisfactory
material to a depth greater than indicated. Make trench sides as nearly vertical as practicable except
where sloping of sides is allowed. Sides of trenches shall not be sloped from the bottom of the trench
up to the excavation of the top of the pipe Overexcavate soft, weak, or wet excavations. Use bedding
material placed in 6-inch maximum layers to refill overdepths to the proper grade. At the Contractor's r
option, the excavations may be cut to an overdepth of not less than 4 inches and refilled to required
grade as specified. Grade bottom of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for
each section of pipe on undisturbed soil, or bedding material as indicated or specified at every point
along its entire length except for portions where it is necessary to excavate for bell holes and for
making proper joints. Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after trench has been graded.
Dimension of bell holes shall be as required for properly making the particular type of joint to ensure
that the bell does not bear on the bottom of the excavation. Trench dimensions shall be as indicated.
-1
SECTION 02302 Page 8
fj

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
3.3.1 Shoring and Sheeting
Shore and sheet excavations as described in the plan submitted with various member sizes arranged to
prevent injury to persons and damage to structures. Arrange shoring and sheeting to preclude injurious
caving during removal. Obtain approval from the Engineer prior to removing shoring, sheeting or
bracing in excavations adjacent to on -grade slabs, foundations, or other structural elements.
3.4 BEDDING
Of materials and depths as specified for utility lines and utility line structures. Place bedding in 6-
inch maximum loose lifts. Provide uniform and continuous support for each section of structure
except at bell holes or depressions necessary for making proper joints.
3.4.1 Polyvinyl (PVC) Pipe / Ductile Iron Pipe
Water Mains:
Pipe shall be installed on 4" of loose soil with embedment lightly consolidated to top of pipe (Type 3
trench).
3.5 BACKFILLING
Construct backfill in two operations (initial and final) as indicated and specified in this section. Place
initial backfill in 6-inch maximum loose lifts to one foot above pipe unless otherwise specified. Ensure
that initially placed material is tamped firmly underpipe haunches. Bring up evenly on each side and
along the full length of the pipe, structure. Ensure that no damage is done to the utility or its protective
coating. Place the remainder of the backfill (final backfill) in 9-inch maximum loose lifts unless
otherwise specified. Compact each loose life as specified in the paragraph entitled "General
Compaction" before placing the next lift. Do not backfill in freezing weather or where the material in
the trench is already frozen or is muddy, except as authorized. Provide a minimum cover from final
grade of 2 feet for sewer mains and storm drains. Where settlements greater than the tolerance allowed
herein for grading occur in trenches and pits due to improper compaction, excavate to the depth
necessary to rectify the problem, then backfill and compact the excavation as specified herein and
restore the surface to the required elevation. Coordinate backfilling with testing of utilities.
3.6 COMPACTION
Use hand -operated, plate -type, vibratory, or other suitable hand tampers in areas not accessible to
j larger roller or compactors. Avoid damaging pipes and protective pipe coatings. Compact material in
accordance with the following unless otherwise specified. If necessary, alter, change, or modify
selected equipment or compaction methods to meet specified compaction requirements.
3.6.1 Compaction of Material in Subcuts or Overexcavations
In soft, weak, or wet soils, tamp refill materials to consolidate to density of adjacent material in trench
wall. In stable soils, compact to 90 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density.
3.6.2 Compaction of Pipe and Conduit Bedding
- In rock, compact to 95 in soil, compact to 90 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density.
SECTION 02302 Page 9

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
3.6.3 Compaction of Backfill
Compact initial backfill material surrounding pipes, cables, conduits, or ducts, to 90 percent of ASTM
D 1557 maximum density except where bedding and backfill are the same material. Where bedding
and backfill are the same material, compact initial backfill to the density of the bedding. Under areas
to be seeded or sodded, compact succeeding layers of final backfill to 85 percent of ASTM D 1557
maximum density. For utilities under structures and pavements compact succeeding layers of final
backfill as specified under paragraph entitled "Special Earthwork Installation Requirements."
3.7 SPECIAL EARTHWORK INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3.7.1 Manholes and Other Appurtenances
Provide at least 12 inches clear from outer surfaces to the embankment or shoring. Remove rock as
specified herein. Remove unstable soil that is incapable of supporting the structure to an overdepth of
one foot and refill with gravel to the proper elevation. Stabilize soft, weak, or wet excavations as
indicated. Refill overdepths with gravel to the required grade and compact as specified.
3.7.2 Compaction for Structures and Pavements
Place final backfill in 6-inch maximum loose lifts. If a vibratory roller is used for compaction of final
backfill, the lift thickness can be increased to 9 inches. Compact all backfill surrounding pipes, ducts,
conduits, and other structures to 90 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density except compact the
top 12 inches of subgrade to 95 percent of ASTM D 1557 maximum density. Backfill to permit the
rolling and compacting of the completed excavation with the adjoining material, providing the
specified density necessary to enable paving of the area immediately after backfillirig has been
completed.
3.8 FINISH OPERATIONS
3.8.1 Grading
Finish to grades indicated within one -tenth of a foot. Provide sod or topsoil in areas to be seeded or
sodded in accordance with requirements specified in Section 02921, "Turf." Grade areas to drain water
away from structures and to provide suitable surfaces for mowing machines. Grade existing grades
that are to remain but have been disturbed by the Contractor's operations.
3.8.2 Spreading Topsoil
Clear areas to receive topsoil for the finished surface of materials that would interfere with planting and
maintenance operations. Scarify subgrade to a depth of 2 inches. Do not place topsoil when the
subgrade is frozen, extremely wet or dry, or in other conditions detrimental to seeding, planting, or
grading spread topsoil to a uniform depth of 4 inches over the designated areas.
3.8.3 Borrow Area
Grade to drain properly. Maintain and restore borrow pits as specified in Section 01575, "Temporary
Environmental Controls."
SECTION 02302 Page 10
i

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
,a
BC0802
3.8.4 Disposition of Surplus Material
The contractor shall dispose of surplus or other soil material not required or suitable for filling,
backfilling, or grading.
3.8.5 Protection of Surfaces
Protect newly graded areas from traffic, erosion, and settlements that may occur and as required in
Section 01575, "Temporary Environmental Controls." Repair or reestablish damaged grades,
elevations, or slopes.
3.8.6 Pavement Repair
Repair pavement, curbs, and gutters as specified in Section 02741, "Bituminous Concreted Pavement',
Section 02752, "Portland Cement Concrete Pavement' and Section 03300, "Cast -In -Place Concrete".
Do not repair pavement until trench or pit has been backfilled and compacted as specified herein.
Provide a temporary road surface of �p ry gravel crushed stone over backfilled portion until permanent
i pavement is repaired. Remove and dispose of temporary road surface material when permanent
—" pavement is placed. As a minimum, maintain one-way traffic on roads and streets crossed by trenches.
Fully open roads and streets to traffic within 14 days.
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
( Test bedding for conformance to specified requirements. Test backfill to be used under roads and
4 paved areas for conformance to special requirements. Test bedding and backfill for moisture -density
relations in accordance with ASTM D 1557 as specified herein. Perform at least one of each of the
required. tests for each material provided. Perform sufficiently in advance of construction so as not to
delay work. Provide additional tests as specified above for each change of source. Perform density
and moisture tests in randomly selected locations and in accordance with ASTM D 1556 as follows:
a. Bedding and backfill in trenches: One test per mile of pipe in each lift.
b. Appurtenance structures: One test per 100 square feet or fraction thereof in each lift.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 02302, Page 11

r, Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
SECTION 02510
WATER DISTRIBUTION
09/98
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and material necessary to provide water distribution as
shown on the drawings and described in the specifications.
1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1.2.1 Plant Water Mains
Provide plant water mains as indicated on the plans of ductile -iron polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic.
Provide water main accessories, butterfly valves, gate valves check valves, etc. as specified and where
indicated.
1.2.2 Water Service Lines
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal Procedures."
1.3.1 SD-02 Manufacturer's Catalog Data
a. Water piping, fittings, joints, valves, and couplings
b. Hydrants
c. Electric valve actuator
d. Valve boxes
Submit manufacturer's standard drawings or catalog cuts, except submit both drawings and cuts for
push -on and rubber-gasketed bell -and -spigot joints. Include information concerning gaskets with
submittal for joints and couplings.
1.3.2 SD-06Instructions
a. Installation procedures for water piping
1.3.3 SD-13 Certificates
a. Water main piping, fittings, joints, valves, and couplings
b. Shop -applied lining and coating
SECTION 02510 Page 1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802 I
c. Electric valve actuator
d. Fire hydrants
Certificates shall attest that tests set forth in each applicable referenced publication have been
performed, whether specified in that publication to be mandatory or otherwise and that production
control tests have been performed at the intervals or frequency specified in the publication. Other tests
shall have been performed within 3 years of the date of submittal of certificates on the same type, class,
grade, and size of material as is being provided for the project.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.4.1 Delivery and Storage
Inspect materials delivered to site for damage. Unload and store with minimum handling. Store
materials on site in enclosures or under protective covering. Store plastic piping, jointing materials and
rubber gaskets under cover out of direct sunlight. Do not store materials directly on the ground. Keep
inside of pipes, fittings, valves and hydrants free of dirt and debris.
1.4.2 Handling
Handle pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and other accessories in a manner to ensure delivery to the
trench in sound undamaged condition. Take special care to avoid injury to coatings and linings on pipe
and fittings; make satisfactory repairs if coatings or linings are damaged. Carry, do not drag pipe to the
trench. Store plastic piping, jointing materials and rubber gaskets that are not to be installed
immediately, under cover out of direct sunlight.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER DISTRIBUTION MAIN MATERIALS
2.1.1 Piping Materials
2.1.1.1 Ductile -Iron Piping
a. Pipe and Fittings: Pipe, except flanged pipe, ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51, Pressure Class
250. Flanged pipe, AWWA C115/A21.15. Fittings, AWWA C110/A21.10 or AWWA
C153/A21.53; fittings with push -on joint ends conforming to the same requirements as
fittings - with mechanical joint ends, except that the bell design shall be modified, as
approved, for push -on joint. Fittings shall have pressure rating at least equivalent to that of
the pipe. Ends of pipe and fittings shall be suitable for the specified joints. Pipe and
fittings shall have cement -mortar lining, AWWA C104/A21.4, standard thickness.
b. Joints and Jointing Material:
(1) Joints: Joints for pipe and fittings shall be push -on joints or mechanical joints. Provide
mechanical joints where indicated. Provide flanged joints where indicated.
(2) Push -On Joints: Shape of pipe ends and fitting ends, gaskets, and lubricant for joint
assembly, AWWA C111/A21.11.
SECTION 02510 Page 2

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
- (3) Mechanical Joints: Dimensional and material requirements for pipe ends, glands, bolts
and nuts, and gaskets, AWWA C111/A21.11.
(4) Flanged Joints: Bolts, nuts, and gaskets for flanged connections as recommended in the
'+ Appendix to AWWA C115/A21.15. Flange for setscrewed flanges shall be of ductile iron,
ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12, and conform to the applicable requirements of
ASME/ANSI B 16.1, Class 250. Setscrews for setscrewed flanges shall be 190,000 psi
tensile strength, heat treated and zinc -coated steel. Gasket for setscrewed flanges, in
accordance with applicable requirements for mechanical joint gaskets specified in AWWA
C111/A21.11. Design of setscrewed gasket shall provide for confinement and compression
of gasket when joint to adjoining flange is made.
(5) Sleeve -Type Mechanical Coupled Joints: As specified in paragraph entitled "Sleeve -
Type Mechanical Couplings."
2.1.1.2 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Piping
a. Pipe and Fittings: Pipe, AWWA 600, shall be plain end or gasket bell end, Pressure Class
150 (DR 18) with cast -iron -pipe -equivalent OD. Fittings with push -on joint ends shall
conform to the same requirements as fittings with mechanical joint ends, except that bell
design shall be modified, as approved, for push -on joint suitable for use with PVC plastic
pipe specified in this paragraph.
b. Joints and Jointing Material: Joints for pipe shall be push -on joints, ASTM D 3139. Joints
between pipe and metal fittings, valves, and other accessories shall be push -on joints ASTM
D 3139, or compression -type joints/mechanical joints, ASTM D 3139 and AWWA
C111/A21.11. Provide each joint connection with an elastomeric gasket suitable for the bell
or coupling with which it is to be used. Gaskets for push -on joints for pipe, ASTM F 477.
Gaskets for push -on joints and compression -type joints/mechanical joints for joint
connections between pipe and metal fittings, valves, and other accessories, AWWA
C111/A21.11, respectively, for push -on joints and mechanical joints. Mechanically coupled
joints using a sleeve -type mechanical coupling, as specified in paragraph entitled "Sleeve -
Type Mechanical Couplings," may be used as an optional jointing method in lieu of push -
on joints on plain -end PVC plastic pipe, subject to the limitations specified for
mechanically coupled joints using a sleeve -type mechanical coupling and to the use of
internal stiffeners as specified for compression -type joints in ASTM D 3139.
2.1.1.3 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Piping
Pipe and heat -fusion fittings shall conform to AWWA C906.
2.1.1.4 Piping Beneath Railroad Right -of -Way
Piping passing under the right-of-way of a commercial railroad shall conform to the specifications for
pipelines conveying nonflammable substances in Chapter 1, Part 5 of AREA MRE, except for casing
pipe, provide ductile -iron pipe in lieu of cast-iron pipe. Ductile -iron pipe shall conform to and have
strength computed in accordance with ASTM:A 746.
- 2.1.2 Valves, Hydrants, and Other Water Main (Accessories
i
l
SECTION 02510 Page 3

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
2.1.2.1 Gate Valves on Buried Piping
AWWA C500, AWWA C509, or UL 262. Unless otherwise specified, valves conforming to: (1)
AWWA C500 shall be nonrising stem type with double -disc gates and mechanical joint ends or push- ` a
on joint ends as appropriate for the adjoining pipe, and (2) AWWA C509 shall be nonrising stem type
with mechanical joint ends, and designed for a hydraulic working pressure of 150 psi, and shall have
mechanical joint ends as appropriate for the pipe to which it is joined. Valves shall open by
counterclockwise rotation of the valve stem. Stuffing boxes shall have 0-ring stem seals. Stuffing
boxes shall be bolted and constructed so as to permit easy removal of parts for repair. Valves shall be
of one manufacturer.
2.1.2.2 Gate Valves in Valve Pit(s) and Aboveground Location
AWWA C500, AWWA C509, or UL 262. Unless otherwise specified, valves conforming to: (1)
AWWA C500 shall be nonrising stem type with double -disc gates and flanged ends, and (2) AWWA
C509 shall be nonrising stem type with flanged ends, and shall be designed for a hydraulic working
pressure of psi. Provide valves with handwheels that open by counterclockwise rotation of the valve
stem. Stuffing boxes shall be bolted and constructed so as to permit easy removal of parts for repair.
Valves shall be of one manufacturer.
2.1.2.3 Butterfly Valves
All butterfly valves shall be of the tight -closing, rubber -seat type, conforming to the design standards of
ANSI/AWWA C504 latest revision, except where noted herein. Valves shall be bubble -tight at the rated
pressure in either direction and shall be suitable for throttling service and/or operation after long periods of
inactivity. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and have manufactured AWWA valves for a period
of at least five (5) years. All butterfly valves shall be from the same manufacturer.
Valves 3"-24" shall have a fusion bonded epoxy coated disc with an AWWA/NSF-61 coating system and -
a one piece through shaft of 18-8 stainless steel, corresponding to the requirements of AWWA C504. The
shafts shall fasten to the disc by means of a threaded disc pin providing a positive leak proof connection of
the shaft to the disc. Valves 30" and larger shall have be lined and coated with a two-part epoxy
AWWA/NSF-61 coating and have stub shafts of 18-8 stainless steel, corresponding to the design
requirements of AWWA C504, latest revision. The shaft shall fasten to the disc by means of pins designed
to provide a shake -proof connection without impairing shaft strength.
Seats for 3"-24" shall be simultaneously bonded and vulcanized to the body of the valve. All interior 1
surfaces in contact with water, excluding stainless steel and disc, in sizes 3"-24" shall be rubber lined.
Valves with rubber seat located on the valve disc are not acceptable. Seats for valves 30" and larger shall
be field replaceable without the use of special tools or factory personnel. Seat adjustment shall be
accomplished with a standard wrench. Valve seat designs that use epoxy to retain the seat or fillers to
increase seat compression are not considered field replaceable or adjustable and must be field leak witness
tested for prior to valves being accepted. Valves shall be installed with full seat adjustment downstream.
All bearings shall be of the self-lubricating, corrosion -resistant, sleeve type. Bearings shall be designed for
horizontal and/or vertical shaft loading.
4
Manual operators shall be of the traveling nut, self-locking type and shall be designed to hold the valve in
any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed without creeping or fluttering. Operators
shall be equipped with mechanical stop -limiting devices to prevent over travel of the disc in open and
closed positions. Valves shall close with a clockwise rotation. Operators shall be fully enclosed and
SECTION 02510 Page 4

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
designed to produce the specified torque with a maximum pull of 80 lbs. on the operator or chainwheel.
Operator components shall withstand an input of 150 ft.-lbs, at extreme operator position without damage.
I
2.1.2.4 Check Valves
�- Swing -check type, AWWA C508. Valves conforming to: (1) AWWA C508 shall have iron or steel
body and cover and flanged ends, and (2) UL 312 shall have cast iron or steel body and cover,
flanged ends, and designed for a working pressure of 150 psi. Valves shall have clear port opening.
Valves shall be weight -loaded where indicated. Valves shall be of one manufacturer.
2.1.2.5 Mud Valves
Mud valves shall be rising stem suitable for use with an electric operator. The valve body shall be cast
iron. The stem, stem nut, disk ring, and seat ring shall be bronze. All bolts and nuts shall be rust -
proofed steel. The valve shall be furnished with operating stem and floor stand.
2.1.2.6 Electric Valve Actuator
I�
1 -1, All electric actuators shall conform to the requirements of AWWA Standard C-540.
Actuators shall contain motor, gearing, manual over -fide, limit switches, torque switches, drive
coupling and integral motor controls.
Valve closing time will be 12 inches per minute for gate valves.
1 ,
The motor shall be specifically designed for actuator service. The motor will be of the induction type
with Class F insulation and protected by means of thermal switches imbedded in the motor windings.
Motor enclosure will be totally enclosed, non -ventilated.
Motors will be capable of operating on 460 v/3 ph/60 hz power.
Actuator housing shall be NEMA 4 (watertight) and suitable for short term submersion in water to a
depth of 6 feet for 30 minutes.
All gearing shall be grease lubricated and designed to withstand the full stall torque of the motor.
Manual operation will be available by means of a handwheel. Return from manual to electric mode of
_ operation will be automatic upon motor operation. A seized or inoperable motor shall not prevent
manual operation.
Limit switches will be furnished at each end of travel. Limit switch adjustment will not be altered by
manual operation. Limit switch drive shall be by countergear. Limit switches must be capable of
quick adjustment requiring no more than five (5) turns of the limit switch adjustment spindle. One set
of normally open and one set of normally closed contacts will be furnished and available for use by the
plant control system at each end of travel where indicated. Contacts shall be of silver and capable of
71
reliably switching a low voltage DC source from the SCADA system.
1'
Mechanically operated torque switches shall be furnished at each end of travel. Torque switches will
trip when valve load exceeds torque switch setting. The torque switch adjustment device must be
calibrated directly in engineering units of torque.
SECTION 02510 Page 5

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
All wiring shall be terminated at plug and socket connector.
Actuators will be capable of operating in an ambient temperature range of -20 to +175 degrees F.
Mechanical dial position indicator will be furnished on all valves.
All actuators in open/close service will be furnished with integral motor controls consisting of
reversing starters, control transformer, "open -stop -close" pushbuttons, "local -off -remote" selector
switch in addition to red and green indicating lights.
2.1.2.7 Fire Hydrants i h
Dry -barrel type. Paint hydrants with at least one coat of primer and two coats of red enamel paint.
Stencil hydrant number and main size on the hydrant barrel using black stencil paint.
a. Dry -Barrel Type Fire Hydrants: Dry -barrel type hydrants, AWWA C502, 'Base Valve"
design, shall have 6 inch inlet, 5 1/4 inch valve opening, one 4 1/2 inch pumper connection,
and two 2 1/2 inch hose connections. Inlet shall have mechanical joint end only; end shall
conform to the applicable requirements as specified for the joint. Size and shape of
operating nut, cap nuts, and threads on hose and pumper connections shall be as specified in
AWWA C502. Hydrants indicated as "traffic type," shall have frangible sections as
mentioned in AWWA C502. The traffic type hydrant shall have special couplings joining
upper and lower sections of hydrant barrel and shall be designed to have the special
couplings break from a force not less than that which would be imposed by a moving
vehicle; hydrant shall operate properly under normal conditions.
2.1.2.8 Valve Boxes
Provide a valve box for each valve on buried piping. Valve boxes shall be of cast iron of a size suitable
for the valve on which it is to be used and shall be adjustable. Provide a round head. Cast the word
"WATER" on the lid. The least diameter of the shaft of the box shall be 5 1/4 inches. Cast-iron box
shall have a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
2.1.2.9 Sleeve -Type Mechanical Couplings
Couplings shall be designed to couple plain -end piping by compression of a ring gasket at each end of
the adjoining pipe sections. The coupling shall consist of one middle ring flared or beveled at each end
to provide a gasket seat; two follower rings; two resilient tapered rubber gaskets; and bolts and nuts to
draw the follower rings toward each other to compress the gaskets. The middle ring and the follower
rings shall be true circular sections free from irregularities, flat spots, and surface defects; the design
shall provide for confinement and compression of the gaskets. For ductile iron and PVC plastic pipe, J
the middle ring shall be of cast-iron; and the follower rings shall be of malleable or ductile iron.
Malleable and ductile iron shall, conform to ASTM A 47 and ASTM A 536, respectively. Gaskets
shall be designed for resistance to set after installation and shall meet the applicable requirements
specified for gaskets for mechanical joint in AWWA C111/A21.11. Bolts shall be track -head type,
ASTM A 307, Grade A, with nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade A; or round -head square -neck type bolts,
ANSI 1318.5.2.1M and ANSUASME B18.5.2.2M with hex nuts, ASME/ANSI B18.2.2. Bolts shall be
5/8 inch in diameter. Bolt holes in follower rings shall be of a shape to hold fast the necks of the bolts
used. Mechanically coupled joints using a sleeve -type mechanical coupling shall not be used as an h
optional method of jointing except where pipeline is adequately anchored to resist tension pull across
the joint.
1-1
SECTION 02510 Page 6
��l

I i Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
2.1.2.10 Automatic Control Check Valve Pump Discharge Control
2.1.2.10.1 General
Automatic Control Check Valve shall have a single disc "offset" pivoted above centerline of the valve.
The "offset" disc shall be partially balanced and capable of closing with minimal backflow for bubble
tight shut-off and no slam closure on power failure.
The valve shall have full flow area designed to operate as a pump control valve with positive shut-off
throttling and check valve functions. The valve shall be controlled through a lost motion type of gear
arrangement mounted on the side of the valve, and totally enclosed in a lubricated gear box. The valve
operating as a check valve or throttling valve shall be hydraulically controlled through an oil dashpot
connected to the lost motion gearing. The open and close speeds, when used as a throttle of flow
sensitive check valve, shall be independently adjustable to cause the valve to open and to close at a rate
compatible with the installation, without slamming and with minimal surge pressure rise.
�l
The valve must be fail safe in the event of electrical power failure, the valve disc shall close
hydraulically, energized by flow reversal in the line. The time of disc closure shall be adjustable from
3 seconds to 5 minutes by means of Cam Operated (dump -type) Timing Valve permitting instant 1st
I Stage closure to any degree and a hydraulic dashpot for 2nd Stage and 3rd Stage final closure.
/ 2.1.2.10.2 Material
The valve body shall be two (2) piece construction, bolted together in a manner to capture the seat.
The valve body shall be Globe Style through the disc section, creating an enlarge flow area to
d minimize the head loss. The body shall have a built-in stop to positively prevent the disc from over -
traveling the shutoff position. The seat must be hand replaceable in the field, without need for
machining or need to remove complete valve from the line. The seat material shall be precision
molded BUNA-N, reinforced with heavy steel insert. Shutoff shall be bubble tight and the seat
�f interchangeable. The offset pivot point shall provide minimal seating and un-seating torques to prevent
wear of the seat.
The valve shaft shall be one piece stainless steel 174PH material, extending completely through the
valve disc and gear box (not stub shafts).
Valve exterior to be painted with Red Oxide Phenolic Primer Paint as accepted by the FDA for use in
- contact with Potable Water for resistance to corrosion.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING
3.1.1 General Requirements for Installation of Piping
These requirements shall apply to all pipeline installation except where specific exception is made in
the "Special Requirements..." paragraphs.
3.1.1.1 Location of Water Lines
a. Water Piping Installation Parallel With Sewer Piping
4 SECTION 02510 Page 7

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
r-
(1) Normal Conditions: Lay water piping at least 10 feet horizontally from a sewer or
sewer manhole whenever possible. Measure the distance edge -to -edge.
(2) Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent a horizontal separation of 10 feet,
the water piping may be laid closer to a sewer or sewer manhole provided that:
(a) The bottom (invert) of the water piping shall be at least 18 inches above the top (crown)
of the sewer piping.
(b) Where this vertical separation cannot be obtained, the sewer piping shall be constructed
of AWWA-approved water pipe and pressure tested in place without leakage prior to
backfilling.
(c) The sewer manhole shall be of watertight construction and tested in place.
b. Installation of Water Piping Crossing Sewer Piping
(1) Normal Conditions: Water piping crossing above sewer piping shall be laid to provide
a separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the water piping and the top of the
sewer piping.
(2) Unusual Conditions: When local conditions prevent a vertical separation described
above, use the following construction:
(a) Sewer piping passing over or under water piping shall be constructed of AWWA-
approved ductile iron water piping, pressure tested in place without leakage prior to
backfilling.
(b) Water piping passing under sewer piping shall, in addition, be protected by providing a
vertical separation of at least 18 inches between the bottom of the sewer piping and the top
of the water piping; adequate structural support for the sewer piping to prevent excessive
deflection of the joints and the settling on and breaking of the water piping; and that the
length, minimum 20 feet, of the water piping be centered at the point of the crossing so that
joints shall be equidistant and as far as possible from the sewer piping.
c. Sewer Piping or Sewer Manholes: No water piping shall pass through or come in contact with
any part of a sewer manhole.
3.1.1.2 Earthwork
Perform earthwork operations in accordance with Section 02301, "Earthwork for Structures and
Pavements".
3.1.1.3 Pipe Laying and Jointing
Remove fins and burrs from pipe and fittings. Before placing in position, clean pipe, fittings, valves,
and accessories, and maintain in a clean condition. Provide proper facilities for lowering sections of
pipe into trenches. Do not under any circumstances drop or dump pipe, fittings, valves, or any other
water line material into trenches. Cut pipe accurately to length established at the site and work into
place without springing or forcing. Replace by one of the proper length any pipe or fitting that does
SECTION 02510 Page 8

ITobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
not allow sufficient space for proper installation of jointing material. Blocking or wedging between
bells and spigots will not be permitted. Lay bell -and -spigot pipe with the bell end pointing in the
direction of laying. Grade the pipeline in straight lines; avoid the formation of dips and low points.
Support pipe at proper elevation and grade. Secure firm, uniform support. Wood support blocking will
not be permitted. Lay pipe so that the full length of each section of pipe and each fitting will rest
solidly on the pipe bedding; excavate recesses to accommodate bells, joints, and couplings. Provide
anchors and supports where indicated and where necessary for fastening work into place. Make proper
provision for expansion and contraction of pipelines. Keep trenches free of water until joints have
been properly made. At the end of each workday, close open ends of pipe temporarily with wood
blocks or bulkheads. Do not lay pipe when conditions of trench or weather prevent installation. Depth
of cover over top of pipe shall not be less than 3 feet unless otherwise approved.
3.1.1.4 Connections to Existing Water Lines
Make connections to existing water lines after approval is obtained and with a minimum interruption of
service on the existing line. Make connections to existing lines under pressure in accordance with the
recommended procedures of the manufacturer of the pipe being tapped.
3.1.2 Special Requirements for Installation of Water Mains
3.1.2.1 Installation of Ductile -Iron Piping
_ Unless otherwise specified, install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General
Requirements for Installation of Pipelines" and with the requirements of AWWA C600 for pipe
installation, joint assembly, valve -and -fitting installation, and thrust restraint.
( a. Jointing: Make push -on joints with the gaskets and lubricant specified for this type joint;
{ ' assemble in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint
assembly. Make mechanical joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts, and nuts specified for
this type joint; assemble in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600
for joint assembly and the recommendations of Appendix A to AWWA C111/A21.11.
Make flanged joints with the gaskets, bolts, and nuts specified for this type joint. Make
flanged joints up tight;' avoid undue strain on flanges, fittings, valves, and other equipment
and accessories. Align bolt holes for each flanged joint. Use full size bolts for the
boltholes; use of undersized bolts to make up for misalignment of boltholes or for any other
purpose will not be permitted. Do not allow adjoining flange faces to be out of parallel to
r' such degree that the flanged joint cannot be made watertight without overstraining the
flange. When flanged pipe or fitting has dimensions that do not allow the making of a
proper flanged joint as specified, replace it by one of proper dimensions. Use setscrewed
flanges to make flanged joints where conditions prevent the use of full-length flanged pipe
and assemble in accordance with the recommendations of the setscrewed flange
manufacturer. Assemble joints made with sleeve -type mechanical couplings in accordance
with the recommendations of the coupling manufacturer.
b. Pipe Anchorage: Provide concrete thrust blocks (reaction backing) where indicated and use
metal harness in all other applications. Thrust blocks shall be in accordance with the
requirements of AWWA C600 for thrust restraint, except that size and positioning of thrust
blocks shall be as indicated. Use concrete, ASTM C 94, having a minimum compressive
strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days; or use concrete of a mix not leaner than one part cement, 2
1/2 parts sand, and 5 parts gravel, having the same minimum compressive strength. Metal
SECTION 02510 Page 9

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
harness shall be in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C600 for thrust restraint,
using tie rods and clamps as shown in NFPA 24.
c. Exterior Protection:. Completely encase buried ductile iron pipelines where indicated with
polyethylene tube or sheet, using Class A polyethylene film, in accordance with AWWA
C105/A21.5.
3.1.2.2 Installation of PVC Plastic Water Main Pipe
Installation of PVC Plastic Water Main Pipe and Associated Fittings: Unless otherwise specified,
install pipe and fittings in accordance with paragraph entitled "General Requirements for Installation of.
Pipelines"; with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for laying of pipe, joining PVC pipe to fittings
and accessories, and setting of hydrants, valves, and fittings; and with the recommendations for pipe
joint assembly and appurtenance installation in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation."
a. Jointing: Make push -on joints with the elastomeric gaskets specified for this type joint, using
either elastomeric-gasket bell -end pipe or elastomeric-gasket couplings. For pipe -to -pipe
push -on joint connections, use only pipe with push -on joint ends having factory -made
bevel; for push -on joint connections to metal fittings, valves, and other accessories, cut
spigot end of pipe off square and re -bevel pipe end to a bevel approximately the same as
that on ductile -iron pipe used for the same type of joint. Use an approved lubricant
recommended by the pipe manufacturer for push -on joints. Assemble push -on joints for
pipe -to -pipe joint connections in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for
laying the pipe and the recommendations in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation," for
pipe joint assembly. Assemble push -on joints for connection to fittings, valves, and other
accessories in accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for joining PVC pipe
to fittings and accessories and with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint
assembly. Make compression -type joints/mechanical joints with the gaskets, glands, bolts,
nuts, and internal stiffeners previously specified for this type joint; assemble in accordance
with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for joining PVC pipe to fittings and accessories,
with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for joint assembly, and with the
recommendations of Appendix A to AWWA CI I I/A21.11. Cut off spigot end of pipe for
compression -type joint/mechanical-joint connections and do not re -bevel. Assemble joints
made with sleeve -type mechanical couplings in accordance with the recommendations of
the coupling manufacturer using internal stiffeners as previously specified for compression -
type joints.
b. Pipe Anchorage: Provide concrete thrust blocks (reaction backing) where indicated and use
metal harness in all other applications for pipe anchorage. Thrust blocks shall be in
accordance with the requirements of UBPPA UNI-B-3 for reaction or thrust blocking and
plugging of dead ends, except that size and positioning of thrust blocks shall be as
indicated. Use concrete, ASTM C 94, having a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi
at 28 days; or use concrete of a mix not leaner than one part cement, 2 1/2 parts sand, and 5
parts gravel, having the same minimum compressive strength. Metal harness shall be as
indicated.
3.1.2.3 Installation of Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Piping
PE pipes shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D 2774.
SECTION 02510 Page 10

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
3.1.2.4 Installation of Valves and Hydrants
a. Installation of Valves: Install gate valves, AWWA C500 and UL 262, in accordance with the
requirements of AWWA C600 for valve -and -fitting installation and with the
recommendations of the Appendix ("Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Gate
Valves") to AWWA C500. Install gate valves, AWWA C509, in accordance with the
requirements of AWWA C600 for valve -and -fitting installation and with the
recommendations of the Appendix ("Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Gate
Valves") to AWWA C509. Install gate valves on PVC water mains in accordance with the
recommendations for appurtenance installation in AWWA M23, Chapter 7, "Installation."
Install check valves in accordance with the applicable requirements of AWWA C600 for
valve -and -fitting installation. Make and assemble joints to gate valves and check valves as
specified for making and assembling the same type joints between pipe and fittings.
b. Installation of Hydrants: Install hydrants in accordance with AWWA C600 for hydrant
installation and as indicated. Make and assemble joints as specified for making and
assembling the same type joints between pipe and fittings. Provide metal harness as
specified under pipe anchorage requirements for the respective pipeline material to which
hydrant is attached. Install hydrants with the 4 1/2 inch connections facing the adjacent
paved surface. If there are two paved adjacent surfaces, contact the Engineer for further
instructions.
3.1.2.5 Installation Beneath Railroad Right -of -Way
Install piping passing under the right-of-way of a commercial railroad in accordance with the
specifications for pipelines conveying nonflammable substances in Chapter 1, Part 5, of AREA MRE.
For PVC plastic water main pipe, also install in accordance with the recommendations of AWWA M23
for installation of casings.
3.1.3 Water Main Sterilization
Sterilization of water mains shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the North Carolina Departmei
Environment, and Natural Resources, Rules Governing Public Water Systems, NCAC Title 15A, Subchapter 18C Se(
.1003 and the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C651-92 or latest revision. The pipe shall be sterilized in segments desigr.
by the Contractor and subject to the approval of the Engineer. All reasonable precautions shall be adhered to in protec
the interior of pipes, fittings, and valves against contamination. All openings in the pipeline shall be closed with water
plugs at the end of the day's work or at other times when pipe laying has ceased. The lubricant used in the installatic
sealing gaskets shall be suitable for use in potable water. If dirt enters the pipe it shall be removed and the interior
surface swabbed with a five percent hypochlorite disinfecting solution.
A. Disinfection Procedure: The basic disinfection procedure consists of the following:
1. Preventing contaminating materials from entering the water main during storage and
construction.
2. Removing, by flushing or other means, those materials that may have entered the water main.
3. Chlorinating any residual contamination that may remain, and flushing the chlorinated water
from the main.
SECTION 02510 Page 11

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
4. Protecting the existing distribution system from backflow due to pressure test and disinfection
procedures.
5. Determining the bacteriological quality by laboratory test after disinfection.
6. Final connection of the approved new water main to the active distribution system.
B. Continuous -Feed Method of Chlorination: The "tablet method" and the "slug method" of
sterilization are not acceptable. The "continuous -feed method" as discussed in ANSUAWWA C651-
92 shall be used to chlorinate the water mains. The continuous -feed method of chlorination consists
of
1. Placing calcium hypochlorite granules in the main during construction.
(a) Calcium hypochlorite granules shall be placed at the upstream end of the first section of
pipe, at the upstream end of each branch main and at 500' intervals. The quantity of
granules shall be as follows:
Pipe Diameter (Inches) Calcium Hypochlorite Granules (Ounces) _
4 0.5
6 1.0
8 2.0
12 4.0
16 & Larger 8.0
2. Completely filling the main to eliminate air pockets. -
(a) The initial filling shall be at a rate such that water within the main will flow at a velocity no
greater than 1 foot per second (fps). Precautions shall be taken to insure that air pockets are
eliminated.
3. Flushing the main to remove particulates.
(a) Once the main has been completely filled with potable water and all air expelled, the main
shall be flushed to remove particulates at a rate of not less than 2.5 fps. The discharge point
for the flushing operation shall be coordinated with the Engineer. In lieu of flushing the
Contractor may choose this time to clean the water main as described in the above naragranh
entitled "Pipe Cleaning."
4. Filling the main with super -chlorinated potable water so that after a 24-hour holding period in the
main there will be a free chlorine residual of not less than 20 parts per million (ppm).
(a) The procedure for chlorinating the main shall begin with water being made to flow into the
newly installed water main at a constant, measured rate. In the absence of a meter the rate
may be approximated by a method approved by the Engineer (A hydrant meter is
recommended). At a point not more than 10' downstream from the beginning of the new
main, water entering the new main shall receive a dose of chlorine fed at a constant rate such
that the water will have not less than 50-ppm free chlorine. The chlorine concentration
should be measured at regular intervals using approLnate chlorine test kits. Chlorine
application shall not cease until the entire main (or isolated portion thereof) is filled with
SECTION 02510 Page 12
i

'i
Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
l'
heavily chlorinated water. The chlorinated water shall be retained in the main for at least 24
hours during which time all valves and hydrants in the treated section shall be operated to
ensure disinfection of the appurtenances. At the end of this 24-hour period, the treated water
in all portions of the main shall have a residual of not less than 20-ppm free chlorine.
(1) Chlorine Application: The forms of chlorine that may be used in the disinfection
i
operations are liquid chlorine conforming to ANSI/AWWA B301, sodium hypochlorite
solution conforming to ANSUAWWA B300 and calcium hypochlorite granules or
tablets conforming to ANSI/AWWA B300. Liquid Chlorine shall be used only in
combination with appropriate gas -flow chlorinators and ejectors and under the direct
supervision of a person who is familiar with the physiological, chemical, and physical
properties of liquid chlorine. Liquid chlorine may be used only when appropriate safety
practices are observed to protect working personnel and the public. Sodium
Hypochlorite Solution and Calcium Hypochlorite Granules used to form a solution may
be applied to the water to be chlorinated with a gasoline or electrically powered
chemical -feed pump designed for feeding chlorine solutions. Feed lines shall be able to
withstand the corrosion caused by the concentrated chlorine solutions and the maximum
pressures created by the pump.
5. Final flushing of the water main to remove super -chlorinated water.
(a) After the applicable retention period, heavily chlorinated water should not remain in
prolonged contact with pipe. In order to prevent damage to the pipe lining or corrosion
damage to the pipe itself, the heavily chlorinated water shall be flushed from the main until
chlorine measurements show that the concentration in the water leaving the main is no
higher than that generally prevailing in the system or is acceptable for domestic use. The
environment to which the chlorinated water is to, be discharged shall be inspected. If there is
any question that the chlorinated discharge will cause damage to the environment, then a
reducing agent shall be applied to the water to be wasted to neutralize thoroughly the
chlorine residual remaining in the water. (See AWWA C-651 Appendix B for neutralizing
1 chemicals). Where necessary, Federal, State and local regulatory agencies should be
contacted to determine special provisions for the disposal of heavily chlorinated water. This
effort shall be coordinated fully by the by Contractor.
C. Bacteriological Tests: Twenty-four hours after final flushing to remove excess chlorine,
representative water samples shall be taken from each water line segment for bacteriological
quality tests in accordance with "Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and
Wastewater". At least one sample shall be collected from every 2000' of water main including
one set from the end of the line and at least one set from each branch. No portion of the system
shall be placed in operation until the tests are approved. If the presence of coliform bacteria is
detected in the water samples, the section of pipe shall be resterilized and additional samples shall
be taken. If, during construction, trench water has entered the main, or if in the opinion of the
Engineer, excessive quantities of dirt or debris have entered the main, bacteriological samples
may be required at more frequent intervals. Furthermore at the discretion of the Owner samples
shall be taken of water that has stood in the main for at least 72 hours after final flushing has been
completed. If the initial disinfection fails to produce satisfactory bacteriological samples, the
main may be reflushed and shall be resampled. If check samples show the presence of coliform
organisms, then the main shall be rechlorinated by the continuous -feed of chlorination until
satisfactory results are obtained
3.1.4 Well Disinfection
SECTION 02510 Page 13

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
Upon completion of the well and installation of the permanent pump, the well and pump shall be sterilized
by the addition of Chlorine in tablets or solution according to NCAC 2C Section .0111. The water shall be
agitated to develop a chlorine residual of 100 parts per million throughout the water column. The well
casing and pump drop piping above the water level in the well shall be thoroughly rinsed with a chlorine
solution as part of the disinfection process. This solution shall remain in the well for at least 24 hours after
which the well shall be pumped until the chlorine residual is less than 0.2 parts per million. The
Contractor will provide a portable generator, temporary electrical appurtenances valves and piping
necessary to energize the permanent pump for the required time it takes to pump the well clear of the
sWerchlorinated material. The environment to which the chlorinated water is to be discharged shall be
inspected. If there is any question that the chlorinated discharge will cause damage to the environment,
then a reducing agent shall be applied to the water to be wasted to neutralize thoroughly the chlorine
residual remaining in the water. (See AWWA C-651 Appendix B for neutralizing chemicals).
Bacteriological samples shall then be taken and submitted to the North Carolina Division of Health
Services Laboratory or an approved testing laboratory. In the event the samples do not pass, the
sterilization procedure described above shall be repeated and new samples taken until a satisfactory sample
is submitted.
3.1.5 Storage Tank Disinfection
Sterilization procedures shall conform to the North Carolina Division of Environmental Health
requirements NCAC Title 15A, Sub -Chapter 18C, Section .1000, Paragraph .1003 (d), where large --
volume tanks may require an alternate method of disinfection due to a lack of a suitable drainage area
for the. chlorinated water. This alternate method is specified as AWWA D-105 Method No. 2 for
disinfection of water storage facilities and shall be accomplished by applying chlorine solution of --
concentration not less than 200 ppm directly to the surfaces of all parts of the storage facility which
would be in contact with water when the storage facility is full to the overflow elevation. The chlorine
shall thoroughly coat all surfaces to be treated including the inlet and outlet piping and shall be applied
to drain piping such that it will have available chlorine of not less than 10 ppm when filled with water.
The surfaces disinfected shall remain in contact with the chlorine solution for at least 30 minutes after
which time any accumulation in the floor of the tank shall be removed. Chlorine concentrated
wastewater from disinfection of tanks shall be dechlorinated by the Contractor before being disposed of
(See AWWA C-651 Appendix B for neutralizing chemicals). Chlorine concentrated wastewater from
disinfection of tanks shall be drained as directed by the Engineer. Potable water shall be admitted; the
drain piping purged of the chlorinated water and the storage facility then filled to its overflow level. All
safety precautions shall be observed. Water samples shall be taken by the Contractor and sent to the -
North Carolina Division of Environmental Health for bacteriological testing at the expense of the
Contractor. Should the sample not be approved, the sterilization procedures shall be repeated and resting
done until the water meets North Carolina Division of Environmental Health standards. All
reutilization and retesting will be done at the Contractor's expense.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.2.1 Field Tests and Inspections
The Engineer will conduct field inspections and witness field tests specified in this section. The
Contractor shall perform field tests, and provide labor, equipment, and incidentals required for testing.
The Contractor shall produce evidence, when required, that any item of work has been constructed in
accordance with the drawings and specifications. Do not begin testing on any section of a pipeline
where concrete thrust blocks or mechanical restraints have been provided until at least 5 days after
placing of the concrete. -
SECTION 02510 Page 14

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
3.2.2 Pressure and Leakage Testing
Hydrostatic pressure and leakage testing for water mains and water service lines shall conform to
ANSI/AWWA C600-93 or latest revision for ductile iron water main and ANSI/AWWA C605-94 or
latest revision for polyvinyl chloride pipe. Leakage test may be performed at the same time and at the
same test pressure as the pressure test. Pressure testing shall be performed on all pipe, valves,
hydrants, and fittings. The test shall be conducted on line segments from shut valve to shut valve in
segments not exceeding 2,000 linear feet. The Contractor shall provide a suitable pump for applying
pressure and an accurate gauge for measuring the pressure and an Engineer approved method of
determining volume of water used. All newly laid pipe and any isolated sections thereof shall be
subject to a hydrostatic pressure of at least 1.5 times the working pressure at the point of testing or 200
psi (whichever is greater). At the same time the test pressure shall not be less than 1.25 times the
working pressure at the highest point along the test section. The hydrostatic test shall be of at least
two-hour duration. Removal of air shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Engineer through use
of the air release valve assemblies (automatic and manual) and the fire hydrants. Prior to the pressure
test, fill that portion of the pipeline being tested with water for a soaking period of not less than 24
hours. If determined necessary by the Engineer, the Contractor shall install additional air taps to be
abandoned after all air removal at no additional cost to the Owner. Leakage shall be defined as the
quantity of water that must be supplied into the newly laid pipe or any isolated section thereof to
maintain pressure within 5 psi (35 MPa or 0.35 bar) of the specified test pressure after the pipe has
been filled with water and the air has been expelled. Leakage shall not be measured by a drop in
pressure in a test section over a period of time. No installation will be accepted if the leakage is greater
than that determined by the following formulas:
When testing Ductile Iron Pipe:
L= SD 4P
133,200
Where:
L = allowable leakage, in gallons per hour
S = length of pipe tested, in feet
D = nominal diameter of the pipe, in inches
P = average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square inch gauge)
When testing against closed metal -seated valves, an additional leakage per closed valve of 0.0078
gpb/in. (0.0012 L/h/m) of nominal valve size shall be allowed. Acceptance shall be determined on the
basis of allowable leakage. If any test of laid pipe discloses leakage greater than that specified above,
the Contractor shall, at his own expense, locate and make approved repairs as necessary until the
r leakage is within the specified allowance. All visible leaks are to be repaired, regardless of the amount of
leakage.
3.2.3 Special Testing Requirements
For pressure test, use a hydrostatic pressure 50 psi greater than the maximum working pressure of the
system, except that for those portions of the system having pipe size larger than 2 inches in diameter,
` hydrostatic test pressure shall be not less than 150 psi. Hold this pressure for not less than 2 hours.
i Prior to the pressure test, fill that portion of the pipeline being tested with water for a soaking period of
not less than 24 hours. Leakage test will be performed at the same time and at the same test pressure as
the pressure test.
3.2.4 Cleaning of Water Mains (Pigging)
SECTION 02510 Page 15

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
1:1
The Contractor shall clean all new water mains installed in this project by using a flexible polyurethane
swab ("pig"). The pig shall be of 5 lb./cf. density polyurethane of the proper size for the water mains
being cleaned. The pig shall be inserted into the first section of pipe and shall remain there until
construction of that line segment is completed. Cleaning shall be accomplished by propelling the pig
down the water main system pressure to the exit point as determined by the Contractor. After the pig
exits the pipe, flushing shall be performed until the water is completely clear and the turbidity level is
less than 1.0 NTU. Cleaning of water mains with diameters larger than 12 inches or water mains that
utilize butterfly valves shall be performed in the same manner acceptable to the Engineer and the
Owner.
SECTION 02510 Page 16

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
SECTION 02821
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
PART GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
i
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM B 117 (1995) Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus
ASTM C 94 (1996) Ready -Mixed Concrete
ASTM F 883 (1997) Padlocks
ASTM F 1043 (1995) Strength and Protective Coatings on Metal
Industrial Chain Link Fence Framework
ASTM G 23 (1996) Operating Light -Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-
i _ Arc Type) With and Without Water for Exposure of
Nonmetallic Materials
ASTM G 26 (1996) Operating Light -Exposure Apparatus (Xenon -
Arc Type) With and Without Water for Exposure of
Nonmetallic Materials
ASTM G 53 (1996) Operating Light -and -Water -Exposure Apparatus
(Fluorescent UV -Condensation Type) for Exposure of
Nonmetallic Materials
_ FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)
FS RR-F-191 (Rev. K) Fencing, Wire and Post Metal (and Gates,
_ Chain -Link Fence Fabric and Accessories) (General
Specification)
FS RR-F-191/1 (Rev. D) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal (Chain -Link
i'
Fence Fabric) (Detail Specification)
FS RR-F-191/2 (Rev. D) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal (Chain -Link
Fence Gates) (Detail Specification)
FS RR-F-191/3 (Rev. D) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal (Chain -Link
Fence posts, top Rails and Braces) (Detail Specification)
�- SECTION 02821 Page 1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
FS RR-F-191/4 (Rev. D) Fencing, Wire and Post, Metal (Chain -Link
Fence Accessories) (Detail Specification)
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.2.1 SD-03 Manufacturer's Catalog Data
a. Chain -link fencing components
b. Accessories
1.2.2 SD-02 Drawings
a. Gates
b. Turnstiles
c. Post spacing
d. Location of gate, corner, end, and pull posts
1.2.3 SD-08Instructions
a. Fence
b. Turnstiles
1.2.4 SD-09 Test Reports
a. Weight in ounces for zinc coating
b. Thickness of PVC coating
c. Chemical composition and thickness of aluminum alloy coating
1.2.4.1 Required Report Data
Submit reports of listing of chain -link fencing and accessories regarding weight in ounces for zinc
coating, thickness of PVC coating, and chemical composition and thickness of aluminum alloy coating.
1.2.5 SD-07 Certificates
a. Fabric
b. Posts
c. Braces
d. Framing
SECTION 02821 Page 2

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
I�
�i
e. Rails
f. Tension wires
g. Gates
h. Padlocks
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
r-,
Deliver materials to site in an undamaged condition. Store materials off the ground to provide
protection against oxidation caused by ground contact.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CHAIN -LINK FENCING AND ACCESSORIES
FS RR-F-191 and detailed specifications as referenced and other requirements as specified.
2.1.1 Fabric
I�
FS RR-F-191/1; Type I, zinc -coated steel, 9-gage. Mesh size, 2 inches. Provide selvage twisted and
barbed at both selvages. Height of fabric, as indicated.
2.1.2 Gates
FS RR-F-191/2; Type II, double swing. Shape and size of gate frame, as indicated. Framing and
bracing members, round of steel or aluminum alloy. Steel member finish, zinc -coated. Gate frames
and braces of minimum sizes listed in FS RR-F-191/3 for each Class and Grade except that steel pipe
j frames shall be 1.90 inches O.D., 0.120 inches minimum wall thickness and aluminum pipe frames and
intermediate braces shall be 1.869 inches O.D., 0.940 lb/ft of length. Gate fabric, as specified for
fencing fabric. Barbed wire top on gate, as specified herein. Coating for steel latches, stops, hinges,
I keepers, and accessories, galvanized. Gate latches, fork plunger bar type. Gate leaves more than 8 feet
wide shall have intermediate members as necessary to provide rigid construction, free from sag or
twist. Gate leaves less than 8 feet wide shall have truss rods or intermediate braces. Attach gate fabric
i to gate frame in accordance with manufacturer's standard', except that welding will not be permitted.
Arrange padlocking latches to be accessible from both sides of gate, regardless of latching
arrangement.
2.1.3 Posts, Top Rails and Braces
FS RR-F-191/3 line posts; Class 1, steel pipe, Grade A or B. End, corner, and pull posts; Class 1, steel
pipe, Grade A or B. Braces and rails; Class 1, steel pipe, Grade A or B in minimum sizes listed in FS
RR-F-191/3 for each class and grade.
2.1.4 Fencing Accessories
FS RR-F-191/4. Provide wire ties constructed at the same material as the fencing fabric.
2.1.5 Concrete
I�
�' SECTION 02821 Page 3

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
ASTM C94, using 3/4 inch maximum -size aggregate, and having minimum compressive strength of
3000 psi at 28 days.
2.1.6 Grout
Provide grout of proportions one part Portland cement to three (3) parts clean, well -graded sand and a
minimum amount of water to produce a workable mix.
2.1.7 Padlocks
ASTM F 883, with chain.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SITE PREPARATION
3.1.1 Clearing and Grading
Clear fence line of trees, brush, and other obstacles to install fencing. Establish a graded, compacted
fence line prior to fencing installation. Compact fill used to establish fence line.
3.1.2 Excavation
Excavate to dimensions indicated for concrete -embedded items, except in bedrock. If bedrock is
encountered, continue excavation to depth indicated or 18 inches into bedrock, whichever is less, with
a diameter in bedrock a minimum of 2 inches larger than outside diameter of post. Clear post holes of
loose material. Dispose of waste material on site as directed.
3.2 FENCE INSTALLATION
Install fence on prepared surfaces to line and grade indicated. Install fence in accordance with fence
manufacturer's written installation instructions except as modified herein.
3.2.1 Post Spacing f
Provide line posts spaced equidistantly apart, not exceeding 10 feet on center. Provide gate posts
spaced as necessary for size of gate openings. Do not exceed 500 feet on straight runs between braced
posts. Provide corner or pull posts, with bracing in both directions, for changes in direction of 15
degrees or more, or for abrupt changes in grade. Provide drawings showing location of gate, corner,
end, and pull posts.
3.2.2 Post Setting
Set posts plumb. Allow concrete and grout to cure a minimum of 72 hours before performing other
work on posts.
SECTION 02821 Page 4
U

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
3.2.2.1 Earth and Bedrock
Provide concrete bases of dimensions indicated except in bedrock. Compact concrete to eliminate
voids, and finish to a dome shape. In bedrock, set posts with a minimum of one inch of grout around
each post. Work grout into hole to eliminate voids, and finish to a dome shape.
_ 3.2.2.2 Concrete Slabs and Walls
Set posts into zinc -coated sleeves, set in concrete slab or wall, to a minimum depth of 12 inches. Fill
sleeve joint with lead, non -shrink grout, or other approved material. Set posts for support of removable
fence sections into sleeves that provide a tight sliding joint and hold posts aligned and plumb without
use of lead or setting material.
' 3.2.3 Bracing
Brace gate, corner, end, and pull posts to nearest post with a horizontal brace used as a compression
member, placed at least 12 inches below top of fence, and two (2) diagonal truss rods and truss
tighteners used as tension members.
3.2.4 Top Rails
Install top rails before installing chain -link fabric. Pass top rail through intermediate post caps.
Provide expansion coupling spaced as indicated.
3.2.5 Top Tension Wires
Install top tension wires before installing chain -link fabric, and pull wires taut. Place top and bottom
tension wires within 8 inches of respective fabric line.
3.2.6 Fabric
Pull fabric taut and secure fabric to top rail and bottom wire, close to both sides of each post and at
maximum intervals of 24 inches on center. Secure fabric to posts using stretcher bars, ties or clips
spaced 15 inches on center, or by integrally weaving to integral fastening loops of end, corner, pull,
and gate posts for full length of each post. Install fabric on opposite side of posts from area being
secured. Install fabric so that bottom of fabric is 2 inches above ground level embedded as indicated.
3.3 ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION
3.3.1 Post Caps
Install post caps as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.3.2 Supporting Arms
;— Design supporting arms to accommodate top rail. Install supporting arms as recommended by
manufacturer. In addition to manufacturer's standard connections, permanently secure supporting arms
to posts. Studs driven by low -velocity powder -actuated tools may be used with steel, wrought iron,
ductile iron, or malleable iron. Do not use studs driven by powder -actuated tools with gray iron or
other material that will fracture.
SECTION 02821 Page 5

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
3.3.3 Barbed Wire
Install barbed wire on supporting arms above fence posts. Extend each end member of gate frames
sufficiently above top member to carry three (3) strands of barbed wire in horizontal alignment with
barbed wire strands on the fence. Pull each strand taut and securely fasten each strand to each
supporting arm or extended member. Secure wires in accordance with fence manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.3.4 Gates
Install swing gates to swing through 180 degrees from closed to open.
3.3.5 Turnstiles
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3.6 Padlocks
Provide padlocks for gate openings and provide chains that are securely attached to gate or gateposts.
Provide padlocks keyed alike, and provide two keys for each padlock.
3.4 GROUNDING
Ground fencing as specified in Division 16.
3.5 SECURITY
Install new security fencing, remove existing security fencing, and perform related work to provide
continuous security for facility. Schedule and fully coordinate work with Engineer.
3.6 CLEANUP
Remove waste fencing materials and other debris from the station.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 02821 Page 6

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
SECTION 02921
TURF
PART GENERAL
1 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOD PRODUCERS ASSOCIATION (ASPA)
ASPA GSS (1988) Guideline Specifications for Sodding
r- AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM C 602 (1995; Rev. A) Agricultural Liming Materials
ASTM D 4427 (1992) Peat Samples by Laboratory Testing
ASTM E 11 (1995) Wire -Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
i
COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTIONS (CID)
CID A-A-1909 Fertilizer
DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (DOA)
DOA FSA (January 1985) Federal Seed Act Rules and Regulations
of the Secretary of Agriculture
DOA SSIR (April 1984) Soil Survey Investigation Report No. 1,
Soil Survey Laboratory Methods and Procedures for
} Collecting Soil Samples, Soil Conservation Service
1.2 DEFINITIONS
i 1.2.1 Stand of Turf
i
95 percent ground cover of the established species.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
t Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
I ;
1.3.1 SD-03 Manufacturer's Catalog Data
i a. Wood cellulose fiber mulch
SECTION 02921 Page 1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
1:1
b. Fertilizer
Include physical characteristics, and recommendations.
1.3.2 SD-08Instructions
a. Erosion Control Materials
1.3.3 SD-07 Certificates
a. State certification and approval for seed.
b. Nursery or sod farm certification for sods and sprigs. Indicate type of sod or sprig in accordance
with ASPA GSS.
1.3.4 SD-09 Test Reports
a. Topsoil composition tests (reports and recommendations).
b. Plant tissue sample test
1.3.4.1 Topsoil composition Tests
Submit reports for test specified in DOA SSIR.
1.3.4.2 Plant Tissue Sample Test
Submit reports for the test specified in DOA SSIR.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
1.4.1 Delivery
1.4.1.1 Seed, Sod, and Sprig Protection
Protect from drying out and from contamination during delivery, on -site storage, and handling.
1.4.1.2 Fertilizer, Gypsum and Lime Delivery
Deliver to the site of original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's chemical analysis, name,
trade name, trademark, and indication of conformance to state and federal laws. Instead of containers,
fertilizer, gypsum and lime may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the above information.
1.4.2 Storage
1.4.2.1 Sod and Sprig Storage
Lightly sprinkle with water, cover with moist burlap, straw, or other approved covering; and protect
from exposure to wind and direct sunlight until planted. Provide covering that will allow air to
circulate so that internal heat will not develop. Do not store sod longer than 24 hours. Do not store
directly on concrete or bituminous surfaces.
SECTION 02921 Page 2

1-1
Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
1.4.2.2 Seed, Fertilizer, Gypsum and Lime Storage
Store in cool, dry locations away from contaminants.
I �
1.4.2.3 Topsoil
Prior to stockpiling topsoil, treat growing vegetation with application of appropriate specified non-
selective herbicide. Clear and grub existing vegetation three (3) to four (4) weeks prior to stockpiling
topsoil.
1.4.2.4 Handling
Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles.
Ii
1.5 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS
1.5.1 Restrictions
Do no plant when the ground is frozen, snow covered, muddy, or when air temperature exceeds 90
degrees Fahrenheit.
1.6 TIME LIMITATIONS
1.6.1 Seed
Apply seed. within twenty-four hours after seed bed preparation.
1.6.2 Sod
Place sod a maximum of thirty-six hours after initial harvesting, in accordance with ASPA GSS as
modified herein.
1.6.3 Sprigging
Perform sprigging a maximum of thirty-six hours after initial harvesting.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SEED
2.1.1 Classification
Provide State -certified seed of the latest season's crop delivered in original sealed packages, bearing
producer's guaranteed analysis for percentages of mixtures, purity, germination, weed seed content,
and inert material. Label in conformance with DOA FSA and applicable state seed laws. Wet, moldy,
or otherwise damaged seed will be rejected.
2.1.2 Compositiori
Name of Grass or Legume Botanical and Common
SECTION 02921 Page 3

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
1:1
Min.
Min. Percent
Max.
Percent
Germination
Percent
Seed
Pure Seed
and Hard Seed
Weed Seed
Tall Fescue
82
85
1
Rye Grain
88
85
0.5
German Millet
83
85
0.5
Lespedeza
88
85
1
2.1.3 Seed Mixture
Planting Season
Varie
Rate (lb/Acre)
Spring/Summer
Annual Lespedeza 50
German Millet
40
Fall/Winter
Rye Grain
120
Tall Fescue
80
Proportion seed mixtures by weight. Seeding during Season 3 is for temporary ground cover that must
later be replaced by Season 1 plantings for a permanent stand of grass. The same requirements for turf
establishment apply for Season 1 as for Season 3.
2.2 SODS
Lay sod from April 1 to July 15 for warm season spring planting and from August 15 to September 15
for cool season fall planting.
2.2.1 Classification
Certified as classified in the ASPA GSS. Machine cut sod at a uniform thickness of 3/4 inch within a
tolerance of 1/4 inch, excluding top growth and thatch. Each individual sod piece shall be strong
enough to support its own weight when lifted by the ends. Broken pads, irregularly shaped pieces, and
torn or uneven ends will be rejected.
2.2.2 Composition
Proportion grass species as follows.
Botanical and common Name Percent
Fescue 100
2.3 SPRIGS
Healthy living stems, stolons, or rhizomes and attached roots of locally adapted grass without adhering
soil, including two (2) or three (3) nodes and from 4 to 6 inches long, obtained from heavy and dense
sod. Provide sprigs that have been grown under climatic conditions similar to those in the locality of
the project. Coordinate harvesting and planting operations to prevent exposure of sprigs to the sun for
more than 30 minutes before covering and moistening. Sprigs containing weds or other detrimental
SECTION 02921 Page 4

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
material or that are heat damaged will be rejected. Sow sprigs from April 1 to July 1 for warm season
planting and from August 15 to September 15 for cool season planting
2.4 TOPSOIL
2.4.1 Existing Soil
Modify existing soil to conform to the requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition".
2.4.2 On -Site Topsoil
Reusable surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site if requirements specified for topsoil in paragraph
entitled "Composition" are met.
2.4.3 Off -Site topsoil
Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled "Composition". Additional topsoil shall be
furnished by the Contractor.
2.4.4 Composition
Containing from 8 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by the topsoil composition tests of the
Organic Carbon, 6A, chemical Analysis Method described in DOA SSIR. Maximum particle size, 3/4
inch, with maximum 3 percent retained on 1/4 inch screen. Other components shall be within the
following percentages:
Silt: 25-50
Clay: 10-30
Sand: 20-35
pH: 5 to 7.6
Soluble Salts: 600 ppm maximum
2.5 pH ADJUSTERS
2.5.1 Lime
ASTM C 602, commercial agricultural limestone containing a minimum of 85% of total carbonates and
15% magnesium. Provide the following ASTM E 11 graduation: 50% will pass through a 50 mesh
screen and 90% will pass through a 10 mesh screen.
`l
2.5.2 Aluminum sulfate
Commercial grade.
2.5.3 Sulfur
100 percent elemental.
2.5.4 Iron
100 percent elemental.
SECTION 02921 Page 5

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
2.6 SOIL CONDITIONERS
Provide singly or in combination as required to meet specified requirements for topsoil. Soil
conditioners shall be nontoxic to plants.
2.6.1 Peat
Sphagnum moss peat derived from a freshwater site and conforming to ASTM D 4427 as modified
herein. Shred and granulate peat to pass 1/2 inch mesh screen and condition in storage pile for
minimum 6 months after excavation.
2.6.2 Sand
Clean and free of materials harmful to plants.
2.6.3 Perlite
Horticultural grade.
2.6.4 Vermiculite
Horticultural grade.
2.6.5 Rotted Manure
Composted, horse or cattle manure containing maximum 25 percent by volume of straw, or other
bedding materials. Manure shall be free of stones, sticks, and soil, viable weed seed and other
materials harmful to plants.
2.6.6 Composted Derivatives
Ground bark, nitrolized sawdust, humus, or other wood green waste material free of stones, sticks, and
soil stabilized with nitrogen and having the following properties:
2.6.6.1 Particle Size
Minimum percent by weight passing:
No. 4 mesh screen: 95
No. 8 mesh screen: 80
2.6.6.2 Nitrogen Content
Minimum percent based on dry weight:
Fir Sawdust: 0.7
Fir or Pine Bark: 1.0
SECTION 02921 Page 6

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
2.6.7 Calcined Clay
Granular particles produced from montmorillonite clay calcined to minimum temperature of 1200
degrees F to the following gradation: minimum 90 percent passing 8 mesh screen, 99 percent retained
on 60 mesh screen and, maximum 2 percent passing 100 mesh screen. Bulk density: 40 pounds
maximum per cubic foot.
2.6.8 Gypsum
Coarsely ground gypsum comprised of calcium sulfate dihydrate 91 percent, calcium 22 percent, sulfur
17 percent; minimum 96 percent passing through a No. 20 mesh screen, 100 percent passing through a
No. 16 mesh screen.
2.7 FERTILIZER
2.7.1 Pre -Plant Fertilizer Mixture
i Fertilizer mixtures not to exceed one percent granular dust and CID A-A-1909, as specified below.
2.7.1.1 Fertilizer "A"
Organic, granular fertilizer containing the following minimum percentages, by weight, of plant food
nutrients:
10 percent available nitrogen
10 percent available phosphorus
10 percent available potassium
2.7.1.2 Fertilizer `B"
Synthetic, granular, controlled -release fertilizer containing the following minimum percentages, by
weight, of plant food nutrients:
10 percent available nitrogen
10 percent available phosphorus
10 percent available potassium
2.7.1.3 Fertilizer "C"
Controlled release fertilizer, to use with hydroseeding and hydrosprigging, composed of pills coated
with plastic resin to provide a continuous release of nutrients for at least 6, months and containing the
following minimum percentages, by weight, of plant food nutrients.
10 percent available nitrogen
10 percent available phosphorus
10 percent available potassium
2.8 SURFACE TOP DRESSING
Free from, noxious weeds, mold, and other deleterious materials.
SECTION 02921 Page 7

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
2.8.1 Humus
95 percent decomposed vegetable matter and wood fiber with a particle size of 1/4 to 1/2 inch.
2.8.2 Straw
Stalks from oats, wheat, rye, barley, or rice. Furnish in air-dry condition and of proper consistency for
placing with commercial mulch blowing equipment.
2.8.3 Hay
Air-dry condition and of proper consistency for placing with commercial mulch blowing equipment.
Provide only marsh hay for lawn areas.
2.8.4 Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch
Use recovered materials of either paper -based (100 percent) or wood -based (100 percent) hydraulic
mulch. Processed to contain no growth or germination -inhibiting factors and dyed an appropriate color
to facilitate visual metering of materials application. Composition on air-dry weight basis: 9 to 15
percent moisture, pH range from 3.5 to 5.0. Use with hydraulic application of grass seed and sprigs
and fertilizer.
2.9 WATER
Source of water to be approved by Engineer, suitable quality for irrigation.
2.10 EROSION CONTROL MATERIALS
2.10.1 Net
Heavy, twisted jute mesh.
2.10.2 Blanket
Fiber, excelsior.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 Extent of Work
Provide soil preparation, fertilizing, seeding, sprigging, and surface top dressing of all newly graded
finished earth surfaces, unless indicated otherwise, and at all areas inside or outside the limits of
construction that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations.
3.1.2 Soil Preparation
Remove existing topsoil to a minimum depth of 2 inches and stock pile. After areas have been brought
to finish subgrade elevation, thoroughly till to minimum depth of 6 inches by scarifying, disking,
harrowing, or other methods approved by the Engineer. Remove debris and stones larger than one inch
SECTION 02921 Page 8

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
in any dimension remaining on surface after tillage. Spread stock piled topsoil evenly to provide
positive drainage. Provide off -site topsoil to meet indicated finish grade. Do not spread topsoil when
frozen or excessively wet or dry. Thoroughly mix subgrade and topsoil and off -site topsoil to a depth
of 8 inches by disking, harrowing, tilling or other method approved by the Engineer. Correct
irregularities in finished surfaces to eliminate depressions. Protect finished prepared soil areas from
damage by vehicular or pedestrian traffic.
Provide off -site topsoil to meet indicated finish grade. After areas have been brought to indicated
finish grade, incorporate fertilizer, pH adjusters, soil conditioners into soil a minimum depth of 6
inches by disking, harrowing, tilling, or other method approved by the Engineer. Remove debris and
stones larger than one inch in any dimension remaining on the surface after tillage. Correct
irregularities in finish surfaces to eliminate depressions. Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by
vehicular or pedestrian traffic.
3.1.2.1 pH Adjuster Application Rates
Apply pH adjuster at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site. For
bidding purposes only apply at rates for the following:
Lime 3000 pounds per acre
3.1.2.3 Fertilizer Application Rates
Apply fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site. For
bidding purposes only apply at rates for the following:
P, Organic Fertilizer 1,000 pounds per acre
c!
Synthetic Fertilizer 1,000 pounds per acre
Hydroseeding Fertilizer 1,000 pounds per acre
{ Hydrosprigging Fertilizer 1,000 pounds per acre
r
3.2 SEEDING
3.2.1 Seed Application Seasons and Conditions
Immediately before seeding, restore soil to proper grade and thoroughly moisten soil to a depth of 6
inches. Do not seed when ground is muddy frozen snow covered or in an unsatisfactory condition for
seeding. If special conditions exist that may warrant a variance in the above seeding dates or
conditions, submit a written request to the Engineer starting the special conditions and proposed
variance. Apply seed within twenty-four hours after seedbed preparation. Sow seed by approved
sowing equipment. Sow one-half the seed in one direction, and sow remainder at right angles to the
first sowing.
3.2.2 Seed Application Method
SECTION 02921 Page 9

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
3.2.2.1 Broadcast and Drop Seeding
Use broadcast or drop seeders. Sow one-half the seed in one direction, and sow remainder at right
angles to the first sowing. Cover seed uniformly to a maximum depth of 1/4 inch in clay soils and 1/2
inch in sandy soils by means of spike -tooth harrow, cultipacker, raking or other approved -devices.
3.2.2.2 Drill Seeding
Use grass seed drills. Drill seed uniformly to average depth of 1/2 inch.
3.2.2.3 Hydroseeding
Mix seed, fertilizer, and wood cellulose fiber in required amount of water to produce a homogeneous
slurry. When hydraulically sprayed on the ground, material shall form a blotter like cover impregnated
uniformly with grass seed. Cover shall allow rainfall or applied water to percolate to underlying soil.
3.2.3 Surface Top Dressing
Spread straw hay over seed bed area to an even depth of 1/2 inch. Take precautionary measures to
prevent top dressing materials from spilling onto pavements, utilities structures, or planter beds.
3.2.4 Rolling
Immediately after seeding, firm entire area except for slopes in excess of 3 to 1 with a roller not
exceeding 90 pounds for each foot of roller width. If seeding is performed with cultipacker-type seeder
or by hydroseeding, rolling may be eliminated.
3.2.5 Erosion Control Material
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2.6 Watering
Start watering areas seeded as required by temperature and wind conditions. Apply water at a rate
sufficient to insure thorough wetting of soil to a depth of 6 inches without run off. During the
germination process, seed is to be kept actively growing and not allowed to dry out.
3.3 SODDING
3.3.1 Placing
Place sod a maximum of 36 hours after initial harvesting, in accordance with ASPA GSS as modified
herein. Thoroughly moisten areas to be sodded immediately prior to placing sod.
3.3.2 Spot Sodding
Cut sod into plugs 2 inches square or 2 inches in diameter. Place individual pieces of sod on 12 inch
centers and press firmly into soil by foot pressure or by tamping. Overseed for erosion control on 3 to
1 or greater slopes and drainage ways in spot sodded areas. Apply seed in accordance with applicable
portions of paragraph entitled "Seed Composition".
SECTION 02921 Page 10

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
3.3.3 Sodding Slopes and Ditches
For slopes 2:1 and greater, lay sod with long edge parallel to slope. For V-ditches and flat bottomed
ditches, lay sod with long edge parallel to flow of water. Anchor each piece of sod with wood pegs or
wire staples maximum 2 feet on center. On slope areas, start sodding at bottom of the slope.
3.3.4 Finishing
After completing sodding, blend edges o sodded area smoothly into surrounding area.
3.3.5 Rolling
Immediately after sodding, firm entire area except for slopes in excess of 3 to 1 with a roller not
exceeding 90 pounds for each foot of roller width.
3.3.6 Watering
Start watering areas sodded as required by daily temperature and wind conditions. Apply water at a
rate sufficient to ensure thorough wetting of soil to minimum depth of 6 inches.
3.4 SPRIGGING
3.4.1 Rate
Perform sprigging a maximum 36 hours after initial harvesting. Inspect sprigs for heat damage during
planting operation. Plant groups of sprigs at 12 inch maximum intervals. Limit the interval between
dropping sprigs and covering with soil as required by temperature and wind conditions.
3.4.2 Planting
Plant sprigs in furrows spaced a maximum 12 inches apart. Immediately after opening furrows, place
sprigs. Fill furrows so that surface is flush with designated grade and a live portion of each sprig is
exposed.
Plant to a depth of approximately 4 inches and cover sprigs so that surface is flush with designated
grade and a live portion of each sprig is exposed.
3.4.3 Overseeing
Apply seed in accordance with applicable portions of paragraph entitled "Seed Application method" at
rates in accordance with paragraph entitled "See Composition".
3.4.4 Rolling
Immediately after completion of sprigging operations and additional seeding, roll planted area with
culltipacker or roller not exceeding 90 pounds per foot for each foot of roller width. If sprigging is
performed by hydro -sprigging, rolling may be eliminated.
SECTION 02921 Page 11

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
KNIT -TIN
3.4.5 Watering
Apply water at the time of sprigging operations at a rate sufficient to ensure thorough wetting of soil to
a depth of 6 inches.
3.5 PROTECTION OF TURF AREAS
Immediately after turfing, protect area against traffic and other use.
3.6 RENOVATION OF EXISTING TURF AREA
3.6.1 Aeration
Upon completion of weed eradication operations and Engineer's approval to proceed, aerate turf areas
indicated, by approved device. Core, by pulling soil plugs, to a minimum depth of 2 inches. Leave all
soil plugs, which are produced, in the turf area.
Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access route
to each building. Clean all soil plugs off of other paving when work is complete.
3.6.2 Vertical Mowing
Upon completion of aerating operation and Engineer's approval to proceed, vertical mow turf areas
indicated, by approved device, to a depth of 1/2 inch above existing soil level, to reduce thatch build-
up, grain, and surface compaction. Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route
and one paved vehicular access route to each building. Clean other paving when work is complete.
Remove all debris generated during this operation off site.
3.6.3 Over Seeding
Apply seed in accordance with applicable portions of paragraph entitled "Seed Application Method" at
rates in accordance with paragraph entitled "Seed Composition".
3.7 RESTORATION
Restore to original condition existing turf areas that have been damaged during turf installation
operations. Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular
access route to each building. Clean other paving when work in adjacent areas is complete.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 02921 Page 12

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)
ACI 301 (1994) Structural Concrete for Buildings
ACI 347R (1994) Form Work for Concrete
AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA)
AHA A135.4 (1982; R 1988) Basic hardboard
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM C 39 (1994) Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
CORPS OF ENGINEERS (COE)
CRD-C-572 (1974) Polyvinylchloride Waterstop
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE PRODUCT STANDARDS (PS)
PS-1 (1995) Construction and Industrial Plywood
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.2.1 SD-05 Data
a. Calculations
1.2.1.1 Formwork Calculations
ACI 347R. Include design calculations indicating arrangement of forms, sizes and grades of supports
(lumber), panels, and related components. Furnish drawings and calculations of shoring and reshoring
methods proposed for floor and roof slabs, spandrel beams, and other horizontal concrete members.
1.2.2 SD-03 Manufacturer's Catalog Data
a. Waterstops
SECTION 03100 Page 1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
1.2.3 SD-02 Shop -Drawings
a. Form Work
b. Form Removal Schedule
1.2.3.1 Form Work
Drawings showing details of formwork including; joints, supports, studding and shoring, and sequence t
of form and shoring removal. Reproductions of contract drawings are unacceptable. —
1.2.3.2 Form Removal Schedule
Submit schedule for form removal indicating element and minimum length of time for form removal.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS FOR FORMS
i
Provide wood, plywood, or steel. Use plywood or steel forms where a smooth form finish is required.
Lumber shall be square edged or tongue -and -groove boards, free of raised grain, knotholes, or other i
surface defects. Plywood: PS-1, B-B concrete form panels or better or AHA A135.4, hardboard for
smooth form lining. Steel form surfaces shall not contain irregularities, dents, or sags.
2.2 FORM TIES AND ACCESSORIES
The use of wire alone is prohibited. Form ties and accessories shall not reduce the effective cover of
the reinforcement.
2.2.1 Polyvinylchloride Waterstops
COE CRD-C-572. Waterstops shall be dumbbell shaped and have dimensions of 6" x 1/4" with a 5/8"
bulb on each end.
2.2.2 Dovetail Anchor Slot
Preformed metal slot approximately one by one inch of not less than 22 gage galvanized steel cast in
concrete. Coordinate actual size and throat opening with dovetail anchors and provide with removable
filler material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FORMS
ACI 301. Provide forms, shoring, and scaffolding for concrete placement. Set forms mortar -tight and
true to line and grade. Chamfer above grade exposed joints, edges, and external corners of concrete
0.75 inch unless otherwise indicated. Provide formwork with clean -out openings to permit inspection
and removal of debris. Forms submerged in water shall be watertight.
� I
SECTION 03100 Page 2
Li

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
3.1.1 Coating
Before concrete placement.
--End of Section--
SECTION 03100 Page 3

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
J
SECTION 03200
-
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed
below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred
to in the test by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)
ACI 301
(1996) Structural Concrete for Buildings
ACI 315
(1994) Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 82
,I
(1995) Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 123
(1989; Rev. A) Zinc 9 Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron
and Steel Products
z.
ASTM A 185
(1994) Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement
ASTM A 496
(1995) Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 497
(1995) Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed, for Concrete
Reinforcement
ASTM A 615/A 615M
(1995; Rev. A) Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 616/A 6/6M
(1995; Rev. B) Rail -Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 617/A 617M
(1995; Rev. B) Axle -Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
—; ASTM A 706/A 706M
(1995; Rev. B) Low -Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
ASTM A 934/A 934M
(1995) Epoxy -coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars
Y'
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY, INC. (AWS)
AWS D1.4
(1992) Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel
v
SECTION 03200 Page 1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
Lj
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.2.1 SD-02 Drawings
a. Reinforcing steel
Reproductions of contract drawing are unacceptable.
1.2.1.1 Reinforcing Steel
ACI 315. Indicate bending diagrams, assembly diagrams, splicing and laps of bars, shapes,
dimensions, and details of bar reinforcing, accessories, and concrete cover. Do not scale dimensions
from structural drawings to determine lengths of reinforcing bars.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Store reinforcement of different sizes and shapes in separate piles or racks raised above the ground to
avoid excessive rusting. Protect from contaminants such as grease, oil, and dirt. Ensure bar sizes can
be accurately identified after bundles are broken and tags removed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 REINFORCEMENT
2.1.1 Reinforcing Bars
ACI 301 unless otherwise specified. ASTM A 615/A 615M and ASTM A 617/A 617M with the bars
marked A, Grade 60.
2.1.2 Mechanical Reinforcing Bar Connectors
ACI 301. Provide 125 percent minimum yield strength of the reinforcement bar.
2.1.3 Welded Wire Fabric
ASTM A 185 or ASTM A 497. Provide flat sheets of welded wire fabric for slabs and toppings.
2.1.4 Wire
ASTM A 82 or ASTM A 496.
2.1.5 Reinforcing Bar Supports
Provide bar ties and supports of coated or noncorrodible material.
a
SECTION 03200 Page 2

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PLACING REINFORCEMENT AND MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
I
ACI 301. Provide bars, wire fabric, wire ties, 'supports, and other devices necessary to install and
secure reinforcement. Reinforcement shall not have rust, scale, oil, grease, clay, or foreign substances
that would reduce the bond. Rusting of reinforcement is a basis of rejection if the effective cross -
sectional area or the nominal weight per unit length has been reduced. Remove loose rust prior to
placing steel. Tack welding is prohibited.
3.1.1 Reinforcement Supports
Place reinforcement and secure with galvanized and noncorrodible chairs, spacers, or metal hangers.
For supporting reinforcement on the ground, use concrete or other noncorrodible material, having a
compressive strength equal to or greater than the concrete being placed.
3.1.2 Splicing
As indicated. For splices not indicated ACI 301. Do not splice at points of maximum stress. Overlap
welded wire fabric the spacing of the cross wires, plus 2 inches.
3.1.3 Future Bonding
Plug exposed, threaded, mechanical reinforcement bar connectors with a greased bolt. Bolt threads
shall match the connector. Countersink the connector in the concrete. Calk the depression after the
bolt is installed.
3.1.4 Cover
ACI 301 for minimum coverage, unless otherwise indicated.
-- End of Section --
i
SECTION 03200 Page 3

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
SECTION 03300
CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed
below form a part of this specification to the extend referenced. The
publications are referred
to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS
r r
(AASHTO)
AASHTO M182
(1991) Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)
ACI117
(1991) Tolerances for Concrete Construction and
Materials
ACI211.1
(1991) Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight,
and Mass Concrete
ACI211.2
(1991) Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight
Concrete
ACI 213R
(1987) Structural Lightweight Aggregate Concrete
ACI 301
(1996) Structural Concrete for Buildings
ACI 302.1R
(1989) Concrete Floor and Slab Construction
- ACI304R
(1989) Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing
Concrete
1 ACI 304.2R
(1996) Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods
ACI 305R
(1991) Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306.1
(1990) Cold Weather Concreting
ACI318M
(1995) Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete (Metric)
ACI318
(1995) Building Code Requirements for Reinforced
Concrete
ACI 347R
(1994) Formwork for Concrete
SECTION 03300 Page 1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM C 31/C 31M (1996) Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in
the Field
ASTM C 33 (1993) Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 39 (1996) Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
ASTM C 42 (1994) Obtaining and Testing Drilled cores and Sawed
Beams of Concrete
ASTM C 94
(1996) Ready -Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 143
(1990; Rev. A) Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
ASTM C 150
((1996) Portland Cement
ASTM C 171
(1995) Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
ASTM C 172
(1990) Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 173
(1991; Rev. A) Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
by the Volumetric Method
ASTN C 227
(1990) Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement -Aggregate
Combinations (Mortar -Bar Method)
ASTM C 231
(1991; Rev. B) Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete
by the Pressure Method
ASTM C 260
(1995) Air -Entraining Admixture for Concrete
ASTM C 295
(1990) Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for
Concrete
ASTM C 309
(1995) Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for
Curing Concrete
ASTM C 330
(1989) Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete
ASTM C 494
(1992) Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 567
(1991) Unit Weight Structural Concrete
ASTM C 595M
(1995; Rev. A) Blended Hydraulic Cements (Metric)
ASTM C 595
(1994; Rev. A) Blended Hydraulic Cements
SECTION 03300 Page 2

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
ASTM C 618
ASTM C 881
ASTM C 920
ASTM C 989
ASTM C 1017
ASTM C 1107
ASTM C 1116
ASTM C 1240
ASTM D 1190
ASTM D 1751
ASTMD 1752
ASTM D 1854
ASTM D 4397
ASTM E 1155M
ASTM E 1155
FS SS-S200
(1996; Rev. A) Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzolan for Use as -a Mineral Admixture in
Portland Cement Concrete
i
(1990) Epoxy -Resin -Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete
(1995) Elastomeric Joint Sealants
(1995) Ground granulated Blast -Furnace Slag for Use in
Concrete and Mortars
(1992) Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing
Flowing Concrete
(1991: Rev. A) Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -Cement Grout
(Nonshrink)
(1995) Fiber -Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete
(1996) Silica Fume for Use in Hydraulic -Cement
Concrete and Mortar
(1996) Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot -Applied Elastic Type
(1983; R 1991) Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
(Nonextiuding and Resilient Bituminous Types)
(1984; R 1996) Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork
Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction
(1996) Jet -Fuel -Resistant Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot -
Poured Elastic Type
(1991) Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction,
Industrial, and Agricultural Applications
(1996) Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using
the F-Number System (Metric)
(1996) Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using
the F-Number System
FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS (FS)
(Rev. E; Am. 2) Sealants, Joint, Two -Component, Jet -
Blast Resistant, Cold -Applied, for Portland Cement
Concrete Pavement
SECTION 03300 Page 3

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
l�.
FS UU-13-790 (Rev. A Reinst) Building Paper, Vegetable Fiber:
(Kraft, Waterproofed, Water Repellent and Fire
Resistant)
FS SS-S-1614
1.2 DEFINITIONS
1.2.1 Cementitious Material
(Rev. A) Sealants, Joint, Jet -Fuel -Resistant, Hot -Applied
for Portland Cement and Tar Concrete Pavements
Cementitious material as used herein shall include all Portland cement, pozzolan, fly ash and ground
iron blast -furnace slag.
1.2.2 Exposed to Public View
Exposed to public view means situated so that it can be seen from eye level from a public location
after completion of the building. A public location is accessible to persons not responsible for
operation or maintenance of the building.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
1.3.1 SD-03 Manufacturer's Catalog Data
a. Materials for curing concrete
b. Joint sealants
c. Joint filler
d. Vapor barrier
e. Epoxy bonding compound
f. Synthetic reinforcing fibers
1.3.2 SD-05 Design Data
a. Concrete Mix design
Thirty days minimum prior to concrete placement, submit a mix design for each strength and type of
concrete. Submit a complete list of materials including type; brand; source and amount of cement, fly
ash, pozzolans, ground slag ployprophlene fibers, and admixtures; and applicable reference
specifications. Submit additional data regarding concrete aggregates if the source of aggregate
changes. Submittal shall clearly indicate where each mix design will be used when more than one mix
design is submitted. An identical concrete mix design previously approved within the past 12 months
by the Owner may be used without further approval, if copies of the previous approval and fly ash and
pozzolan test results are submitted. The approval of fly ash and pozzolan, and polypropylene fibers'
SECTION 03300 Page 4

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
tests e s s results shall have been within 6 months of submittal date. Obtain acknowledgement of receipt
prior to concrete placement
1.3.3 SD-07 Certificates
a. Curing concrete elements
b. Pumping concrete
1.3.3.1 Curing Concrete Elements
Submit proposed.materials and methods for curing concrete elements.
1.3.3.2 Pumping Concrete
-, Submit proposed materials and methods for pumping concrete. Submittal shall include mix designs,
pumping equipment including type of pump and'size and material for pipe, and maximum length and
height concrete will be pumped.
1.3.4 SD-09 Test Reports
a. Concrete mix design
b. Fly ash
c. Pozzolan
d. Ground iron blast -furnace slag
e. Aggregates
f. Fiber -reinforced concrete
d 1.3.4.1 Concrete Mix Design
Submit copies of test reports showing that the mix has been successfully tested to produce concrete
With the properties specified and that mix will be! suitable for the job conditions. Test reports shall be
submitted along with the concrete mix design. Obtain approval before concrete placement.
1.3.4.2 Fly Ash and Pozzolan
Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C 618 for fly ash and pozzolan. Submit test results
performed within 6 months of submittal date.
- 1.3.4.3 Ground Iron Blast -Furnace Slag
Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C, 989 for ground iron blast -furnace slag. Submit test
results performed within 6 months of submittal date.
SECTION 03300 Page 5

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
1.3.4.4 Aggregates
ASTM C 227 for potential alkali -silica reactions, ASTM C 295 for petrographic analysis.
1.3.4.5 Fiber -Reinforced Concrete
Test to determine flexural toughness index I5 in accordance with ASTM C 1116.
1.3.5 SD-06 Field Test Reports
a. Compressive strength tests
1.4 MODIFICATION OF REFERENCES
Accomplish work in accordance with ACI publications except as modified herein. Consider the
advisory or recommended provisions to be mandatory, as though the word "shall' had been substituted
for the words "should" or "could" or "may", wherever they appear. Interpret reference to the 'Building
Official', the "Structural Engineer", and the "Architect/Engineer" to mean the Engineer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Do not deliver concrete until vapor barrier, forms, reinforcement, embedded items, and chamfer strips
are in place and ready for concrete placement and inspected by the Engineer or his representative. ACI
301 for job site storage of materials. Protect materials from contaminants such as grease, oil, and dirt.
Ensure materials can be accurately identified after bundles are broken and tags removed.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE
2.1.1 Contractor -Furnished Mix Design
ACI 211.1, ACI 301, and ACI 318 except as otherwise specified. The compressive strength (fc) of the
concrete for each portion of the structure(s) shall be as indicated.
fc
min.28- Range Water -
Day Comp. ASTM C 33 of Cement Air
Strength Aggregate Slump Ratio Entr.
Location (psi) (Size No) (inches) (by weight) (percent)
All areas 4000 67 1.5-3.5 0.5 5-7
Maximum slump shown above may be increased one inch for methods of consolidation other than
vibration. Slump may be increased to 7 inches when superplasticizers are used. Provide air
entrainment using air -entraining admixture. Air entrainment shall be within plus or minus 1.5 percent
of the valve specified.
SECTION 03300 Page 6

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
2.1.1.1 Required Average strength of Mix Design
The selected mixture shall produce an average =production
sive strength exceeding the specified strength
by the amount indicated in ACI 301. When a facility has a record of at least 15
consecutive tests, the standard deviation shall be calculated and the required average compressive
strength shall be determined in accordance with ACI 301. When a concrete production facility does
not have a suitable record of tests to establish a standard deviation, the required average strength shall
be as follows:
a. For fc less than 3000 psi, 1000 psi plus PC.
b. For fc between 3000 and 5000 psi, 1200 psi plus PC.
c. For fc over 5000 psi, 1400 psi plus fc.
2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 Cement
ASTM C 150, Type I or ASTM C 595, Type IP (MS) blended cement except as modified herein. The
blended cement shall consist of a mixture of ASTM C 150 cement and one of the following materials:
ASTM C 618 pozzolan or fly ash, ASTM C 989' ground iron blast -furnace slag. The pozzolan or fly
ash content shall not exceed 20 percent by weight of the total cementitious material. For exposed
concrete, use one manufacturer for each type of cement, ground slag, fly ash, and pozzolan.
2.2.1.1 Fly Ash and Pozzolan
ASTM C 618, Type N, F, or C, except that the maximum allowable loss on ignition shall be 6 percent
for Types N and F. Add with cement.
2.2.1.2 Ground Iron Blast -Furnace Slag
ASTM C 989, Grade 120
2.2.2 Water
Water shall be fresh, clean, and potable; free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts,
organic materials, or other substances deleterious to concrete.
2.2.3 Aggregates
ASTM C 33, except as modified herein. Furnish aggregates for exposed concrete surfaces from one
source. Aggregates shall not contain any substance that may be deleteriously reactive with the alkalies
in the cement.
2.2.4 Nonshrink Grout
ASTM C 1107.
SECTION 03300 Page 7

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
2.2.5 Admixtures.
Do not use calcium chloride admixtures. `'
2.2.6 Admixtures
Do not use calcium chloride admixtures.
2.2.6.1 Air -Entraining
ASTM C 260.
2.2.6.2 Accelerating
ASTM C 494, Type C.
2.2.6.3 Retarding
ASTM C 494, Type B, D, or G.
2.2.6.4 Water Reducing
ASTM C 494, Type A, E, or F.
2.2.6.5 High Range Water Reducer (HRWR) (Superplasticizers)
ASTM C 494, Type F and ASTM C 1017.
2.2.6.6 Fiber -Reinforced Concrete
In addition to the requirements specified above, fiber reinforced concrete shall be provided in
accordance with ASTM C 1116 Type III, synthetic fiber reinforced concrete, and as follows. Synthetic
reinforcing fibers shall be 100 percent virgin polypropylene fibrillated fibers containing no reprocessed
olefin materials. Fibers shall have a specified gravity of 0.0, a minimum tensile strength of 70 ksi,
graded per manufacturer, and specifically manufactured to an optimum gradation for use as concentrate '
secondary reinforcement. A minimum of 1.5 pounds of fibers per cubic yard of concrete shall be used.
Fibers shall be added at the batch plant. Toughness indices shall meet requirements for performance
level I. Provide the services of a qualified technical representative to instruct the concrete supplier in
proper batching and mixing of materials to be provided.
2.2.7 Vapor Barrier
ASTM D 4397 polyethylene sheeting, minimum 6 mil thickness.
2.2.7.1 Waterproof Paper
Kraft paper, glass reinforming fibers and layers of polyethylene laminated under heat and pressure to ti
form a single layer meeting the requirements of FS UU-B 790, Type I, Grade A, Style 4; or waterproof -"
Paper, regular, conforming to ASTM C 171, consisting of two sheets of kraft paper cemented together
With bituminous material in which are embedded cords or strands of fiber running in both directions
not more than 1 1/4 inch apart.
SECTION 03300 Page 8 L j
F1
L

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
i C
2.2.7.2 Polyethylene Sheeting
ASTM D 4397, minimum 6 mil thickness.
2.2.8 Materials for Curing Concrete
2.2.8.1 Impervious Sheeting
ASTM C 171; waterproof paper, clear or white polyethylene sheeting, or polyethylene -coated burlap.
{ 2.2.8.2 Previous Sheeting
AASHTO M 182.
2.2.8.3 Liquid Membrane -Forming Compound
ASTM C 309, white -pigmented, Type 2, Class B.
2.2.9 Liquid Chemical Sealer -Hardener Compound
Compound shall be magnesium fluosilicate which when mixed with water seals and hardens the
surface of the concrete. Do not use on exterior slabs exposed to freezing, tile, paint, roofing,
- waterproofing, or other material applied to concrete.
2.2.10 Expansion/Contraction Joint Filler
ASTM D 1751 or ASTM D 1752, 1/2 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.
2.2.11 Joint Sealants
2.2.11.1 Horizontal Surfaces, 3 Percent Slope, Maximum
ASTM D 1190 or ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, use T. ASTM D 1854 for surfaces subjected to jet
fuel.
2.2.11.2 Vertical Surfaces Greater Than 3 Percent Slope
ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use T.
2.2.12 Epoxy Bonding Compound
ASTM C 881. Provide Type I for bonding hardened concrete to hardened concrete; Type II for
bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete; and Type III as a binder in epoxy mortar or
concrete, or for use in bonding ski -resistant materials to hardened concrete. Provide Grade 1 or 2 for
horizontal surfaces and Grade 3 for vertical surfaces. Provide Class A if placement temperature is
below 40 degrees F; Class B if placement temperature is between 40 and 60 degrees F; or Class C if
placement temperature is above 60 degrees F.
SECTION 03300 Page 9

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PLACING MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
3.1.1 Vapor Barrier
Provide beneath the on -grade concrete floor slab. Use the greatest widths and lengths practicable to
eliminate joints wherever possible. Lap joints
A minimum of 12 inches. Remove torn, punctured, or damaged vapor barrier material and provide
with new vapor barrier prior to placing concrete. Concrete placement shall not damage vapor barrier
material.
3.1.2 Setting Miscellaneous Material
Place and secure anchors and bolts, pipe sleeves, conduits, and other such items in position before
concrete placement. Plumb anchor bolts and check location and elevation. Temporarily fill voids in
sleeves with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete.
3.1.3 Construction Joints
Locate joints to least impair strength. Continue reinforcement across joints unless otherwise indicated.
3.1.4 Expansion Joints and Contraction Joints
Provide expansion joint at edges of interior floor slabs on grade abutting vertical surfaces, and as
indicated. Make expansion joints 1/2 inch wide unless indicated otherwise. Fill expansion joints not
exposed to weather with preformed joint filler material. Completely fill joints exposed to weather with
joint filler material and joint sealant. Do not extend reinforcement or other embedded metal items
bonded to the concrete through any expansion joint unless an expansion sleeve is used. Provide
contraction joints, either formed or saw cut or cut with a jointing tool, to the indicated depth after the
surface has been finished. Sawed joints shall be completed within 4 to 12 hours after concrete
placement. Protect joints from intrusion of foreign matter.
3.2 BATCHING, MEASURING, MIXING, AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
ASTM C 94, ACI 301,ACI 302.1R, and ACI 304R, except as modified herein. Batching equipment
shall be such that the concrete ingredients are consistently measured within the following tolerances: 1
percent for cement and water, 2 percent for aggregate, and 3 percent for admixtures. Furnish
mandatory batch ticket information for each load of ready mix concrete.
3.2.1 Measuring
Make measurements at intervals as specified in paragraphs entitled "Sampling" and "Testing."
3.2.2 Mixing
ASTM C 94 and ACI 301. Machine mix concrete. Begin mixing within 30 minutes after the cement
to the aggregates. Place concrete within 90 minutes of either addition of mixing water to cement and
aggregates or addition of cement to aggregates if the air temperature is less than 85 degrees F. Reduce
mixing time and place concrete within 60 minutes if the air temperature is greater than 85 degrees F
except as follows: if set retarding admixture is used and slump requirements can be met, limit for -
SECTION 03300 Page 10 ,Lj
r

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
placing concrete may remain at 90 minutes. Additional water may be added provided that both the
specified maximum slump and water -cement ratio are not exceeded. When additional water is added,
an additional 30 revolutions of the mixer at mixing speed is required. If the entrained air content falls
below the specified limit, add a sufficient quantity of admixture to bring the entrained air content
within the specified limits. Dissolve admixtures in the mixing water and mix in the drum to uniformly
distribute the admixture throughout the batch.
3.2.3 Transporting
Transport concrete from the mixer to the forms as rapidly as practicable. Prevent segregation or loss of
ingredients. Clean transporting equipment thoroughly before each batch. Do not use aluminum pipe or
chutes. Remove concrete, which has segregated in transporting, and dispose of as directed.
3.3 PLACING CONCRETE
Place concrete as soon as practicable after the forms and the reinforcement have been inspected and
approved. Do not place concrete when weather conditions prevent proper placement and
consolidation; in uncovered areas during periods of precipitation; or in standing water. Prior to placing
concrete, remove dirt, construction debris, water, snow, and ice from within the forms. Deposit
concrete as close as practicable to the final position in the forms. Do not exceed a free vertical drop of
3 feet from the point of discharge. Place concrete in one continuous operation from one end of the
structure toward the other. Position grade stakes on 10 foot centers maximum in each direction when
' pouring interior slabs and on 20 foot centers maximum for exterior slabs.
3.3.1 Footing Placement
Concrete for footings may be placed in excavations without forms upon inspection and approval by the
Engineer. Excavation width shall be a minimum of 4 inches greater than indicated.
3.3.2 Vibration
ACI 301. Furnish a spare vibrator on the job site whenever concrete is placed. Consolidate concrete
slabs greater than 4 inches in depth with high frequency, internal, mechanical vibrating equipment
supplemented by hand spading and tamping. Consolidate concrete slabs 4 inches or less in depth by
wood tampers, spading, and settling with a heavy leveling straightedge. Operate vibrators with
vibratory element submerged in the concrete, with a minimum frequency of not less than 6000
impulses per minute when submerged. Do not use vibrators to transport the concrete in the forms.
Insert and withdraw vibrators approximately 18 inches apart. Penetrate the previously placed lift with
the vibrator when more than on lift is required. Place concrete in 18 inch maximum vertical lifts.
External vibrators shall be used on the exterior surface of the forms when internal vibrators do no
provide adequate consolidation of the concrete.
3.3.3 Application of Epoxy Bonding Compound
Apply a thin coat of compound to dry, clean surfaces. Scrub compound into the surface with a stiff -
bristle brush. Place concrete while compound is stringy. Do not permit compound to harden prior to
h, concrete placement. Follow manufacturer's instructions regarding safety and health precautions when
working with epoxy resins.
SECTION 03300 Page 11

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
3.3.4 Pumping
ACI 304R and ACI 304.2R. Pumping shall not result in separation or loss of materials nor cause
interruptions sufficient to permit loss of plasticity between successive increments. Loss of slump in
pumping equipment shall not exceed 2 inches. Concrete shall not be conveyed through pipe made of
aluminum or aluminum alloy. Rapid changes in pipe sizes shall be avoided. Maximum size of coarse
aggregate shall be limited to 33 percent of the diameter of the pipe. Maximum size of well rounded
aggregate shall be limited to 40 percent of the pipe diameter. Samples for testing shall be taken at both
the point of delivery to the pump and at the discharge end.
3.3.5 Cold Weather
ACI 306.1. Do not allow concrete temperature to decrease below 50 degrees F. Obtain approval prior
to placing concrete when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or when concrete is likely to
be subjected to freezing temperatures within 24 hours. Cover concrete and provide sufficient heat to
maintain 50 degrees F minimum adjacent to both the formwork and the structure while curing. Limit
the rate of cooling to 5 degrees F in any 1 hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours after heat application.
3.3.6 Hot Weather
ACI 305R Maintain required concrete temperature using Figure 2.1.5 in ACI 305R to prevent the
evaporation rate from exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square foot of exposed concrete per hour.
Cool ingredients before mixing or use other suitable means to control concrete temperature and prevent
rapid drying of newly placed concrete. Shade the fresh concrete as soon as possible after placing. Start
curing when the surface of the fresh concrete is sufficiently hard to permit curing without damage.
Provide water hoses, pipes, spraying'equipment, and water hauling equipment, where job site is remote
to water source, to maintain a moist concrete surface throughout the curing period. Provide burlap
cover or other suitable, permeable material with fog spray or continuous wetting of the concrete when
weather conditions prevent the use of either liquid membrane curing compound or impervious sheets.
For vertical surfaces, protect forms from direct sunlight and add water to top of structure once concrete
is set.
3.4 SURFACE FINISHES EXCEPT FLOOR, SLAB, AND PAVEMENT FINISHES
3.4.1 Defects
Repair formed surfaces by removing minor honeycombs, pits greater than 1 square inch surface area or
0.25 inch maximum depth, or otherwise defective area. Provide edges perpendicular to the surface and
patch with nonshrink grout. Patch tie holes and defects when the forms are removed. Concrete with
extensive honeycomb including exposed steel reinforcement, cold joints, entrapped debris, separated
aggregate, or other defects, which affect the serviceability or structural strength, will be rejected, unless
correction of defects is approved. Obtain approval of corrective action prior to repair. The surface of
the concrete shall not vary more than the allowable tolerances of ACI 347R. Exposed surfaces shall be
uniform in appearance and finished to a smooth form finish unless otherwise specified.
3.4.2 Not Against Forms (Top of Walls)
Surfaces not otherwise specified shall be finished with wood floats to even surfaces. Finish shall
match adjacent finishes.
SECTION 03300 Page 12

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
3.4.3 Formed Surfaces
3.4.3.1 Tolerances
ACI 117 and as indicated.
3.4.3.2 As -Cast Rough Form
Provide for surfaces below ground that are not exposed to public view. Patch these holes and defects
and level abrupt irregularities. Remove or rub off fins and other projections exceeding 0.25 inch in
_ height.
3.4.4 Wall Finish
Provide concrete indicated with a finish as follows:
a. All formed concrete surfaces shall be repaired, patch, with all fins and projections removed
and smoothed. All exposed (formed) concrete surfaces shall be rubbed with an abrasive stone
not more than 24 hours after the forms have been removed. The concrete shall be moistened
and rubbed until a uniform color and texture is produced.
b. After normal cleaning, patching, and rubbing, all interior concrete surfaces will be coated with
a cement based waterproof coating. The coating will be Thoroseal, by Standard DryWall
Products, Inc., Set Seal by Set Products, Inc., or equivalent. The dry powder and acrylic liquid
sealant shall be mixed with water into a batter consistency and applied to the surface with a
stiff fiber brush. The coating shall be scrubbed well into the dampened wall, filling all pores
and shall be Brushed out with a final stroke in one direction. Curing will be as required by the
Manufacturer's specifications. Two complete coats will be required on the interior surfaces of
all concrete structures.
C. All exposed exterior concrete surfaces as described above (to 24" below grade) shall be coated
with a textured finish. The material shall be Tex -cote, Thorocoat, or approved equal. The
color shall be selected by the Engineer.
3.4.5 Surface Finish Samples
Provide a minimum of three sample concrete panels for each finish for each mix design, 3 feet by 3
feet, 3 inches think. Use the approved concrete mix design(s). Provide sample panels on -site at
locations directed. Once approved, each set of panels shall be representative of each of the finishes
specified and shall be representative of each of the finishes specified and shall be representative of the
workmanship and finish (es) required. Do not remove or destroy samples until directed by the
Engineer.
3.5 FLOOR, SLAB, AND PAVEMENT FINISHES AND MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION
ACI 302.1R, unless otherwise specified. Slope floors uniformly to drains where drains are provided.
Depress the concrete base slab where quarry tile, ceramic tile, or vinyl tile are indicated. Where
- ^ straightedge measurements are specified, Contractor shall provide straightedge.
SECTION 03300 Page 13

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
3.5.1 Finish
Place, consolidate, and immediately strike off concrete to obtain proper contour, grade, and elevation
before bleedwater appears. Permit concrete to attain a set sufficient for floating and supporting the
weight of the finisher and equipment. If bleedwater is present prior to floating the surface, drag the
excess water off or remove by absorption with porous materials. Do not use dry cement to absorb
bleedwater.
3.5.1.1 Scratched
Use for surfaces intended to receive bonded applied cementitious applications. After the concrete has
been placed, consolidated, struck off, and leveled to a Class C tolerance as defined below, the surface
shall be roughened with stiff brushes of rakes before final set.
3.5.1.2 Floated
Use for exterior slabs where not otherwise specified. After the concrete has been placed, consolidated,
struck off, and leveled, do not work the concrete further, until ready for floating. Whether floating
with a wood, magnesium, or composite hand float, with a bladed power trowel equipped with float
shoes, or with a powered disc, float shall begin when the surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the
operation. During or after the first floating, surface shall be checked with a 10 foot straightedge
applied at no less than two different angles, one of which is perpendicular to the direction of strike off.
High spots shall be cut down and low spots filled during this procedure to produce a surface level
within 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
3.5.1.3 Steel Troweled
Use for floors intended as walking surfaces, and for reception of floor coverings. First, provide a
floated finish. The finish shall next be power troweled two times, and finally hand troweled. The first
troweling after floating shall produce a smooth surface, which is relatively free of defects, but which may still show some trowel marks. Additional trowelings shall be done by hand after the surface has
hardened sufficiently. The final troweling shall be done when a ringing sound is produced as the
trowel is moved over the surface. The surface shall be thoroughly consolidated by the hand troweling
operations. The finished surface shall be essentially free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and
appearance. The finished surface shall produce a surface level to within 1/4 inch in 10 feet. On
surfaces intended to support floor coverings, any defects of sufficient magnitude to show through the
floor covering shall be removed by grinding.
3.5.1.4 Nonslip Finish
Use on surfaces of exterior platforms, steps, and landings; and on exterior and interior pedestrian
ramps. Apply dry shake aggregate of ceramically bonded aluminum oxide to the surface at a minimum
rate of 25 pounds per 100 square feet. Blend approximately two-thirds of the aggregate with portland
cement as recommended by the manufacturer and apply to the surface evenly and without segregation.
After blended material has been embedded by floating, apply the remainder of the blended material to
the surface at right angles to the previous application. Apply blended material heavier in any areas not
sufficiently covered by the first application. Perform a second floating immediately following the first.
After the selected material has been embedded by the two floatings, complete the operation with a
broomed finish.
SECTION 03300 Page 14 }

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
3.5.1.5 Broomed
Use on surface of exterior walks, platforms, patios, and ramps, unless otherwise indicated. Perform a
floated finish, then draw a broom or burlap belt across the surface to produce a coarse scored texture.
Permit surface to harden sufficiently to retain the scoring or ridges. Broom transverse to traffic or at
right angles to the slope of the slab.
3.5.1.6 Pavement
Screed the concrete with a template advanced with a combined longitudinal and crosswise motion.
Maintain a slight surplus of concrete ahead of the template. After screeding, float the concrete
longitudinally. Use a straightedge to check slope and flatness; correct and refloat as necessary. Obtain
final finish by a burlap drag. Drag a strip of clean, wet burlap from 3 to 10 feet wide and 2 feet longer
than the pavement width across the slab. Produce a fine, granular, sandy textured surface without
disfiguring marks. Round edges and joints with an edger having a radius of 1/8 inch.
3.5.1.7 Concrete Toppings Placement
{ The following requirements apply to the placement of toppings of concrete on base slabs that are either
freshly placed and still plastic, or on hardened base slabs.
a. Placing on a Fresh Base: Screed and bull float the base slab. As soon as the water sheen has
` disappeared, lightly rake the surface of the base slab with a stiff bristle .broom to produce a
bonding surface for the topping. Immediately spread the topping mixture evenly over the
roughened base before final set takes place. Give the topping the finish specified herein.
b. Bonding to a Hardened Base: When the topping is to be bonded to a floated or troweled
hardened base, roughen the base by scarifying, grit -blasting, scabbing, planing, flame cleaning,
or acid -etching to lightly expose aggregate and provide a bonding surface. Remove dirt,
laitance, and loose aggregate by means of a stiff wire broom. Keep the clean base wet for a
period of 12 hours preceding the application of the topping. Remove excess water and apply a
1:1:1/2 cement -sand -water grout, and brush into the surface of the base slab. Do not allow the
cement grout to dry, and spread it only short distances ahead of the topping placement. Do not
allow the temperature differential between the completed base and the topping mixture to exceed
10 degrees F at the time of placing. Place the topping and finish as specified herein.
3.5.2 Flat Floor Finishes
ACI 302.1R. Construct in accordance with one of the methods recommended in Table 7.15.3, "Typical
Composite Ff/FL Values for Various Construction Methods." ACI 117 for tolerance tested by ASTM
# 1155.
a. Specified Conventional Value:
Floor Flatness (Ff) 20-13 minimum
Floor Levelness (FL) 15-10 minimum
b. Specified Industrial:
Floor Flatness (Ff) 30-15 minimum
Floor Levelness (FL) 20-10 minimum
SECTION 03300 Page 15

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
3.5.2.1 Measurement of Floor Tolerances
Test slab within 24 hours of the final troweling. Provide tests to Engineer within 12 hours after
collecting the data. Floor flatness inspector shall provide a tolerance report, which shall include:
a. Key plan showing location of data collected.
b. Results required by ASTM E 1155.
3.5.2.2 Remedies for Out of Tolerance Work
Contractor shall repair and retest any floors not meeting specified tolerances. Prior to repair,
Contractor shall submit and receive approval for the proposed repair, including product data from any
materials proposed. Repairs shall not result in damage to structural integrity of the floor. For floors
exposed to public view, repairs shall not result in any uneven or unusual coloring of the surface.
3.5.3 Concrete Walks
Provide 4 inches thick minimum. Provide contraction joints spaced every 5 linear feet unless otherwise
indicated. Cut contraction joints one inch deep with a jointing tool after the surface has been finished.
Provide 0.5 inch thick transverse expansion joints at changes in direction where sidewalk abuts curb,
steps, rigid pavement, or other similar structures; space expansion joints every 50 feet maximum. Give
walks a broomed finish. Unless indicated otherwise, provide a transverse slope of 1/48. Limit
variation in cross section to 1/4 inch in 5 feet.
3.5.4 Pits and Trenches
Place bottoms and walls monolithically or provide waterstops and keys.
3.5.5 Curbs and Gutters
Provide contraction joints spaced every 10 feet maximum unless otherwise indicated. Cut contraction
joints 3/4 inch deep with a jointing tool after the surface has been finished. Provide expansion joints
1/2 inch thick and spaced every 100 feet maximum unless otherwise indicated. Perform pavement
finish.
3.5.6 Splash Blocks
Provide at outlets of downspouts emptying at grade. Splash blocks may be precast concrete, and shall
be 24 inches long, 12 inches wide, and 4 inches thick, unless otherwise indicated, with smooth -finished
countersunk dishes sloped to drain away from building.
3.6 CURING AND PROTECTION
ACI 301 unless otherwise specified. Begin curing immediately following form removal. Avoid
damage to concrete from vibration created by blasting, pile driving, movement of equipment in the
vicinity, disturbance of formwork or protruding reinforcement, and any other activity resulting in
ground vibrations. Protect concrete from injurious action by sun, rain, flowing water, frost, mechanical
injury, tire marks, and oil stains. Do not allow concrete to dry out from time of placement until the
expiration of the specified curing period. Do not use membrane -forming compound on surfaces where
SECTION 03300 Page 16

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
appearance would be objectionable, on any surface to be painted, where coverings are to be bonded. If
�l forms are removed prior to the expiration of the curing period, provide another curing procedure
specified herein for the remaining portion of the curing period. Provide moist curing for those areas
receiving liquid chemical sealer -hardener or epoxy coating.
3.6.1 Moist Curing
Remove water without erosion or damage to the structure.
3.6.1.1 Ponding or Immersion
Continually immerse the concrete throughout the curing period. Water shall not be more than 20
degrees F less than the temperature of the concrete. For temperatures between 40 and 50 degrees F,
increase the curing period by 50 percent.
3.6.1.2 Fog Spraying or Sprinkling
Apply water uniformly and continuously throughout the curing period. For temperatures between 40
and 50 degrees F, increase the curing period by 50 percent.
3.6.1.3 Pervious Sheeting
Completely cover surface and edges of the concrete with two thicknesses of wet sheeting. Overlap
sheeting 6 inches over adjacent sheeting. Sheeting shall be at least as long as the width of the surface
to be cured. During application, do not drag the sheeting over the finished concrete nor over sheeting
already placed. Wet sheeting thoroughly and keep continuously wet throughout the curing period.
3.6.1.4 Impervious Sheeting
Wet the entire exposed surface and edges of the concrete with two thicknesses of wet sheeting
throughout the curing period. Lay sheeting directly on the concrete surface and overlap edges 12
inches minimum. Provide sheeting not less than 18 inches wider that the concrete surface to be cured.
Secure edges and transverse laps to form closed joints. Repair torn or damaged sheeting or provide
new sheeting. Cover or wrap columns, walls, and other vertical structural elements from the top down
with impervious sheeting; overlap and continuously tape sheeting joints; and introduce sufficient water
to soak the entire surface prior to completely enclosing.
j3.6.2 Liquid Membrane -Forming Curing Compound
Seal or cover joint openings prior to application of curing compound. Prevent curing compound from
entering the joint. Apply in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer immediately
after any water sheen, which may develop after finishing has disappeared from the concrete surface.
Provide and maintain compound on the concrete surface throughout the curing period. Do not use this
method of curing where the use of Figure 2.1.5 in ACI 305R indicated that hot weather conditions will
_s cause an evaporation rate exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square foot per hour.
SECTION 03300 Page 17

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
3.6.2.1 Application
Unless the manufacturer recommends otherwise, apply compound immediately after the surface loses
its water sheen and has a dull appearance, and before joints are sawed. Mechanically agitate curing
compound thoroughly during use. Use approved power -spraying equipment to uniformly apply two
coats of compound in a continuous operation. The total coverage for the two coats shall be 200 square
feet maximum per gallon of undiluted compound unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer's
written instructions. The compound shall form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that will not
check, crack, or peel. Immediately apply an additional coat of compound to areas where the film is
defective. Respray concrete surfaces subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound
application.
3.6.2.2 Protection of Treated Surfaces
Prohibit pedestrian and vehicular traffic and other sources of abrasion at least 72 hours after compound
application. Maintain continuity of the coating for the entire curing period and immediately repair any
damage.
3.6.3 Liquid Chemical Sealer -Hardener
Apply sealer -hardener to interior floors not receiving floor covering and floors located under access
flooring. Apply the sealer -hardener in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Seal or
cover joints and openings in which joint sealant is to be applied as required by the joint sealant
manufacturer. The sealer -hardener shall not be applied until the concrete has been moist cured and has
aged for a minimum of 30 days. Apply a minimum of two coats of sealer -hardener.
3.6.4 Curing Periods
ACI 301 except 10 days for retaining walls, pavement or chimneys, 21 days for concrete that will be in
full-time or intermittent contact with seawater, salt spray, alkali soil or waters. Begin curing
immediately after placement. Protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot temperatures,
and mechanical injury; and maintain minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the
period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of the concrete. The materials and
methods of curing shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
3.6.5 Requirements for Type III, High -Early -Strength Portland Cement
The curing periods shall be not less than one-fourth of those specified for Portland cement, but in no
case less than 72 hours.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.7.1 Sampling
ASTM C 172. Collect samples of fresh concrete to perform tests specified.
ASTM C 31/C 31M for making test specimens.
3.7.2 Testing
SECTION 03300 Page 18

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
3.7.2.1 Slump Tests
BC0802
h
ASTM C 143. Take concrete samples during concrete placement. The maximum slump may be
increased as specified with the addition of an approved admixture provided that the water -cement
ration is not exceeded. Perform tests at commencement of concrete placement, when test cylinders are
made, and for each batch (minimum) or every 100 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete.
3.7.2.2 Temperature Tests
Test the concrete delivered and the concrete in the forms. Perform tests in hot or cold weather
conditions (below 50 degrees F and above 80 degrees F) for each batch (minimum) or every 100 cubic
yards (maximum) of concrete, until the specified temperature is obtained, and whenever test cylinders
and slump tests are made.
3.7.2.3 Compressive Strength Tests
ASTM C 39. Make five test cylinders for each set of tests in accordance with ASTM C31/C 31M.
Precautions shall be taken to prevent evaporation and loss of water from the specimen. Test two
j cylinders at 7 days, two cylinders at 28 days, and hold one cylinder in reserve. Samples for strength
tests of each mix design of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day, nor less
than once for each 100 cubic yards of concrete, nor less than once for each 5000 square feet of surface
area for slabs or walls. For the entire project, take no less than five sets of samples and perform
strength tests for each mix design of concrete placed. Each strength test result shall be the average of
two cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days. If the average of any three consecutive
strength test results is less than f c or if any strength test result falls below f c by more than 500 psi,
take a minimum of three ASTM C 42 core samples from the in -place work represented by the low test
r_ cylinder results and test. Concrete represented by core test shall be considered structurally adequate if
the average of three cores is equal to at least 85 percent of f'c and if no single core is less than 75
percent of f c. Locations represented by erratic core strengths shall be retested. Remove concrete not
meting strength criteria and provide new acceptable concrete. Repair core holes with nonshrink grout.
Match color and finish of adjacent concrete.
3.7.2.4 Air Content
ASTM C 173 or ASTM C 231 for normal weight concrete. Test air -entrained concrete for air content
at the same frequency as specified for slump tests.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 03300 Page 19

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
1
1:1
pressures for all relief and regulating valves. Self-contained automatic valves shall be tested at both
maximum and minimum operating ranges, and reset upon completion of test to the design value.
II
3.14 FINAL CLEANING
3.14.1 Interim Cleaning
The Contractor shall prevent the accumulation of weld rod, weld spatter, pipe cuttings and filings,
gravel, cleaning rags, and other foreign material within piping sections during fabrication. The piping
shall be examined to assure removal of these and other foreign objects prior to assembly and
installation.
3.14.2 Flushing
iFollowing assembly and testing, and prior to final acceptance, piping systems shall be flushed with
water to remove accumulated construction debris and other foreign matter. The piping shall be flushed
until all foreign matter is removed from the pipeline. The Contractor shall provide all hoses, temporary
pipes, ditches, and other items as required to properly dispose of flushing water without damage to
adjacent properties. The minimum flushing velocity shall be 2.5 fps. For large diameter pipe where it
is impractical to flush the pipe at the minimum flushing velocity, the pipeline shall be cleaned in -place
from the inside by brushing and sweeping, then flushing the pipeline at a lower velocity. Cone
strainers shall be installed in the flushing connections of attached equipment and left in place until
cleaning is completed. Accumulated debris shall be removed through drains, or by removing spools or
valves.
3.14.3 Disinfection
1 The Contractor shall disinfect all process piping as specified in Section 02000, Disinfection.
r 3.15 WASTE WATER DISPOSAL
F
The water used for testing, cleaning, flushing and/or disinfection shall be disposed of in accordance
with all applicable regulations. Disposal is solely the responsibility of the Contractor. The method
Iproposed for disposal of waste water shall be provided to, and approved by, the Engineer prior to
performing any testing, cleaning, flushing and disinfection activities.
�� -- End of Section --
SECTION 15200 Page 38

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
test. Exposed pipe, joints, fittings, and valves shall be carefully examined where possible. Joints _
showing visible leakage shall be replaced as necessary. Defective pipe, joints, fittings, and valves
found during the pressure test shall be removed and replaced with new material, and the test repeated
until the test results are satisfactory. The requirement for the joints to remain exposed for the
hydrostatic tests may be waived by the Engineer when one or more of the following conditions are
encountered: (1) wet or unstable soil conditions in the trench; (2) compliance would require
maintaining barricades and walkways around and across an open trench in a heavily used area that
would require continuous surveillance to assure safe conditions; or (3) maintaining the trench in an
open condition would delay completion of the Contract. The Contractor may request a waiver, setting
forth in writing the reasons for the request and stating the alternative procedure proposed to comply
with the hydrostatic tests. Backfill placed prior to the tests shall be placed in accordance with the
requirements of Section 02316A EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFIL.LING FOR
UTILITIES SYSTEMS.
3.13.1.2 Exposed Piping
Hydrostatic testing shall be conducted in accordance with ASME B31.3. Piping systems shall be tested
under normal service conditions to demonstrate compliance. The test pressure shall not be less than 1.5
times the design pressure. Water shall be used as the hydrostatic test fluid. The Contractor shall -
provide clean test water of such quality to prevent corrosion of the piping system materials. Air release
vents shall be opened at all high points of the piping system in order to purge air pockets while the
piping system is filling.
3.13.2 Pipe Leakage Tests
Unless approved by the Engineer, leakage testing shall be conducted after the pressure tests have been
satisfactorily completed. The duration of each leakage test shall be at least 2 hours, and during the test
the piping shall be subjected to not less than 150 psig pressure. Leakage is defined as the quantity of
the test liquid, water that is supplied to the piping system, or any valved or approved section thereof, in
order to maintain pressure within 5 psi of the specified leakage test pressure after the piping has been
filled with the test liquid and all air is expelled. No piping installation will be accepted if leakage
exceeds the allowable leakage determined by the following formula: -
L=CfxNxDxP0.5
Cf = conversion factor = 0.0001351
L = allowable leakage, gallons per hour
N = number of joints in the length of piping tested
D = nominal pipe diameter, inches
P = average test pressure during the test, psig.
Should any test disclose leakage greater than that allowed, the leaks shall be located and repaired until
the leakage is within the specified allowance, without additional cost.
3.13.3 Valve Testing
Valves may either be tested while testing pipelines, or as a separate step. It shall be demonstrated that
valves open and close smoothly with operating pressure on one side and atmospheric pressure on the
other, and in both directions for two-way valve applications. The Contractor shall count and record the
number of turns required to open and close each valve, and account for any discrepancies with
manufacturer's data. Air and vacuum relief valves shall be examined as the associated pipe is being
filled to verify venting and seating is fully functional. The Contractor shall set, verify, and record set
SECTION 15200 Page 37

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
3.10 AIR RELEASE, DRAINS AND SAMPLE PORTS
' - Sample ports shall be provided where indicated on the contract drawings. The Contractor shall install
specified vents at piping high points for entrapped air release and install drains in the low points of
pipelines regardless of whether shown on contract drawings.
3.11 PIPING SUPPORT SYSTEMS INSTALLATION
The absence of pipe supports and details on the contract drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for sizing and providing supports throughout plant.
3.11.1 General Support Requirements
Pipe support systems shall meet the requirements of MSS SP-58. Contractor -designed and selected
support systems shall be installed in accordance with MSS SP-69, and as specified herein. Piping
connections to equipment shall be supported by pipe supports and not off the equipment. Large or
- heavy valves, fittings, and/or equipment shall be supported independently of associated piping. Pipes
shall not be supported off other pipes. Supports shall be provided at piping changes in direction or in
elevation, adjacent to flexible joints and couplings, and where otherwise shown on the contract
drawings. Pipe supports and hangers shall not be installed in equipment access areas or bridge crane
runs. Hanging pipes shall be braced against horizontal movement by both longitudinal and lateral sway
bracing. At each channel type support, every pipe shall be provided with an intermediate pipe guide,
except where pipe anchors are required. Existing support systems may be used to support additional
new piping only if the Contractor can demonstrate that the existing support systems are adequate for
the additional loads, or if the existing systems are strengthened to support the additional loads.
Pedestal type pipe supports shall be provided under base flanges adjacent to rotating equipment and
where required to isolate vibration. Piping 2.5 inches in diameter and larger shall be braced for seismic
forces. Lateral supports for seismic loads shall be installed at all changes in direction.
3.11.2 Support of Insulated Piping
The Contractor shall install oversized supports to fit the insulation inserts. Supports shall be provided
with galvanized or stainless steel protection shields and oversized rollers.
3.12 PIPE IDENTIFICATION, PAINTING AND COLOR CODING
Piping or its insulation covering may be banded either with plastic adhesive tapes or painted stripes
around pipe designating piping contents in accordance with following options and requirements. A
single individual band, of plastic adhesive tape or paint, designating pipe contents shall be provided
with sufficient length to permit the stenciling of pipe contents in letters. Identification shall be
provided at branch connections, inlets and outlets of equipment, every 12 feet of straight run, upstream
of valves, and within 4 feet of entrance to or exit from wall curtains, or other similar type barrier.
3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
3.13.1 Hydrostatic Tests
3.13.1.1 Buried Piping
After the pipe is laid, the joints completed, unless otherwise specified, be subjected for 2 hours to a
hydrostatic test pressure of 150 psig. Each valve shall be opened and closed several times during the
SECTION 15200 Page 36

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
3.8 CLOSURES
Closure pieces shall be installed as necessary to end pipe runs and shall conform to ASME B 16.9 or
ASME B 16.11. Elastomer sleeves bonded to pipe ends are not acceptable. Pressure piping shall have
closures of blind flanges or plain end pieces, with thickness matching the nominal wall thickness of the
associated pipe, mounted on double flexible couplings, unless otherwise shown on contract drawings or
approved by the Engineer. Pipes with restrained joints shall have pipe closures installed with thrust tie -
rod assemblies.
3.9 VALVE INSTALLATION
Flanged valve bolt holes shall be installed so as to straddle the vertical centerline of pipe. Flanged
faces shall be cleaned prior to inserting the gasket and bolts, and then the nuts shall be tightened
progressively and uniformly. Threaded ends shall have the threads cleaned by wire brushing or
swabbing prior to installation.
3.9.1 Valve Orientation
The operating stem of a manual valve shall be installed in a vertical position when the valve is installed
in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations 4.5 feet or less above finished floor, unless
otherwise shown on contract drawings. The operating stem of a manual valve shall be installed in a
horizontal position in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations between 4.5 feet and 6.75
feet above finish floor, unless otherwise shown on contract drawings. Automatic valves shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
3.9.1.1 Butterfly Valves
Orientation of butterfly valves shall take into account changes in pipe direction. Valve shafts shall be
oriented so that unbalanced flows caused by pipe direction changes or other disturbances are equally
divided to each half of the disc.
3.9.1.2 Plug Valves -
If a plug valve seat position is not shown in the contract drawings, locate the seat position as follows:
for horizontal flow, the flow shall produce an "unseating" pressure, and the plug shall open into the top
half of valve; and for vertical flow, the seat shall be installed in the highest portion of the valve.
3.9.3 Isolation Valve
Safety isolation valves shall be installed on compressed air supplies. The valve shall be located to
provide accessibility for control and maintenance. If necessary, access doors shall be installed in
finished walls and plaster ceilings for valve access.
3.9.4 Operator Extension Stems
Where the depth of the valve is such that its centerline is more than 5 feet below grade, an operator
extension stem shall be furnished with a 2 inch operating nut to bring the operating nut to a point 12
inches below the surface of the ground and/or box cover. The operating nut shall be located in a floor -
box. The extension stem shall be attached to the top of the valve.
SECTION 15200 Page 35

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
3.3.3 Thrust Restraints
�— Thrust restraint devices are generally not shown in the contract drawings; their absence will not relieve.
Contractor of the responsibility for providing them as required to provide complete systems for the use
1 intended. The Contractor shall provide mechanical thrust restraints where required, whether or not
shown on the contract drawings. At a minimum, thrust restraints shall be provided at pipeline tees,,
plugs, caps, bends, and other locations where unbalanced forces exist.
3.3.3.2 Restrained Joints
For ductile iron pipe, restrained joints shall be designed by the Contractor or the pipe manufacturer in
accordance with DIPRA TRD.
--, 3.3.4 Marking Tape
Pipe marking tape shall be provided and installed in accordance with the requirements of Section
02316A EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES SYSTEMS.
3.4 CONNECTING DISSIMILAR PIPE
Flexible transition couplings, dielectric fittings and isolation joints shall be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
3.5 EXTERNAL CORROSION PROTECTION
Protect all pipe and piping accessories from corrosion and adverse environmental conditions.
+{ 3.5.1 Above Grade Metallic Piping
3.5.1.1 Ferrous Piping
Shop primed surfaces shall be touched up with ferrous metal primer. Surfaces that have not been shop
primed shall be solvent cleaned. Surfaces that contain loose rust, mill scale or other foreign substances
shall be mechanically cleaned by power wire brushing and primed with a ferrous metal primer. Primed
surfaces ,shall be finished with two coats of exterior oil paint in accordance with Section 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS.
3.6 DOUBLE CONTAINMENT PIPING LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM
The system shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended installation
procedures. All local, state and federal codes and requirements shall be followed. The system shall be
installed by properly trained personnel. A location map shall be provided with the system by the
Contractor indicating the "as built" system configuration.
3.7 FLEXIBLE JOINTS AT CONCRETE STRUCTURES
Flexible joints shall be provided at the face of all structures, whether or not shown on the contract
drawings. Rubber ring joints, mechanical joints, flexible couplings, and proprietary restrained ductile
iron pipe joints shall be considered flexible joints; welded pipe joints shall not.
SECTION 15200 Page 34

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802 -
3.2.5 Pipe Flanges
Pipe flanges shall be set level, plumb, and aligned. Flanged fittings shall be installed true and
perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. The bolt holes shall be concentric to the centerline of the pipe
and shall straddle the vertical centerline of the pipe.
3.2.6 Valve Locations
Valves shall be located in accordance with the contract drawings where actuators are shown. Where
actuators are not shown, valves shall be located and oriented to permit easy access to the valve
operator, and to avoid interferences.
3.2.7 Pipe Tap Connections
Taps to pipe barrels are unacceptable. Taps to ductile iron piping shall be made only with a service
saddle or at a tapping boss of a fitting, valve body, or equipment casting. Taps to steel piping shall be
made only with a welded threadolet connection. -
3.2.8 Plastic Pipe Installation
All plastic pipe shall be cut, made up, and installed in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's
recommendations. Heat joining shall be performed in accordance with ASTM D 2657. Electrofusion
joining shall be performed in accordance with ASTM F 1290. Schedule 40 pipe shall not be threaded.
Schedule 80 threaded nipples shall be used where necessary to connect to threaded valves or fittings. f
Strap wrenches shall be used for tightening threaded plastic joints, and care shall be taken not to over
tighten these fittings. Pipe shall not be laid when the temperature is below 40 degrees F nor above 90
degrees F when exposed to direct sunlight. Any plastic pipe installed above grade and outdoors shall
be ultraviolet (UV) protected or UV resistant. The pipe ends that are to be joined shall be shielded
from direct sunlight prior to and during the laying operation. Adequate ventilation shall be provided _
when working with pipe joint solvent cement and the handling of solvent cements, primers and
cleaners shall be in accordance with ASTM F 402. The Contractor shall provide and install supports
and hangers as specified and shown on the contact drawings.
3.2.8.1 PVC Piping
Solvent -cemented joints shall be constructed in accordance with ASTM D 2855.
3.3 BURIED PIPE PLACEMENT
3.3.1 Excavation and Backfilling
Earthwork shall be performed as specified in Section 02316A EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, AND
BACKFILLING FOR UTILITIES SYSTEMS. Backfilling shall be accomplished after inspection by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall exercise care when lowering pipe into the trench to prevent damage
or twisting of the pipe.
3.3.2 Fittings
At valves and connections, the trench bottom shall be dug out with sufficient length, width, and depth
to ensure clearance between the undisturbed trench bottom and the valves and such connections. I
}
SECTION 15200 Page 33
it

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
—. 3.2.1.1 Drilled -In Adhesive Anchors
The anchors shall be composed of an anchor rod assembly and an anchor rod adhesive cartridge. The
anchor rod assembly shall be a chamfered and threaded stud rod of TP304 stainless steel with a nut and
washer of TP316 stainless steel. The anchor length, diameter, and embedment depth shall meet the
manufacturer's requirements for the maximum allowable working load of the application. The
adhesive cartridge shall be a sealed capsule containing premeasured amounts of resin, quartz sand
aggregate, and a hardener contained in a separate vial within the capsule. The capsule ingredients shall
be activated by the insertion procedure of the anchor rod assembly.
3.2.2 Piping Flexibility Provisions
i
Thrust protection shall be provided as required. Flexible couplings and expansion joints shall be
installed at connections to equipment, and where shown on the contract drawings. Additional pipe
anchors and flexible couplings beyond those shown on the contract drawings, shall be provided to
facilitate piping installation, in accordance with reviewed shop drawings.
3.2.3 Couplings, Adapters and Service Saddles
Pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned of oil, scale, rust, and dirt in order to provide a clean seat for gaskets.
1 Gaskets shall be wiped clean prior to installation. Flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapter
gaskets shall be lubricated with soapy water or the manufacturer's standard lubricant before installation
on the pipe ends. Couplings, service saddles, and anchor studs shall be installed in accordance with
i manufacturer's instructions. Bolts shall be tightened progressively, drawing up bolts on opposite sides
a little at a time until all bolts have a uniform tightness. Torque -limiting wrenches shall be used to
tighten bolts.
I�
f 3.2.4 Piping Equipment/Component Installation
Piping components and indicators shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Required upstream and downstream clearances, isolation valves, and miscellaneous devices shall be
provided for an operable installation. Straight runs of piping upstream and downstream of flow
measuring devices shall be as shown in the contract drawings. The upstream and downstream lengths
of undisturbed piping shall be in accordance with flow indicator manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2.4.1 Backflow Preventers
Backflow preventers shall be installed with nameplate and test cocks accessible from front of unit, and
with a minimum clearance of 12.2 inches between the port and grade. The assemblies shall be installed
in accordance with local codes and shall discharge to an open drain with an air gap; vertical installation
is prohibited.
3.2.4.2 Local Indicators
All direct -reading indicator devices, and pressure gauges shall be installed so that they can be easily
read from floor level, and are readily accessible for maintenance and service. Pressure gauges shall be
? [ installed where indicated in the contract drawings. Field calibration of all indicators shall be performed
at time of installation to ensure measuring and reading accuracy.
SECTION 15200 Page 32

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
3.1.1 Protection
Pipe and equipment openings shall be protected from dirt, water, and chemical or mechanical damage
during installation.
3.1.2 System Preparation
3.1.2.1 Pipe and Fittings
Pipe and fittings shall be inspected before exposed piping is installed or buried piping is lowered into
the trench. The Contractor shall clean the ends of pipes thoroughly, remove foreign matter and dirt
from inside of pipes, and keep piping clean during and after laying.
3.1.2.2 Damaged Coatings
The Contractor shall repair damaged coating areas in the field with material equal to the original
coating, except for damaged glass -lined pipe which shall be promptly removed from the site. The
Contractor shall not install damaged piping materials. Field repair of damaged and uncoated areas of
galvanized piping shall conform to ASTM A 780.
3.1.3 Adjacent Facilities
3.1.3.1 Sewer Lines
Where the location of the water pipe is not clearly defined in dimensions on the drawings, the water
pipe shall not be laid closer horizontally than 10 feet from a sewer except where the bottom of the
water pipe will be at least 12 inches above the top of the sewer pipe, in which case the water pipe shall
not be laid closer horizontally than 6 feet from the sewer. Where water lines cross under gravity -flow
sewer lines, the sewer pipe, for a distance of at least 10 feet each side of the crossing, shall be fully
encased in concrete or shall be made of pressure pipe with no joint located within 3 feet horizontally of
the crossing. Water lines shall in all cases cross above sewage force mains or inverted siphons and
shall be not less than 2 feet above the sewer main. Joints in the sewer main, closer horizontally than 3
feet to the crossing, shall be encased in concrete.
3.2 EXPOSED PIPING INSTALLATION
Exposed piping shall be run as straight as practical along the alignment shown on the contract drawings
and with a minimum of joints. Piping and appurtenances shall be installed in conformance with
reviewed shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions and ASME B31.3. Piping shall be installed
without springing or forcing the pipe.
3.2.1 Anchors and Fasteners
Impact expansion (hammer and explosive charge drive -type) anchors and fastener systems are not
acceptable. Lead shields, plastic or fiber inserts, and drilled -in plastic sleeve/nail drive systems are
also not acceptable.
SECTION 15200 Page 31

"s Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
2.18.1.3 Offset Pipe Clamp
-, Where pipes are indicated as offset from wall surfaces, a double -leg design two-piece pipe clamp shall
be supplied by the Contractor..
2.18.1.4 Racks
. J Multiple pipe racks or trapeze hangers shall be fabricated from ASTM A 36/A 36M steel (stainless
steel), and designed to suit the conditions at the points of installation. Pipes shall be kept in their
fr relative positions to each other by the use of clamps or clips. Pipelines subject to thermal expansion
i r must be free to slide or roll.
2.18.1.5 Hangers
Hangers shall be fabricated of ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel (stainless steel). All hangers shall be
of a uniform type and material for a given pipe run and application. Coated or plated hangers shall be
used to isolate steel hangers from dissimilar metal tube or pipe. Hangers for pipe sizes 2.5 inches or
larger shall incorporate a means of vertical adjustment after erection while supporting the load. For
piping systems with operating temperatures from 122 to 446 degrees F the following shall be used:
2.18.1.6 Hanger Rods
Hanger rods shall be carbon steel conforming to ASTM A 576.. The diameter of the rods for piping
system support shall conform to ASME B31.1.
2.18.2 Wall Penetrations
2:18.2.1 Above Grade Wall Penetrations
" Piping which passes through fire -rated or smoke -rated walls, floors, or ceilings shall be provided with
insulated and encased pipe sleeves. Penetrations through an existing fire or fire barrier wall shall be
�— sealed with a fire stop system that has an "F" rating not less than the required fire resistance rating of
the penetrated wall. The fire stopping sealant for metal piping systems shall be a water based,
nonslumping, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, that is rated for 3 hours pursuant to ASTM
r� E 814 and UL requirements.
2.19 FIRE HYDRANTS
IHydrants shall be dry -barrel type conforming to AWWA C502 with valve opening at least 5 inches in
diameter and designed so that the flange at the main valve seat can be removed with the main valve
seat apparatus remaining intact, closed and reasonably tight against leakage and with a breakable valve
f� rod coupling and breakable flange connections located no more than 8 inches above the ground grade.
Hydrants shall have a 6 inch bell connection, two 2-1/2 inch hose connections and one 4-1/2 inch
pumper connection. Outlets shall have American National Standard fire -hose coupling threads.
i, Working parts shall be bronze. Design, material, and workmanship shall be equal to the latest stock
1 pattern ordinarily produced by the manufacturer. Hydrants shall be painted with 1 coat of red iron
oxide, zinc oxide primer conforming to SSPC Paint 25 and 2 finish coats of silicone alkyd paint
conforming to SSPC Paint 21, color as selected by Owner. Suitable bronze adapter for each outlet,
with caps, shall be furnished.
SECTION 15200 Page 30

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
Pressure and vacuum gauges shall be stem mounted, with stainless steel cases equipped with safety
pressure blowout backs and glycerine -filled dials. The gauge sensors shall be C-Type Bourdon tube
actuated and constructed of stainless steel. The gauges shall be equipped with brass threaded 0.25 inch
male connections. The dials of the gauges shall be 4.5 inches in diameter with scale readings in psig
and feet of water ranging from zero to approximately twice the anticipated process operating or
equipment pressure. A slotted adjustable pointer shall be provided with accuracy to conform to ASME
B40.1, Grade A. A lever handled gauge cock and filter type snubber shall be provided.
2.17.4 Static Mixer
The static mixer shall be designed to disperse the design flow, 0.5 gpm of added chemicals in a process
flow stream with flows ranging from 4200 to 12500 gpm. The maximum allowable pressure drop for
the static mixer shall be 3 feet of water column in accordance with the requirements of the process
stream pumping system. The diameter of the mixer housing shall be sized identical to the process
piping. The length shall be in accordance with the number of mixing elements required. Housing
materials shall be TP304 stainless steel, providing chemical resistance to both the chemical additives
and process stream. End configurations shall be flanged faced and drilled to ASME B16.1 Class 150
and shall compatible with the piping system. Injection ports shall be of the same materials as the mixer
housing in the number, dimensions, and positions shown on drawings, and with female ASME B 1.20.1
threaded connections compatible with the chemical feed piping system. Each housing shall be supplied
with a name plate which at a minimum provides the manufacturer's name and address, part model
number, and direction of flow. Mixing elements shall be constructed of TP316 stainless steel
providing resistance to both the chemical additives and process stream. Elements shall be installed
consecutively, with the number required designed to provide mixing with a homogeneity of the final
mix of less than or equal to 0.05 by the end of the static mixer.
2.18 PIPE SUPPORTS AND PENETRATIONS
Auxiliary steel shall be provided by the Contractor where the support of piping systems and equipment
is required between building structural elements. Light gauge and structural steel shapes shall conform
to the requirements of ASTM A 36/A 36M. However, a mixture of support system manufacturers
products is not permitted. Where auxiliary steel is indicated as stainless steel, the Contractor shall
provide TP304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 167, No. 1 Finish.
2.18.1 Pipe Supports
Pipe supports shall conform to the requirements of MSS SP-58, MSS SP-69, and MSS SP-89. Where
pipe supports contact bare piping or in -line devices, provide supports of compatible material so that
neither shall have a deteriorating action on the other.
2.18.1.1 Beam Clamps
For upper attachments on structural steel, the Contractor shall provide beam clamps of ASTM A 36/A
36M carbon steel. Holes drilled in structural steel for hanger support rods will not be permitted.
Clamps shall be provided with hardened steel cup -point set screws and lock -nuts for anchoring in
place. Clamp size selection shall only be based on the support of the required load.
2.18.1.2 Brackets
Where piping is run adjacent to walls or steel columns, the Contractor shall provide welded ASTM A
36/A 36M steel (stainless steel) brackets, pre -punched with a minimum of two fastener holes.
SECTION 15200 Page 29

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
I r
^� The sample ports shall be located in easily accessible locations, and shall avoid potential stagnant
points and/or areas where material could collect. A plug -type sampling valve with a stainless steel
piston that extends beyond the inner surface of the pipe when closed shall be provided at all the
sampling ports. The piston shall be sealed by two compressible replaceable polytetrafluoroethylene
(PTFE) rings, one above the discharge port, the other below the discharge port. The valve body shall
be stainless steel Class 150 with a male ASME B 1.20.1 pipe threads inlet connection and sampling
-, ports shall be comprised of pipe fittings, pipe, and ball valves which comply with material,
temperature, and pressure requirements of the associated piping system as specified elsewhere in this
Section.
2.17 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING COMPONENTS
2.17.1 Air Release and Vacuum Breakers
Air release vents shall be located, and vented, such that a hazardous atmosphere will not be created
upon operation.
2.17.1.1 Locations
Air release and vacuum breakers shall be located as indicated on the contract drawings.
2.17.1.2 Air and Vacuum Valve Suitable for Corrosive Service
The air and vacuum valve shall conform to ASSE 1001, and automatically exhaust air during the filling
of a system while allowing air to re-enter during draining or when vacuum occurs. The valve shall be
rated for 150 psig working pressure and built with a special short body. The valve shall have a ductile
iron body and cover, with stainless steel float and trim. End connections shall be as follows: for 0.5
inch through 3 inches ASME B 1.20.1 pipe threaded inlet and outlet, for 4 inches and larger ASME
B 16.1 Class 125 flanged inlet with outlet. The air and vacuum valve shall be fitted with blowoff valve,
quick disconnect couplings, and a minimum 6 feet of hose in order to permit back flushing after
installation without dismantling the valve.
2.17.1.3 Air Release Valve Suitable for Corrosive Service
The air release valve shall automatically exhaust entrained air that accumulates in a system and shall be
ASSE approved. The valve shall be rated for 150 psig working pressure and built with a special short
body. The valve shall have a ductile iron body and cover, with stainless steel float and trim. Valve end
connections shall be ASME B 1.20.1 pipe threaded ASME B 16.1 Class 125 flanged.
2.17.2 Strainers
Strainers shall be simplex body. The strainers shall be rated for 150 psig working pressure at 150
Fi degrees F and conform to ASTM F 1199. The body shall be cast iron with a bolted iron cap. The
-� screen shall be heavy -gauge stainless steel, 30 mesh and be equipped with a ASME B1.20.1 pipe
threaded blowoff hole.
2.17.3 Indicating Devices
2.17.3.1 Pressure and Vacuum Gauges
r-
SECTION 15200 Page 28

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
a. Limit Switches. Limit switches shall be single -pole, double -throw (SPDT) type, rated 10
amps at 120 volts ac, housed in a NEMA 250 Type 4 enclosure, and adjustable for open and
closed valve positions.
b. Positioners. The positioners for modulating actuators shall control valve positions as a
function of the input signals. The positioner shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz voltage. The
mode of operation shall be direct acting. Modulating valve positioners shall operate on a 4
to 20 mA input signal unless otherwise indicated. Corrosion -resistant enclosures for
positioners shall be splash -and moisture -proof with gasketed covers.,
2.13.11 Valve Accessories
2.13.11.1 Floor Stand and Extension Stem
A floor stand and extension stem shall be the nonrising, indicating type; complete with stem, coupling,
handwheel, stem guide brackets, and yoke attachment. The stem guide shall be spaced such that stem
L/R ratio does not exceed 200. Anchors shall be supplied as required.
2.13.11.2 Floor Box and Stem
A floor box and stem shall be the plain type, for support of nonrising type stem; complete with stem,
operating nut, and stem guide brackets. The stem guide shall be spaced such that stem L/R ratio does
not exceed 200. Anchors shall be supplied as required.
2.14 MUD VALVES
Mud valves shall be of heavy duty flange type with non -rising stems. Frame, cover, yoke and stem
extension connection shall be cast iron. Stems shall be stainless steel. Lift nuts shall be bronze. On
non -rising stem models the stem is to be protected by a cast iron shroud with drain hole.
Seating surfaces are stainless steel and of flat configuration. Flange drilling on frame will be suitable
for mounting to flange per ASA-B-16.1 (125 lbs. drilling).
Gate will be operated by a tee handle on a standard AWWA 2" valve nut or with stainless stem
extension to the height required.
When shown, pedestal lifts, stem guides, and wall brackets will be furnished by the mud valve
manufacturer to make a complete and operable unit. -
2.15 DRAINS
Valved drains may not be shown on the detailed drawings for individual pipelines; their absence will
not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing and installing them as indicated in the
piping and instrumentation diagrams to complete the piping system for the use intended.
2.16 SAMPLE PORTS
Sample ports, shown on the flow diagrams and piping and instrument diagrams of the contract
drawings, may not be shown on the detailed drawings of the individual pipelines; their absence shall
not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing them. Sample ports shall be provided as
indicated in the piping and instrument diagrams to complete the piping systems for the use" intended.
SECTION 15200 Page 27

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
- b. Air Sets. The air set shall include a pressure regulator with internal relief, filter, outlet
pressure gauge, and adjustable reduced pressure range as required by the valve actuator.
The air set shall have an aluminum body and handwheel, safety vented lockout isolation
valve, and gauge range 1.33 to 2 times maximum operating pressure.
c. Limit Switches. Limit switches shall be single -pole, double -throw (SPDT) type, rated 10
amps at 120 volts ac, housed in a NEMA 250 Type 4 enclosure, and adjustable for open and
closed valve positions.
d. Positioners. The positioners for modulating actuators shall be pneumatic force balance
instruments to control valve positions as a function of the input signals. The positioners
- shall accomplish positive positioning of valve by a mechanical feedback connection from
the valve actuating mechanism. Position feedback shall be provided through a
- F characterized linear cam to allow adjustment of valve positioning and input signal. The
positioner shall be suitable for either a double acting or spring return actuator. The
positioner shall have zero and span adjustment and be field reversible for direct or reverse
action. Gauges shall be included for supply and output pressure and for input signal
pressure. Modulating valve positioners shall operate on a 4 to 20 mA electric input signal
unless otherwise indicated. A positioner for do input signal with transducers shall convert
the electrical signal to the appropriate pneumatic signal. The transducer shall be integral
with the positioner. Line electric power not shall not be required for transducer operation.
Corrosion -resistant enclosures for positioners and transducers shall be splash- and moisture -
proof with gasketed covers.
e. Solenoid Valve. A solenoid valve shall pilot the control actuator in the appropriate
configuration for the type of actuator being controlled. A pilot operated diaphragm type
�? solenoid valve shall have a brass body and resilient seat. and operate with minimum
operating pressure differential no greater than 10.2 psi and maximum operating pressure
differential no less than 150 psi. Internal parts shall be corrosion -resistant. The solenoid
valve shall have Class F molded coils for operation on 120 volts, 60-Hz, ac, unless
i otherwise indicated. The solenoid enclosure shall conform to NEMA 250 Type 4.
Solenoids on double acting cylinders for open -close and throttling valves shall be four-way
with dual coils. Solenoids on spring return cylinders for open -close and throttling valves
1 shall be three-way, spring return. An air exhaust muffler shall be furnished in the exhaust
port of all actuator pilot solenoid valves.
2.13.10.3 Electric Operator
Electric operators shall be provided complete with actuators, speed controls and accessories. The
actuators shall operate on 460v, 3p, 60 Hz with a 75 percent duty cycle and shall be equipped with an
AC thermal overload protector with automatic rest, reversing (bi-directional) operation for use with
quarter -turn valves, or rotating equipment to full rotation. Gearing shall be a two -stage planetary,
permanently lubricated self-locking gear train with self-lubricating bearings; connections via male
output staff. The start-up torque shall be 120 foot-pound. The stall torque shall be 150 foot-pound.
Two travel stop limit switches with cams, internal, independent, adjustable, and actuated by cams shall
be mounted on the drive shaft. A side mounted hand turn wheel shall be provided for a manual
override. The actuators shall have a NEMA 250 Type 4 enclosure with a corrosion resistant, baked
epoxy finish as standard. The actuator shall operate in a temperature range of -40 to 150 degrees F.
Actuators shall fail in last position unless otherwise indicated. Limit switches shall be provided on all
actuators.
SECTION 15200 Page 26
r_7

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
2.13.9.1 Pump Control Valve
Pump control valve shall be hydraulically operated, diaphragm actuated, pilot controlled globe valve
with ductile iron bodies, ASME B 16.1 Class 250 flanged end connections, stainless steel trim, stainless
steel stems, and externally mounted strainers with cocks. Valves shall be designed to eliminate
pipeline surge caused by pump startup and shutdown, and shall include automatic check features.
2.13.10 Operators
2.13.10.1 Manual Operator
The force in a manual operator shall not exceed 39.3 pound under any operating condition, including
initial breakaway. The operator shall be equipped with gear reduction when force exceeds 39.3 pound.
The manual operator shall be a self-locking type or shall be equipped with a self-locking device. A
position indicator shall be supplied on quarter -turn valves. Worm and gear operators shall be a one-
piece design with worm -gears of gear bronze material. Worm shall be hardened alloy steel with the
thread ground and polished. Traveling nut type operators shall have threader steel reach rods with an
internally threaded bronze or ductile iron nut.
a. Exposed Operators. Exposed operators shall have galvanized and painted handwheels. Lever
operators are allowed on quarter -turn valves 8 inches and smaller. Cranks shall be supplied
on gear type operators. If located off of the operator floor, chain wheel operator with
tiebacks, extension stem, floor stands, and other accessories shall be provided to permit
operation from normal operation level. Valve handles shall be capable of padlocking, and
wheels shall be lockable with a chain and padlock.
b. Underground Operators. Buried service operators on valves larger than 2.5 inches shall have
a 2 inch operating nut. Buried operators on valves 2 inches and smaller shall have a cross
handle for operation by a forked key. The moving parts of valve and operator shall be
enclosed in housing to prevent contact with the soil. Buried service operators for quarter -
turn valves shall be designed to withstand an input torque of 450 foot-pound of input torque
at the fully open or fully closed positions, and shall be grease packed and gasketed to -
withstand a submersion in water to 10.2 psig. Buried valves shall have extension stems,
bonnets, and valve boxes.
2.13.10.2 Pneumatic Operator
Pneumatic operators shall be provided complete with actuators, air sets, exhaust mufflers, speed
controls, pilot solenoids, safety vented isolation valves, and accessories. The pneumatic operators shall
be suitable for full operation range of valve at air supply pressure indicated. Actuators shall return the
valve to the closed position upon loss of signal unless otherwise indicated. Springs shall return valve
to this failed position. Limit switches shall be provided on all actuators.
a. Cylinder Actuators. Cylinder actuators shall conform to AWWA C540 and operate with an
air supply pressure of 80 psig. The nonswivel type shall be totally enclosed with travel
stops and position indicator, and shall be factory lubricated and sealed, requiring no
additional lubrication. The double acting type shall be nonmetallic for operation on
nonlubricated air and shall have a manual handwheel override independent of the cylinder.
The manual override shall be located on the valve.
SECTION 15200 Page 25

f Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
h
a. Gate valves, Each valve shown on the drawings with the designation "P.I.V." shall be
equipped with indicator post conforming to the requirements of NFPA 24. Operation shall
be by a wrench which shall be attached to each post.
2.13.6 Globe Valves
2.13.6.1 General Requirements For Globe Valves
Globe valves, 3 inches and smaller, shall be globe style valve and shall have bronze bodies, with
bronze trim, and bronze bonnets. Valves shall conform to ASME B 16.34 and shall have ASME
B 16.11 threaded end connections. Valves shall include bonnets, inside screws, rising stems,
!_ conventional discs constructed of bronze rings. Valves shall be rated for 200 psig service. Valves
shall be equipped with handwheel operators.
2.13.6.2 Needle Valve
Needle valves, 1 inch and smaller, shall be of a straight pattern and shall have brass bodies and trim.
Valves shall be female threaded, in accordance with ASME 131.20.1 end connections. Valves shall
include bonnets, TP316 stainless steel stems, plug stem tips constructed of stainless steel. Valves shall
be rated for 300 psig service. Valves shall be equipped with handwheel operators.
2.13.7 Plug Valves
2.13.7.1 Lined Eccentric Valve
Nonlubricated type eccentric valves, 3 inches through 54 inches, shall be rated for 175 psig service at
140 degrees F. Valves shall have drip -tight shutoff with pressure from either direction, and cast iron
i _j bodies in accordance with ASME B16.1 flanged AWWA C111 mechanical joint end connections.
Plugs shall be cast iron with rectangular ports of no less than 80 percent of the connecting pipe area
and coated with hard natural rubber. Valves shall have stainless steel seats, self-lubricating stainless
steel stem bearings, and multiple O-rings stem seals. Valves shall be equipped with handwheel
operators. Valves 6 inches and smaller shall have a wrench lever manual operator and valves 8 inches
and larger shall have a totally enclosed, geared, manual operator with handwheel, 2-inch nut, or chain
wheel.
f--) 2.13.8 Butterfly Valves
2.13.8.1 Standard Service Butterfly Valve
Butterfly valves, 2 inches and larger, shall have ductile iron bodies, wafer with ASME B 16.1 flanged
or AWWA C111 mechanical joint end connections. Valves shall conform to AWWA C504 Class 125.
Discs shall be contoured ASTM A 536 Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron. The valve shafts shall be stainless
steel with self-lubricating, corrosion -resistant sleeve type bearings. Valve seats for 24 inch and smaller
valves shall be attached to either the valve body or the disc and shall be constructed of chloroprene.
Valve seats for valves larger than 30 inches shall be field replaceable in accordance with AWWA
C504. Valves shall have manual, locking hand lever, pneumatically actuated or electrically actuated
operators.
2.13.9 Self -Contained Automatic Valves
SECTION 15200 Page 24

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
a. Swing check valves, 2 inches through 36 inches, shall conform to AWWA C508, and have
ASME B16.1 Class 125 flanged end connections. Valves shall have a ductile iron body,
bronze disc, solid bronze hinges, and a stainless steel hinge shaft. Valves 2 inches through
12 inches shall be rated for 175 psig service and valves 14 inches through 36 inches shall be _
rated for 150 psig service at 140 degrees F. Valves shall be fitted with an adjustable outside
lever and weight. An increasing -pattern body valve may be used where increased outlet
piping size is shown.
2.13.3.2 Thermoplastic Check Valve
Thermoplastic check valves, 0.25 inch through 16 inches, shall be a ball -check design, manufactured of
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) with socket or threaded, in
accordance with ASME B 1.20.1, end connections. Valves shall be rated for 150 psig service. Valves
shall have fluoro-elastomeric O-ring seals and seats. Caps shall be of hex design.
2.13.3.3 Double Disc Swing Check Valve
Double disc swing check valves, 2 inches through 52 inches, shall be wafer style, spring loaded swing
check valve, with a TP316 stainless steel body, a stainless steel or bronze disc, resilient seats, stainless —
steel hinge pin, and a stainless steel stop pin spring. Valves 2 inches through 12 inches shall be rated 5
for 200 psig service at 140 degrees F and valves 14 inches through 52 inches shall be rated for 150 psig
service at 140 degrees F.
2.13.4 Ball Valves
2.13.4.1 General Purpose Ball Valves
General purpose ball valves shall conform to the following:
a. Ball valves, 2 inches and smaller, shall be end entry type with brass bodies and threaded, in
accordance with ASME B1.20.1, regular ports. Valves shall have polytetrafluoroethylene
(PTFE) seats and packing, stainless steel balls and hand lever operators. Valves shall be `
rated for 400 psig service at 150 degrees F.
2.13.4.3 Thermoplastic Ball Valve
Thermoplastic ball valves, 6 inches and smaller, shall be rated for 150 psig service at 120 degrees F,
and have ASTM D 1784, minimum cell classification, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or chlorinated
polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) bodies, balls, and stems. Valves shall be end entry, double union design,
with solvent -weld socket threaded, in accordance with ASME B 1.20.1 or flanged ends connections, an
ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) seat, and fluoro-elastomer O-ring stem seals. Valves shall
have hand lever operators.
2.13.5 Gate Valves
2.13.5.1 General Service Gate Valves
General service gate valves shall conform to the following:
SECTION 15200 Page 23

1
" Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
2.11.3.2 Flanged Coupling Adapters
- Flanged coupling adapters shall be fully assembled units manufactured to meet ASTM A 126 Class B,
cast iron. The flanges shall mate with AWWA C207 flanges of the same nominal size. A factory
applied corrosion resistant coating shall be applied. The coupling shall use natural rubber gaskets.
-1
Where pipe movement out of the adaptor may occur, proper anchorage of the pipe shall be provided
I
and couplings shall be furnished with lock pins. The coupling shall be sized to match the associated
piping.
2.12 VALVE BOXES
The box length shall adapt to the length required for the depth of the line without full extension. Boxes
shall be cast iron or concrete, except that concrete boxes may be installed only in locations not
subjected to vehicular traffic. The boxes shall have housings of sufficient size to completely cover the
valve or service stop and shall be complete with covers.
2.12.1 Valve Boxes
Cast-iron valve boxes shall have minimum metal thickness of 3/16 inch and boxes shall be extension
type with slide -type adjustment and with flared base. Concrete boxes shall be the standard product of a
manufacturer of precast concrete equipment.
2.13 VALVES
2.13.1 General Requirements For Valves
r �
Valves shall include operator, actuator, handwheel, chain wheel, extension stem, floor stand, worm and
gear operator, operating nut, chain, wrench, and all other accessories required for a complete operation.
The valves shall be suitable for the intended service. Renewable parts are not to be of a lower quality
than those specified. Valves shall be the same size as adjoining pipe. Valve ends shall be compatible
with adjacent piping system. An operator shall be sized to operate the associated valve for the full
range of pressures and velocities. Valves will open by turning counterclockwise. Operators, actuators,
j } and accessories shall be factory mounted.
2.13.2 Factory Finishing
Valves shall have an epoxy lining and coating in accordance with AWWA C550 unless otherwise
specified. The epoxy shall be either a two-part liquid material or a heat -activated (fusion) material
except that only a heat -activated material shall apply if a valve coating is specified as "fusion" or
' "fusion bonded" epoxy. The epoxy lining and coating shall have a minimum 7.0 mils dry film
thickness except where it is limited by valve operating tolerances. Exposed valves shall be finished in
accordance with Section 09900 PAINTS AND COATINGS.
r-�
2.13.3 Check Valves
2.13.3.1 Swing Check Valves
Swing check valves shall conform to the following:
SECTION 15200 Page 22

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
2.10 DOUBLE CONTAINMENT PIPING SYSTEM
Double containment piping systems shall conform to the requirements of ASME B31.3.
2.10.1 Primary (Carrier) Pipe
The primary, or carrier, pipe of the double containment piping system shall be PE. The primary piping
shall be rated at a working pressure of at least 150 psig at a maximum operating temperature of 90 j
degrees F. The piping shall be free of flanges and other joints that are not compatible with the
secondary piping installation. The piping shall be equipped with expansion loops, offsets, or direction
changes as necessary to counter thermal expansion and contraction, which shall be coordinated with
the secondary piping.
2.10.2 Secondary (Containment) Pipe
The secondary, or containment, pipe of the double containment piping system shall be CPVC,
Schedule 80. The secondary piping shall be resistant to weathering, impacts, and ambient temperature
variations. The secondary piping shall be drainable and dryable. The secondary piping system shall be
continuous. —
2.11 ISOLATION JOINTS AND COUPLINGS
2.11.1 Dielectric Fittings
Dielectric fittings shall be provided between threaded ferrous and nonferrous metallic pipe, fittings and
valves. Dielectric fittings shall prevent metal -to -metal contact of dissimilar metallic piping elements
and shall be suitable for the required working pressure, temperature and corrosive application.
2.11.2 Isolation Joints
Isolation joints shall be provided between nonthreaded ferrous and nonferrous metallic pipe fittings and
valves. Isolation joints shall consist of an isolation gasket of the dielectric type, isolation washers and
isolation sleeves for flange bolts. Isolation gaskets shall be full faced with an outside diameter equal to
the flange outside diameter. Bolt isolation sleeves shall be full length. Units shall be of a shape to
prevent metal -to -metal contact of dissimilar metallic piping elements.
2.11.3 Metallic Piping Couplings
Thrust ties shall be provided where shown on the contract drawings and where required to restrain the
force developed by 2 times the maximum allowable operating pressures specified. For metallic pipe
other than ductile iron, thrust ties shall be attached with fabricated lugs. For ductile iron pipe, thrust _
ties shall be attached with socket clamps against a grooved joint coupling or flange. For exposed
installations, TP304 stainless steel nuts and bolts shall be used. For buried and submerged
installations, TP304 stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be provided.
2.11.3.1 Sleeve -Type Couplings
Sleeve -type couplings shall be used for joining plain end pipe sections in a flexible manner with a
diameter to properly fit the pipe. A coupling shall consist of one ductile iron middle ring, two ductile
iron followers, two elastomeric wedge section gaskets and elliptic -neck, track -head steel bolts designed
to properly compress the gaskets.
�l
SECTION 15200 Page 21
I�

`r Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
2.8.4 ABS Solvent Cement.
� _i
Socket connections shall be joined with ABS solvent cement conforming to ASTM D 2235. Viscosity
shall be as recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer to assure compatibility.
2.9 POLYETHYLENE (PE)
2.9.1 HDPE Pipe
J
The pipe shall be extruded from PE 3408 ASTM F 412, ASTM D 3350 with a minimum cell
classification of 345464-C. The PE shall be manufactured to an SDR rating
pipe gin accordance with
ASTM D 3035 for piping systems less than 4 inches in diameter, or in accordance with AWWA C901
for piping systems with a diameter equal to or greater than 4 inches, so that the pressure rating of the
pipe shall be consistent for all pipe sizes. The pipe shall be DR21 with a pressure rating of 80 psig at
80 degrees F.
2.9.2 PE Tubing
Tubing shall be flexible crosslinked PE conforming to ASTM D 3350, minimum cell classification
35400, and dimensioned in accordance with ASTM F 876.
2.9.3 HDPE Joints
PE pipe shall be joined by thermal butt -fusion, except where connecting to valves and equipment that
may require future disassembly, then joints shall be flanged.
2.9.4 PE Fittings
PE fittings shall have the same or higher pressure rating as the pipe when installed in accordance with
the latest technical specifications. PE fittings shall be molded. Butt -fusion fittings shall conform to
ASTM D 3261.
2.9.4.1 Couplings
Couplings and saddle joints shall be joined by electrofusion in accordance with ASTM F 1055.
2.9.4.2 Flanged Fittings
{ Flanges and flanged fittings shall be ASTM A 240/A 240M, TP304 stainless steel backing flanges with
ASME B 16.1 ASME B 16.1 drilling. Flanges shall be complete with one-piece, molded PE stub ends.
Flanged connections shall have the same pressure rating as the pipe or greater. Bolting shall be
stainless steel, ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B8 hex head bolts and ASTM A 194/A 194M, Grade 8
hex head nuts. Bolts shall be provided with washers of the same material as the bolts. Gaskets shall be
_Y full-faced, maximum 1/8 inch thick, fabricated from ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) in accordance
with ASME B 16.21.
2.9.4.3 Tubing Fittings
Fittings shall be compression type comprised of forged brass alloy C37700, conforming to ASTM B
124/B 124M, nuts, ferrules and bodies.
SECTION 15200 Page 20

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
y'
2.7.1 CPVC Pipe
CPVC, ASTM D 1784, minimum cell classification 23447, pipe shall be Schedule 80 conforming to
ASTM F 441/17 441M.
2.7.2 CPVC Joints
The piping system shall be joined by socket -weld connections except where connecting to unions,
valves, and equipment with threaded connections that may require future disassembly. Connections at
those points shall be threaded and back -welded.
2.7.3 CPVC Fittings
The schedule rating for the fittings shall not be less than that for the associated pipe. Fittings shall be
ASTM D 1784, cell classification 23447, CPVC.
2.7.4 Solvent Cement
Socket connections shall be joined with PVC solvent cement conforming to ASTM F 493.
Manufacture and viscosity shall be as recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer to assure
compatibility.
2.8 ACRYLONITRILE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (ABS) PIPING
2.8.1 ABS Pipe
ABS, ASTM D 3965, minimum cell classification 42222, pipe shall be Schedule 40 conforming. to
ASTM D 1527. Where ABS pipe is subjected to severe temperature fluctuations, provisions for
expansion and contraction must be provided. This shall be accomplished with the use of expansion
joints and offset piping arrangements.
2.8.2 ABS Joints
Pipe shall be joined by solvent cementing, except where connecting to valves and equipment that may
require future disassembly, then flanged joints shall be provided.
2.8.3 ABS Fittings
Fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2468 for Schedule 40 piping systems. ABS fittings shall be
molded. Fittings shall have the same or higher pressure rating as the pipe when installed in accordance
with the specifications. Flanges and flanged fittings shall be Class 125. Flanged connections shall
have the same pressure rating as the pipe or greater. Bolting shall be stainless steel, ASTM A 193/A
193M, Grade B8 hex head bolts and ASTM A 194/A 194M, Grade 8 hex head nuts. Bolts shall be
provided with washers of the same material as the bolts. Gaskets shall be full-faced, maximum 0.125
inch thick, fabricated from ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) in accordance with ASME B 16.21. When
the mating flange has a raised face, a flat ring gasket shall be supplied and a filler gasket shall be
provided between outer diameter of the raised face and the flange outer diameter to protect the ABS
flange from bolting moment.
SECTION 15200 Page 19
_t

Tobermory, Well Iron Removal System BC0802
,F
2.6.2 PVC Tubing
i
Tubing shall be flexible and clear with nominal size and wall thickness.
2.6.3 PVC Joints
The piping system shall be joined by socket -weld flanged or mechanical connections except where
connecting to unions, valves, and equipment with threaded connections that may require future
disassembly. Connections at those points shall be threaded and back -welded. Tubing connections
shall use compression fittings.
2.6.4 PVC Fittings
f The schedule rating for the fittings shall not be less than that for the associated pipe. Fittings shall be
ASTM D 1784, PVC conforming to the requirements of ASTM D 2464, threaded in accordance with
ASME B 1.20.1 or ASTM D 2466, socket type.
2.6.4.1 Push -on Joints
Push -on type joints shall be sealed with ethylene propylene rubber (EPR) gaskets in accordance with
ASTM F 477.
r� 2.6.4.2 Flanged Fittings
Flanges and flanged fittings shall be Class 125, one piece, molded hub type, flat faced, and shall
conform to ASME B 16.1, TP304 stainless steel backing flanges with ASME B 16.1 drilling. Flanged
connections shall have the same pressure rating as the pipe or greater. Bolting -shall be stainless steel,
ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B8 hex head bolts and ASTM A 194/A 194M, Grade 8 hex head nuts.
Bolts shall be provided with washers of the same material as the bolts. Gaskets shall be full-faced,
! maximum 1/8 inch thick, fabricated from ethylene propylene rubber (EPR), chloroprene rubber
polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), or approved material in accordance with ASME B16.21. When the
mating flange has a raised face, a flat ring gasket shall be used and a filler gasket shall be provided
~' between outer diameter of the raised face and the flange outer diameter to protect the PVC flange from
bolting moment.
2.6.4.3 Tubing Fittings
Fittings shall be compression type comprised of forged brass alloy C37700, conforming to ASTM B
124B 124M, nuts, ferrules and bodies.
2.6.5 PVC Solvent Cement
Socket connections shall be joined with PVC solvent cement conforming to ASTM D 2564.
Manufacture and viscosity shall be as recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer to assure
compatibility. Joints shall be prepared with primers conforming to ASTM F 656 prior to cementing
and assembly.
2.7 CHLORINATED POLYVINYL CHOLORIDE (CPVC)
SECTION 15200 Page 18

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
2.4.1.7 Compression Fittings for Tubing
Compression fittings shall be of ASTM A 479/A 479M stainless steel, Grade TP316, nuts, ferrules and
bodies rated to a minimum 100 psig. Threads shall be straight conforming to ASME B 1.1.
2.5 COPPER PIPING SYSTEM
2.5.1 Copper Pipe
Seamless copper alloy pipe, shall be a H80 (hard -drawn).
2.5.2 Copper Tubing
Seamless copper alloy tubing shall conform to ASTM B 88 alloy C12200, Type L, M, H (drawn).
2.5.3 Copper Joints
Pipe shall be joined using soldered fittings and flanged connections to equipment. Tubing shall be
joined using solder or compression fittings. Dielectric fittings or isolation joints shall be provided
between all dissimilar metals.
2.5.4 Copper Fittings
Component castings of flanges and fittings shall be copper alloy. Solder joint fittings shall conform to
ASME B 16.22 and ASME B 16.18. Flanges and flanged fittings shall be faced and drilled Class 150 in
accordance with ASME B 16.26. Tubing compression fittings shall be forged brass alloy C37700,
conforming to ASTM B 124/B 124M, nuts, ferrules and bodies rated to a minimum 150 psig with
straight threads conforming to ASME B 1.1.
2.5.5 Solder For Copper Piping
Solder and flux shall conform to ASTM B 32. The solder alloy shall contain less than 0.2 percent lead.
2.5.6 Copper Piping Supports
The piping system shall be supported using brass piping supports that conform to MSS SP-58, MSS
SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Conventional steel and galvanized pipe hangers shall not be used for copper
piping systems. All valves, instruments and other equipment attached to the piping system shall be
individually supported.
2.6 POLYVINYL CHOLORIDE (PVC)
2.6.1 PVC Pipe
PVC, ASTM D 1784, minimum cell classification 12545-C, pipe shall be Schedule 80 conforming to
ASTM D 1785 or manufactured to a DR rating in accordance with AWWA C900, so that the pressure
rating of the pipe is consistent for all pipe sizes.
SECTION 15200 Page 17

r Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
0.0625 inch raised face. Bolting shall be alloy -steel ASTM A 193/A 193M Grade B5 hex head bolts
r and ASTM, A 194/A 194M Grade 8 nuts. When mating flange on valves or equipment is cast iron,.
ASTM A 193/A 193M Grade B8 Class 1 bolts and ASTM A 194/A 194M Grade 8 heavy hex head
nuts shall be used. Bolts shall be provided with washers of the same material as the bolts. Gaskets
shall meet the requirements of ASME B 16.1. Nonmetallic gaskets shall conform to ASME B 16.21 and
be a maximum 0.125 inch thick chloroprene rubber, durometer hardness No.80, 1,500 psi minimum
tensile strength, 125 percent minimum elongation, flat ring type for use with raised face flanges and
I full face type for use with flat face flanges.
2.3.3.4 Compression Fittings for Tubing
Compression fittings shall be of carbon steel ASTM A 108 nuts, ferrules and bodies rated to a
minimum 150 psig. Threads shall be straight conforming to ASME B1.1.
2.3.4 Carbon Steel Coatings
Carbon steel piping components shall be coated with corrosion resistant materials. Coatings and
finishes shall be 100 percent holiday free.
2.4 STAINLESS STEEL PIPING SYSTEM
2.4.1 Austenitic Piping
2.4.1.1 Stainless Steel Pipe
_ Stainless steel pipe intended for general corrosive service shall meet the requirements of ASTM A
312/A 312M, seamless for flanged and cold -bending quality, Class SW, Grade TP304 or TP316L,
Schedule 10S with dimensions conforming to ASME B36.19M.
2.4.1.2 Stainless Steel Tubing
Stainless .steel tubing shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 269, seamless Grade TP304 or TP316L.
2.4.1.3 Stainless Steel Joints
—, Stainless steel piping shall be joined by welded fittings flanges. Tubing shall be joined using
compression fittings. Dielectric fittings or isolation joints shall be provided between all dissimilar
metals.
2.4.1.5 Stainless Steel Welding Fittings
Welding fittings shall be butt -welding. Welding fittings shall be forged austenitic stainless steel,
ASTM A 403/A 403M Grade TP304 or TP316L.
2.4.1.6 Stainless Steel Flanged Fittings
The internal diameter bores of flanges and flanged fittings shall be the same as that of the associated
pipe. The flanges shall be welding neck socket welding type. Flanges and flanged fittings shall be
forged austenitic stainless steel, ASTM A 182/A 182M Grade TP304 or TP316L, Class 150, drilled to
ASME B 16.1 with a 0.0625 inch raised face. Bolting shall be alloy -steel ASTM A 193/A 193M Grade
B8 hex head bolts and ASTM A 194/A 194M Grade 8 hex head nuts.
SECTION 15200 Page lb

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
UN-0 U1
2.2.4 Corrosion Control
Ductile iron piping shall be coated with the manufacturer's standard asphaltic coating, approximately 1
mil thick, applied to the outside of pipe and fittings. Buried pipe shall be coated.
2.3 CARBON STEEL PIPING SYSTEM
2.3.1 Carbon Steel Pipe
2.3.1.1 General Service
Carbon steel pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 53/A 53M seamless, Grade API Spec 5L,
Schedule 40.
2.3.1.2 High Temperature Service
Seamless carbon steel pipe for high temperature service shall conform to ASTM A 106 Grade B,
Schedule 40 with dimensions conforming to ASME B36.10M.
2.3.1.3 Chemical Process Service
Electric -resistance welded low -carbon steel pipe shall conform to ASTM A 587.
2.3.2 Carbon Steel Joints
Carbon steel piping shall be joined by welding fittings or flanges. Dielectric fittings or isolation joints
shall be provided between all dissimilar metals.
2.3.3 Carbon Steel Fittings
Fittings shall be carbon steel. Where cast fittings are not available, segmental welded steel fittings,
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, meeting the requirements of manufacturer's recommended wall
thicknesses shall be fabricated.
2.3.3.1 Threaded Fittings
Threaded fittings shall be Class 150, malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, conforming to ASME B16.3,
black, banded, and threaded in accordance with ASME B 1.20.1. Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) pipe -
thread tape conforming to ASTM D 3308 shall be used for lubricaritlsealant.
2.3.3.2 Welding Fittings
Welding fittings shall be butt -welding. Welding fittings shall be forged steel, ASTM A 105/A 105M
Class 150.
2.3.3.3 Flanged Fittings
The internal diameter bores of flanges and flanged fittings shall be the same as that of the associated
pipe. The flanges shall be welding neck socket welding or threaded type. Flanges and flanged fittings
shall be forged steel, ASTM A 105/A 105M, faced and drilled to ASME B16.1 Class 150 or 300 with a
SECTION 15200 Page 15

�r Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
2.2.1 Ductile Iron Pipe
Ductile iron pipe for pressure service shall have a design and wall thickness conforming to AWWA
— C151 according to pipe schedule. Ductile iron pipe shall have a standard cement lining conforming to
q AWWA C104.
2.2.2 Ductile Iron Joints
Joints shall have a working pressure rating for liquids equal to the pressure rating of the connected
pipe. Dielectric fittings or isolation joints shall be provided between all dissimilar metals.
2.2.2.1 Mechanical Joints
�^ Mechanical joints shall conform to AWWA C110 and AWWA C111. Gaskets, glands, bolts and nuts
shall be furnished in sufficient quantity for the complete assembly of each mechanical joint. Glands
shall be ductile iron with an asphaltic coating. Gaskets shall be vulcanized synthetic rubber, reclaimed
rubber is not acceptable. For grooved shoulder piping, self -centering gasketed couplings designed to
mechanically engage piping and lock in a positive watertight couple shall be used. Housings shall be
composed of malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M or ductile iron, ASTM A 536 and gaskets of molded
synthetic rubber, shall be used. Bolts and nuts shall be heat treated carbon steel, ASTM A .183,
minimum tensile 110,000 psi. Mechanical joints shall have bolt holes oriented straddling the vertical
centerline of the valves and fittings.
2.2.2.2 Push -on Joints
Push -on type joints shall conform to AWWA C111. Each push -on joint shall be supplied complete
with gasket and lubricant. Gaskets shall be compatible with joint design and comprised of vulcanized
synthetic rubber, reclaimed rubber is not acceptable. Lubricant shall be specifically formulated for use
with push -on joints and shall be non -toxic, odorless, tasteless and shall not support bacteria growth.
2.2.2.3 Restrained Joints
T Restrained joints shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C111, and be designed for a working
pressure equal to connected pipe rating. When using ductile iron pipe with restrained joints, field cuts
shall be supplied with a lock ring complete with retainer, retainer lock and roll -pin, as required by
manufacturer's recommendations, procedures and/or installation instructions.
2.2.2.4 Flanged Joints
Flanged joints shall conform to AWWA C110. Gaskets, bolts and nuts shall be provided with flanged
joints in sufficient quantity for the complete assembly of each joint. Gaskets shall be vulcanized
synthetic rubber, reclaimed rubber is not acceptable.
2.2.3 Ductile Iron Fittings
Fittings shall be gray iron ASTM A 48 or ductile iron AWWA C153. Up to 12 inches inclusive, the
fittings shall be 250 psig rated. Gray iron fittings shall be cement mortar lined standard thickness.
Flanges and flanged fittings shall conform to AWWA C110 and shall be rated for 150 psig or 250 psig
service as required. Materials shall be ductile iron. Bolts and nuts shall be carbon steel conforming to
ASTM A 307, Grade B. Bolts shall be provided with washers of the same material as the bolts.
Gaskets shall be rubber full face, maximum 0.125 in thick.
SECTION 15200 Page 14

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
pipe installation. At a minimum, this includes all solvents, solvent cements, glues and other materials
that may contain hazardous compounds. Handling shall be in accordance with ASTM F 402. Storage
facilities shall be classified and marked in accordance with NFPA 704, with classification as indicated
in NFPA 49 and NFPA 325-1. Materials shall be stored with protection from puncture, dirt, grease,
moisture, mechanical abrasions, excessive heat, ultraviolet (UV) radiation damage, or other damage.
Pipe and fittings shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation.
Plastic pipe shall be packed, packaged and marked in accordance with ASTM D 3892.
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
1.7.1 Verification of Dimensions
After becoming familiar with all details of the work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions in the
field, and shall advise the Engineer of any discrepancy before performing the work.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
For slab, floor, wall, and roof penetrations, the Contractor shall have on site pertinent wall pipes and
sleeves before they are required for placement in concrete forms. The Contractor shall verify and
coordinate the size and location of building and structure pipe penetrations before forming and placing
concrete.
1.9 MAINTENANCE
1.9.1 Service
Services for automatic valve systems shall be provided by a manufacturer's representative who is
experienced in the installation, adjustment and operation of the equipment specified. The
representative shall inspect the installation, and supervise the adjustment and testing of the equipment.
1.9.2 Extra Materials
Concurrent with delivery and installation of the specified piping systems and appurtenances, spare
parts for each different item of material and equipment specified that is recommended by the
manufacturer to be replaced any time up to 3 years of service shall be furnished. For each type and
size of valve, the following extra materials shall be provided: lubricator, lubricant (with appropriate
temperature rating), lubricator/isolating valve; galvanized operating wrench, 4 feet long, for T-handled
operators. Extra materials shall include 2 of the following spare parts for each type and size of valve:
gaskets; O-ring seals; diaphragms (molded); all elastomer parts; stem packing; seat rings and seat ring
pulling tool.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS (GENERAL)
Materials for various services shall be in accordance with TABLE I. Pipe fittings shall be compatible
with the applicable pipe materials.
2.2 DUCTILE IRON PIPING SYSTEM
SECTION 15200 Page 13

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
- 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
i
1.4.1 Contractor
Contractor shall have successfully completed at least 3 projects of the same scope and size or larger
within the last 6 years. Contractor shall demonstrate specific experience in regard to the system
installation to be performed.
1.4.2 Welders
The welding of pressure piping systems shall be in accordance with qualifying procedures using
performance qualified welders and operators.
1.5 GENERAL JOB REQUIREMENTS
Piping materials and appurtenances shall be as specified and as shown on the drawings, and shall be
suitable for the service intended. Piping materials, appurtenances and equipment supplied as part of
this contract shall be new and unused except for testing equipment. Components that serve the same
function and are the same size shall be identical products of the same manufacturer. The general
materials to be used for the piping systems are indicated by service in the Pipe Schedule.
1.5.1 Components
Piping equipment and appurtenances shall be new products of equal material and ratings as the
connecting pipe.
1.5.2 Standard Products
Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacturing of the products and shall essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use
for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Nominal sizes for standardized products shall be used. Pipe,
valves, fittings and appurtenances shall be supported by a service organization that is, in the opinion of
the Engineer, reasonably convenient to the site.
1.5.3 Identification and Tagging
Each piece of pipe shall bear the ASTM designation and all other markings required for that
designation. Valves shall be marked in accordance with MSS SP-25and shall bear an identification
tag securely attached using stainless steel wire. Identification tags shall be 1.375 inch minimum
diameter, made of engraved laminated plastic. The service, valve identification number shown on the
Valve Schedule in the contract drawings, the manufacturer's name, and the valve model number shall
be displayed.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Materials delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, excessive
humidity variation, excessive temperature variation, dirt, dust and/or other contaminants. Proper
protection and care of material before, during and after installation is the Contractor's responsibility.
Any material found to be damaged shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. During installation,
piping shall be capped' to keep out dirt and other foreign matter. A material safety data sheet in
conformance with 29 CFR 1910 Section 1200(g) shall accompany each chemical delivered for use in
SECTION 15200 Page 12

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
Installation;
The manufacturer's installation recommendations or instructions for each material or
procedure to be utilized, including materials preparation.
Pipe Schedule;
A list of piping systems, pressure ratings and source of supply for each piping system
broken out by material, size and application as indicated on the contract drawings. A list of
any special tools necessary for each piping system and appurtenances furnished for
adjustment, operation, maintenance and disassembly of the system.
Valve Schedule;
A list of valve materials, pressure ratings, and reference identification as indicated in the
contract drawings. A list of any special tools necessary for each valve type and
appurtenances furnished for adjustment, operation, maintenance and disassembly.
SD-06 Test Reports
Manufacturer's engineering end load calculations for anchors in double containment piping
systems.
Pipe Leakage Tests;
Hydrostatic Tests;
Disinfection;
Copies of all field test reports within 24 hours of the completion of the test.
SD-07 Certificates
Plastic Piping System;
Documentation certifying that the manufacturer of each thermoplastic piping system is
listed with the Plastic Pipe Institute as meeting the recipe and mixing requirements of the
resin manufacturer for the resin used to manufacture each of the respective thermoplastic
pipe systems.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Piping and Appurtenances;
Six copies each of operation and maintenance manuals in indexed booklet form.
Operation manuals shall detail the step-by-step procedures required for specialized startup,
operation and shutdown of piping systems, and shall include the manufacturer's name,
model number, parts list and brief description of piping equipment such as valves and other
appurtenances and their basic operating features. Maintenance manuals shall list routine
maintenance procedures and troubleshooting guides for the equipment, and shall include
piping layout and valve locations.
SECTION 15200 Page 11
r�

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
SD-02 Shop Drawings.
;I
Pipe and Equipment;
Equipment shop drawings and support system detail drawings showing piping systems and
appurtenances, such as mechanical joints, valves, local indicators and hangers, including a
complete list of equipment and materials. As -built drawings showing pipe anchors and
guides, and layout of piping systems relative to other parts of the work including clearances
r s for maintenance and operation. As -built piping and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs)
identifying and labeling equipment, instrumentation, valves, vents, drains, and all other
inline devices; if the contract drawings contained P&IDs, the P&IDs found in the contract
drawings shall be revised to reflect the constructed process system, as directed by the
Engineer.
SD-03 Product Data
Qualifications;
A statement certifying that the Contractor has the specified experience.
Welders;
The names of all qualified welders, their identifying symbols, and the qualifying
procedures for each welder including support data such as test procedures used, standards
tested to, etc.
Waste Water Disposaf;
The method proposed for disposal of waste water from hydrostatic tests and disinfection,
and all required permits, prior to performing hydrostatic tests.
Assistance and Training;
A signed statement certifying that the installation is satisfactory and in accordance with the
contract drawings and specifications and the manufacturer's prescribed procedures and
techniques, upon completion of the project and before final acceptance.
Delivery, Storage and Handling;
Material safety data sheets.
Materials and Equipment;
Manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature for each piping system, including
design recommendations; pressure and temperature ratings; dimensions, type, grade and
strength of pipe and fittings; thermal characteristics (coefficient of expansion and thermal
conductivity); and chemical resistance to each chemical and chemical mixture in the liquid
stream.
SECTION 15200 Page 10

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
PLASTICS PIPE INSTITUTE (PPI)
PPI TR21 (2001) Thermal Expansion and Contraction of Plastic Pipe
THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
SSPC SP 6
(1994) Commercial Blast Cleaning.
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This specification covers the requirements for above and below grade liquid process pipe, pipe
supports, fittings, equipment and accessories located both inside and outside of treatment plants.
1.2.1 Design Requirements
Support systems shall be selected and designed in accordance with MSS SP-58, MSS SP-69, and MSS
SP-89 within the specified spans and component requirements. The absence of pipe supports and
details on the contract drawings does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for sizing and
providing supports throughout facility. The structural design, selection, fabrication and erection of
piping support system components shall satisfy the seismic requirements accounting for a 2000 psf soil
bearing capacity, and a maximum wind speed of 90 mph.
1.2.2 Performance Requirements
The pressure ratings and materials specified represent minimum acceptable standards for piping
systems. The piping systems shall be suitable for the services specified and intended. Each piping
system shall be coordinated to function as a unit. Flanges, valves, fittings and appurtenances shall have
a pressure rating no less than that required for the system in which they are installed.
1.2.2.1 Buried Piping Systems
Piping systems shall be suitable for design conditions, considering the piping both with and without
internal pressure. Consideration shall be given to all operating and service conditions both internal and
external to the piping systems.
1.2.2.2 Above Grade Piping Systems
Piping systems shall be suitable for design conditions, considering the piping both with and without
internal pressure, and installation factors such as insulation, support spans, and ambient temperatures.
Consideration shall be given to all operating and service conditions both internal and external to the
piping systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SECTION 15200 Page 9

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
ASME B 16.34 (1997) Valves - Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End
ASME B16.42 (1998) Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges & Flanged Fittings, Classes
150-300
ASME B16.1 (1996; B16.5a) Pipe Flanges and Flanged- Fittings NPS 1/2
thru NPS 24
ASME B16.9 (1993) Factory -Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings
ASME B18.2.1 (1996) Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series)
ASME B18.2.2 (1987; R 1993) Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series)
ASME B31.1 (1998) Power Piping
ASME B36.10M (1996) Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
ASME B36.19M (1985; R 1994) Stainless Steel Pipe
ASME B40.1 (1991) Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic
Element
DUCTILE IRON PIPE RESEARCH ASSOCIATION (DIPRA)
DIPRA TRD (1997) Thrust Restraint Design for Ductile Iron Pipe
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION (ISO)
ISO 228-1 (1994) Pipe Threads Where Pressure -Tight Joints Are Not
Made on The Threatd - Part 1: Dimensions, Tolerances and
Designation
MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS
INDUSTRY (MSS)
MSS SP-25 (1998) Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings,
Flanges and Unions
MSS SP-43 (1991; R 1996) Wrought Stainless Steel Butt -Welding
Fittings
MSS SP-58 (1993) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and
Manufacture
MSS SP-69 (1996) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and
Application
MSS SP-89 (1998) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and
Installation Practices
SECTION 15200 Page 8

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)
AWS A5.10/A5.IOM (1999) Bare Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Welding
Electrodes and Rods
AWS A5.1l/A5.1IM (1997) Filler Metal Nickel & Nickel Alloy CVD
AWS A5.14/A5.14M (1997) Filler Metal Specifications for Nickel and Nickel
Alloy Bare Welding Electrodes and Rods
AWS A5.3/A5.3M (1999) Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Electrodes for
Shielded Metal Arc Welding
AWS A5.8 (1992) Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding
AWS D1.1/Dl.1M (2000) Structural Welding Code - Steel
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B1.1
(1989) Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread
Form).
ASME B1.20.1
(1983; R 1992) Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch)
ASME B 1.20.7
(1991: R 1998) Hose Coupling Screw Threads (Inch)
ASME B 16.1
(1998) Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
ASME B16.11
(1996) Forged Fittings, Socket -Welding and Threaded
ASME B 16.15
(1985; R 1994) Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings Classes 125
and 250
ASME B16.18 (1984; R 1994) Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
ASME B16.20 (1993; R 1998) Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges - Ring -
Joint, Spiral -Wound, and Jacketed
ASME B16.21 (1992) Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
ASME B16.22 (1995; B16.22al998) Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy
Solder Joint Pressure Fittings
ASME B16.26 (1988) Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes
ASME B16.28 (1994) Wrought Steel Buttwelding Short Radius Elbows and
Returns
ASME B16.3 (1998) Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings
SECTION 15200 Page 7

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
C T.
AWWA C110 (1998) Ductile -Iron and Gray -Iron Fittings, 3 In. Through 48
In. (75 mm through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids
AWWA C111 (2000) Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe
and Fittings
AWWA C115
(1999) Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe With Ductile -Iron or Gray -
Iron Threaded Flanges
AWWA C150
(1996) Thickness Design of Ductile -Iron Pipe
AWWA C151
(1996) Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or
Other Liquids
AWWA C153
(2000) Ductile -Iron Compact Fittings, 3 In. Through 24
In.(76 mm through 610 mm) and 54 In. through 64 In. (1,400
mm through 1,600 mm) for Water Service
AWWA C207
(1994) Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4
In. Through 144 In. (100 mm Through 3,600 mm)
AWWA C500
(1993; C500a) Metal -Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply
Service
AWWA C504 (1994) Rubber -Seated Butterfly Valves
AWWA C508 (1993; C508a) Swing -Check Valves for Waterworks Service,
2 In. (50 mm) Through 24 In. (600 mm) NPS
AWWA C509 (1994; Addendum 1995) Resilient -Seated Gate Valves for
Water Supply Service
AWWA C511 (1997) Reduced -Pressure Principle Backflow-Prevention
Assembly
AWWA C512 (1997) Air Release, Air/Vacuum and Combination Air
Valves for Water Service
AWWA C540 (1993) Power -Activating Devices for Valves and Sluice
Gates
AWWA C550 (1990) Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and
Hydrants
AWWA C606 (1997) Grooved and Shouldered Joints
AWWA C651 (1999) Disinfecting Water Mains
SECTION 15200 Page 6

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
ASTM F 402
(1993; R 1999) Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers,
and Cleaners Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and
Fittings
ASTM F 437
(1999) Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM F 438
(1999) Socket -Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40
ASTM F 439
(1999) Socket -Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM F 441/F 441M
(1999) Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride).(CPVC) Plastic
Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80
ASTM F 442/F 442M
(1999) Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic
Pipe (SDR-PR)
ASTM F 477
(1999) Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe
ASTM F 493
(1997) Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM F 656
(1996a) Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of
Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM F 714
(2000) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on
Outside Diameter
ASTM F 876 (2000) Crosslinked Polyethylene (PEX) Tubing
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)
ASSE 1001 (1990) Pipe Applied Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers
ASSE 1012 (1995) Backflow Preventers with Intermediate Atmospheric
Vent
ASSE 1013
(1999) Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers
ASSE 1015
(1999) Double Check Backflow Prevention Assembly
ASSE 1020
(1998) Pressure Vacuum Breer ak A bl R d d
ssem y ( ecommen e
for Outdoor Usage)
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION(AWWA)
AWWA C104 (1995) Cement -Mortar Lining for Ductile -Iron Pipe and
Fittings for Water
SECTION 15200 Page 5

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
ASTM D 2468 (1996a) Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 40
ASTM D 2564 (1996a) Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Piping Systems.
ASTM D 2609 (2000) Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic
Pipe
ASTM D 2683 (1998) Socket -Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside
Diameter -Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing
ASTM D 2737 (1999) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing
ASTM D 2774 (1994) Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pressure
Piping
ASTM D 2855 (1996) Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 3035 (1995) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (DR -PR) Based on
Controlled Outside Diameter
ASTM D 3261 (1997) Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings
for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing
ASTM D 3350 (1999) Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials
ASTM D 3892 (1993; R 1998) Packaging/Packing of Plastics
ASTM D 3965 (1999) Rigid Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Materials for Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 4101 (2000) Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials
ASTM F 1055 (1998) Electrofusion Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside
Diameter Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing
ASTM F 1056 (1997) Socket Fusion Tools for Use in Socket Fusion Joining
Polyethylene Pipe or Tubing and Fittings
ASTM F 1199 (1988; R 1998) Cast (All Temperature and Pressures) and
Welded Pipe Line Strainers (150 psig and 150 degrees F
Maximum)
ASTM F 1200 (1988; R 1998) Fabricated (Welded) Pipe Line Strainers
(Above 150 psig and 150 degrees F)
SECTION 15200 Page 4

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
ASTM A 814/A 814M (1996; R 1998) Cold -Worked Welded Austenitic Stainless
Steel Pipe
ASTM A 865 (1997)Threaded Couplings, Steel, Black or Zinc -Coated
(Galvanized) Welded or Seamless, for Use in Steel Pipe
Joints
ASTM B 124/13 124M
(2000) Copper and Copper Alloy Forging Rod, Bar, and
Shapes
ASTM B 302
(1998) Threadless Copper Pipe
ASTM B 32
(1996) Solder Metal
ASTM B 813
(2000) Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering Applications of
Copper and Copper Alloy Tube
ASTM B 88
(1999) Seamless Copper Water Tube
ASTM D 1784
(1999a) Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds
ASTM D 1785
(1999) Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules
40, 80, and 120
ASTM D 2104
(1999el) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedule 40
ASTM D 2235
(1996a) Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene
(ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings
ASTM D 2239
(1999) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on
Controlled Inside Diameter
ASTM D 2241 (2000) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure -Rated Pipe
(SDR Series)
ASTM D 2282 (1999) Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe
(SDR-PR)
ASTM D 2447 (1999) Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80,
Based on Outside Diameter
ASTM D 2464 (1999) Threaded Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe
Fittings, Schedule 80
ASTM D 2466 (1999) Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 40
ASTM D 2467 (1999) Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 80
SECTION 15200 Page 3

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
ASTM A 312/A 312M (2000) Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipes
ASTM A 334/A 334M (1999) Seamless and Welded Carbon and Alloy -Steel Tubes
for Low -Temperature Service
ASTM A 351/A 351M (2000) Castings, Austenitic, Austenitic-Ferritic (Duplex), for
Pressure -Containing Parts
ASTM A 36/A 36M
(2000a) Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A 403/A 403M
(2000) Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings
ASTM A 423/A 423M
(1995) Seamless and Electric -Welded Low -Alloy Steel Tubes
ASTM A 436
(1984; R 1997el) Austenitic Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A 47/A 47M
(1999) Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A 48
(1994ae1) Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A 48M
(1994el) Gray Iron Castings (Metric)
ASTM A 513
(2000) Electric -Resistance -Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel
Mechanical Tubing
ASTM A 53/A 53M
(2001) Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated,
Welded and Seamless
ASTM A 536
(1984; R 1999el) Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A 576
(1990b; R 1995e1) Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot -Wrought, Special
Quality
ASTM A 587
(1996) Electric -Resistance -Welded Low -Carbon Steel Pipe
for the Chemical Industry
ASTM A 632
(1998) Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing (Small -Diameter) for General Service
ASTM A 727/A 727M
(2000) Forgings, Carbon Steel for Piping Components with
Inherent Notch Toughness
ASTM A 780
(2000) Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot -
Dipped Galvanized Coatings
ASTM A 789/A 789M
(2000) Seamless and Welded Ferritic/Austenitic Stainless
Steel Tubing for General Service
ASTM A 813/A 813M
(1995e2) Single- or Double -Welded Austenitic Stainless
Steel Pipe
SECTION 15200 Page 2

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
SECTION 15200
PIPELINES, LIQUID PROCESS PIPING
03/02
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 105/A 105M (2001) Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications
ASTM A 106 (1999el) Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High -Temperature
Service
ASTM A 108
(1999) Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold -Finished, Standard Quality
ASTM A 126
(1995; R 2001) Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and
Pipe Fittings
ASTM A 153/A 153M
(2001) Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
ASTM A 181/A 181M
(2001) Carbon Steel Forgings, for General -Purpose Piping
ASTM A 182/A 182M
(2001) Forged or Rolled Alloy -Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged
Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High -Temperature Service
ASTM A 183
(1998) Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts
ASTM A 193/A 193M
(2001a) Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for
High -Temperature Service
ASTM A 194/A 194M
(2001) Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High -
Pressure or High -Temperature Service or Both
ASTM A 216/A 216M
(1993; R 1998) Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion
Welding, for High -Temperature Service
ASTM A 269
(2000) Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service
ASTM A 276
(2000) Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
ASTM A 307
(2000) Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile
Strength
SECTION 15200 Page 1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
Pressure Gauge Panel
Dial Size
4-1/2" diameter, liquid -filled
Case Material
Black glass reinforced thermoplastic
Wetted Parts
316 SS
Readout Range
0 —100 psi
Accuracy
+/- 5% of span, ASME B40.100 Grade 2A
Connection Location / Size
Lower mount, %a" NPT
Mounting Panel Material
Type 304 SS
Sample Cocks
1/2" ball valve, brass body and fittings
Sample Cock Tap Locations
1- inlet, 1- outlet (to be tapped in field by contractor)
SECTION 11393 - Page 3

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
Tank Supports
Su portLegs
Quantity(8), Adjustable Jack Stands
Leg Height
14" elevation
Lifting Lug in top head)
Quantity 3), carbon steel, A-36
Protective Coatings
Interior Preparation
SSPC-SP10 blast
Interior Paint System
Tnemec Pota-pox epoxy or equal, 2-coats, 8 - 11 mils DFT
Exterior Preparation
SSPC-SP6 blast
Exterior Paint System
Tnemec Series 66 Epoxy primer or equal, > 3.0 mils DFT
Exterior Finish Coats
By Contractor, in the field
Tank Accessories
Air Release Valve
Val-Matic Model VM-22 or equal, 1" FPT connection, cast
iron body, stainless steel trim.
Tank Internals
Overdrain
6" Schd. 80 PVC pipe w. (1) inverted 90-ELL
Underdrain
6" Schd. 80 PVC header pipe w. (18) 2" diam. ABS slotted
laterals, 0.010" opening size.
Support Media
Support Material
Gravel
Depth & Size
18" depth,'/4" X 1/8" size
Filter Media
Two (2) layers
Silica Sand
24" depth, 0.45 — 0.55 mm, u.c. < 1.6, s.g. 2.65
Anthracite
24" depth, 0.85 — 0.95 nun, u.c. < 1.7, s. g. 1.45
Media Freeboard
Greater than 18" depth, > 50 percent
Backwash Flow Control
Flow Rate Control Limit
600 gpm (max) per filter unit
Pipe Size
6" wafer, cast iron body, 7.25" overall length
Accuracy
+/- 5 percent of the set rate
Pressure Loss
8.0 psi minimum
Manual Control Valve
Lever -style butterfly valve
Valve Identification Numbers
Valves 1 thru 4
Valve Size
(as shown on drawing Sheet No.
Valve Cv
2,500 GPM for 6"
Valve Body Material
Epoxy -coated cast iron
Valve Disc & coating Material
Ductile iron disc with Nylon coating
Valve Shaft
Stainless steel
Valve Seat
EPDM rubber
Closeoff Pressure Rating
175 psig
Actuator Style
Manual lever with slave linkage on inlet/outlet valves
SECTION 11393 - Page 2

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
SECTION 11393
n�
PRESSURE FILTRATION UNITS
Flow Rate Capacity per Filter
Unit
150 gpm
Influent Water Quality
Iron
1.5 mg/L — 2.0 mg/L
Effluent Limits
Manganese
0.05 mg/L
Iron
0.30 mg/L
Filter Design Criteria
Maximum Filter Loading Rate
3 GPM / Sq. Ft.
Maximum Operating Pressure
100 psig
Pressure Loss (across filter system)
3 psi (clean) — 25 psi (dirty)
EQUIPMENT
Tank
Quantity (2)
Type
Pressure Vessel, vertical
Service
Well water @ ambient temperature
Design Working Pressure
100 psig
Hydrostatic Test Pressure
130 psig
Design & Construction Standard
ASME Code, Section VIH, Division 1
Proof of Design
National Board's Label & "U" Stamp
Tank Size
96" outside diameter by 72" sideshell (seam to seam)
Head & Shell Materials
SA516 Grade 70 carbon steel
Head Type
ASME 2:1 Eliptical
Circumferential Joint Method
Butt weld
Longitudinal Joint Method
Butt weld
Tank Penetrations
Full Coupling air release vent
Quantity (1), 1" NPT
Coupling Material
A105 carbon steel, class 3,000#
Pipe Nozzle (draindown)
Quantity (1), 3"
Pipe Nozzle (inlet & outlet)
Quantity (2), 6"
Pipe Nozzle Material
Schedule 40, seamless, SA-106B carbon steel
Pipe Flange Material
SA105 carbon steel, class 150#, raised face
Manway (in top head & lower side
shell)
Quantity (2), 14" X 18" elliptical, double yoke style
Manway Ring Material
SA-675 Grade 70 carbon steel
Manway Cover Material
SA-285-C carbon steel
SECTION 11393 -Page 1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
3.3.5 Flow
Pumps shall be tested to demonstrate zero gallons per minute flow at a zero stroke or speed setting.
Failure to meet this test shall be cause for rejection.
3.3.6 Synchronization
The pumps shall be operated for a period of 4 hours to demonstrate that the double diaphragm systems
do not lose their synchronization. Loss of synchronization shall also be cause for rejection and the
pump shall be repaired or replaced as necessary. Repaired or replaced equipment shall be fully
retested.
3.3.7 Chemical Waste
Chemicals wasted during testing procedures shall be neutralized to achieve a pH value between 6.5 and
9.5 and a chlorine concentration of not more than 1 percent (10,000 mg/L). All chemicals wasted
during testing procedures shall be [routed to the sanitary sewer] [routed through the treatment process]
at a rate that the process can assimilate without upset.
3.4 FIELD TRAINING
The Contractor shall conduct a field training course for designated operating, maintenance and
supervisory staff members. Training shall be provided for a total period of 4 hours of normal working
time and shall start after the system is functionally complete but prior to final acceptance tests. Field
training shall cover all of the items contained in the operating and maintenance instructions.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 11242 Page 13

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
All chemical feed piping inside the well house building shall be Sch. 80 PVC unless otherwise noted on
the contract drawings. The piping shall be securely mounted utilizing pipe hangers, unistrut, or an
approved mounting system in areas readily accessible to the Owner. The piping shall be color coded and
' labeled with colored tape exhibiting the chemical name or sample point. The tape shall be applied at
strategic points not to exceed 20' on center within all areas where pipe is visible. In exterior locations the
pipe shall be insulated and wrapped with aluminum sheathing.
3.2 FIELD PAINTING
Factory painted items requiring touching up in the field shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign
material and shall be primed and top -coated with the manufacturer's standard factory finish provided it
does not discolor in the presence of hydrogen sulfide fumes, high water vapor atmosphere, alkaline
water vapor, and concentrated chlorine (oxidizing) conditions. Equipment, which did not receive a
factory finish, shall be painted as specified in Section 09900 PAINTING, GENERAL. Coating shall be
not less than 1.75 mils thick.
3.3 FIELD TESTING
After installation of each controlled volume pump, operating tests shall be carried out to assure that the
chemical metering installation operates properly. If any deficiencies are revealed during any tests, such
deficiencies shall be corrected and the tests shall be reconducted. Reports of all tests shall be submitted
prior to final acceptance of the installation.
3.3.1 Tanks
;1 No new chemical tanks shall be supplied.
3.3.2 Metering Pumps
Pumps shall be tested to demonstrate that the pumps are capable of operating without vibration or
leakage. Testing shall be performed at the maximum design flow rate and at half the design flow rate.
Testing shall be demonstrated while controlled and operated in all feasible modes with the pumps
operated singly and in unison. The response of each pump shall be plotted on curves for the various
operating pressures encountered and the results shall be compared to the curves shown on the
manufacturer's published pump data. If control characteristic curves are not available at the time of
testing, the pump manufacturer's service engineer shall generate such curves for each pump. Pump
curves shall graphically depict the pump displacement at 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of motor speed for
SCR equipped pumps, and at 25, 50, 75, and 100 percent of maximum stroke position for all pumps.
Curves shall be generated only for the specified back pressure.
I�
3.3.3 Time, Volume and Pumping Pressure
y Pumps shall be tested by filling the standpipe with chemical and measuring the outage, with all other
equipment valved off. The time, volume and pumping pressures shall be recorded.
3.3.4 Test Pressure
Tests shall be carried out at 50 and 60 psig. Back pressure valves shall be manually controlled for this
testing, and shall be reset as necessary after testing. The time to deliver a given quantity of chemical at
a given stroke and speed setting shall be the same at all pressures.
SECTION 11242 Page 12

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
Outside the well house building all chemical feed piping shall be flexible ribber tubing installed inside
PVC Conduit.
2.8 ELECTRICAL WORK
Electric motor -driven equipment shall be provided complete with motor, motor starter, and controls.
Electrical equipment and wiring shall be in accordance with Section 16000, ELECTRICAL. Hazard
classifications indicated on the drawings shall be implemented in accordance with NFPA 70.
2.8.1 Motor Starters
Motor starters shall be provided complete with thermal overload protection and other appurtenances
necessary for the motor control specified.
2.8.2 Control and Protective Devices
Manual or automatic control and protective or signal devices required for the operation and any control
wiring required for controls and devices shall be provided. Motor controls shall conform to NEMA
ICS 1 or NEMA ICS 2. Equipment shall be prewired to the maximum practicable extent. Control
cabinets shall conform to the requirements of UL 50, NEMA 250, Type 4, Type 7, or Type 12.
2.9 EQUIPMENT APPURTENANCES
Bolts, nuts, anchors, washers and all other types of supports necessary for the installation of the
equipment shall be galvanized steel, cadmium plated or Type 316 stainless steel.
2.10 FACTORY PAINTING
Factory painting shall conform to manufacturer's standard factory finish, provided it does not discolor
in the presence of hydrogen sulfide fumes, high water vapor atmosphere, alkaline water vapor, and
concentrated chlorine (oxidizing) conditions. Coating shall be not less than 1.75 mils thick.
2.11 FACTORY TEST REPORT
Factory examination of fiberglass tanks shall be in accordance with ASTM E 1067 prior to shipping. A
copy of the corresponding test report shall be furnished with each tank.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.1.1 Chemical Feeding Equipment
Controlled volume pumps, equipment, and appurtenances shall be installed to provide a complete and
integrated system in accordance with the instruction of the manufacturer and under the direct
supervision of the manufacturer's representative.
3.1.2 Pipe, Tubing, Hangers and Supports
SECTION 11242 Page 11

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
The chemical metering equipment shall be provided with the appurtenances and accessories, as
required, for flow capacity adjustment. Manual range adjustment shall be provided on all systems.
2.3.1 Automatic Controls
All chemical feed pumps shall energize when the well pump is energized. No automatic controls shall
be required for the metering pumps.
r �
2.4 DRIVES FOR LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED PUMPS
The metering pumps shall be supplied with and driven by direct current electric motor drives.
2.4.1 Electric Motor Drive
Electric motor shall be of sufficient capacity to operate the chemical metering equipment under all
operating conditions without exceeding their rated nameplate current or power, or their specified
temperature limits. The motors shall have starting characteristics and ruggedness necessary under the
actual conditions of operations or clean-up procedures used in the areas where they will be located.
Alternating current motors with power rating of 1/3 hp or less shall be 115 volts, single-phase, 60-11z
service; motors with power rating in excess of 1/3 hp shall be 460 volts, three-phase, 60-Hz service.
Electrical features of direct current motors, including the ratings of the motors, shall be compatible
with the capabilities and ratings of the rectifier controllers with which they are used.
2.5 SOLUTION TANKS
No chenucal tanks shall be supplied by the Contractor. The existing chemical tanks shall be utilized.
2.6 INJECTORS
Injectors for chemical solution shall be introduced into the pipeline Y eline mains b means of a hard rubber or
plastic injection nozzle, or by means of a suitable diffuser tube inserted through a corporation cock.
The device for introducing the solution into a pressure main shall be constructed in such a way that
accidental breakage of discharge hose or tubing will not cause water to escape from the pipeline, and
will allow disassembling of the unit without leakage.
2.7 PIPING
i
2.7.1 Backflow Preventer
� s
Backflow prevention devices or air gaps shall be provided on tank fill lines in accordance with
NAPHCC Plumbing Code.
2.7.2 Chemical Solution Piping
Provisions shall be incorporated to allow solution piping to be conveniently and safely bled of trapped
air and minimize infiltration of air bubbles.
Chemical solution piping inside the well house building shall be Schedule 80 PVC pipe conforming to
ASTM D 1785. Fittings for plastic pipe shall be of plastic with flanged threaded, or solvent weld
j oints.
SECTION 11242 Page 10

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
Concentration: 12.5 percent
Number of pumps: 2 - one for Pre -Caustic and one for Post -Caustic
Type of pump: Mechanically or hydraulically coupled diaphragm.
Configuration: Duplex.
Controls: Automatic or semiautomatic rate adjustment.
Feed/flow rate: Minimum .1 gph; maximum 1.5 gph.
Back pressure at point of injection: 60 psig. Back pressure regulating valve shall be installed on the
pump discharge and shall be factory adjusted to crack open at 70 psig. Regulators shall be of polyvinyl
chloride construction with fluorocarbon resin diaphragms.
Suction valve cartridge: Double ball check.
Discharge valve cartridge: Double ball check.
Materials of construction allowed for wetted parts: PVC
2.2.5 Phosphate Feed System
The following shall be provided for sodium polyphosphate solution delivery.
Weight: 71bs. per gallon.
Number of pumps: 2 — one in service and one spare
Type of pump: Mechanically or hydraulically coupled diaphragm.
Configuration: Duplex.
Controls: Automatic or semiautomatic rate adjustment.
Feed/flow rate: Minimum .01 gph; maximum .3 gph.
Back pressure at point of injection: 60 psig. Back pressure regulating valve shall be installed on the
pump discharge and shall be factory adjusted to crack open at 65 psig. Regulators shall be of polyvinyl
chloride construction with fluorocarbon resin diaphragms.
Suction valve cartridge: Double ball check.
Discharge valve cartridge: Double ball check.
Materials of construction allowed for wetted parts: PVC
2.3 CONTROLS
SECTION 11242 Page 9

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
piston disc which exerts uniform pressure on the teflon diaphragm. Sizing, of the back pressure
valve shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer with the condition that the valve shall not
be less than 1/2" diameter. The back pressure valve shall have a flow capacity of not less than
6 gpm pulsating flow from a single -acting simplex metering pump.
e. Pump, Pipe and Fittings: Chemical feed system integrator shall supply the chemical metering
(= pump discharge pipe and fittings including stainless steel fittings, stainless steel quick coupling
disconnect fittings, flexible discharge pipe, etc., from the discharge of the pump to the point of
connection at the PVC fittings, including stainless steel threaded adapters. This shall also
include flexible pipe, quick coupling disconnects and fittings as shown for the calibration
chambers.
f. Calibration Standpipe: Chemical metering equipment shall be provided with a calibration
standpipe for measuring pump output. The standpipe shall allow convenient observation of
the change of fluid level for at least 1/2 minute at full stroke and maximum speed settings,
and shall be Schedule 80, clear PVC pipe conforming to ASTM D 1785 with Schedule 80
fittings equipped with a flanged connection to the pump manifold and an end cap fitted
with a PVC vacuum breaker and ball valve for air venting. The standpipe shall have a
_
clear, observable length of at least 12 inches and shall be permanently calibrated in gallons
�1
and fractions thereof, to allow reading of the fluid contents with an accuracy of 1 percent.
2.2.3 Caustic Feed System
The following shall be provided for caustic soda solution delivery.
Concentration: 50 percent.
Number of pumps: 2.
Type of pump: Mechanically or hydraulically coupled diaphragm.
Configuration: Duplex — one for Pre -Caustic and one for Post -Caustic
Controls: Automatic, or semiautomatic rate adjustment.
Feed/flow rate: Minimum .1 gph; Maximum 1.2 gph.
Back pressure at point of injection: 60 psig. Back pressure regulating valve shall be installed on the
pump discharge and shall be factory adjusted to crack open at 70 psig. Regulators shall be of polyvinyl
chloride construction with fluorocarbon resin diaphragms.
—, Suction valve cartridge: Double ball check.
Discharge valve cartridge: Double ball check.
Materials of construction allowed for wetted parts: PVC
2.2.4 Hypochlorite Feed System
The following shall be provided for hypochlorite solution delivery.
SECTION 11242 Page 8

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
auto stroke controller in a NEMA 7 housing on the pump, the drive control panel for the will not be
required.
The metering pump supplier shall provide food grade oil for the hydraulic fluid in the metering pump in
accordance with FDA and USDA requirements. FDA -approved chemical additives may be used to
provide, the required lubricating properties.
Pump and motor shall be mounted on a common cast or stainless steel base. The metering pump supplier
shall provide one half gallon of touch-up paint for the chemical feed pumps. Any manufacturers bidding
must have at least five (5) years experience with tubular diaphragms in service. Paint shall be suitable for
use with chlorine and fluoride fumes in the atmosphere. Metering pumps may be Pulsatron, Pulsafeeder
Model 340, or as provided by Combs Integrated Technologies, Inc.
The metering pump shall be rated as shown on the attached design calculations, at an output pressure of
100 psig, with a %Z inch suction and discharge threaded connection, single ball check valves, and a 30 mm
diameter drive piston.
2.2.2.1 Metering Pump Accessories
The metering pump supplier shall supply metering pump accessory equipment as specified herein and as
indicated in the contract drawings including pressure gauges, calibration chamber, pulsation dampeners,
pressure relief valves, and back pressure valves.
a. Pressure Gauge: Supply a pressure gauge for installation by the Contractor on the discharge
piping of each metering pump. Pressure gauge shall be plastic with a clear acrylic gauge guard
or equivalent with Type 1, Grade 1, PVC and a 2-1/2" diameter dial indicator. Mounting of the
gauge shall be 1/4" NPT. A diaphragm protector shall be supplied with each gauge to include a
teflon O-ring seal at the gauge, liquid filled upper housing, flexible diaphragm, and a 1/2"
process connection. The gauge shall be provided with a chemical protector for the internals of
the gauge.
b. Pulsation Dampener: Supply a pulsation dampener for each metering pump. Pulsation
dampener shall have a gas volume of 38 cubic inches and shall have a bottom chamber of 316
stainless steel. The diaphragm material shall be supplied for the specific chemical for which
the dampener is used without corrosion, wear, or other cause of abnormally short life. Each
dampener shall be equipped with a charging valve and gas pad pressure gauge. The pulsation
dampener shall be rated for 200 psig with over range protection up to 300 psig. Process
connection to be 1/2" female NPT.
C. Pressure Relief Valve: Supply a pressure relief valve for each metering pump. The ball, seat,
ball guide, and lower body shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel, or material suitable for
solution. The diaphragm shall be Viton-A. Valve set pressure shall be coordinated by the
metering pump supplier. The capacity of the valve at set pressure shall be not less than 6 gpm.
The valve shall be 1/2" diameter and shall be nonchattering with screwdriver adjustment of
pressure settings.
d. Back Pressure Valve: Supply a back pressure valve for each metering pump. The body and
seat of the back pressure valve shall be 316 stainless steel or chemical suitable for the chemical
pumped. The diaphragm shall be Teflon. The bonnet shall be of cast steel construction. The
back pressure valve shall consist of a pressure exerted by an adjustable assembly guided in a
cast steel bonnet which puts pressure on a lower guide spring plate to a .375" guide ball, to a
SECTION 11242 Page 7

ITobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
installed. Construction shall be as simple as practicable to provide equipment isolation, bypass and
ti reliable service and to be readily accessible for inspection, cleaning, adjustment, repairs, and
replacements.
There are existing hypochlorite caustic and polyphosphate metering pumps onsite currently. The
Contractor may utilize. these existing pumps in the new chemical feed system All new metering
d pumps shall be by the same manufacturer as the existing metering pumps
2.2.1.1 Chemical Feed Control Signals
The chemical feeders shall have DC motors, the speed of which may be paced from a 4-20 mA signal
originating from instrumentation described in this section.
2.2.2 Metering Pumps
} The pumps shall be of the hydraulically balanced diaphragm type, wherein a measuring plunger
reciprocates within a cylinder and causes hydraulic oil to deflect a tubular diaphragm. The pump shall be
self -priming and capable of indefinite operation without process fluid. All pumps shall be capable of
handling the treatment chemicals in their full commercial strength. All metering pumps shall be tubular or
flat hydraulically actuated diaphragm pumps and all pumps shall be provided with a cast or stainless steel
pump base which will be interchangeable with the heads of each pump for spare parts purposes. Pumps
shall be supplied with food grade intermediate fluid oil.
The pumps shall be equipped with integral process fluid suction and discharge ball check valves that
can be removed without dismantling the piping. Pump check valve clamp plates and bolt assemblies
shall be of the same material as the pump head.
The pump system shall be hydraulically balanced by three automatic valves. A make-up valve shall
permit the flow of replacement oil from the oil reservoir to the area between the plunger and the
diaphragm. Mechanically actuated meter pumps will not be accepted. A bypass valve shall release oil
and terminate the pumping action when the oil ahead of the plunger is under excess pressure from
accidental valve closure of the stoppage to protect the pump mechanism. A bleeder valve shall
p l automatically and continuously release any oil or air vapors. The chemical solution being pumped
through the reagent head shall be isolated from the rest of the pump by means of a diaphragm. The
pump shall be leak -free. The pump's internal working components shall be completely submerged in
Yoil with no interval lubricator pumps. All drive components must be provided with a two (2) year
warranty from the manufacturer. The pump must be supplied with an optic oil indicator for the
operator to easily check the oil without the removal of any pump parts.
No stuffing box shall be allowed. Leakage past the piston shall be replenished on the suction stroke by an
automatic compensator valve, which draws oil from the oil reservoir. The drive end of the pump shall be
of the cycloidal motion type.
1
- The pump capacity shall be adjustable from 0 to 100 percent of the rated capacity by automatic
adjustment with manual override, and shall be accurate to +/- 1 percent of maximum over a 100 to 1
flow range. Stroke adjustment shall be accomplished using a micrometer adjustment with over 20
turns. Mechanically actuated diaphragm pumps shall not be permitted. The automatic stroke controller
shall contain a SCR drive for 4 to 20 ma input for auto stroke control. The auto stroke controller shall
have on board calibration, operator interface with LCD readout, on board batch and turndown
programming and all contained in a NEMA 7 enclosure. If the internal SCR is provided within the
SECTION 11242 Page 6

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802 iI
b. For each machine: one extra of each part used that is made from glass, hard rubber, or clear
plastic; one extra set of solution -hose connections; one extra set of diaphragms, two filler
plug seal washers; two ball checks; two seats; two complete sets of all gaskets; one spare
diaphragm for each back pressure regulator; one hydraulic plunger assembly for each
different size metering pump; one of each type of material back pressure regulator, with three
spare springs and fluorocarbon resin diaphragms for each; one spare diaphragm and air valve
for pulsation dampener.
c. For each different size of direct current motor one SCR circuit board with 12 drive motor
fuses and 12 SCR controller fuses; overload replacement elements for each size and type of
motor.
d. One set of special tools for each type of equipment including calibration devices, and
instruments required for adjustment, calibration, disassembly, operation, and maintenance of
the equipment.
e. One residual -chlorine comparator employing permanent color standards and 13- or 26-
millimeter viewing depth sample tubes, with corrosion -resistant case, color disk reading from
0.0 to 1 part per million, and sufficient DPD tablets for 100 tests.
f. Two pairs of safety goggles and/or face shields, two chemical resistant aprons, and two pairs
of chemical resistant gloves in one or more wall mounted steel cases.
g. One assembly tool for tubular diaphragm.
h. One lever type grease gun or other lubricating device for each type of grease required.
i. One or more steel tool cases mounted on the wall in a convenient location complete with flat
key locks, two keys, and clips or hooks to hold each special tool.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CHEMICALS
The Contractor shall not be responsible for providing chemicals.
2.2 LIQUID CHEMICAL FEED EQUIPMENT
2.2.1 General
The liquid chemical feed system shall meter chemicals shown on the drawings to the points of application
as shown on the plans. All chemical metering pumps, accumulators, pressure gauges, ball valves, check
valves, unions, pressure relief valves, and calibration columns as specified herein and shown on the
contract plans shall be supplied and coordinated by one supplier. All equipment shall be suitable for
utilization with the chemical specified.
Pumps shall be controlled volume pumps as defined by HI 7.1-7.5. Each pump shall be capable of
delivering chemical solution at any rate from the minimum flow rate to the maximum flow rate and
shall be capable of continuous operation at rated capacity. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 2 percent
over a 100 to 1 range from the required maximum capacity to the minimum pumping rate. Net positive
suction head required shall not exceed 90 percent of the net positive suction head available, as
SECTION. 11242 Page 5

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
chemical feed system shall include controlled volume pumps,, tanks, mixers, gauges, back pressure
i regulators, strainers, pressure relief valves, sight glasses andflow metering devices, check valves, and
hand valves.
C7
4 1.4.1 Standard Products
Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the
manufacture of the products and shall essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for
at least 2 years prior to bid opening. Equipment shall be supported by a service organization that is, in
the opinion of the Engineer, reasonably convenient to the site.
1.4.2 Design Requirements
Design and fabrication of the pumps shall be in accordance with HI 7.1-7.5 and HI 9.1-9.5 except as
modified herein. Pump stands and platforms shall be adequate to support the pumping system.
1.4.3 Performance Requirements
Capacity and design of the chemical feed systems and accessories shall be suitable for 24-hour full load
service in ambient, non-freezing conditions.
1.4.4 Nameplates
Each major item of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, type or style, model or
serial number, and catalog number on a plate secured to the item of equipment.
} 1.4.5 Manufacturer's Services
1,
Services of a manufacturer's representative who is experienced in the installation, adjustment, and
operation of the equipment specified shall be provided. The representative shall supervise the
installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment.
1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
The Contractor shall become familiar with details of the work, verify all dimensions in the field, and
shall advise the Engineer of any discrepancy before performing the work.
1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Material and equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the
weather, excessive humidity and excessive temperature variation, dirt, dust, or other contaminants.
1.7 AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT AND SPARE PARTS
Concurrent with deliveryand installation of the specified equipment, auxiliary equipment and spare
eparts shall be furnished as follows:
a. Spare parts for each different item of material and equipment specified including all of the
parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 and 3 years service.
SECTION 11242 Page 4

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
a unit. Drawings shall show proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances, and
equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearances for installation,
maintenance and operation.
SD-03 Product Data
Catalog Information
Manufacturer's descriptive and technical literature, catalog cuts, performance charts, and pump
curves.
List of materials, list of equipment, including a complete list of parts and supplies with current
unit prices and source of supply. List of special tools for each type of equipment furnished
including special tools necessary for adjustment, operation, maintenance, and disassembly.
Material Safety Data Sheets, Instructions and Spare Parts
Material safety data sheets in conformance with ANSI Z400.1 each chemical.
Installation instructions and framed instructions.
List of parts recommended by the manufacturer to be replaced after 1 and 3 years service.
SD-06 Test Reports
Factory Test Report _
A copy of the ASTM E 1067 test report shall be furnished with each fiberglass tank.
Field Testing
Test reports in booklet form showing all field tests performed to adjust each component and all
field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria, upon
completion and testing of the installed system. Each test report shall indicate the final position of
controls.
SD-07 Certificates
Chemicals
Two copies of certification stating that each chemical supplied meets the specified requirements.
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Chemical Feed Systems
Six complete copies of operating instructions outlining the step-by-step procedures required for
system startup, operation and shutdown. The instructions shall include the manufacturer's name,
model number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of all equipment and their basic
operating features. The instructions shall include as -built drawings of the piping layout,
equipment layout, and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed. Flow
diagrams shall be included in the instructions.
Six complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible
breakdowns and repairs, and trouble -shooting guides.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Chemical feed systems shall consist of a chemical supply storage tank from which the chemical
solution shall be pumped through piping or tubing, as appropriate, to the point of application. Each
SECTION 11242 Page 3

, J
Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
ASME B16.11 (1996) Forged Fittings, Socket -Welding and Threaded
ASME B16.5 (1996; B16.5a) Pipe Flanges and Flanged Finings NPS 1/2
thru NPS 24
9L HYDRAULIC INSTITUTE (HI)
HI 7.1-7.5 (1994) Controlled Volume Pumps
r,
HI 9.1-9.5 (1994) Pumps - General Guidelines
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
—' NEMA 250 (1997) Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts
Maximum)
NEMA ICS 1 (1993) Industrial Control and Systems
NEMA ICS 2 (1993) Industrial Controls and Systems Controllers,
Contactors, and Overload Relays Rated Not More Than 2,000
Volts AC or 750 Volts DC
NSF INTERNATIONAL (NSF)
NSF 60 2000 Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects
PLUMBING -HEATING -COOLING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION
(NAPHCC)
NAPHCC Plumbing Code (1996) National Standard Plumbing Code
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 50 (1995; Rev thru Nov 1999) Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment
1.2 GENERAL
The Contractor shall provide all materials, labor, equipment and all other items necessary to install, test
and place into operation liquid transfer pumps and liquid metering pumps including valves, fittings,
markings, control panels, etc. necessary for a complete functioning system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
- r Detailed Drawings
Detail drawings containing complete piping, wiring, schematic, flow diagrams, and any other
details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as
I
SECTION 11242 Page 2
f

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
SECTION 11242
CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEMS
PARTI GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI A13.1 (1996) Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems
ANSI Z400.1 (1998) Hazardous Industrial Chemicals - Material Safety
Color Data Sheets - Preparation
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM D 1785 (1999) Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules
40, 80, and 120
ASTM D 1998 (1997) Polyethylene Upright Storage Tanks
ASTM D 3299 (2000) Filament -Wound Glass -Fiber -Reinforced Thermoset
Resin Corrosion -Resistant Tanks
ASTM D 5421 (1993) Contact Molded "Fiberglass" (Glass -Fiber -Reinforced
Thermosetting Resin) Flanges
ASTM E 1067 (1989; R 1996) Acoustic Emission Examination of Fiberglass
Reinforced Plastic Resin (FRP) TanksNessels
ASTM F 441/F 441M (1999) Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride).(CPVC) Plastic
Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION(AWWA)
AWWA B201 (1998) Soda Ash
AWWA B300 (1999) Hypochlorites
AWWA B501 (1998) Sodium Hydroxide (Caustic Soda)
AWWA B502 (1994; Addendum 1997) Sodium Polyphosphate, Glassy
(Sodium Hexametaphosphate)
ASME INTERNATIONAL (ASME)
ASME B16.1 (1998) Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
SECTION 11242 Page 1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
Engineer. Perform this demonstration after appropriate curing and drying times of coatings have
elapsed and prior to invoicing for final payment.
-- End of Section --
SECTION 09900 Page 12

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
1:1
e. Intercoat Drying Time:
(1) 24 hours at 35 to 60 degrees F.
(2) 12 hours at 60 to 100 degrees F.
f. Drying Time Before Immersion: 7 days.
3.5.4.2 Exterior Paint System
(a) Shop Primer: Spray all exterior surfaces with one complete coat to a minimum dry film
thickness of 2.5-3.5 mils. Brush allowed on small areas. Do not roll.
Tnemec Series 91-1120 Hydro -Zinc 2000 or Induron Z-Rep 56 Primer
I
(b) Field Patch Coat: Spray all exterior rusted or abraded surfaces requiring touch up in the
field with one complete coat to a minimum dry film thickness of 2.5-3.5 mils. Brush
allowed on small areas. Do not roll. Allow a minimum of 24 hours drying and solvent
release time prior to top coating.
Tnemec Series 91-H2O Hydro -Zinc 2000 or Induron Z-Rep 56 Primer
(c) Intermediate Coat: Spray all exterior surfaces with one complete coat to a minimum -
dry film thickness of 4-5 mils. Brush allowed on small areas. Do not roll. Allow a
minimum of 24 hours drying and solvent release time prior to top coating.
Tnemec Series 66-M Epoxoline or Induron Armorguard Epoxy
Tnemec Series 74 Endura-Shield Acrylic Polyurethane or Induron Indurethane 5500
(d) Total Exterior System:
1. Number of Coats: 3.
2. Total Dry Film Thickness: 8.5-10.5 mils (shop primed areas)
3. The required minimum dry film thickness per coat will be maintained
regardless of method of application.
3.6 PIPING IDENTIFICATION
Piping Identification, Including Surfaces In Concealed Spaces: Provide in accordance with MIL-STD-
101. Place stenciling in clearly visible locations. On piping not covered by MIL-STD-101, stencil
approved names or code letters, in letters a minimum of 1/2 inch high for piping and a minimum of 2
inches high elsewhere. Stencil arrow -shaped markings on piping to indicate direction of flow. Use —
black stencil paint, CID A-A-1558.
3.7 INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE
In addition to meeting previously specified requirements, demonstrate mobility of moving components,
including swinging and sliding doors, cabinets, and windows with operable sash, for inspection by the
SECTION 09900 Page 11

i Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
1:1
jI a. Drying. Time:. Allow time between coats, as recommended by the coating manufacturer, to
permit thorough drying, but not to present topcoat adhesion problems. Provide each coat in
specified condition to receive next coat.
b. Primers, and Intermediate Coats: Do not allow primers or intermediate coats to dry more than
30 days, or longer than recommended by manufacturer, before applying subsequent coats.
Follow manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation if primers or intermediate
coats are allowed to dry longer than recommended by manufacturers of subsequent
coatings. Each coat shall cover surface of preceding coat or surface completely, and there
shall be a visually perceptible difference in shades of successive coats.
c. Finished Surfaces: Provide finished surfaces free from runs, drops, ridges, waves, laps, brush
marks, and variations in colors.
d. Thermosetting Paints: Topcoats over thermosetting paints (epoxies and urethanes) should be
applied while the intermediate coat is still tacky, within a few days. Otherwise, apply a
mist -coat of 1 to 2 wet mils of MIL-P-24441/20 and allow to cure to tack, a minimum of 4
hours, before topcoating.
3.5.2 Equipment
Apply coatings with approved brushes, approved rollers, or approved spray equipment, unless specified
otherwise. Spray areas made inaccessible to brushing by items such as ducts and other equipment.
j 3.5.3 Thinning of Paints
Reduce paints to proper consistency by adding fresh paint, except when thinning is mandatory for the
type of paint being used. Obtain written permission from the Engineer to use thinners. The written
n permission shall include quantities and types of thinners to use.
3.5.4 Coating Systems
j 3.5.4.1 Paint in Contact with Water
High build two-part epoxy paints over commercial blast cleaned surfaces.
a. Surface Preparation: (Shop) Gritblast to SSPC-SP6 or pickle to SSPC-SP-8.
b. Number of Full Coats: 2.
c. Total Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 11.5 mils.
d. Paint Materials:
(1) Shop Primer and Field Touch Up: One coat Tnemec Epoxy, Series 20-1255 Pota-Pox
Primer, or Induron PE 54 Intermediate — Tan, or Owner approved equal. Minimum dry film
thickness - 4.5 mils.
(2) Finish Coat: One coat Tnemec Epoxy, Series 139-AA90 Pota-Pox 11 Finish, or Induron
PE 54 Finish — White, or Owner approved equal. Minimum dry film thickness - 7 mils.
i
I
SECTION 09900 Page 10

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
surfaces with a suitable detergent and rinse thoroughly. For large areas, water blasting may
be used.
(2) Fungus and Mold: Wash new, existing coated, and existing uncoated surfaces with a
solution composed of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, 1 quart 5
percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts of warm water. Rinse thoroughly with
fresh water.
(3) Paint and Loose Particles: Remove by wire brushing.
(4) Efflorescence: Remove by scraping or wire brushing followed by washing with a 5 to _
10 percent by weight aqueous solution of hydrochloric (muriatic) acid. Do not allow acid to
remain on the surface for more than five minutes before rinsing with fresh water. Do not
acid clean more than 4 square feet of surface, per workman, at one time.
(5) Removal of Existing Coatings: For surfaces to receive textured coating, remove
existing coatings including soundly adhered coatings if recommended by textured coating
manufacturer.
b. Cosmetic Repair of Minor Defects: Repair or fill mortar joints and minor defects, including
but not limited to spalls, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and prior to
coating application.
c. Allowable Moisture Content: Latex coatings may be applied to damp surfaces, but not to
surfaces with droplets of water. Do not apply epoxies to damp surfaces as determined by
ASTM D 4263. Allow surfaces to cure a minimum of 30 days before painting.
3.4.2 Gypsum Board, Plaster, and Stucco
a. Surface Cleaning: Plaster and stucco shall be clean and free from loose matter; gypsum board
shall be dry. Remove loose dirt and dust by brushing with a soft brush or rubbing with a
dry cloth prior to application of the first coat material.
b. Repair of Minor Defects: Prior to painting, repair joints, cracks, holes, surface irregularities, and other minor defects with patching plaster or spackling compound and sand smooth.
c. Allowable Moisture Content: Latex coatings may be applied to damp surfaces, but not -_-
surfaces with droplets of water. Do not apply epoxies to damp surfaces as determined by
ASTM D 4263. New plaster to be coated shall have a maximum instrument measured
moisture content of 8 percent. In addition to moisture content requirements, allow new
plaster to age a minimum of 30 days before preparation for painting.
3.5 APPLICATION
3.5.1 Coating Application
Apply coating materials in accordance with SSPC PA 1. SSPC PA 1 methods are applicable to all
substrates, except as modified herein. Thoroughly work coating materials into joints, crevices, and
open spaces. Touch up damaged coatings before applying subsequent coats. Interior areas shall be
broom clean and dust free before and during the application of coating material. —
SECTION 09900 Page 9

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
Brush -Off Blast Cleaning B SP 7 C SP 7 D SP7
SSPC SP 7
Near White Blast Cleaning ASP 10 B SP 10 C SP 10 D SP 10
SSPC SP 10
3.3.3 Galvanized Surfaces
a. New or Existing Galvanized Surfaces With Only Dirt and Zinc Oxidation Products: Clean
with solvent, steam, or non -alkaline detergent solution in accordance with SSPC SP 1. If
the galvanized metal has been passivated or stabilized, the coating shall be completely
removed by brush-off abrasive blast or other treatment, or the surface shall be primed with a
primer which is specifically recommended by the paint manufacturer for use on passivated
or stabilized galvanized steel. For new galvanized steel to be coated, if absence of
hexavalent stain inhibitors is not documented, test as described in ASTM D 2092, Appendix
X2, and remove by one of the methods described therein.
b. Galvanized with Slight Coating Deterioration or with Little or No Rusting: Water jetting to
SSPC SP 12 WJ3 to remove loose coating from surfaces with less than 20 percent coating
deterioration and no blistering, peeling, or cracking. Use inhibitor as recommended by the
coating manufacturer to prevent rusting.
c. Galvanized With Severe Deteriorated Coating or Severe Rusting: Spot abrasive blast rusted
areas as described for steel in SSPC SP 6, and abrasive blast as described for steel in SSPC
SP 7, to remove existing coating.
3.3.4 Aluminum, Other Non -Galvanized, and Non -Ferrous Surfaces
- a. Surface Cleaning: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 and wash with mild non -
alkaline detergent to remove dirt and water soluble contaminates.
3.3.5 Terne-Coated Metal Surfaces
Solvent clean surfaces with mineral spirits, CID A-A-2904. Wipe dry with clean, dry cloths.
3.3.6 Existing Surfaces with a Bituminous Coating
Remove chalk, mildew, and other loose material by washing with a solution of 1/2 cup trisodium
phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, one quart 5 percent sodium hypochlorite solution and 3 quarts
of warm water.
3.4 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND CEMENTITIOUS SURFACE
- 3.4.1 Concrete and Masonry
j a. Surface Cleaning: Remove the following deleterious substances.
(1) Dirt, Chalking, Grease, and Oil: Wash new and existing uncoated surfaces with a
i solution composed of 1/2 cup trisodium phosphate, 1/4 cup household detergent, and 4
quarts of warm water. Then rinse thoroughly with fresh water. Wash existing coated
SECTION 09900 Page 8
1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
c. The requirements specified are minimum. Comply also with the application instructions of
the paint manufacturer.
3.2.2 Existing Coated Surfaces with Minor Defects
Remove chalking by sanding or blasting so that when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4214, the
chalk rating is not less than 8.
3.2.3 Removal of Existing Coatings
Remove existing coatings from the following surfaces:
a. Surfaces containing large areas of minor defects;
b. Surfaces containing more than 20 percent peeling area; and
c. Surfaces designated by the Engineer, such as surfaces where rust shows through existing
coatings.
3.3 PREPARATION OF METAL SURFACES
3.3.1 Existing and New Ferrous Surfaces
a. Shop -coated Surfaces and Small Areas That Contain Rust, Mill Scale and Other Foreign
Substances: Solvent clean in accordance with SSPC SP 1 to remove oil and grease. Where
shop coat is missing or damaged, clean according to SSPC SP 6 or SSPC SP 10. Brush-off
blast remaining surface in accordance with SSPC SP 7.
b. Surfaces With More Than 20 Percent Rust, Mill Scale, and Other Foreign Substances: Clean
entire surface in accordance with SSPC SP 6.
3.3.2 Final Ferrous Surface Condition:
For tool cleaned surfaces, cleaned surface shall be similar to photographs in SSPC VIS 3 as follows:
100
100
Percent
100
Percent
Degree of
Adherent
Mill Scale
Percent
Rust
Cleaning
Mill Scale
and Rust
Rust
with Pits
Hand Tool Cleaning
A SP2
B SP 2
C SP 2
D SP 2
(SSPC SP 2/Wire Brush)
Power Tool Cleaning
A SP3/PWB
B SP3/PWB
C SP3/PWB
D SP3/PWB
(SSPC SP 3/Power Wire Brush)
Power Tool Cleaning
A SP3/SD
B SP3/SD
C SP3/SD
D SP3/SD
(SSPC SP 3/Sanding Disc)
Commercial Blast Cleaning
B SP 6
C SP 6
D SP 6
SSPC SP 6
SECTION 09900 Page 7

,t
Tobermory. Well Iron Removal System BC0802
b. Do not paint the following, unless indicated otherwise:
(1) New zinc -coated, aluminum, and copper surfaces under insulation
(2) New aluminum jacket on piping
(3) New interior ferrous piping under insulation.
1.9.6 Exterior Painting of Site Work Items
j Field coat the following items:
New Surfaces
a. Tank and Piping
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Conform to the specifications and standards referenced in PART 3.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION OF AREAS AND SPACES
Prior to surface preparation and coating applications, remove, mask, or otherwise protect, hardware,
hardware accessories, machined surfaces, radiator covers, plates, lighting fixtures, public and private
property, and other such items not to be coated that are in contact with surfaces to be coated.
Following completion of painting, workmen skilled in the trades involved shall reinstall removed
items. Restore surfaces contaminated by coating materials, to original condition and repair damaged
items.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
Remove dirt, splinters, loose particles, grease, oil, rust, scale, disintegrated coatings, and other
substances deleterious to coating performance as specified for each substrate.
3.2.1 Existing Coated Surfaces With No Defects
Before application of coatings, perform the following on surfaces covered by soundly -adhered
coatings, defined as those which cannot be removed with a putty knife:
a. Wipe previously painted surfaces to receive solvent -based coatings, except stucco and
similarly rough surfaces clean with a clean, dry cloth saturated with mineral spirits, CID A-
t, A-2904. Allow surface to dry. Wiping shall immediately precede the application of the
first coat of any coating, unless specified otherwise.
b. Sand existing enamel and other glossy surfaces to remove gloss. Brush, and wipe clean with a
dry cloth.
SECTION 09900 Page 6

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
1.9.1 Painting Included
Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following unless indicated otherwise.
a. Surfaces behind portable objects and surface mounted articles readily detachable by removal
of fasteners, such as screws and bolts.
b. New factory finished surfaces that require identification or color coding and factory finished
surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work.
c. Existing coated surfaces that are damaged during performance of the work.
1.9.2 Painting Excluded
Do not paint the following unless indicated otherwise.
a. Surfaces concealed and made inaccessible by panelboards, fixed ductwork, machinery, and
equipment fixed in place.
b. Surfaces in concealed spaces. Concealed spaces are defined as enclosed spaces above
suspended ceilings, furred spaces, attic spaces, crawl spaces, and chases.
c. Steel to be embedded in concrete.
d. Copper, stainless steel, aluminum, brass, and lead except existing coated surfaces.
1.9.3 Exterior Painting
Includes new surfaces, existing coated surfaces, and existing uncoated surfaces, of the elevated tank
and appurtenances as indicated. Also included are existing coated surfaces made bare by cleaning
operations.
1.9.4 Interior Painting
Includes new surfaces, existing uncoated surfaces, and existing coated surfaces of the elevated tank and
appurtenances as indicated and existing coated surfaces made bare by cleaning operations. Where a
space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following items, unless indicated otherwise.
1.9.5 Mechanical and Electrical Painting
Includes field coating of interior and exterior new and existing surfaces.
a. Where a space or surface is indicated to be painted, include the following items unless
indicated otherwise.
(1) Exposed piping and conduit;
(2) Supports and hangers;
(3) Miscellaneous metalwork and insulation coverings.
SECTION 09900 Page 5

i�
Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
1.6.2 Toxic Materials
To protect personnel from overexposure to toxic materials, conform to the most stringent guidance of:
a. The chemical manufacturer when using mineral spirits, or other chemicals. Use impermeable
gloves, chemical goggles or face shield, and other recommended protective clothing and
equipment to avoid exposure of skin, eyes, and respiratory system. Conduct work in a
manner to minimize exposure of building occupants and the general public.
b. The appropriate OSHA standard in 29 CFR 1910.1025 and 29 CFR 1926.62 for surface
preparation on painted surfaces containing lead. Removal and disposal of coatings which
contain lead is specified in SSPC Guide 7.
c. 29 CFR 1910.1000.
d. ACGIR TLV-BKLT, threshold limit values.
e. Manufacturer's material safety data sheets (MSDS).
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
1.7.1 Exterior Coatings
Do not apply coating to surfaces during foggy or rainy weather, or under the following surface
temperature conditions:
a. Less than 5 degrees F above dew point;
b. Below 40 degrees F (for oil -based paints), 50 degrees F (for latex paints or over 95 degrees F,
unless approved by the Engineer.
1.7.2 Interior Coatings
Apply coatings when surfaces to be painted are dry and the following surface temperatures can be
maintained:
a. Between 40 and 95 degrees F during application of enamels and varnishes;
b. Between 50 and 95 degrees F during application of other coatings.
1.8 COLOR SELECTION
Colors of finish coats shall be as indicated or specified. Where not indicated or specified, colors shall
be selected by the Engineer. Manufacturers' names and color identification are used for the purpose of
color identification only. Named products are acceptable for use only if they conform to specified
requirements. Products of other manufacturers are acceptable if the colors approximate colors
indicated and the product conforms to specified requirements.
1.9 LOCATION AND SURFACE TYPE TO BE PAINTED
SECTION 09900 Page 4

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1 Interior Coating
Interior paint material shall be NSF 61 approved.
1.4.2 Lead Content
Do not use coatings having a lead content over 0.06 percent by weight of nonvolatile content.
1.4.3 Chromate Content
Do not use coatings containing zinc -chromate or strontium -chromate.
1.4.4 Asbestos Content
Materials shall not contain asbestos.
1.4.5 Mercury Content
Materials shall not contain mercury or mercury compounds.
1.4.6 Silica Sand
The use of silica sand is prohibited.
1.4.7 Human Carcinogens
Materials shall not contain ACGIH TLV-BKLT and ACGIH TLV-DOC confirmed human carcinogens
(Al) or suspected human carcinogens (A2).
1.5 PACKAGING, LABELING, AND STORAGE
Paints shall be in sealed containers that legibly show the contract specification number, designation
name, formula or specification number, batch number, color, quantity, date of manufacture,
manufacturer's formulation number, manufacturer's directions including any warnings and special
precautions, and name and address of manufacturer. Pigmented paints shall be furnished in containers
not larger than 5 gallons. Paints and thinners shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's
written directions, and as a minimum, stored off the ground, under cover, with sufficient ventilation to
prevent the buildup of flammable vapors, and at temperatures between 40 to 95 degrees F.
1.6 SAFETY METHODS
Apply coating materials using safety methods and equipment in accordance with the following:
1.6.1 Safety Methods Used During Coating Application
Comply with the requirements of SSPC PA 3.
SECTION 09900 Page 3

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
1.2.4.1 Applicator's Qualifications
a. Submit evidence that applicator has met certification requirements of- SSPC Painting
Contractor Certification Program as described in SSPC QP 1.
b. Submit evidence that applicator has satisfactorily applied paint by airless spray at minimum of
two sites. Indicate names and locations of sites, and type and design of equipment used,
including safety devices.
1.2.4.2 Evidence of Acceptable Variation
If a product proposed for use does not conform to requirements of the referenced specification, submit
for approval to the Engineer, evidence from the paint manufacturer's laboratory that the proposed
product is either equal to or better than the product specified. The submittal shall include the
following:
a. Identification of the proposed substitute;
b. Reason why the substitution is necessary;
c. A comparative analysis of the specified product and the proposed substitute, including
tabulations of the composition of pigment and vehicle;
d. The differences between the specified product and the proposed substitute; and
e. Other information necessary for an accurate comparison of the proposed substitute and the
specified product.
1.2.5 SD-14 Samples
a. Color
Submit manufacturer's samples of paint colors. Cross reference color samples to color scheme as
indicated.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.3.1 Qualifications of Airless Spray Applicators
Satisfactory application of paint by airless spray at a minimum of two sites.
_} 1.3.2 Field Samples and Tests
The Engineer will take one pint samples of paint at random from the products delivered to the job site
and test them to verify that the products either conform to the referenced specifications or the approved
substitution. Products which do not conform shall be removed from the job site and replaced with new
products that conform to the referenced specification or the approved substitution.
SECTION 09900 Page 2

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
SECTION 09900
PAINTS AND COATINGS
09/98
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and material necessary to provide Paints and Coatings as
shown on the drawings and described. in the specifications. Contractor shall coat all exposed pipe,
fittings, equipment, etc. within the pump station and chemical feed rooms.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal Procedures."
1.2.1 SD-02 Manufacturer's Catalog Data
a. Coating
b. Sealant
1.2.1.1 Requirements
For each type of coating, sealant, or other product furnished:
a. Submit data from the manufacturer's paint laboratory indicating that the product conforms to
requirements of the referenced specification.
1.2.2 SD-06Instructions
a. Application instructions
b. Manufacturer's material safety data sheets
Submit Manufacturer's material safety data sheets for coatings, solvents, and other potentially
hazardous materials, as defined in FED-STD-313.
1.2.3 SD-07 Schedules
a. Piping identification
Submit color stencil codes.
1.2.4 SD-08 Statements
a. Applicator's qualifications
b. Evidence of acceptable variation
SECTION 09900 Page 1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
1:1
r-,
1 '
Do not clean or paint surface when damp or exposed to foggy or rainy weather, when metallic surface
temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the dew point of the surrounding air, or when surface
temperature is below 45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless approved by the Engineer.
3.6 CONTROL -JOINT COVERS
Provide covers over control joints and fasten on one side only with fasteners spaced to give positive
contact with wall surfaces on both sides of joint throughout the entire length of cover.
i
3.7 COVER PLATES AND FRAMES
Install the tops of cover plates and frames flush with floor.
3.8 HANDRAILS
3.8.1 Aluminum Handrail
Affix to base structure by flanges anchored to concrete or other existing masonry by expansion shields.
Provide Series 300 stainless steel bolts to anchor aluminum alloy flanges, of a size appropriate to the
standard product of the manufacturer. Where aluminum or alloy fittings or extrusions are to be in
contact with dissimilar metals or concrete, give the contact surface a heavy coating of bituminous
paint.
3.9 LADDERS
Secure to the adjacent construction with the clip angles attached to the stringer. Secure to masonry or
concrete with not less than two 1/2 inch diameter expansion bolts. Install intermediate clip angles not
over 48 inches on center. Install brackets as required for securing of ladders welded or bolted to
structural steel or built into the masonry or concrete. In no case shall ends of ladders rest upon floor.
--End of Section--
SECTION05500 Page 14

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
Provide the bottom of each jamb member with a clip angle welded in place with two 1/2
Inch diameter floor bolts for adjustment.
2.19 WINDOW GUARDS, WOVEN WIRE
Provide woven wire window guards of size necessary to completely fill opening. Construct guards
with 3/8 inch round rod frame and 1 1/2 inch diamond -mesh of No. 10 U.S. Gage (0.135 diameter)
wire; all material zinc -coated. Provide at least three hinge side clips on one side and two lock ring
hasps on opposite side.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Install items at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions. Items listed below
require additional procedures.
3.2 ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS
Provide anchorage where necessary for fastening miscellaneous metal items securely in place. Include
for anchorage not otherwise specified or indicated slotted inserts, expansion shields, and powder -driven
fasteners, when approved for concrete; toggle bolts and through bolts for masonry; machine and
carriage bolts for steel; through bolts, lag bolts, and screws for wood. Do not use wood plugs in any
material. Provide non-ferrous attachments for non-ferrous metal. Make exposed fastenings of
compatible materials, generally matching in color and finish, to which fastenings are applied. Conceal
fastenings where practicable.
HKOWITH NU17L • 91,_
Form for anchorage metal work built-in with concrete or masonry, or provide with suitable anchoring
devices as indicated or as required. Furnish metal work in ample time for securing in place as the work
progresses.
3.4 WELDING
Perform welding, welding inspection, and corrective welding, in accordance with AWS Dl.l. Use
continuous welds on all exposed connections. Grind visible welds smooth in the finished installation.
3.5 FINISHES
3.5.1 Field Preparation
Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection, using a remover approved by the rust
preventive manufacturer. Surfaces, when assembled, shall be free of rust, grease, dirt and other foreign
matter.
3.5.2 Environmental Conditions
SECTION 05500 Page 13
l—

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS PLATES AND SHAPES
Provide the items that do not form a part of the structural steel framework, such as lintels, sill angles,
miscellaneous mountings and frames. Provide lintels fabricated from structural steel shapes over
openings in masonry walls and partitions as indicated and as required to support wall loads over
openings. Provide with connections and fasteners. Construct to have at least 8 inches bearing on
masonry at each end.
Provide angles and plates, ASTM A 36/A 36M, for embediment as indicated. Galvanize embedded
items exposed to the elements according to ASTM A 123.
2.14 SAFETY CHAINS
Construct safety chains of galvanized steel, straight link type, 3/16 inch diameter, with at least twelve
links per foot, and with snap hooks on each end. Provide snap hooks of boat type. Provide galvanized
3/8 inch bolt with 3/4 inch eye diameter for attachment of chain, anchored as indicated. Supply two
chains, 4 inches longer than the anchorage spacing, for each guarded area. Locate safety chain where
indicated. Mount the top chain feet 6 inches above the floor and mount the lower chain 24 inches
above the floor.
2.15 SAFETY NOSINGS FOR CONCRETE TREADS
Provide safety nosings of cast aluminum with cross -hatched abrasive -surfaces, or extruded aluminum
with abrasive inserts. Nosing to be at least 4 inches wide and 1/4 inch thick for metal -pan cement -
filled treads extending the full length of the tread for stairs and as indicated for platforms and landings.
Provide safety nosings with anchors embedded in the concrete and with tops flush with the top of the
traffic surface.
2.16 SAFETY TREADS
NAAMM BG aluminum ASTM B 209.
2.17 SECURITY GRILLES
Fabricate channel frames with not less than two masonry anchors at each jamb and 1/2 inch hardened
steel bars spaced not over 4 inches both ways and welded to frame. Provide 18 by 16 mesh screen and
two layers of 1/4 inch hardware cloth clamped to frame.
2.18 STRUCTURAL STEEL DOOR FRAMES
a. Provide frames as indicated. If not otherwise shown, construct frames of structural
shapes, or shape and plate composite, to form a full depth channel shape with at least
1 1/2 inch outstanding legs. For single swing doors, provide continuous 5/8 by 1 1/2
inch bar stock stops at head and jambs.
b. Where track, guides, hoods, hangers, operators, and other such accessories are
required, provide support as indicated.
c. Provide jamb anchors near top, bottom, and at not more than 24 inch intervals.
SECTION'05500 Page 12

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802 ;
OAfm0I:A117tv.11141
Design handrails to resist a concentrated load of 200 pounds in any direction at any point of the top of
the rail or 20 pounds per square foot applied horizontally to top of rail, whichever is more severe. "-
NAAMM PR, provide the same size rail and post. Provide pipe collars of the same material and finish as the handrail and posts. Provide series 300 stainless steel pipe collars.
2.11.1 Aluminum Handrails
Consists of 1 1/2 inch nominal schedule 40 pipe ASTM B 429. Railings shall be mill finish aluminum.
All fasteners shall be Series 300 stainless steel.
a. Fabrication: Provide jointing by one of the following methods:
(1) Flush -type rail fittings, welded and ground smooth with splice locks secured with 3/8 inch !,
recessed head set screw.
(2) Mitered and welded joints made by fitting post to top rail, intermediate rail to post, and
corners, shall be groove welded and ground smooth. Splices, where allowed by the Engineer,
shall be butted and reinforced by a tight fitting dowel or sleeve not less than 6 inches in length.
Tack weld or epoxy cement dowel or sleeve to one side of the splice.
(3) Assemble railings using slip-on aluminum -magnesium alloy fittings for joints. Fasten
fittings to pipe or tube with 1/4 or 3/8 inch stainless steel recessed head setscrews. Provide
assembled railings with fittings only at vertical supports or at rail terminations attached to i
walls. Provide expansion joints at the midpoint of panels. Provide a setscrew in only one side —'
of the slip-on sleeve. Provide fittings to conform to ASTM B 26/B 26M.
b. Provide toe -boards and brackets where indicated, using flange castings as appropriate.
2.12 LADDERS
Fabricate vertical ladders conforming to Section 7 of 29 CFR 1910.27. Use 1/2 by 3/8 inch aluminum
flats for stringers and 3/4 inch diameter aluminum rods for rungs. Rungs to be not less than 16 inches
wide, spaced one foot part, plug welded or shouldered and headed into stringers. Install ladders so that
the distance from the rungs to the finished wall surface will not be less than 7 inches. Provide heavy
clip angles riveted or bolted to the stringer and drilled for not less than two 1/2 inch diameter expansion
bolts as indicated. Provide intermediate clip angles not over 48 inches on centers. Installed ladder to
support minimum of 200 pound concentrated load.
2.12.1 Ladder Cages
Conform to 29 CRF 1910.27. Fabricate 2 by 1/4 in horizontal bands and 1 1/2 by 3/6 inch vertical
bars. Provide attachments for fastening bands to the siderails of ladders or directly to the structure.
Provide and fasten vertical bars on the inside of the horizontal bands. Extend cages not less than 27
inches or more than 8 inches from the centerline of the rungs, excluding the flare at the bottom of the
cage, and not less than 27 inches in width. Clear the inside of the cage of projections.
SECTION 05500 Page 11
Ll

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System. BC0802
Provide 6 inch prime coated weight steel pipe as specified in ASTM A 53. Anchor posts in concrete as
indicated and fill solidly with concrete with minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi.
i
SECTION 05500 Page 10

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
Fabricate cover plates of 1/4 inch thick rolled steel weighing not more than 100 pounds per plate with a
selected raised pattern nonslip top surface. Plate shall be aluminum. Reinforce to sustain a live load of
300 pounds per square foot. Frames shall be structural steel shapes and plates, with bent steel bars or i
headed anchors welded to frame for anchoring to concrete. Miter and weld all corners. Butt joint
straight runs. Allow for expansion on straight runs over 15 feet. Provide holes and openings with 1/2
inch clearance for pipes and equipment. Remove sharp edges and burrs from cover plates and exposed
edges of frames. Weld all connections and grind top surface smooth. Weld bar stops every six inches.
Provide 1/8 inch clearance at edges and between cover plates.
2.7 EXPANSION JOINT COVERS
Provide expansion joint covers constructed of extruded aluminum with anodized satin aluminum finish
for walls and ceilings and with standard mill finish for floor covers and exterior covers. Furnish plates,
backup angles, expansion filler strip and anchors as indicated.
2.8 EXTRUDED FLOOR MAT FRAMES
Provide recess frames for rubber or coco mats of extruded 6063-T5 aluminum, in sizes shown. Miter
corners to ensure accurate fitting. Determine depth of recess by the mat thickness. Anchor frames in
concrete with anchor pins or bolts.
2.9 FLOOR GRATINGS
Design aluminum grating in accordance with NAAMM BG for bar type grating or manufacturer's
charts for plank grating. Grates, platforms and frames shall be of aluminum or FRP construction.
Aluminum grating shall be banded, and all items, shall be of sizes shown on the plans or sized to carry --
a live load of 150 pounds per square foot and a concentrated load of 200 pounds per square foot.
Frames shall be fabricated for setting in concrete and shall be set even with the surrounding finished
concrete surface or fabricated to the platform or stair requirements shown on the plans and sizes to
support 150 pounds per square foot and concentrated load of 200 pounds per square foot. Fiber glass
grating shall be manufactured from isophthalmic, fire retardant resin and may be molded or pultruded.
Fiberglass frames may be shipped in 20' stock lengths and fabricated onsite.
a. Design floor gratings to support a live load of 150 pounds per square foot for the spans
indicated, with maximum deflection of L/240.
b. NAAMM BG, band edges of grating with bars of the same size as the bearing bars. Weld
banding in accordance with the manufacturer's standard for trim unless otherwise
indicated . Design tops of bearing bars, cross or intermediate bars to be in the same plane
and match grating finish.
c. Anchor gratings to structural members with bolts, toggle bolts, or expansion shields and bolts.
d. Slip resistance requirements
2.10 GUARD POSTS (BOLLARDS)
SECTION 05500 Page 9

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
F-I
Apply pretreatment, primer, and paint in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. On
surfaces concealed in the finished construction or not accessible for finish painting, apply an additional -
prime coat to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.0 mil. Tint additional prime coat with a small amount
of tinting pigment.
2.2.5 Nonferrous Metal Surfaces
Protect by plating, anodic, or organic coatings.
2.2.6 Aluminum Surfaces
2.2.6.1 Surface Condition
Before finishes are applied, remove roll marks, scratches, rolled -in scratches, kinks, stains, pits, orange
peel, die marks, structural streaks, and other defects which will affect uniform appearance of finished
. ' surfaces.
2.2.6.2 Unexposed Sheet, Plate, and Extrusions
Unexposed sheet, plate and extrusions may have mill finish as fabricated. Sandblast castings' finish,
�f medium, AA 45, or AA 46.
2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
Provide flush type access doors and'panels. Fabricate frames for access doors of 1/4 inch aluminum
flange around the perimeter and anchorage for securing into construction. The right front corner of the
channel frame shall have a 1 1/2 inch drainage coupling. Provide access doors with a minimum of 14
by 20 inches and of not lighter than 1/4 inch aluminum with a diamond pattern to withstand a live load
of 300 pounds per square foot with stiffened edges and welded attachments. Provide access doors
hinged to frame with heavy forged brass hinges, stainless steel pins, spring operators for easy
operation, and an automatic hold -open arm with release handle. A snap lock with removable handle
shall be provided.
Hardware shall be cadmium plated and factory finish shall be mill finish with bituminous coating
applied to exterior of the frame.
2.4 CONTROL -JOINT COVERS
Provide control joint covers to be located on wall surfaces of concrete, masonry and tile work. Provide
protective coating on the surface in contact with concrete, masonry or tile.
2.5 CORNER GUARDS AND SHIELDS
{ Jambs and sills of openings and edges of platforms shall be steel shapes and plates anchored in
masonry or concrete with welded steel straps or end -weld stud anchors.
2.6 COVER PLATES AND FRAMES
SECTION 05500 Page 8

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
2.1.7.6 S crews
ANSI B 18.2.1, ANSI B 18.6.2, and ANSI B 18.6.3.
2.1.7.7 Washers
American Standard beams and channels, square or rectangular, tapered in thickness, and smooth.
Provide lock washers to conform to ASME/ANSI B 18.21.1.
2.1.8 Aluminum Alloy Products
Conform to ASTM B 209 for sheet plate, ASTM B221 for extrusions and ASTM B 26B 26M or
ASTM B 108 for castings, as applicable. Provide aluminum extrusions at least 1/8 inch think and
aluminum plate or sheet at least 0.050 inch thick.
2.2 FABRICATION FINISHES
2.2.1 Galvanizing -
Hot -dip galvanize items specified to be zinc -coated, after fabrication where practicable. Galvanizing:
ASTM A 123, ASTM A 153/A 153Mor ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90, as applicable.
2.2.2 Galvanize
Anchor bolts, grating fasteners, washers, and parts or devices necessary for proper installation, unless
indicated otherwise.
2.2.3 Repair of Zinc -Coated Surfaces
Repair damaged surfaces with galvanizing repair method and paint conforming to ASTM A 780 or by
application of stick or thick paste material specifically designed for repair of galvanizing, as approved -_
by Engineer. Clean areas to be repaired and remove slag from welds. Heat surfaces to which stick or
paste material is applied, with a torch to a temperature sufficient to melt the metallics in stick or paste;
spread molten material uniformly over surfaces to be coated and wipe off excess material.
2.2.4 Shop Cleaning and Painting
2.2.4.1 Surface Preparation
Blast clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6. Surfaces that will be exposed in spaces above
ceiling or in attic spaces, crawl spaces, furred spaces, and chases may be cleaned in accordance with
SSPC SP 3 in lieu of being blast cleaned. Wash cleaned surfaces, which become contaminated with
rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants with solvents until thoroughly clean. Steel to be embedded
in concrete shall be free of dirt and grease. Do not paint or galvanize bearing surfaces, including
contact surfaces within slip critical joints, but coat with rust preventative applied in the shop. _
2.2.4.2 Pretreatment, Priming and Painting
SECTION 05500 Page 7
�i

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
Follow safety provision of ANSI A10.3.
SECTION 05500 Page 6

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
�l
2.1.1 Structural Carbon Steel
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.1.2 Structural Tubing —
ASTM A 500, Grade B —
2.1.3 Steel Pipe
I
ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B
2.1.4 Fittings for Steel Pipe
Standard malleable iron fittings ASTM A 47.
2.1.5 Gratings
a. Gray cast iron ASTM A 48, Class 40. ;
b. Metal plant grating, non -slip requirement, FS RR-G-1602 Aluminum -
ASTM B 209, 6061-T6; steel ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90
c. Metal bar type grating NAAMM BG. _
2.1.6 Floor Plates, Patterned
Floor plate ASTM A 786/A 786M. Steel plate shall not be less than 14 gage.
2.1.7 Anchor Bolts
ASTM A 307. Where exposed, shall be of the same material, color, and finish as the metal to which
applied.
2.1.7.1 Expansion Anchors
2.1.7.2 Lag Screws and Bolts
ANSI B 18.2.1, Type and grade best suited for the purpose.
2.1.7.3 Toggle Bolts
ANSI B 18.2.1
2.1.7.4 Bolts, Nuts, Studs and Rivets
ASME/ANSI B 18.2.2 and ASTM A 687 or ASTM A 307.
2.1.7.5 Powder Driven Fasteners
SECTION 05500 Page 5

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
b. Fabrication drawings of structural steel door frames
c. Access doors and panels, installation drawings
d. Cover plates and frames, installation drawings
e. Expansion joint covers, installation drawings
i Floor gratings, installation drawings
r�
g. Handrails, installation drawings
h. Ladders, installation drawings
d�
i. Embedded angles and plates, installation drawings
j. Gates
Submit fabrication drawings showing layout(s), connections to structural system, and anchoring details
as specified in AISC S303.
Submit templates, erection and installation drawings indicating thickness, type, grade, class of metal,
r—� and dimensions. Show construction details, reinforcement, anchorage, and installation with relation to
the building construction.
1.2.3 SD-04 Samples
a. Expansion joint covers
b. Control joint covers
Samples may be installed in the work, provided each sample is clearly identified and its location
recorded.
1.3 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
Quality welders in accordance with AWS D1.1, Use procedures, materials, and equipment of the type
required for the work.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store items in an enclosed are free
from contact with soil and weather. Remove and replace damaged items with new items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
i
SECTION 05500 Page 4

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
ASTM E 488 (1990) Strength of Anchors in Concrete and
Masonry Elements
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY, INC. (AWS)
AWS D1.1 (1996) Structural Welding Code Steel
CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)
29 CFR 1910.27 Fixed Ladders
NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS
(NAAMM)
NAAMM BG (1993) Metal Bar Grating Manual
NAAMM PR (1995) Pipe Railing Manual
STEEL STRUCTURES PAINTING COUNCIL (SSPC)
SSPC SP 3 (1995) Power Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP 6 (1994) Commercial Blast Cleaning
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal Procedures."
1.2.1 SD-03 Manufacturer's Catalog Data
a. Access doors and panels
b. Cover plates and frames
c. Control joint covers
d. Expansion joint covers
e. Floor gratings
f. Handrails
g. Ladders
h. Structural steel door frames
i. Gates
1.2.2 SD-02 Drawings
SECTION 05500 Page 3

TobermoryWell Iron Removal System
ASME/ANSI B18.22.1 (1965; R 1990) Plain Washers
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 47 (1990) Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A 48 (1994; Rev. A) Gray Iron Castings
ASTM A 53 (1996) Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped
Zinc -Coated Welded and Seamless
ASTM A 123
(1989; Rev. A) Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A 307 (1994) Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000
psi Tensile Strength
ASTM A 500 (1993) Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless
Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in
Rounds and Shapes
ASTM A 687 (1993) High -Strength Nonheaded Steel Bolts
And Studs
ASTM A 780
(1993; Rev. A) Repair of Damaged and
Uncoated Areas of Hot -Dip
Galvanized Coatings
ASTM A 786/A 786N
(1995) Rolled Steel Floor Plates
ASTM B 26
(1995) Aluminum -Alloy Sand Castings
ASTM B 108
(1995) Aluminum -Alloy Permanent
Mold Castings
ASTM B 209
(1995) Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy
Sheet and Plate
ASTM B 221
(1995; Rev. A) Aluminum and Aluminum -
Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire,
Shapes, and Tubes
ASTM B 429
(1995) Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Structural
Pipe and Tube
ASTM D 1187
(1995) Asphalt -Base Emulsions for Use as
Protective Coatings for Metal
SECTION 05500 Page 2

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extend referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
THE ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION, INCORPORATED (AA)
AA 45 (1980) Aluminum Finishes
AA 46 (1978) Anodized Architectural Aluminum
AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION (AISC)
AISC S303
(1992) Steel Buildings and Bridges
AISC S335
(1989) Structural Steel Buildings Allowable
Stress Design and Plastic Design
AISC S342L
(1993) Load and Resistance Factor Design
Specification for Structural Steel
Buildings
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI A 10.3
(1995) Power -Actuated Fastening Systems
ANSI B 18.2.1
(1981; R 1992) Square and Hex Bolts and
Screws Inch Series
ANSI B18.6.2
(1972; R 1993) Slotted Head Cap Screws,
Square Head Set Screws, and Slotted
Headless Set Screws
ANSI B 18.6.3 (1972; R 1991) Machine Screws and Machine
Screw Nuts
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)
ASME/ANSI B 18.2.2
ASME/ANSI B 18.21.1
(1987; R 1993) Square and Hex Nuts
(Inch Series)
(1994) Lock Washers (Inch Series)
SECTION 05500 Page 1

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
� I
3.9 SEALANTS
Provide as iindicated and as specified in Section 07920, "Joint Sealants."
--End of Section--
1
I
i
SECTION 03410 Page 12
J

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
3.2 ERECTION
Precast members shall be erected after the concrete has attained the specified compressive strength,
unless otherwise approved by the precast manufacturer. Erect in accordance with the approved shop
drawings. PCI MNL-116 and PCI NINL-120 (Chapter 8), for tolerances. Brace precast members,
unless design calculations submitted with the shop drawings indicate bracing is not required. Follow
the manufacturer's recommendations for maximum construction loads. Place precast members level,
plumb, square, and true within tolerances. Align member ends.
3.3 BEARING SURFACES
Shall be flat, free of irregularities, and properly sized. Size bearing surfaces to provide for the
indicated clearances between the precast member and adjacent precast members or adjoining field
placed surfaces. Correct bearing surface irregularities with nonshrink grout. Provide bearing pads
where indicated or required. Do not use hardboard bearing pads in exterior locations. Place precast
members at right angles to the bearing surface, unless indicated otherwise, and draw -up tight without
forcing or distortion, with sides plumb.
3.4 ANCHORAGE
Provide anchorage for fastening work in place. Conceal fasteners where practicable. Make threaded
connections up tight and nick threads to prevent loosening.
3.5 WELDING
AWS D1.4 for welding connections and reinforcing splices. Protect the concrete and other reinforcing
from heat during welding. Weld continuously along the entire area of contact except where tack
welding is permitted. Do not tack weld exposed connection. Grind smoother visible welds in the
finished installation.
3.6 OPENINGS
Holes or cuts requiring reinforcing to be cut, which are not indicated on approved shop drawing, shall
only be made with the approval of the Engineer and the precast manufacturer. Drill holes less than 12
inches in diameter with a diamond tipped core drill.
3.7 GALVANIZING REPAIR
Repair damage to galvanized coatings using ASTM A 780 zinc rich paint for galvanized surfaces
damaged by handling, transporting, cutting, welding, bolting, or acid washing. Do not heat surfaces to
which repair paint has been applied.
3.8 GROUTING
Clean and fill keyways between precast members, and other indicated areas, solidly with nonshrink
grout or cementitious grout. Provide reinforcing where indicated. Remove excess grout before
hardening.
SECTION 03410 Page 11

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
4
2.3.3.1 Concrete Mixing
ASTM C 94. Mixing operations shall produce batch -to -batch uniformity of strength, consistency, and
appearance.
2.3.3.2 Concrete Placing
ACI 304R.
2.3.3.3 Concrete Curing
Commence curing immediately following the initial set and completion of surface finishing. Provide
curing procedures to keep the temperature of the concrete between 50 and 190 degrees F. When
accelerated curing is used, apply heat at controlled rate and uniformly along the casting beds. Monitor
temperatures at various points in a product line in different cast.
2.3.4 Surface Finish
Repairs located in a bearing area shall be approved by the Engineer prior to repairs. Precast members
f containing hairline cracks, which are visible and are less the 0.02 inches in width, may be accepted,
except that cracks larger than 0.005 inches in width for surfaces exposed to the weather shall be
—, repaired. Precast members who contain cracks greater than 0.02 inches in width shall be approved by
w the Engineer, prior to being repaired. Any precast member that is structurally impaired or contains
honeycombed section deep enough to expose reinforcing shall be rejected.
2.3.4.1 Unformed Surfaces
f,
Provide a floated finish.
I
2.3.4.2 Formed Surfaces
PCI MNL-116 (Appendix A — Commentary), Chapter 3, for grades of surface finishes.
a. Unexposed Surfaces: Provide a standard grade surface finish.
b. Exposed Surfaces: Provide a standard grade broomed surface finish. The combined area
of acceptable defective areas shall not exceed 0.2 percent of the exposed view surface
area, and the patches shall be indistinguishable from the surrounding surfaces when dry.
` PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 SURFACE REPAIR
Prior to erection, and again after installation, precast members shall be checked for damage, such as
cracking, spalling, and honeycombing. As directed by the Engineer, precast members that do not meet
the surface finish requirements specified in Part 2 in paragraph entitled "Surface Finish" shall be
repaired, or removed and replaced with new precast members.
r
SECTION 03410 Page 10

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
1:1
2.2.6.1 Inserts
ASTM A 47, Grade 32510 or 35018, or ASTM A 27/A 27M Grade U-60-30.
2.2.6.2 Structural Steel
ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.2.6.3 Bolts
ASTM A 307; ASTM A 325.
2.2.6.4 Nuts
ASTM A 563.
2.2.6.5 Washers
ASTM F 844 washers for ASTM A 307 bolts, and ASTM F 436 washers for ASTM A 325 bolts.
2.2.7 Bearing Pads
2.2.7.1 Elastomeric
AASHTO HB 14, for plain neoprene bearings.
2.2.7.2 Hardboard (Interior Only)
ANSI A135.4, class as specified by the precast Manufacturer.
2.3 FABRICATION
PCI MNL-116 unless specified otherwise.
2.3.1 Forms
Brace forms to prevent deformation. Forms shall produce a smooth, dense surface. Chamfer exposed
edges of columns and beams 3/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Provide threaded or snap -off type
form ties.
2.3.2 Reinforcement Placement
ACI 318 for placement and splicing. Reinforcement may be preassembled before placement in forms.
Provide exposed connecting bars, or other approved connection methods, between precast and cast -in -
place construction. Remove any excess mortar that adheres to the exposed connection.
2.3.3 Concrete
SECTION 03410 Page 9

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
C, 2.2.1.1 Fly Ash and Pozzolan
ASTM C 618, Type N, F, or C, except that the maximum allowable loss on ignition shall be 6 percent
for Type N and F.
2.2.1.2 Ground Iron Blast -Furnace Slag
ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.
2.2.2 Water
Water shall be fresh, clean, and potable.
2.2.3 Aggregates
2.2.3.1 Aggregates Selection
ASTM C 33, Size 67 except as modified herein. Obtain aggregates for exposed concrete surfaces from
one source. Aggregates shall not contain any substance, which may be deleteriously reactive with the
alkalies in the cement.
2.2.3.2 Aggregates for Lightweight Concrete
ASTM C 330.
2.2.4 Grout
2.2.4.1 Nonshrink Grout
ASTM C 1107.
2.2.4.2 Cementitious Grout
Shall be a mixture of portland cement, sand, and water. Proportion one part cement to approximately
2.5 parts sand, with the amount of water based on placement method.
2.2.5 Reinforcement
2.2.5.1 Reinforcing Bars
ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60.
2.2.5.2 Welded Wire Fabric
ASTM A 185 or ASTM A 497
2.2.6 Metal Accessories
Provide ASTM A 123 or ASTM A153/A 153M galvanized.
SECTION 03410 Page 8

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
� t
BC0802
1.3.7.1 Record Requirement
ASTM C 94. Submit mandatory batch ticket information for each load of ready -mixed concrete.
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
1.4.1 Precast Concrete Member Design
ACI 318 and the PCI MNL-120. Design precast members (including connections) for the design load
conditions and spans indicated, and for additional loads imposed by openings and supports of the work
of other trades. Design precast members for handling without cracking in accordance with the PCI
MNL-120.
1.4.2 PCI Quality Certifications
PCI MNL-116. At the precast manufacturer's option, in lieu of core samples, ACI 318, full scale load
tests may be performed. Perform on randomly selected members, as directed by the Engineer.
1.4.2.1 Product Quality Control
Plants shall be certified by the PCI Plant Certification Program for Category C1 work.
1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Lift and support precast members at the lifting and supporting points indicated on the shop drawings.
Store precast members off the ground. Separate stacked precast members by battens across the full
width of each bearing point. Protect from weather, marring, damage, and overload.
1.6 FACTORY INSPECTION
At the option of the Engineer, precast units may be inspected by the Engineer prior to being transported
to the job site. The Contractor shall give notice 14 days prior to the time the units will be available for
plant inspection. Neither the exercise nor waiver of inspection at the plant will affect the Owner's right
to enforce contractual provisions after units are transported or erected.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTRACTOR -FURNISHED MIX DESIGN
ACI 318. The minimum compressive strength of concrete at 28 days shall be 5000 psi unless
otherwise indicated.
2.2 MATERIALS
2.2.1 Cement
ASTM C 150, Type I, II, or ASTM C 595 Type IP (MS) or IS (MS).
SECTION 03410 Page 7

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
a. Concrete batch ticket information
SECTION 03410 Page 6

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
k. Erection sequence and handling requirements
1. All loads used in design (such as live, dead, handling, and erection)
m.Bracing/shoring required
n. Areas to receive toppings, topping thickness
1.3.3 SD-05 Design Data
a. Precast concrete members design calculations
b. Concrete mix design
1.3.3.1 Design Calculations
Submit calculations reflecting design conforming to requirements of paragraph entitled "Precast
Concrete Member Design." Design calculations and drawings of precast members (including
connections) shall be prepared and sealed by a registered professional engineer, and submitted for
approval prior to fabrication.
1.3.3.2 Concrete Mix Design
Thirty days minimum prior to concrete placement, submit a mix design for each strength and type of
concrete. Include a complete list of materials including type; brand; source and amount of cement,
pozzolan, and admixtures; and applicable reference specifications.
1.3.4 SD-07 Certificates
a. Fabrication
Submit quality control procedures established in accordance with PCI MNL-116 by the precast
manufacturer.
1.3.5 SD-09 Factory Test Reports
a. Contractor -furnished mix design
Submit copies of test reports showing that the mix has been successfully tested to produce concrete
with the properties specified and will be suitable for the job conditions. Obtain approval before
concrete placement.
1.3.6 SD-04 Samples
a. Surface Finish
Submit two 12 by 12 by 2 inch thick sample panels representative of the color and finish for each type
of precast member requiring a finish Grade A surface finish.
1.3.7 Records
SECTION 03410 Page 5

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
The work includes the provision of precast non -prestressed concrete herein referred to as precast
members. Precast members shall be the product of a manufacturer specializing in the production of
precast concrete members. In the ACI publications, the advisory provisions shall be considered to be
mandatory, as though the word "shall" has been substituted for "should" wherever it appears; reference
to the "Building Official," the "Structural Engineer" and the "Architect/Engineer" shall be interpreted
to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Submit the following in accordance with Section 01330, "Submittal Procedures."
1.3.1 SD-03 Manufacturer's Catalog Data
r-`
y a. Anchorage and lifting inserts and devices
b. Bearing pads
1.3.2 SD-02 Drawings
a. Drawings of precast members
1.3.2.1 Drawing Information
_ t Submit drawings indicating complete information for the fabrication, handling, and erection of the
precast member. Drawings shall not be reproductions of contract drawings. Design calculations and
drawings of precast members (including connections) shall be prepared and sealed by a registered
professional engineer, and submitted for approval prior to fabrication. The drawings shall indicate, as a
minimum, the following information.
a. Marking of members for erection
b. Connections for work of other trades
c. Connections between members, and connections between members and other
construction
d. Location and size of openings
e. Headers for openings
f. Joints between members, and joints between members and other construction
g. Reinforcing details
h. Material properties of steel and concrete used
i. Lifting and erection inserts
j. Dimensions and surface finishes of each member
SECTION 03410 Page 4

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
BC0802
ASTM C 330
(1989) Lightweight Aggregates for
Structural Concrete
ASTM C 494
(1992) Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C 595M
(1995) Blended Hydraulic Cements (Metric).
ASTM C 595
(1994; Rev. A) Blended Hydraulic Cements
ASTM C 618
(1995) Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral
Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete
ASTM C 989
(1994; Rev. A) Ground Granulated Blast -
Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and
Mortars
ASTM C 1107
(1991; Rev. A) Packaged Dry, Hydraulic -
Cement Grout (Nonshrink)
ASTM F 436M
(1993) Hardened Steel Washers (Metric)
ASTM F 436
(1993) Hardened Steel Washers
ASTM F 844
(1990) Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat),
Unhardened for General Use
AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY, INC. (AWS)
AWS D1.4
(1992) Structural Welding Code Reinforcing
Steel
PRECAST/PRESTRESSED CONCRETE INSTITUTE (PCI)
PCI MNL-116
(1985) Quality Control for Plants and
Production of Precast Prestressed Concrete
Products
PCI MNL-120
(1992) Design Handbook — Precast
And Prestressed Concrete
PCI MNL-124
(1989) Fire Resistance of Precast
Prestressed Concrete
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL)
UL FRD
(1995) Fire Resistance Directory
1.2 PRECAST MEMBERS
SECTION 03410 Page 3

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System
�I
3r
ASTM A 153/A 153M
ASTM A 185
ASTM A 307
ASTM A 325M
w�
ASTM A 325
ASTM A 497
ASTM A 563M
` -s! ASTM A 563
t ASTM A 615/A 615M
ASTM A 616/A 616M
ASTM A 617/A 617M
ASTM A 706/A 706M
BC0802
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
(1995) Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and
Steel -Hardware
(1994) Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain,
For Concrete Reinforcement
(1994) Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60,000 psi Tensile Strength
(1993) High -Strength Bolts for Structural
Steel Joints (Metric)
(1994) Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat
Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile
Strength
(1995) Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Deformed,
For Concrete Reinforcement
(1993) Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts (Metric)
(1994) Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts
(1995; Rev. B) _Deformed and Plain Billet -
Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
(1995; Rev. B) Rail -Steel Deformed and
Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
(1995; Rev. B) Axle -Steel Deformed and Plain
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
(1995 Rev. A) Low -Alloy Steel Deformed
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 780
(1993; Rev. A) Repair of Damaged and
Uncoated Areas of Hot -Dip Galvanized
Coatings
ASTM C 33
(1993) Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C 94
(1994) Ready -Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 150
(1995) Portland Cement
ASTM C 260
(1995) Air -Entraining Admixtures for
Concrete
SECTION 03410 Page 2

Tobermory Well Iron Removal System BC0802
SECTION 03410
PLANT -PRECAST STRUCTURAL CONCRETE
PART GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed
below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred
to in the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION
OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
AAASHTO HB14
(1992) Highway Bridges
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE (ACI)
ACI 304R
(1989) Measuring, Mixing, Transporting
And Placing Concrete
ACI 305R
(1991) Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306.1
(1990) Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 309R
(1987) Consolidation of Concrete
ACI 318M
(1995) Building Code Requirements for
Reinforced Concrete (Metric)
ACI 318
(1995) Building Code Requirements for
Reinforced Concrete
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI A135.4
(1995) Basic Hardboard
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM A 27/A 27M
(1993) Steel Castings, Carbon, for General
Application
ASTM 1 36/A 36M
(1994) Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A 47M
(1990) Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
(Metric)
ASTM A 47
(1990) Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A 123
(1989; Rev. A) Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized)
SECTION 03410 Page 1

)
U
Final Report
on
Soil Scientist Evaluation and Agronomic Assessment
For Proposed Spray Irrigation
Of Municipal Well Discharge Water
At the Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9)
Bladen County, North Carolina
Submitted to
Hobbs, Upchurch and Associates, P.A.
300 SW Broad St.
Southern Pines, North Carolina 28388
from
Cpec Environmental Inc. (Cpec)
700 Arendell Street — Suite 14
Morehead City, NC 28557
Cpec Job Number 1710
May 2008

v EC SOIL, HYDROGEOLOGIC, & WETLAND CONSULTING
ivironniental, Inc. 700.Arendell A Suite 14, Morehead City, NC 28557 voice/fax:[phone]
May 22, 2008
Adam P. Kiker, E.I.
Hobbs; Upchurch. and Associates, P.A.
300 SW Broad St.
Southern Pines, North Carolina 28388.
[phone]
Subject: Soil Scientist Evaluation and Agronomic Assessment for Proposed Spray Irrigation. of
Municipal Wel1.Discharge. Water at the Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9), Bladen
County, North Carolina..
Cpec Job'#1710
Dear Mr. Kiker,
One copy of the subject report is attached. Should you have any questions or comments on the
report, please contact us at your convenience.
Sincerely,
h�,,, &,-,
Thomas H. Hinson, PG; LSS
Chief Environmental Consultant
Attachment: Report
�,,C,p SOIL Scll,�i,
JCJ� WNRDlNh%,y

Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
Table of Contents
Page
Tableof Contents............................................................................................................................. i
Listof Tables...................................................................................................................................
i
Listof Figures.................................................................................................................................
ii
Listof Appendices..........................................................................................................................
ii
1.0 Introduction...............................................................................................................................1
1.1 Site location and general description.................................................................................1
1.2 Project description..............................................................................................................1
1.3 Discharge water characterization.......................................................................................1
1.4 Purpose and scope..............................................................................................................1
2.0 Site Characterization.................................................................................................................2
2.1 Soil/site evaluation.............................................................................................................2
2.2 Soil profile descriptions.....................................................................................................2
2.3 Soil sampling......................................................................................................................2
2.4 Soil permeability estimates................................................................................................3
2.5 Cover crop selection...........................................................................................................3
2.5.1 Hybrid Coastal Bermudagrass.................................................................................3
2.5.2 Annual Ryegrass (winter cover crop)......................................................................3
3.0 Site -loading Capacity Assessment............................................................................................3
3.1 Maximum hourly hydraulic loading rates..........................................................................3
3.2 Water balance calculations and recommended long-term hydraulic loading rates ............ 4
3.2.1 Hydraulic loading rates based on soil permeability.................................................4
4.0 Agronomic Assessment.............................................................................................................5
4.1 Toxicity problems...............................................................................................................5
4.1.1 Chloride Toxicity..................................................................................................:..5
4.2 Liming and planting recommendations..............................................................................5
4.3 Fertility recommendations..................................................................................................6
4.4 Crop management recommendations.................................................................................6
4.5 Irrigation field management recommendations..................................................................7
5.0 Limits of Investigation..............................................................................................................7
6.0 References.................................................................................................................................8
List of Tables
Table 1. Irrigation zone general characteristics and seasonal high water table estimates........ T1
Table 2. Deep boring description at DB-1................................................................................ T2
Table 3. Deep boring description at DB-2................................................................................ T3
Table 4. Selected laboratory results from soil analyses............................................................ T4
Table 5. Soil infiltration rates (typical ranges) by soil texture, slope, and vegetative cover.... T5
Table 6. Precipitation and potential evapotranspiration estimates for Elizabethtown Lock, NC
................................................................................................................................ T6
Cpec
�I

Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
List of Figures
Figure 1. Location of the Tobermory Well Site, Bladen County, NC ...................................... F1
Figure 2. General site map including deep soil boring locations ............................................ F2
List of Appendices
Appendix A - Field Procedures.................................................................................................. A-1
Appendix B- Field Notes - deep boring descriptions.................................................................B-1
Appendix C - Laboratory analyses..............................................................................................C-1
Appendix D — DWQ -'Quick Water Balance Assuming No Storage' Worksheet...................... D-1
ii Cpec

11
Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
0 1.0 INTRODUCTION
Cpec Environmental, Inc. (Cpec) was contracted by Hobbs, Upchurch and Associates, P.A.
(HUA) to perform a soil scientist evaluation and agronomic assessment for a proposed spray
irrigation site located at the Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) on Chicken Foot Road near Tar
Heel, North Carolina. Cpec prepared this report with information collected from on -site surface
and subsurface investigations, survey maps, aerial photographs, technical publications,
geological maps, and county, state, and federal records. Appendix A contains Cpec's field
procedures and methods.
1.1 Site location and general description
The site is located off NC SR 1300 (Chicken Foot Road) near the town of Tar Heel, in Bladen
County, North Carolina (Figure 1). The entire parcel was approximately 2.21 acres. Our
y investigation covered approximately 0.72 acres (Figure 2).
1.2 Project description
The Bladen County Water District proposes to discharge (via spray irrigation) backwash water
r from a well filtration system at the Tobermory Well Site. The estimated maximum discharge
volume was approximately 8,000 gallons per week or 1,143 gallons per day (gpd). The proposed
system will operate under a Non -Discharge Permit issued by the State of North Carolina
Department of Environment and Natural Resources, Division of Water Quality. Applicable
regulations governing this type of facility are included in Title 15A; Subchapter 2T "Waste Not
tj Discharged to Surface Waters" (NCAC, 2006).
1.3 Discharge water characterization
HUA furnished Cpec with estimated discharge water concentrations of chloride and iron from an
_l equivalent facility. HUA's estimated soil water concentrations of chloride and iron are 47.0 mg/1
-> and 368 mg/l, respectively (Appendix C).
1.4 Purpose and scope
In May 2008, Cpec initiated this evaluation to identify suitable soil areas for the proposed spray
irrigation system. This evaluation focuses primarily on the hydraulic assimilative capacity of the
J site soils and the health of the proposed cover crops.
Specific tasks undertaken to achieve these objectives were:
• Evaluate soil/site conditions and delineate usable areas for spray irrigation;
• Perform subsurface characterization at the proposed irrigation field and estimate the
vertical saturated hydraulic conductivity (permeability) within the most restrictive soil
horizon;
• Recommend maximum hourly instantaneous application rates;
Perform water balance calculations on spray irrigation field and recommend maximum
monthly hydraulic loading rates based on soil permeability;
U
1 Cpec
u

Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
• Provide liming / nutrient recommendations and suggest general management practices for
cover crops.
2.0 SITE CHARACTERIZATION
2.1 Soil/site evaluation
Traversing the site, Cpec personnel observed landforms (slope, drainage patterns, past use, etc.)
and noted the location of existing property boundaries, vegetation, roads, etc. Following the site
walkover, we advanced numerous hand-augered soil borings to characterize and assess
subsurface conditions. Subsurface observations included: soil morphological properties (e.g.,
texture, structure, color, presence and type of redoximorphic features, etc.), types and respective
thickness of restrictive horizons, and soil wetness conditions.
Figure 3 and Table 1 display the soil/site evaluation results. Seasonal high water table (SHWT)
depths were >3.5 ft below land surface (bls). Of the 0.72 acres evaluated, all was potentially
usable (suitable) for spray irrigation.
2.2 Soil profile descriptions
Cpec performed two 2 deep boring descriptions 7-ft bls at selected locations (Figure 3 within
p p O p g( ) ( g )
the proposed irrigation area. At each deep boring, qualitative subsurface descriptions included:
soil morphological properties (e.g., texture, structure, color, presence and type of redoximorphic
features, etc.), types and respective thickness of restrictive horizons, and soil wetness conditions.
Tables 2 and 3 provide deep boring descriptions and permeability estimates (by horizon) for DB-
1 and DB-2, respectively. Appendix B contains 'raw' field descriptions.
Generally, the shallow stratigraphy (7 ft bls) consisted of a thin surface horizon (A -horizon) with
fine sand textures underlain by a thick elluviated horizon (E-horizon) with sand to loamy sand
textures. The subsoil (B-horizon) had weak -fine to weak -medium structure with sandy loam
textures. The substratum (C-horizon) also had weak -fine to weak -medium structure with sandy
loam to sandy clay loam textures. Based on soil morphology, the Cg2 horizon was the most ,
hydraulically restrictive.
2.3 Soil sampling
Soil samples were collected from the surface (i.e., A -horizon) horizons at each deep boring.
Laboratory analysis of cation exchange capacity (CEC), soil texture, and pH was performed on
selected soil samples. Laboratory analytical reports are presented in Appendix C and selected
laboratory results are summarized in Table 4.
2 Cpec

Tobermory Well Site (Well_ #: 9), - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
4_
2.4 Soil permeability estimates
�1 As put forth in Section 2.2, most restrictive zone in the soil profile to 7-ft bls was the Cg2
horizon. The estimated permeability of the A -horizons were 6.0 inches per hour (in/hr) and the
r� estimated permeability of the C-horizons were 0.2 in/hr. (Tables 2 and 3).
2.5 Cover crop selection
Cpec assumes the wastewater generated at the proposed facility will exhibit a similar character to
the data presented in Section 1.4 and furthermore, will not exhibit dangerous, hazardous, or
unusual properties that would make it unsuitable for the use on hay crops or for animal
consumption.
In general, the land application site will grow hay crops and harvest these crops regularly. The
land application site will be using a coastal bermudagrass as the warm season crop and
overseeding with an annual ryegrass during the cool seasons. No grazing is planned at this time.
2.5.1 Hybrid Coastal Bermudagrass
Coastal bermudagrass is best suited for sandy soils in the Coastal Plain of North Carolina.
Coastal bermudagrass is a warm season crop and its nutrient uptake is typically greatest in the
months from May to August, however it can have a growth period from April to October.
Climatic and nutrient conditions will alter growth rates for bermudagrasses. About 3 cuttings
yper year can be expected on most bermudagrass fields.
2.5.2 Annual Ryegrass (winter cover crop)
Annual ryegrass is a winter annual grass that looks much like tall fescue. This crop will be used
rY g g P
to overseed the warm season crop (bermudagrass). Doing so affords some flexibility to an
irrigation routine and enhances nitrogen uptake on an annual basis. However, it must be
managed correctly or it can have a negative impact on a bermudagrass crop. Ryegrass will
1 suppress the early growth of bermudagrass if not managed carefully.
3.0 SITE -LOADING CAPACITY ASSESSMENT
3.1 Maximum hourly hydraulic loading rates
To recommend Instantaneous Application Rates (IAR) for each irrigation field, Cpec consulted
} published data from the Sprinkler Irrigation Association (Table 5) and "Technical Guide: Section
II-G. Sprinkler Irrigation Guide" (USDA, 1976).
In Table 5, soil infiltration rates are a function of the A -horizon texture, vegetative cover, and
slope. Recommended IARs were 1.0 in/hr for the entire irrigation area.
Cpec

Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
3.2 Water balance calculations and recommended long-term hydraulic loading rates
The hydraulic loading rate is the volume of wastewater applied per unit area. The water balance
analysis is useful in determining an optimum monthly irrigation schedule to accommodate low -
volume application periods during the winter season (low evapotranspiration periods). Monthly
surpluses are then used to calculate required effluent storage volumes.
The long-term hydraulic loading rates will be based on the more restrictive of two limiting
conditions: (1) the capacity of the soil profile to transmit water (soil permeability) and (2) the
nitrogen concentration in water percolating beyond the root zone (groundwater impacts).
3.2.1 Hydraulic loading rates based on soil permeability
Cpec calculated a monthly water balance using a procedure adapted from "Process Design
Manual for Land Treatment of Municipal Wastewater", 625/1-81-013 (EPA, 1981). A water
balance based on soil permeability was developed for each proposed irrigation field by balancing
monthly water losses and gains.
Evapotranspiration + Natural runoff + Drainage = Precipitation + Irrigation
Precipitation (PPT5) - Precipitation data was derived from "Soil Survey of Bladen County,
North Carolina" (USDA, 1990). Precipitation values were adjusted to represent a 5-year
recurrence high. Precipitation data are given on Table 6. The estimated annual PPT5 was
52.75 in/yr.
Evapotranspiration (pET) - Using the Thornthwaite Method (Thornthwaite, 1957), Cpec
calculated monthly potential evapotranspiration estimates from average daily temperatures
for each month (USDA, 1990). Potential evapotranspiration estimates for Elizabethtown
Lock, NC are given on Table 6. The estimated annual pET was 35.37 in/yr.
Drainage (DR) - The estimated permeability of the most restrictive horizon (MRH) beneath
the proposed irrigation field was 0.20 in/yr. (Section 2.4). Drainage rates were calculated as
6% of the estimated permeability of the MRH beneath each irrigation field. Annual DR
values were calculated by converting the hourly rate (0.20 in/yr) to the annual rate of 105.12
in/yr (0.2 in/yr.*0.06*24 hours*365 days). Monthly DR values varied only as a function of
31, 30, and 28-day months.
Natural Runoff (NR) - Since the system is designed to operate with no runoff, Cpec
conservatively estimated the NR-factor as 0% of monthly precipitation.
By re -arranging the water balance equation, we calculated the maximum allowable irrigation
based on soil permeability (AIs) in inches per month at the irrigation field.
(pET + DR + NR) - PPT5 = AIs
Cpec

�I
Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
Utilizing the Division of Water Quality (DWQ) Quick Water Balance Assuming No Storage
(Appendix D), we calculated the maximum allowable irrigation at 32,991 gallons per week
(gal/wk). The projected maximum weekly irrigation volume was 8,000 gal/wk (Section 1.2) or
24% of the irrigation field's maximum allowable irrigation.
4.0 AGRONOMIC ASSESSMENT
4.1 Toxicity problems
U Toxicitynormally results when certain ions are taken u with the soil -water and accumulate in
Y p
the leaves during water transpiration to an extent that results in damage to the plant. The degree
of damage depends upon time, concentration, crop sensitivity and crop water use, and if damage
is severe enough, crop yield is reduced. The usual toxic ions in irrigation water are chloride,
r sodium and boron. Damage can be caused by each, individually or in combination.
Not all crops are equally sensitive to these toxic ions. Toxicity symptoms, however, can appear
on almost any crop if concentrations are high enough. Toxicity often accompanies or
complicates a salinity or infiltration problem although it may appear even when salinity is low.
The toxic ions sodium and chloride can also be absorbed directly into the plant through the
G leaves moistened during sprinkler irrigation. This occurs typically during periods of high
temperature and low humidity. The leaf absorption speeds the rate of accumulation of a toxic ion
and may be a primary source of the toxicity.
4.1.1 Chloride Toxicity
�. The most common toxicity is from chloride in the irrigation water. Chloride is not adsorbed or
held back by soils, therefore it moves readily with the soil -water, is taken up by the crop, moves
in the transpiration stream, and accumulates in the leaves. If the chloride concentration in the
leaves exceeds the tolerance of the crop, injury symptoms develop such as leaf burn or drying of
leaf tissue.
L 1 Cpec assessed the chloride toxicity potential on the proposed cover crop using the estimated
chloride concentration (47 mg/1- Section 1.3) in the irrigation water. The United Nations Food
and Agricultural Organization (FAO) estimates chlorine toxicity restrictions to be 'none', 'slight'
and'severe' at < 4 me/I, 4 —10 me/I, and >10 me/I, respectively. The irrigation water chloride
concentration was 1.32 me/1(47 mg/1 divided by 35.46 mg/me =1.32 me/1), which is well below
the 'slight' restriction range of 4 to 10 me/l. Therefore, we do not foresee any plant toxicity
issues related to chloride loading at the site.
4.2 Liming and planting recommendations
The following recommendations are based on laboratory data from soil samples prior to the
proposed project construction and should be used for general guidance only.
5 Cpec
r,
r

Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC -
Job # 1710, May 2008
Coastal bermudagrass tolerates acid soils reasonably well (pH 5 to 5.5). However it does respond
to liming. A soil pH of 6.0 or higher is recommended for improved growing conditions. Prior to
planting, Cpec suggests applying 2 tons/acre of finely ground dolomite limestone. Liming
should be divided across two applications. Work lime into soil where conventional equipment
can be used. Use a disker or similar equipment to prepare depth of 3 to 4 inches.
Bermudagrass must be established from sprigs. The best planting dates for Bermudagrass in the
Coastal Plain are between March 1st and March 31". Planting may also be possible from 4
February 15th to May I" if weather conditions permit. If irrigated, some planting may spill over
into July but this is not recommended. Sprig mortality is lessened when ample soil moisture is
present. Do not let sprigs dry in sun or wind before planting. Plant bermudagrass at 5 to 15
bushels per acre in rows about 3 to 4 feet apart with the sprigs 2 to 3 feet apart within the row. If
sprigs are plentiful, the farmer can establish by broadcasting 70 to 100 bushels/acre in late
winter. One bushel contains approximately 1,200 sprigs. r-
Ryegrass will suppress the early growth of bermudagrass if not managed carefully. Annual
ryegrass should be planted between September 1st and October 31St in the Coastal Plain region.
Planting by October 15th is recommended to provide the best opportunity to get winter growth. til
The growth of ryegrass peaks in the early spring, although some fall growth also occurs.
The most consistent grass stands are obtained from drilling rye into short (less than 3 inches tall) j
bermudagrass sod. If drilling is not possible, the seeds may be broadcast on short bermuda sod
followed by a light cultivation with a disc or tillage implement. The seeding rate for broadcast
planting of seeds should be 1.5 times the rate for drilled seeds. Typical planting of annual
ryegrass is 20 to 30 pounds of seed per acre if drilling, and 30 to 45 pounds per acre if
broadcasting. �-
h
4.3 Fertility recommendations
Fertility recommendations for coastal bermudagrass are provided in Appendix C for first, second
and third applications. -
4.4 Crop management recommendations
All forage crops should be cut regularly. Bermudagrass should be cut when it is 12 to 15 inches —
tall. The frequency of cutting can be expected to occur approximately every four to six weeks
during the growing season, however, cutting frequency can be adjusted according to crop
production. If not overseeding, bermudagrass should go into the winter with 3 to 4 inches of
growth. For overseeding, cut bermudagrass back to 2 or 3 inches before planting the winter
crop. To avoid potential damage the root system, do not cut bermudagrass closer than 2 inches
from the ground surface. -
Usually ryegrass will need to be cut when it is 12 to 15 inches tall. This will favor bermudagrass
production. Do not cut ryegrass lower than 3 or 4 inches to avoid damage to the emerging
bermudagrass shoots or root system. The mature crops must be harvested as needed and
removed from the site. Stored hay must be covered.
Cpec
I

Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
Weed control is critical to obtaining projected yields. Weeds may try to take over an irrigation
field, especially if drought or disease has weakened the cover crops. Always control weed
growth and strive for a mono -culture crop, so target nutrient -removal rates are realized.
4.5 Irrigation field management recommendations
The irrigation operator should lime and supplement fertilizer according to the NCDA soil
' reports. If an overseeded crop is not cut properly in the spring, it can shade the greening
bermudagrass and reduce the subsequent yields. Therefore it is important to harvest the
overseeded crop before it heads or by April 7 in most coastal counties.
` - The farm manager should minimize the cutting of bermudagrass and/or other crops in the buffer
areas around irrigated fields. Taller grass allows for better sediment control and animal habitat
along the borders surrounding the irrigated fields. This is especially important near drainage
ways or ditches. The farmer may elect to plant some other type of vegetation in this area, which
requires minimal maintenance. Cut buffer zones as needed and minimize the use of commercial
4 fertilizers in these areas.
L
A comprehensive turf management plan should be developed addressing the variable cover crop
and spray irrigation management throughout the year. This evaluation assumes that careful
operation and maintenance of the site will be provided. Personnel should ensure that the site is
not instantaneously overloaded resulting in ponded water and subsequent overland flow. All
irrigation areas should also be properly landscaped to shed rainwater during heavy rainfall .
events.
5.0 LIMITS OF INVESTIGATION
Data presented in this report represent isolated data points. Conclusions of this report, including
maps and calculations, are based on extrapolations between data points and on subjective
hydrogeologic, soils, and geologic interpretation. Therefore, our conclusions may not be
completely representative of all conditions in the study area. Our assessment is based on the best
available data and current understanding of project objectives and design plans. The calculations
in this analysis are necessarily conservative, however, additional conservative safeguards should
be incorporated in the final design.
Additionally, this assessment does not account for the cumulative hydraulic loading effect (i.e.,
groundwater mounding) on the surficial groundwater system. A comprehensive hydrogeologic
assessment and groundwater mounding analysis should be performed to determine if the loading
rates recommended in this report would have a negative impact (due to exaggerated groundwater
mounding) on the spray field operation and on regulatory compliance.
Significant soil/site modification on the proposed spray irrigation fields, either through filling or
excavation, may alter existing soil/site conditions and therefore invalidate our conclusions and
recommendations and require a site re -assessment.
Cpec

Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
6.0, REFERENCES
NCAC 15A:2T North Carolina Administrative Code, Title 15A, Subchapter 2T, North Carolina
Department of Environment, Health and Natural Resources. 2006. Waste Not Discharged
to Surface Waters.
United States Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service. 1976. Technical Guide:
Section II-G. Sprinkler Irrigation Guide.
United States Department of Agriculture, Soil Conservation Service. 1990. Soil Survey of
Bladen County, North Carolina.
United States Department of Agriculture, Natural Resources Conservation Service. 1996.
National Soil Survey Handbook, Title 430-VI.
United States Environmental Protection Agency. 1981. Process Design Manual for Land
Treatment of Municipal Wastewater, 625/1-81-013.
Thornthwaite, C.W. and J.R. Mather. 1957. Instructions and tables for computing potential
evapotranspiration and the water balance. In Climatology. Drexel Inst. Of Tech.,Vol.10(3).
8 Cpec

I�
Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC _.
Job # 1710, May 2008
r-,
Table 1. Irrigation zone general characteristics and seasonal high water table estimates.
�l
spray zone t predominate soil unit(s) slope* 2 e SHWT total 'wetted' area
(soil series taxajunct). N (ft-bls) (acre)
1 Butters 1 to 2 3.5 0.72
E
total = 0.72
1 predominate soil unit - predominate soil unit within proposed irrigation zone boundary
2 eSHWT - estimatedavera a seasonal high water across irrigation field (in feet below land surface)
* averaged from random transects across irrigation field
+ I
76 2576 6 F7 3
r
Ca(p
4
f`
I
i
� 4
A 1
3 I
T1 Cpec

Tobermory Welt Site (Well #: %- Bladen Coutity, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
Table 2. Deep soil boring description at DB-I.
soil. color*, mottling*, and
horizon. depth 'soil structure* soil`texture* comments I e PermR
(USDA). , (fl-bls)... .(USDA) (USDA)
Ap. 0.0-0.5
weak, fine, granular
fine sand
brown,(l OYR 5/3)
6:0-20
E 0:5=1.5
weak, fine; granular
loamy sand
light yellowish lirown.(2:SY 6/4)
6.0-20
weak,.fine, sub -angular
Bil 1.5-3.1 sandy loa2.0-6.0
m . yellowish brown (l OYR 5/8)
blocky .
yellowish. brown.(l0Y 5/8) with many,
weak, mediurn, sub- medium, distinct yellowish red (5YR
Bt2 3.1-3.9 angular blocky sandy loam-6/9)>mottles; many, medium Fe+ 0:6-2;0
nodules
yellowish red (5YR 5/8) with common,
weak, fine, sub angular -
BC 3.9-5.6 11 sandy :loam medium, distinct white (I OYR 8/I) 0.6-2.0
blocky . mottles; clay films on sand grains
weak, fine, sub -angular . sandy.loain to gray. (I OYR 6/1) with many, medium,
Cgl 5.0-6.2 blocky sandy clay loam distinct yellow. (I OYR 7/8) mottles 0.6-2.0
gray.(lOYR 6/1) with few; medium
Cg2 6:2 7.0
.weak, medium, sub-
-sandy clay loam
distinctyellow (1 OYR 7/6) and few,
-0 246
angular blocky
to sandy loam
medium distinct reddisli yellow (5YR
6/8) moitles; numerous. sand lenses
estimated average seasonal high water table: >3.5' below land surface (bls)*
.-Most Restrictive Horizon
I ePermR estimated permeability range (USDA,.1996) ° determined via standard USDA field methods
T2 Cpec

Toberrnory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
. Job # 1710, May 2008
Table 3. Deep soil boring description at DB-2.
soil color*, mottling*, and
.horizon depth soil structure* - soil texture* comments I e PermR
(USDA) (ft-blsl (USDA) (USDA) (in/hr)
Ap 0.0-0.7
weak, fine, granular
fine sand
brown (1 OYR 5/3)
6.0-20
E 0.1-1.7
weak; fine, granular
loamy sand
light yellowish brown (2.5Y 614)
6.0-20
Btl 1.7-3.2
weak; fine, sub -angular.
sandy loam
yellowish brown (1 OYR 5/8)
2.0-6.0
.
blocky
yellowish brown (1 OYR 5/8) with
Bt2 3.2-4.6
weak, medium; sub-
sandy loam
many; medium, distinct yellowish red.
0.6-2.0
angular blocky
(5YR 6/8) mottles; many, medium Fe+..
_
nodules
weak, fine, sub -angular
yellowish red (5YR 5/8) with common;
BC 4.6-6.3
blocky
sandy loam
medium, distinct white (1 OYR 8/1)
0.6-2.0
mottles; clay films on sand grains.
Cgl 6.3-6.9
weak, fine, sub -angular
sandy loam to
gray (l OYR 6/1) with many, medium, .
0.6-2.0
block y
sandy clay loam
distinct yellow (1 OYR 7/8) mottles
gray (IOYR 6/1) with few, medium
AI
Cg2 6,9 7 0
weak, medium; sub
sandy clay loam,
dlstmct yellow (1 OYR 7/6) and few
0 2 0.6 j
angular blocky
-to Sandyloam :.
medium dlshnct.reddislryellow,(SYR
i
6/8)anottle's,~numerousssand lenses
estimated average seasonal high water table: >3.5' below land surface (bls)*
" Most Restrictive Horizon
1 ePenmR - estimated permeability range (USDA, 1996) * determined via standard USDA field methods
T3 Cpee

Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
Table 4. Selected laboratory results from soil analyses.
cation -
sample sample exchange
boring ID horizon ID soil pH capacity
!i icnA) (.—/1 OOo)
soil texture ------
sand silt clay class
P/) (%l to/ li TQnAI
DB-1 A
11062
5.4
1.8
91 5 4:
sand
DB-2 A
11063
5.8
2.1
91 7 2
sand
Source: A&L Labs, Richmond, VA (Lab Certificates located in Appendix C)
T4 Cpec

Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008 _
Table 5. Soil infiltration rates (typical ranges) by soil texture, slope, and vegetative cover.
Infiltration Rate (in/hr)*
------------------------------------------------------ slope ------------------------------------------------
A-hnriznn texture 0-3% 3-9% 9+%
sand
1.0+
0.7+
0.5+
loamy sand
0.7-1.5
0.5-1.0
0.4-0.7
sandy loam / fine sandy loam
0.5-1.0
0.4-0.7
0.3-0.5
very fine sandy loam / silt loam
0.3-0.7
0.2-0.5
0.15-0.3
sandy clay loam / silty clay loam
0.2-0.4
0.15-0.25
0.1-0.15
clay / silty clay
0.1-0.2
0.1-0.15
<0.1
* For good vegetative cover, rates may be.25-50% higher; For poor vegetative cover, rates may be as much as 50% less.
Source: Sprinkler Irrigation Association,Snrinkler Irrieation(1969)
T5 Cpec
j

Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
LI
Table 6. Precipitation and potential evapotranspiration estimates for Elizabethtown Lock, NC.
Month i pET , PPT5
r,ni (in)
January
0.82
3.91
February
1.44
3.75
March
2.69
4.63
April
3.61
3.33
May
4.19
4.29
June
4.31
5.22
July
4.53
6.84
August
4.27
6.38
September
3.74
4.65
October
2.83
3.23
November
1.88
3.21
December
1.06
3.31
35.37 ' 52.75
1 pET - potential evapotranspiration estimates (Thomthwaite Method calculations)
2 PPT5 - precipitation values adjusted to represent a 5-year recurrence high (USDA, 1990)
T6 Cpec
0

FIGURES
Cpec

Tobgmory Well Site (Well #:, 9) = Bladen County, NC

APPENDICES
Appendix A - Field Procedures
" Appendix B - Field Notes - deep boring descriptions
I Appendix C - Laboratory analyses
Appendix D - DWQ -'Quick Water Balance Assuming No Storage' Worksheet
0

Appendix A
Field Procedures
SiteSurvey and Mapping........................................................................................................... A-1
Subsurface Descriptions............................................................................................................. A-1

r
Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
�l
I
Site Survey and Mapping
Ir ,
Lr' Before the site visit, Cpec Environmental, Inc. (Cpec) compiled various site information
(ownership, site maps, USGS topographic maps, tax maps, aerial photographs, etc.). During the
site visit, Cpec recorded the location of property boundaries and other site elements such as
structures, roads, fences, utilities, wells, ditches, creeks, etc. Cpec produced a comprehensive
` site map incorporating all pertinent site information.
Subsurface Descriptions
Soil -profile descriptions and bore logs were described from either boring cuttings or disturbed -
core samples. Disturbed -core sample collection methods are described below. Representative
samples were collected from selective soil horizons and at abrupt lithologic or hydraulic
boundaries. Subsurface samples reside in Cpec's archives and will be held for one year beyond
} this report date.
(� Qualitative subsurface characterizations included: soil morphological properties (e.g., texture,
structure, color, presence and type of redoximorphic features, etc.), thickness and type of
restrictive horizons, depth to saprolite and bedrock (parent material), lithologic character of
saprolite and bedrock, ambient soil wetness conditions, and seasonal high water table estimates.
Detailed soil -profile descriptions are presented in Appendix B.
l�
J
cl,
Selected soil samples were analyzed by A&L Eastern Agricultural Laboratories of Richmond
VA, for cation -exchange capacity (CEC), soil texture, and pH. Appendix C contains the
laboratory analytical reports
A-1 Cpec

Appendix B
Field Notes - deep boring descriptions
.......B-1
.......B-2

Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
Appendix C - Detailed Profile Description CIO -
Detailed deep boring description at P�
Client: d} t A -0 NRCS series: 9? Disturbance:� d
Project N. �j l0 Classification: Q'k'*4Clet tr Geologic region:
I; LPrj. Name: dV_A, ^0^.t_- t Drainage Class: V4`1440 Elevation:
Location: landscape position: 'j1t^Aw(re Date: 71nii
V'Z6i Slope: L7, Described by: T. Hinson
FIELD PARAMETERS —
n
r
q
°n
o
CI
5
m
o
rw.
r...u.,n.,.a
nrene_uorcl
r.w.,rc,.r.al
� 0
Comments
6.1A fnl. rnl
b-WO
r z s�f�
a.d'1zs_
3G �. •S.n
5.0-L121
. _
1_ Snvt� S !,
1 S L sL--su
tit
(d{� (o r
_z14 foy��i�fo5..
�d� (01UL r
(4L
- --- - -s ----
- -
- f�
_
Structure
grd - grade
sz - size
typ - type
s c�
vt -very fine < I mm
gr - gran ar
p - platy
I - weak
f- fine (I-2 mm)
abk - angular blocky
pr - prismatic
2 - moderate
m - medium (2-5 mm)
sbk - sub -angular blocky c - columnar
3 - strong
c - coarse (5-10 mm)
in -massive
sg-single grained
vc - v.coarse (>10 mm)
nets e e
in - moist
dry
w - wet
- nose
0=Tiiose (1)
stickiness
plasticity
1 - very friable (vfi)
I -soft (s)
- nonsnc ns
- nonp cup
2 - friable (fP)
2 - slightly hard (sh)
I - slightly sticky (ss)
1 -slightly plastic (sp)
3 - firm(t)
3 - hard (h)
2 - sticky (s)
2 - plastic (p)
4 - very firm (A)
4 - very hard (vh)
3 _very sticky (vs)
3 - very plastic (vp)
5 - Extremely firm (xt)
5 - extremely hard (A)
ca re
o ran moaMr,
s - sand
set - sandy clay loam
si - silt
of - very fine (0.1 - 0.05 mm)
Is - loamy sand
sit - silt Loam
so - sandy clay
f - fine (0.25 - 0.1 mm)
at - sandy Loam
cl - _clay loam
sic - silty clay
in - medium (0.5 - 0.25 mm)
I - loam
sicl - silty clay loam
o - clay
c - coarse (1.0 - 0.5 mm)
ab - abundance
sz - size
contrst - contrast
_ ev <
e < 5 mm
- faint
c - common (2 - 2U%)
2 - medium (5-15 mm)
d - distinct
m - many (> 20•/n)
3 - coarse (> 15 mm)
p - rommerd
Color (matriziltmottles omments
Munsell color scheme - hue, value/chroma
e PermR estimated permeability range (NRCS, 1996)
eSIf1WT estimated depth below land surface to the seasonal high water table (estimates made from redoximorphic soil characteristics)
DTS depth below land surface to saturated conditions
- no data
Cpec
B-1 Cpec.

Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
Appendix C - Detailed Profile Description
Detailed deep boring description at VA_2
Client: 14t,t,A
NRCS series:
Disturbance: 113 ."T7.r0 .
Project #: I �l (7
Classification:
^r Qt>✓ j%� �� uei.. �''
Geologic region: Ll Q,I f
Prj. Name:-f` #,1"
Drainage Class:
prp h,.. t l
Elevation: s3/�
Location: (see-Fi-mcs}�
Landscape position: -�--
Dater
kru #1
Slope:
Described by: T. Hinson
FIELD PARAMETERS —
-
--
--
n
ta
21
S.
Comments
mcndrm i
(.61o/rnnaYl
finrml
(ft) (ftl
c0,— to—
�- m• •�
-� LSD
l� _
Z c �
- —
�,—L°
_
�
10,0611-
G Z
c ► a S�_� t-�
.� �L
��2'..M 4
ro-2
Structure
grd - gredc
sz - size
typ - e
- sw ure ess
v - very ne < mm
gr - granu ar
p - platy
l - weak
Y- tine (1-2 nun)
abk - angular blocky
pr - prismatic
2 - moderate
in - medium (2-5 mm)
sbk - sub -angular blocky e - columnar
3 - strong
c - coarse (5-I0 mm)
in - massive
sg-single grained
vc - v.coarse (> l0 ram)
s en e
in - moist
�
w - wet—
-
0 -loose (1)
stickiness
as ra
1 - very triable (vfr)
1 -soft is)
- no (cry ins)om
- rp as rc np
2 - friable (fr)
2 - slightly hard (sh)
1 - slightly sticky (ss)
1 - slightly plastic (sp)
3 - firm (f)
3 - hard (h)
2 - sticky (s)
2 - plastic (p)
4 - very firm (vi)
4 - very hard (vh)
3 - very sticky (vs)
3 - very plastic (vp)
5 - Extremely firm (xi)
5 - extremely hard (xh)
Sand r moditierg
s - sand
scl - sandy clay loam
si - silt
vf- very fine (0.1- 0.05 ram)
Is - loamy sand
sil - silt loam
se - sandy clay
f - tine (0.25 - 0.1 mm)
sl - sandy Loam
cl - clay loam
sic - silty clay
in - medium (0.5 - 0.25 ram)
1- loam
sick - silty clay loam
c - clay
c - coarse (1.0 - 0.5 ram)
ab - abundance
sz - size
contrst - contrast
w otine
< 5 mm
rat
c - common (2 - 20%)
2 -medium (5-15 mm)
d - distinct
in - many (> 200%)
3 - coarse (> 15 mm)
p - prominent
Color mottles)
ommeo
Munsell color scheme -hue, valuelchroma
ePermR estimated permeability range (NRCS.1996)
e SHHT estimated depth below land surface to the seasonal high water table (estimates made from redoximorphic soil characteristics)
DTS depth below land surface to saturated conditions
- no data
'9� Cpec
B-2 Cpec.

Appendix C
Laboratory analyses
Water sample laboratory records.................................................................................................C-1
Soil sample laboratory records....................................................................................................C-2
LI!

I� I
Tobermory Well Site (Welt #: 9) - Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
OE-f 19/ 22008 08: 32 910861216725 BIADEN PURCHASING PAGE 0
C-hilwa oweml % bra,00 TP it Tango. i
NEW WELL INO,RG.kMC CHEMICAL ANALYSIS,
W TE-RSYSTFM1D9: 03-09-OsD COUVTY::D.t.ADPN
Name of Water Systcrr.: MAST BLADEN MCF)
Sample Type: ( ) Entry Point ( X) Speci"on-001opliance
Lo4titton %Vhrrc C.olieCted: IRON XZHOW0 FrLTER W03
collection Date Ceilectioa_'1'ime
Ft�ciL.ry Ill Tao-:
SanplePoint: SAi 05/07/09 07:40 AM
I! d B • LTN TiDCF
Cn CCte y, A .
Mail Results to (water system rcpre5entstivc):
LAST BLADSN (LCF)
MR. RANDT GAM91t
BT=Zn CO1rNTY WATLM DISTRICT Phcne r (9101 &E2-G996
P.O. sox 2350 Fax#: (910) sae-7869
}3LIZA9ExtiTOWN,NC 2ti337 Responsible Persen's Email:
LABORATORY 1D#: 3 7 7 15 ( ) SAMPLE U15ATTSFACTORY ( ) RESAMPLE REQUESTED
CCO T.'M
CONTAMINANT
METHOD
REQUIRED
'NOTDEW7913
QUANTli'IED
AV.LOWAIILE
i CODE
CODE
REPORTING Wrr
ABOVE R.R.L.
RESULTS
LIMIT
0100
Turbidil
001
0.100 nm
atu
lalA
1005
Arsenic
w 170
0.005 _
_ m 1
0.010 m-
1610
Barium
170
0.4 i
ra
MCI
2.000 mz/
1015
Cadmium
170
0.001 m '1
m
0.005 Mgq
1016
Calcium
169
1,0 m I
NIA
1017
Chloride
127
5.0 mn 1
47 m 1
250.0 mo
1020
chromium
170
0.020 rngil
m
01100
1C22
Copper
.103,
i 0.050 mJl
-ir111
m'1
1.300 mglt_
0.200 1
1024
C aide
148
0.040
ma/i
10
1025
Fluoride
ID7
0.100 1n
4.000 1
1028
lton
101
0.060 lii
368.6001n Il .
0.300 m 1
1030
Ted L
170
0.003 [m 'l
m '1
ni
'1
0.015 m
1031
Me esium
_
169
_r1,0 m 1 _
NIA
1032
Manganese
1,70
0.010 M9,11
_
m
0.050 nI 11
1- -(lt - i
Mercury17
o
0.0004 m >)
fro
0.002 7
;' `1QTF.: C;UnCCnV4.i-n3E ]Of LCdn Ong -Oppf arc acaao icvcv, �n�•:nv..�,
coatiauad on Page 2....
- r�;.
�r
�:,. '�rs' ��,-:� a;tr3ra�ii�%�i�iys�as�. _,;.::.,•
C-1
Cpec.

C_C
SOIL SAMPLE SUBMITTAL FORM 1136.3
A&L EASTERN LABORATORIES, INC.
7621 Whitepine Road • Richmond, Virginia 23237 • Tel. [phone] • Fax [phone] Date Account#
® Email: [e-mail] - Website: www.al-labs-eastem.com s---S —")9—
Grower Information Customer Information
Submitted by Charge to
7 CJ I C-pe CPC
Field ID �/ C Farm 1D Send reportto: _Grower Submitter by e-mail
Email Address ` C /Y1I�S�/� �iv� , C. r rt� Phone & Fax Number
Visa/MC Card # Exp. Date Fill in this section if recommendatibns are nee/ded
Sample ID
Lab Number
S�
S2�
$Ff
SA'(
S
W
Tex-
Individual Elements
Crop
Yield
Previous
Lime
SampleFDrip
(tab Use Only)
ture
(mark chemrcaf symtiols)
to be grown
Goal
Cropfeld
Yr: T
Depth
p
A4,(,,s
—
�etv��<<:Ip
rt
—
I/
L
Sprinkler
_
_ Drip
Sprinkler
Drip
—
_ Sprinkler
Drip .
—
_ Sprinkler
- Drip
—
_ Sprinkler
—
Drip ,.
Sprinkler
r
_ Drip
_
_ Sprinkler
Drip
_ Sprinkler
Mehlich III Test Packages: For Va., Pa., N.Y, Md. nutrient management programs
Soil Test Packages using Ammonium Acetate and Bray P
S1 — Organic matter, estimated nitrogen release,• phosphorus, potassium, magnesium, calcium, pH,
SA1 — Organic matter, estimated nitrogen release, phosphorus (P1, P2), potassium, magnesium, calcium,
butter pH, hydrogen, cation exchange capacity, and % base saturation
pH, buffer pH, hydrogen, cation exchance capacity, and % base saturation
82—Test S1 plus soluble salts and sodium
SA10—Same as SA1 without P2 phosphorus
83 —Test S1 plus sulfur (S), boron (B), zinc (Zn), manganese (Mn), copper (Cu), and Iron (Fe)
SA2 —Test SA1 plus soluble salts and sodium
S23 (complete test) —Test S3 plus soluble salts and sodium
SA3 — Sulfur, boron, zinc, manganese, copper, and iron
S5 —Test St plus sulfur (S), and zinc (Zn)
SA5 — Sulfur and zinc
S6 —Test S1 plus sulfur (S), boron (B), zinc (Zn), and manganese (Mn)
SA6 — Sulfur, boron, zinc, and manganese
Special Instructions or Remarks:
CUSTOMER'S COPY
rD
C
0
Zk

n
w
Report Number:
R08127-0091 A&L Eastern Laboratories, Inc.
Account Number: 7621 Mitepine Road Richmond, Virginia 23237 [phone]
46117 Fax No. [phone] Email: [e-mail] Iffl
Send To: CPEC ENVIRONMENTAL INC Grower: 1710 - HOBBS-BLADEN-CPEC Submitted By: CPEC ENVIRONMENTAL INC
1010 BRIDGES ST
MOREHEAD CITY, NC 28557
Sample Number: DB-1 Lab Number: 11062 Date Received: 5/6/2008 Date Reported: 5/8/2008
• •
PEST t` " 1 P i
K ° 7 FlA9
Ca
S s
7n,
Mn Fe
Cu
B'
Na
REStI>x
,
k_.;�S�
{
'
Soluble ;
t Phosphoius«
. Potas�s�un :; sMegiesiun ,
..,; Calgum,
Tm `Aanganese
, Ilon ._,z.
:Copper}
bBorcn`
tiff
ppm 142
24 35
180
2.5
11 112
0.5
16
26
M...
].
AC�t`JY�
J I Y
D.E:C,
1 ll Z k 1:
'„ PERCENTt BASE"SATURITION
i .�
ORGANIC MATTER.,
, ..- r r�. 4
NITftAT,E' CHLC.RIDEj
- /t f 1 V:...�'t
Numm
f
%W.
,
, r
,
Cap 4 Na',
H `
z
NOSNtir 1011
AID
',
S S {���
Ibs/A
PH' r
k'nieg1100gyni�tmeN.1,
9`
°%,k
r %
s`?96 M ,°%>:
.°k,
"96 f
TIN N P,Pm
PPm
;r
5.4
0.5
1.8
3.3
15.8
48.8
3.8
28.3
2.2
91
"ia 31xtY
SOIL',FERTIUTY'RECOMMENDATIONS
POUNDS PER�7�000
SQUARE FEET
."
4
K20
: Mg _
` S,
Zn
Mn
I Fe I
Cu
B
y',
,YIELD-
a
77a'
Ps.,,,x
„r
} `
;
r
r5
isi, SZ e3p"
}S,r'R•�.h.-ram^, S4i �...
x,. —tixi •,,W �„) b
....,;_'�i r
1 ... .;';.
a Nihogen
:_._. _
Phosphate
..o...,...
,P�otaSll <
Magnesiun.
,
':Sal(u_rt
Zmc i
Manganese
Iran
. Copper,
Bonn'
Lawn; Bermuda Grass
25
3.0
0.0
6
0.77
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
_-3
0
U*
CD
0
C
0
rG
i
ZM

C `-7:(— [ [ =1 C-,
b�
Report Number:
R08127-0091 A&L Eastern Laboratories, Inc.
Account Number: 7621 Whitepine Road Richmond, Virginia 23237 [phone]
46117 Fax No. [phone] Email: [e-mail] At
Send To: CPEC ENVIRONMENTAL INC Grower: 1710 - HOBBS-BLADEN-CPEC Submitted By: CPEC ENVIRONMENTAL INC
1010 BRIDGES ST
MOREHEAD CITY, NC 28557
Sample Number: DB-2 Lab Number: 11063 Date Received: 5/6/2008 Date Reported: 502008
"E'— `
r ".
} .� o
, -rK
Cap
ti
-
r
-
Sduble.
RESIJLAS y
C'alaum,Maiganese
Iron
Copper
Boron
Sodum
Saits
" `,. ;Iiosptgn�st
Patasslan„
Magness',,
,a ,
a
_
PPm 156
27
60
220
3.3 13 120
0.5
14
26
P,�RC
ENT' BA5ESATURATION
NITRATE `,CHLORIDE.
All
EN,R ;
ORGANICMAriER'
F S�dl
aH +
Kt
AAg Ca '1
lVe
aFl
tiNO3 N
Cl
,
PPm'
Ppm
PpR?_r,.
5.8
0.4
2.1
3.2
23.4 1 51.5 1
2.8
1 19.0
1.0
67
U,
{
SOIL"FERTILI,TY
RECOIHMENDAT;IONS
P. OUNDS^:PER 1,000 Sf�UARE FEET'
n �
1fIELDr' '
�..
..
Lime N
,.x
" KZO
APZ0517,
k Mg,
t
S Zn Mn Fe B
R"°;s
" `�
GOAL
`"'
" $
Phos ate, Potash..
M nesiun
Sulfurf' %Znc 'INanganese Iron � Copper Boron
-',''
�Ni6o/�pn'
r _ ,," .;
Lawn; Bermuda Grass
15
3.0
0.0
6
0.23
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
H
0
a,
CD
C
CD
K
CD
C
0

Report Number:
R08127-Oo91 A&L Eastern Laboratories, Inc.
Account Number: 7621 Whitepine Road Richmond, Virginia 23237 [phone] A ��
46117 Fax No. [phone] Email: [e-mail] ■"■
Send To: CPEC ENVIRONMENTAL INC Grower: 1710 - HOBBS-BLADEN-CPEC Submitted By: CPEC ENVIRONMENTAL INC
1010 BRIDGES ST
MOREHEAD CITY, NC 28557
Sample Number: DB-1 Lab Number: 11062 Date Received: 5/6/2008 Date Reported: 518/2008
FERTILIZATIONSUGGESTED •
T,hlyd`APPlcatlon
.,;Second;Applieabon
#/1000 Sq. Ft.
Fertilizer
#11000 Sq. Ft. Fertilizer
#/1000 Sq. Ft.
Fertilizer
8.0
16-4-8
12.0 10-5-20
6.0
21-3-7
Comments:
Sample DB-1: Apply the amount of lime recommended in first page to raise pH
Sample D13-1: This soil is very sandy and subject to heavy leaching loss of nutrients such as nitrogen, sulfur and boron . To minimize loss, make
sure apply these leachable nutrients dose to planting time in the Spring or when plants start to grow. Split application if possible.
Sample DB-1: The above fertilizer application recommendation is a general guideline, if the specified grades cannot be found, replace with fertilizer
having similar N:P:K ratio. The best time to apply fertilizer for warm season grass (bermuda, St. Augustine, zoysia, bahia, centipede) is in the late
spring and summer when grass is growing. For Mid -Atlantic region the time is from May to Mid September. Apply with the interval of 4-6 weeks. These
grades of fertilizer are the best fit for your requirements for Nitrogen and Phosphorus. It may cause the amount of Potassium being slightly lower than
the amount required. This problem should not affect the growth of your lawn and can be easily adjusted from resubmitting soil sample same time next
year.
Sample DB-1: If dolomitic lime is not used, apply required magnesium with magnesium oxide. Epsom Salts, K Mag or Sul-PO-Mag.
b�
;r
0
c�

Report Number:
R08127-0091 A&L Eastern Laboratories, Inc.
Account Number: 7621 Whitepine Road Richmond, Virginia 23237 [phone]
46117' Fax No. [phone] Email: office@?al-labs-eastem.com
Send To: CPEC ENVIRONMENTAL INC Grower: 1710 - HOBBS-BLADEN-CPEC
1010 BRIDGES ST
MOREHEAD CITY, NC 28557
a
Submitted By: CPEC ENVIRONMENTAL INC
Sample Number: DB-2 Lab Number: 11063 Date Received: 5/6/2008 Date. Reported: 5/8/2008
Comments:
Sam pie D13-2: Apply the amount of lime recommended in first page to raise pH
Sample DB 2: This soil is very sandy and subject to heavy leaching loss of nutrients such as nitrogen, sulfur and boron . To minimize loss, make
sure apply these leachable nutrients dose to planting time in the Spring or when plants start to grow. Split application if possible.
Sam ale DB 2: The above fertilizer application recommendation is a general guideline, if the specified grades cannot be found, replace with fertilizer
having similar N:P:K ratio. The best time to apply fertilizer for warm season grass (bermuda, St. Augustine, zoysia, bahia, centipede) is in the late
spring and summer when grass is growing. For Mid -Atlantic region the time is from May to Mid September. Apply with the interval of 4-6 weeks. These
grades of fertilizer are the best fit for your requirements for Nitrogen and Phosphorus. It may cause the amount of Potassium being slightly lower than
the amount required. This problem should not affect the growth of your lawn and can be easily adjusted from resubmitting soil sample same time next
year.
Sample DB-2: If dolomitic lime is not used, apply required magnesium with magnesium oxide. Epsom Salts, K Mag or Sul-PO-Mag.
Sample DB 2: "" Manganese is not effective when broadcasted. For row crops, apply 4 to 6 pounds per acre in band near the crops. For non -row
crops, apply 2 pound per acre foliar when needed.
H
0
a'
S
0
CD
l�
CD

n
'bn
Report Number:
R0812count urrib A&L Eastern Laboratories Inc. Ai
0091
Acount Number. '
46117 7621 Whitepine Road Richmond, Virginia 23237 [phone]
Fax No. [phone] Email: [e-mail]
TO: CPEC ENVIRONMENTAL INC Grower: 1710- HOBBS-BLADEN-CPEC Submitted By:CPEC ENVIRONMENTAL INC
1010 BRIDGES ST
MOREHEAD CITY, NC 28557
ATTN: TOM HINSON PG LSS
Date Received: 5/6108 Date Reported: 05/09/2008 REPORT OF ANALYSIS Page:1
-j. Y1 4 ( -.A r rj.Y ti •. f 1 r 1 r• � r t ' 'y
LAB,NO SANIPLE ID ANALYSIS " RESULT UNIT _ METHOD
11062 DB-1
Sand
91
%
Bouyoucos 1962
Silt
5
%
Bouyoucos 1962
Clay
4
%
Bouyoucos 1962
Soil Textural Class
Sand
Bouyoucus 1962
11063 DB-2
Sand
91
%
Bouyoucos 1962
Silt
7
%
Bouyoucos 1962
Clay
2
%
Bouyoucos 1962
Soil Textural Class
Sand
Bouyoucus 1962
Our reports and letters era for the exclusive and confidential use of ourclients, end may not be reproduoed in whole or in part normay any reference be made
to the work, the results, or the company in any advertising, news re ease, or other public announcements without obtaining ourpriorwntten authorwafbn.
Paul Chu, Ph.D.
AV
co
C
CD
C)z
000
-

Appendix D
DWQ -'Quick Water Balance Assuming No Storage' Worksheet
DWQ -'Quick Water Balance Assuming No Storage' Worksheet ............
.... D-1

Tobermory Well Site (Well #: 9)-.Bladen County, NC
Job # 1710, May 2008
Quick Water
Balance
for: iTobertnory Mtln'clpal_UUeILySte it
_
JZ
Quick Water
Balance
Assuming. No Storage
)� l/
Proposed Application Calcs
SpraylrrigationArea=
'„,072
acres
Volume(gpd)
loading rate (gpd/ft^2)�loading
lo
rate (INwk)
iJ
Limiting Soil Ksat =
0:200
inch/hour
.tgpci
Drainage Coefficient =
Kv = Ksat `(Drainage CoeffJ =
0.288 Inchlday ,
0ofDays
Maximum
Maximum
Maximum
In "
Vertical
Monthly
Allowable
Allowable
Allowable
Month ET
Drainage
Precipitation
Irrigation
Irrigation
Irrigation
(days) pnhno)
anhno)
(Intmo)
Qnlmo)
(gagonslday)
(gallonslmonth)
January
31
`-0 82
8.93
i 3 9.1.'.
5.84
3,685
114.222
February
28
144
8.06
3.`.75
5.76
4,019
112,532
March
31
_2 69 , n
8.93
, 4,63n
6.99
4,410
136.698
April
30
3 61 _' -
8.64
8.92
5,812
174,367
May
31
"4 19
8.93
t 4`s29 i+`
8.83
5.569
172.630
June
30
'.4 31 '
8.64
TM
5 2 ; :
7.73
5,036
151,077
July
31
453
8.93
;,6':$4,..._i
6.61
4,171
129,315
August
31
"427
8.93
6i3$
6.82
4,299
133,255
September
30
n ``374
8.64
4#65 +;
7.73
5,039
151,157
October
31
3$$
8.93
8.53
5,378
166,728
November
30
8.64
2� :; i
7.31
4.765
142,962
December
31
8.93
331s a
6.68
1 4,212
130,580
TOTAL= 366 35.37 106.12 62.76 87.74 1,716,622
Formulas: (Max. Allowable Irrigation) = (ET) + (Drainage) - (Precipitation) I
32,991
Proposed loading rate (gallons per week)
8,000
I Dercentaae of maximum hvdraulic loading
2ae/
Maximum
allowable
(gallwk)
f7
xis "No Storage" Version 5 December 2004
D-1 Cpec _
i
i

G nen40re4
0550
0561
Fage 1 oT L
000s StN,p4
Prepared by: W. Leslie Johnson, Jr.
FILED
BLADEN COUNTY
CHARITY C. LEWIS
REGISTER. OF DEEDS
FILED Aug 02, 2004
AT 01:36:46 pm
BOOK 00650
START PAGE 0561
END PAGE 0562
INSTRUMENT # 15066
STATE OF NORTH CAROLINA
Stamps: $
COUNTY OF BLADEN WARRA]V'I'Y DEED
THIS DEED made and entered into this the _t4idb � day ofa , by and between MILTON
C. STONE and wife, VIMN S. STONE, hereinafter rderred to as ' of the first part: and THE
COUNTY OF BLADEN, a body politic and corporate, hereinafter referred to as party of the second part;
WITZU SETH:
THAT said parties of the first part, for and in consideration of the sum of TEN AND N01100
DOLLARS ($1.0.00) and other good and valuable considerations to theta paid by the said party of the
second part, the receipt of which is hereby aclmowledged, have bargained and sold, and by these presents
do hereby grant, bargain, sell and convey unto the said party of the second part, and its successors and
assigns, that certain tract or parcel of land, situate, flying and being in Hollow Township, Bladen County,
North Carolina, and being further described as follows:
That certain tract or parcel of land containing 2.20 acres, more or less lying in Hollow
Township, Bladen County shown on that plat of sureecyy dated A�nI, 2004 entitled "WELL
AND TANK LOT SURVEY FOR COUNTY OF BI.ADE.N OI3 PROPERTY OF MILTON
C. STONE", by WilliWilliapi E. Crave, Professional Land Surveyor and recorded at Map Boob
� �at Page , Bladen County Registry.
This being a part of the same lands conveyed to Milton C. Stone and wife, 'Vivian S. Stone by deed
dated September 15, 1956 from C.A. Allen and wife, Eloise F. Allen, and recorded in Boob 132, .
Page 71, Bladen County Registry.
TO HAVE AND TO HOLD the aforesaid tract or parcel of land and all privileges and
appurtei=ces thereunto belonging to it, the party of the second part, and its successors and assigns, in fee
simple forever.
AND said parties of the first part covenant that they are seized of said premises in fee simple; that
the same are free and clear from any and all encttmbmces, that they do hereby wanmt and will forever
defend the title to the same against the lawful claim of all persons whomsoever.
P TAx REYm D k,
-.p://www.withersravenel.com/deeds/DeedDisplay/DeedViewIrnage.aspx 11/28/2006

+.-aut.AA:LVGiu rage l or
JOHMN LAW Fmm, Attanwp at Lawn, P.O. Bey 2212, Ellubta town, NC ?,8M
p;//www.withersravenel.com/deeds/DeedDisplay/DeedViewImage.aspx 11/28/2006

•� \'. I`� a� ' r 7�• S.-- ( ,�} ^�'� k�, s F I. 6R 1 i J✓ Y. VA jq> I
T r -t - •r:,.:r,J' ._ �( �� ,. �� >! a ./u ---. ��'t4 `. �� � .. � � � • Y v is ��
NO
` 'fir 'ir•n" ,��' �7. - 4,,�'' '� ��_;�° e���I? t ���4� �
rF-
-
. v u• \
C `- `r-Z � � { ai• \: �, �t • � ' ! fir, , ' :�--.(,o : �,
((' ,� w,•� � �:'Y�S`( i. ,� `�'`�a �`i�e� 1I}t7/ � ~'� o•
'Horse 1 Neek ` j w-.�.�.._,� B fC.l
•,,O E•�, _ 'J-.�,""dt f •r
%�, 1z7 17,1
g
' _- �r'a-..`•-�'.�r�-�=�" '�.'�`�` tf":a.'{� v'/tC��4 � ., � r r�"f � ^.G 1-/ .. __ f Y.' !, '•"' / .r�
- •+e:>M/'.n-. ; f.~ = y `rJ 1 . T �� /r -� !'+d.� _ J"' . _ _:�G.-F• I. r �/ �� - I
' i� 9 �: \ �'• ' ,•,li" � � ; / i '�} 1 i ��.i• � `� - � �`C1 1'� •I �•� J y/ '
. `[ -- �k`:�;r=�'{IYY `�*.-_ .=-uJL)�"{/f� —, � ' ��� � •h„ ' ` r•�\� `%/la�l: ° _� �,�I\ �
iw^ }pvtCS
_iluQ � •'.; � �` cc% I .Bulos NBB� ( ` ti\; ' .i � �. �. .. `t, - _.
\ � r-'•- .. fl -- •� • `� 1. `,��� t"'���'•--.. j a I �I.,i•- .a- . � - �_ �J , . --�J.=�- --:�
i-ti :,r' It - '� _ - �_ qA� n� - �+�""' 'gl ,+�- � I.' � rya, ,• ..f • r- 1� • � � � � \~� , 'H• Boyo� ��\
µ )
,
— - -.�' � '�/r '�:blanh � ,.d`.S, p�..i -� f-i.. H �" ,�`n' y1 \ � � '"�� + �•e `�-....�\u,� �.�•�``�.F.
I• N � � � � r t y� �! ,,hky n a � .y � y �`4 .7 I1 `
-�y�_". '.�t''��`=.•_� ,ri�,.X.,, $O9.-'cam ,a �'� - S i , '' ; 4 (r- ` ' =--a _" � _5 #�',7
fib)
Name: ST PAULS. Location: 034° 48' 36.4" N 078o 53' 09.1" W-
Date: 5/14/2008
Scale: 1 inch equals-3333 feet
Copyright (C) 1997, Maptech, Inc. - '